JP2022080385A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can perform decoration efficiently.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine includes decoration means (e.g., a decoration panel 401) having a decoration part to be decorated and a transparent part. A first recognition state in which an area behind the decoration means is invisible or difficult to see and a second recognition state in which the area behind the decoration means is visible or easy to see can be selected by a player. In the first recognition state, the mode of the decoration part is visible or easy to see as a specific mode (e.g., a picture with a sea motif such as a whale and a school of fish). In the second recognition state, the specific mode is invisible or difficult to see.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 44

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

As a kind of gaming machine, for example, there is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-271480

By the way, the area on the front side of the gaming machine is limited, and there is a demand for more efficient decoration on the front side of the gaming machine, particularly on a portion that is easily visible to the player.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently decorating.

The gaming machine of the present invention
In a gaming machine provided with a specific aspect of decorative means
The player can see a first visual state in which the area behind the decorative means is invisible or difficult to see, and a second visual state in which the area behind the decorative means is visible or easy to see. It is characterized by being configured to be selectable.

The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine or a rotating drum type gaming machine.

According to the present invention, decoration can be performed efficiently.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows the structure of the inner frame, a game board and the like. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like. It is a block diagram which shows the main electric composition of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit / fail determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the reach determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage processing. It is a flowchart which shows the residual ball monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the special display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the discrimination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable prize apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows the end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure discrimination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows the receive interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub-control device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for the determination of a decorative pattern and the like. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information storage process. It is a flowchart which shows the hold process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the count process in continuous change. It is a front view which shows the visual appearance mode of a decorative pattern display device. It is sectional drawing of the right-handed prize-winning unit. It is a front view of a decorative panel. It is a front view which shows the front side sheet of a decorative panel. It is a front view which shows the rear side sheet of a decorative panel. It is a partially enlarged schematic sectional view which shows a decorative panel and a right-handed prize-winning unit. It is a figure which shows the decoration means (right-handed prize-winning unit) in another embodiment, (a) is a partially enlarged perspective view including a partial cross section, (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view. It is a partially enlarged front schematic diagram which shows the glass unit and the decorative unit in another embodiment. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged schematic cross-sectional view showing a glass unit and a decorative unit in another embodiment. It is a partially enlarged sectional view which shows the lenticular lens. It is sectional drawing which shows the decorative body in another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the decorative body in another embodiment, (a) is a perspective view, (b) is a side view. It is a front view which shows the decorative means in another embodiment.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame constituting the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 11 as a game board mounting frame is provided on one side of the outer frame 11. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. In FIG. 3, for convenience, the game members (nails, accessories, etc.) arranged on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame 14 as the front frame, and the like are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of a wooden plate material, and the left side frame component 11c and the right side frame component 11d are extruded from an aluminum alloy. It is made of a material, and each of the frame constituent parts 11a to 11d is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, whereby the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. Then, the inner frame 12 and the like are housed in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, the right side frame constituent portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 projecting from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84, 85 for locking the locking member of the locking device 600 are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on the inner frame opening detection switch 92, which will be described later, is projected from the lower receiving portion 85 toward the inside of the outer frame 11.

Further, a resin curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame constituent portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed between the inner frame 12 and the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened to the front side with this opening / closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38.

Further, a front frame 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 can be opened to the front side with the opening / closing axis set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as an axis. The front frame 14 may be configured to be directly openly supported by the outer frame 11 instead of being supported via the inner frame 12.

The front frame 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A window portion 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed in the central portion of the front frame 14. As a result, the game board 30 (the game area in which the game ball can move) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. Become. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a lower plate 15 as a ball receiving plate is provided on the front side of the front frame 14 at the center of the lower portion thereof, and the game ball discharged from the lower payment outlet 16 is the lower plate 15. It can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball pulling lever 25 for ejecting a game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball launching handle (hereinafter referred to as “handle 18”) is provided as an operating means (launching operating means) protruding toward the front side. The handle 18 is provided with a rotation operating body 18a as an operation unit provided so as to be rotatable, and a touch as a touch detecting means capable of detecting that a human touches the handle 18 at a position (not shown). A sensor and a variable resistor as an operation amount detecting means for detecting the operation amount of the operation portion of the handle 18 are provided. Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, the game ball is launched by the launching device 60 as a launching means described later with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a stop lever 18b as a stop operation means that can be pressed by the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. In the state where the stop lever 18b is pressed, the launching of the game ball by the launching device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is held. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the firing of the game ball, or to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball while holding the handle 18. The handle 18 may be configured to have a built-in light emitting means such as an LED that allows the light emitting mode to be visually recognized via a transparent front cover, and the light emitting mode may be changed according to an effect or the like. Further, in the handle 18 or its vicinity, a vent may be provided so that air can be sent out from the vent, or a vibrating means (vibe, speaker, etc.) may be provided to vibrate the handle 18 (hand operating the handle 18). You may do it.

As shown in FIG. 2, above the lower plate 15, an upper plate 19 capable of storing game balls paid out from the upper payout outlet 17 is provided. The upper plate 19 is a ball receiving plate that temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward the launching device 60, which will be described later, while arranging them in a row. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be discharged are guided to the lower plate 15 via the lower plate continuous passage 71 and the lower payment outlet 16, which will be described later.

A lending switch 121, a return switch 122, and a balance display unit 124 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. In a game hall or the like, when the lending switch 121 is operated with a game card having a balance inserted (inserted) into the CR unit arranged on the (left) side of the pachinko machine 10, the lending switch 121 is operated in response to the operation. The rental ball is supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return switch 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the CR unit. Further, the balance display unit 124 displays how much the balance of the card inserted in the CR unit is.

Further, a ball removal button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. The ball removal button 123 is configured to be able to appear and disappear from the upper surface of the upper plate 19, and is always urged to the side protruding from the upper surface of the upper plate 19 by an urging means (not shown). By pressing the ball removal button 123, the space between the upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15 is opened, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 19 is guided to the lower plate 15. .. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

In addition, an effect button 125 and a cross button 126 as effect operation means are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. The effect button 125 is provided with a cylindrical transparent operating body whose upper side is closed so as to be displaceable up and down, and is always urged upward (in a direction protruding from the mounting surface) by a spring to emit light (for example, an LED). ) Is built-in, and characters and patterns (for example, characters such as PUSH and decoration of edging) are attached to the upper surface of the operating body. By pressing the effect button 125 and the cross button 126, it is possible to perform the corresponding effect (button effect) on the decorative symbol display device 42, etc., which will be described later, and to change various setting contents. be.

For example, as a button effect, the decorative symbol display device 42 described later performs an effect display that teaches a predetermined result (for example, whether or not a jackpot state described later occurs), and the predetermined result is displayed in the effect display. A display prompting the operation of the effect button 125 (and a display indicating the valid period of the button operation) is derived before being taught, and when the effect button 125 is operated, the predetermined result is desirable for the player. A suggestion effect display suggesting whether or not a result may be obtained may be configured to be derivable. Further, for example, by operating the effect button 125 in a state where the game is not performed (for example, a state in which the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b described later is not performed), a predetermined display means (for example, for example). In the decorative pattern display device 42) described later, items that can be set by the player regarding the effect, etc. (change of the effect pattern in the decorative pattern display device 42, change of volume, change of brightness, pachinko machine 10 via a mobile communication terminal). A menu screen is displayed that displays passwords for mobile-linked games that exchange information between the device and the server of the game machine manufacturer, and output of a two-dimensional code, etc.), and select each item. Then, the configuration may be such that the corresponding setting is possible.

Further, on the front surface of the front frame 14, various lamps and other light emitting means are provided around the front frame 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode according to the change of the gaming state or the like. For example, on the peripheral edge of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided. Further, error indicator lamps 104 that light up when a predetermined error occurs are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. A large number of fine through holes corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame 14 are formed in the upper portion of each error indicator lamp 104 in the annular illumination portion 102. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to enhance the design, the range visible to the player is appropriately decorated. For example, the front side (front side) of the front frame 14 and the upper plate 19 The peripheral portion, the surface (front surface, etc.) of the handle 18 and the like are designed (decorated) as the motif of the pachinko machine 10.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular plate glasses attached separately in a front and rear pair, but is formed in a round shape as a whole and is attached after being assembled. It should be noted that a sticker or the like for teaching information or for decoration may be attached (attached) to a part of the glass unit 137 (at least one of the pair of front and rear transparent bodies). The sticker is required for a transparent or translucent sheet so that the rear area of the part where the sticker is attached (the game area when the sticker overlaps in front of a part of the game area) can be visually recognized as much as possible. Characters and patterns are printed on the spots. In addition, the transparent body of the glass unit 137 is not limited to tempered glass, and a transparent resin plate can also be used.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 in a state of being in contact with the back side of the resin base 38 on the rear side of the window hole 39. Therefore, the substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

Further, a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding the game ball immediately after being launched by the launching device 60 are attached to the lower front portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, at a position below the window hole 39. Has been done. In this embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is adopted as the launcher 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device that guides a game ball guided from the upper plate 19 to the launching position of the launching device 60 one by one by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 is provided.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning device 31, a first variable winning device 32a (first variable winning means) as a variable winning means, a second variable winning device 32b (second variable winning means), and starting. A first start winning device 33a (first starting ball entering means), a second starting winning device 33b (second starting ball entering means), a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, etc. are arranged as ball entering means. Has been done. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various winning devices such as a general winning device 31, variable winning devices 32a, 32b, and starting winning devices 33a, 33b, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper plate 19 or lower. A predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) are paid out to the plate 15.

The game board 30 of the present embodiment is made of transparent resin, and various decorations are provided behind the range excluding the openings corresponding to the above-mentioned various winning devices. The decoration includes a print sticker that is attached and detached on the rear surface of the game board 30, and a decorative object (three-dimensional that matches the motif of the pachinko machine 10) that is installed (attached) behind the game board 30. Object) and the like. Further, behind the game board 30 (rear or lateral to the decorative member, or diagonally forward), a light emitting means for irradiating the decorative member with light is provided. The game board 30 does not have to be made of transparent resin, and may be made of opaque resin or wooden (plywood), for example.

Further, an opening is provided in a portion of the game board 30 where various winning devices are arranged, and a passage for guiding the game ball entered into the winning device to the rear of the game board 30 or a game is provided in the opening. Wiring of a detection switch for detecting the passage of a ball is appropriately inserted, and various winning devices are attached to the game board 30. The work of attaching the game board 30 to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) is completed by attaching the game board 30 in a state where various winning devices and decorative members are attached to the inner frame 12 and connecting the wiring. When the decorative symbol display device 42 becomes large, the decorative symbol display device 42 should be attached to the game board 30 or the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) after the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12. It may be configured.

In the present embodiment, 3 balls are entered in the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, 10 balls are entered in the general winning device 31 and 10 balls are entered in the variable winning device 32. If there is, 15 game balls are configured to be paid out. Further, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 (which is not discharged to the back surface side of the game board 30) through which the game ball passes in the game area, the game ball is not paid out. In addition, the first start winning device 33a, the general winning device 31, and the through gate 34 are configured so that the game ball moving in the game area can always enter or pass through. The two starting winning devices 33b and the variable winning devices 32a and 32b are configured to change the state between an open state in which the game ball can be entered and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be entered.

As will be described in detail later, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b include a condition establishment detecting means for detecting a winning game ball and a first starting winning switch 224a as a starting ball detecting means. , A second start winning switch 224b is provided. When a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224a and 224b, whether or not to generate a big hit state as a special gaming state in which the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b are opened. In addition to the winning / failing lottery, the special display devices 43a and 43b, which will be described later, and the decorative symbol display device 42 perform variable display. Then, if the winner is won by the winning or losing lottery, the jackpot state will be given.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowermost portion of the game area, and a game ball that has not won a prize in various winning devices such as the general winning device 31 uses the out opening 36. It is discharged to the outside of the game area through it. Further, in the game board 30, a large number of nails (game nails) are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill are arranged. ing.

A variable display device unit 35 is arranged in a substantially central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 35, a center frame 47 is arranged so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 42 described later. A pair of left and right entry ports 151 are provided on the upper part of the center frame 47, and the game ball that has entered the inside of the center frame 47 through the entry openings 151 is the left and right side portions of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is guided on the stage 153 formed below the decorative symbol display device 42 via the warp flow path 152 extending up and down along the above. The game ball guided on the stage 153 falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or rolls on the stage 153 and then enters the pocket 154 formed on the inner back side of the center of the stage 153. .. In addition, the pocket 154 communicates with the guide passage 155 leading to the game area directly above the first start winning device 33a, and the game ball entering the pocket 154 has a relatively high probability of being described later. The ball is inserted into the first start winning device 33a.

The warp flow path 152 has a transparent or semi-transparent portion extending along the extending direction thereof, and the light emitting means provided behind the warp flow path 152 constantly emits light. Is able to confirm the game ball moving in the warp flow path 152. Since the variable display device unit 35 is provided in a substantially central portion of the game area, it is a portion that attracts the attention of the player. The shape of the center frame 47 is also designed for each model and various decorations are applied, and some of the center frames 47 are provided with a light emitting body or a movable accessory that gives a predetermined instruction to the player. However, even if a print sticker is attached to the front surface, side surface, or rear surface of the warp flow path 152, or a decorative (fall prevention) wall portion is provided in a part of the front of the warp flow path 152 or the stage 153. However, the game ball moving on the center frame 47 is configured to be visible to the player.

A first start winning device 33a is arranged at a lower position of the variable display device unit 35. The first starting winning device 33a protrudes forward from the front portion of the game board 30, and a winning opening (starting winning opening) in which the game ball can always win is opened on the upper side thereof. The first starting winning device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with a configuration (opening / closing member or the like) that changes the ease of entering the game ball into the first starting winning device 33a.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is to be entered into the first start winning device 32a by arranging the game nail or the like provided in the game area, the game ball is placed in the variable display device unit in the game area. It is necessary to pass through (left-handed) the area located on the left side of 35 (left-handed area), and even if it is passed through the right-sided area (right-handed area) of the variable display device unit 35 (right-handed). Even so), it is not possible to enter the ball into the first start winning device 32a.

A first variable winning device 32a, a second variable winning device 32b, and a second starting winning device 33b are provided at a position to the right of the first starting winning device 33a, and a game ball is efficiently entered into these. A right-handed winning unit 37 is provided for this purpose. As shown in FIG. 43, the right-handed winning unit 37 has an entry portion 111 that opens upward and allows a game ball to enter, and a game ball that has entered the entry portion 111 into a second variable winning device 32b. A first guide passage 112 for guiding, a second guide passage 113 for guiding a game ball guided by the first guide passage 112 and not entering the second variable winning device 32b to the second starting winning device 33b, and a second guide passage 113. The third guide passage 114, which is guided by the guide passage 113 and guides the game ball that did not enter the second start winning device 33b to the first variable winning device 32a, and the game ball that moves the right-handed winning unit 37. Discharge unit 116 that discharges to the outside of the right-handed winning unit 37 (in this example, the game ball is discharged to the game area outside the right-handed winning unit 37 by opening to the left) and the third guide passage 114. It is provided with a fourth guide passage 115 that guides a game ball that has been guided and has not entered the first variable winning device 32a to the discharge unit 116. The game board 30 is provided with an opening corresponding to the installation position of the right-handed winning unit 37, and the right-handed winning unit 37 is attached to the game board 30 in such a manner as to close the opening. ..

Further, the right-handed winning unit 37 of the present embodiment includes a right unit 37a including a ball entry portion 111, a first guide passage 112, a second variable winning device 32b, and a part of the second guide passage 113. It is divided into a part of the 2 guide passage 113, a 2nd start winning device 33b, a 3rd guide passage 114, a 1st variable winning device 32a, a 4th guide passage 115, and a left unit 37b provided with a discharge unit 116. There is. Further, as the right unit 37a and the left unit 37b, the rear part of the first guide passage 112, the second guide passage 113, the third guide passage 114, and the fourth guide passage 115 (the gaming area in the right-handed winning unit 37). The rear part 181 provided with the rear plate portion 182 defining the rear portion), and the front portion (right-handed prize) of the first guide passage 112, the second guide passage 113, the third guide passage 114, and the fourth guide passage 115. A front plate portion 185 (see FIG. 47) that defines (the front portion of the game area in the unit 37) and a front plate portion 185 extending rearward, the first guide passage 112, the second guide passage 113, and the third guide passage 114. , And a front part 184 including a guide plate portion 186 that defines the extending direction of the fourth guide passage 115.

The rear part 181 and the front part 184 are integrally formed of a colorless and transparent resin (for example, polypropylene). Therefore, from the front of the right-handed winning unit 37 via the front plate portion 185, the inside of the right-handed winning unit 37 (first variable winning device 32a, second variable winning device 32b, second starting winning device 33b, and A game ball that moves inside the right-handed winning unit 37) can be visually recognized. Further, the rear side of the right-handed winning unit 37 can be visually recognized from the front of the right-handed winning unit 37 via the front plate portion 185 and the rear plate portion 182.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the present embodiment, behind the right-handed winning unit 37 (so as not to interfere with the first variable winning device 32a, the second variable winning device 32b, and the second starting winning device 33b). A surface light emitting illumination 188 is provided as a light emitting means. The surface-emitting illumination includes a light source and a surface-emitting means that emits surface light by incident the light of the light source inside. The surface-emitting illumination 188 is basically white, that is, in a standby state in which no game is performed, or in a normal mode, basically in a blue light emitting mode (an image of the sea named after a marine organism). (Imagine the reflection of light on the surface of the sea). In the probabilistic mode, the light emission mode is transparent (or white), and in the time reduction mode, the light emission mode is yellow. It is a mode that switches between orange and white alternately at a relatively high speed when the ball enters (returns to the mode corresponding to the probability change mode or the time reduction mode after 1 second), and in the jackpot state, it is a light red light emission mode. , It is said that the light emission mode (returns to the mode corresponding to the jackpot state after 5 seconds) in which red, white, blue, green, and yellow are alternately lit at a relatively high speed when the ball enters the special ball entry unit 145.

Although not shown, the front part 184 is provided with a boss that opens rearward, and the rear part 181 is provided with a screw hole correspondingly, and a screw is screwed to the boss through the screw hole. As a result, the front part 184 and the rear part 181 are connected. In addition, the guide plate corresponds to the first guide passage 112 (a portion that faces the ball entry portion 111 in the vertical direction and is expected to receive a relatively large force from the game ball that has entered the right-handed winning unit 37). A positioning protrusion protruding rearward from the portion 186 is provided, and a positioning opening for inserting the positioning protrusion is provided in the rear plate portion 182.

Further, the first guide passage 112, the second guide passage 113, the third guide passage 114, and the fourth guide passage 115 are provided with a delay protrusion (not shown) as a delay means for delaying the moving speed of the game ball. ing. The delay protrusion is provided by projecting forward from the rear plate portion 182 or projecting rearward from the front plate portion 185. Further, the delay protrusion is a direction in which the moving direction of the game ball intersects the direction toward the downstream side of the first guide passage 112, the second guide passage 113, the third guide passage 114, and the fourth guide passage 115. It is intended to slightly change to, and is configured so that the movement of the game ball is not hindered by the delayed protrusion (the delayed protrusion and the front plate portion 185 facing the tip of the delayed protrusion). Or, the distance between the rear plate portion 182 and the rear plate portion 182 is larger than the diameter of the game ball (for example, about 1 mm).

The second variable winning device 32b is configured to have a second variable specific area 141 in which a game ball guided to the first guide passage 112 can enter, and a second variable specific area 141 that can be slid back and forth and can be displaced. A closed position that is located above and restricts the entry of the game ball into the second variable specific area 141, and retracts backward from the upper position of the second variable specific area 141 to the second variable specific area 141. It includes a second variable shutter 142 that can be displaced between the open position that allows the game ball to enter, and a solenoid (not shown) that opens and closes the second variable shutter 142. The second variable winning device 32b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter, and the game ball can be entered in the jackpot state of the type in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state. It is in the open state. The second variable shutter 142 is attached to the rear surface side of the rear part 181 and is configured to be able to appear and disappear inside the right-handed winning unit 37 through the opening provided in the rear plate portion 182.

Further, an LED as a ball entry teaching means and a mode teaching means is provided corresponding to the second variable winning device 32b (for example, directly below the second variable specific area 141, particularly the second variable shutter 142), and the second variable winning device 32b is provided. The LED is configured to emit light when the variable winning device 32b is opened (for example, only during the period when the second variable winning device 32b is open). Further, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 32b, the lighting mode of the LED changes (for example, blinking, the emission color changes, etc.). In addition to or in addition to the LED, a movable accessory or the like that makes it easy to recognize that the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state may be provided.

Further, the second variable shutter 142 of the present embodiment is inclined downward toward the left, and the first guide passage 112 guides the game ball to the upper right portion of the second variable shutter 142. When the game ball is guided to the first guide passage 112 and reaches the second variable winning device 32b, if the second variable shutter 142 is in the closed position, the game ball is placed on the upper surface of the second variable shutter 142. At the same time, the second variable shutter 142 guides the user to the second guide passage 113 on the left side. If the game ball is placed on the second variable shutter 142 when the second variable shutter 142 is set to the open position, the game ball enters the second variable specific area 141.

Further, the second variable winning device 32b enters the second variable entry count switch 223b and the second variable specific region 141, which can detect all the game balls entered in the second variable specific region 141, and the second variable winning device 32b. 2 Special entry section 145 where the game ball detected by the variable entry count switch 223b can enter, non-special entry section 146, and special entry to detect the game ball entered into the special entry section 145. The ball detection switch 226a, the non-special ball entry detection switch 226b that detects the game ball that has entered the non-special entry section 146, and the game ball detected by the second variable entry count switch 223b are the special entry section 145. , Or a distribution device 147 that guides to one of the non-special entry portions 146.

The sorting device 147 has a slide piece 148 that is displaced to a closed position that restricts entry into the special entry section 145 and an open position that allows entry into the special entry section 145, and a slide piece at predetermined intervals. It is equipped with a solenoid (not shown) that displaces 148 to the open position. If the slide piece 148 is in the open position when the game ball that has entered the second variable specific area 141 reaches the distribution device 147, the game ball enters the special entry portion 145 and the slide piece 148 is closed. If it is in the position, the game ball will enter the non-special entry section 146. In the present embodiment, when a game ball that has entered the second variable specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b enters the special entry portion 145, a "probability variation mode" described in detail will be provided. It has become. Further, in the present embodiment, the gaming ball passes through the second variable entry count switch 223b in the diagonally left-right direction, and the distribution device 147, the special entry detection switch 226a, and the non-special entry detection switch 226b are moved in the vertical direction. From the front of the right-handed winning unit 37 (pachinko machine 10), the game ball passes through the distribution device 147, the second variable ball entry count switch 223b, the special ball entry detection switch 226a, and non-special. It is configured so that the state of passing through the ball entry detection switch 226b can be visually recognized.

Further, an LED (not shown) as a ball entry teaching means and a mode teaching means is provided corresponding to the special ball entry unit 145 (for example, directly below the slide piece 148 of the distribution device 147), and the special ball entry unit 145 is in an open state. (For example, only during the period when the special ball entry portion 145 is in the open state), the LED is configured to emit light, and is turned off during the other periods. Further, when a game ball enters the special ball entry unit 145, the lighting mode of the LED changes (for example, blinking, the emission color changes, etc.), and 1 from the ball entry detection. After a second, it returns to the basic light emitting mode (lighting mode when the special ball entry portion 145 is open, extinguishing mode when the special ball entry portion 145 is closed). The LED may be provided on the side of the passage in the right-handed winning unit 37, or may be provided behind the passage. Further, in place of or in addition to the LED, a movable accessory or the like that makes it easy to recognize that the special ball entry portion 145 is in the open state may be provided.

In addition, an LED (not shown) as a ball entry teaching means and a mode teaching means is provided corresponding to the non-special entry section 146, and when a game ball enters the non-special entry section 146, such an LED is provided. Turns on and turns off 1 second after ball entry detection. Although not shown, the rear plate portion 182 is provided with a special entry portion 145 and a discharge port for discharging the game ball that has entered the non-special entry portion 146 to the rear. Further, the rear part 181 is provided with a discharge passage that protrudes rearward from the peripheral edge portion of the discharge port of the rear plate portion 182 and guides the game ball rearward. Further, the distribution device 147 is attached to the rear surface side of the rear part 181 and is configured to be able to appear and disappear inside the right-handed winning unit 37 through the opening provided in the rear plate portion 182. Further, the front part 184 is provided with a holding portion for holding the second variable entry count switch 223b, the special entry detection switch 226a, and the non-special entry detection switch 226b, respectively, and the rear plate portion 182 is provided with a holding portion. An opening through which the wiring of the second variable ball entry count switch 223b, the special ball entry detection switch 226a, and the non-special ball entry detection switch 226b is inserted is provided.

The second start winning device 33b is configured to have a second start specific area 171 in which a game ball guided to the second guide passage 113 can enter, and a second start specific area 171 that can be slid back and forth and displaced. A closed position that is located above and restricts the entry of the game ball into the second start specific area 171 and retracts backward from the upper position of the second start specific area 171 to the second start specific area 171. A second start shutter 172 that can be displaced between the open position that allows the game ball to enter, a second start winning switch 224b that can detect all the game balls that have entered the second start specific area 171, and the second start winning switch 224b. It includes a solenoid (not shown) that opens and closes the second start shutter 172. The second start winning device 33b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter, and is in an open state in which the game ball can enter when the ball is won in the ball entry support lottery described in detail later.

Further, the second start shutter 172 of the present embodiment is inclined downward toward the right, and the second guide passage 113 guides the game ball to the upper left portion of the second start shutter 172. When the game ball is guided to the second guide passage 113 and reaches the second start winning device 33b, if the second start shutter 172 is in the closed position, the game ball is placed on the upper surface of the second start shutter 172. At the same time, the second start shutter 172 guides the user to the third guide passage 114 on the right side. If the game ball is placed on the second start shutter 172 when the second start shutter 172 is set to the open position, the game ball enters the second start specific area 171.

Further, an LED (not shown) as a ball entry teaching means and a mode teaching means is provided corresponding to the second start winning device 33b (for example, for example, the second start specific area 171 and particularly directly below the second start shutter 172). The LED is configured to emit light when the second start winning device 33b is opened, and to turn off in other cases. Further, when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b, the lighting mode of the LED changes (for example, blinking, the emission color changes, etc.), and the ball entry detection After 1 second, it returns to the basic light emitting mode (lighting mode when the second start winning device 33b is open, extinguishing mode when the second start winning device 33b is closed). In addition to or in addition to the LED, a movable accessory or the like that makes it easy to recognize that the second start winning device 33b is in the open state may be provided.

The first variable winning device 32a is configured to have a first variable specific area 161 in which a game ball guided to the third guide passage 114 can enter, and a first variable specific area 161 that can be slid back and forth and displaced. A closed position that is located above and restricts the entry of the game ball into the first variable specific area 161 and retracts backward from the upper position of the first variable specific area 161 to the first variable specific area 161. A first variable shutter 162 that can be displaced between an open position that allows a game ball to enter, and a first variable entry switch 223a that can detect all game balls that have entered the first variable specific area 161. , A solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the second start shutter 172 is provided. The first variable winning device 32a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter, and the game ball can be entered in a jackpot state of a type in which the first variable winning device 32b is in an open state. It is in the open state.

Further, the first variable shutter 162 of the present embodiment is inclined downward toward the left, and the third guide passage 114 guides the game ball to the upper right portion of the first variable shutter 162. When the game ball is guided to the third guide passage 114 and reaches the first variable winning device 32a, if the first variable shutter 162 is in the closed position, the game ball is placed on the upper surface of the first variable shutter 162. At the same time, the first variable shutter 162 guides the user to the fourth guide passage 115 on the left side. If the game ball is placed on the first variable shutter 162 when the first variable shutter 162 is set to the open position, the game ball enters the first variable specific area 161.

Further, an LED (not shown) as a ball entry teaching means and a mode teaching means is provided corresponding to the first variable winning device 32a (for example, directly below the first variable specific area 161 and particularly the first variable shutter 162). When the first variable winning device 32a is opened (for example, only during the period when the first variable winning device 32b is open, from the start to the end of the jackpot state, or from the start of the first round. Until the end of the final round), the LED is configured to emit light, and is turned off during the rest of the period. Further, when a game ball enters the first variable winning device 32a, the lighting mode of the LED changes (for example, blinking, the emission color changes, etc.), and the ball entry detection After 1 second, it returns to the basic light emitting mode (lighting mode when the first variable winning device 32a is open, extinguishing mode when the first variable winning device 32a is closed). In addition to or in addition to the LED, a movable accessory or the like that makes it easy to recognize that the first variable winning device 32a is in the open state may be provided.

The right-handed winning unit 37 of the present embodiment enters the ball winning portion 111 when the second variable winning device 32b, the second starting winning device 33b, and the first variable winning device 32a are closed. The ball-balls are guided in a row to the discharge unit 116 via the second variable shutter 142, the second start shutter 172, and the first variable shutter 162. Further, when the game ball is to be entered into the first variable winning device 32a, the second variable winning device 32b, and the second starting winning device 33b, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the right-handed winning unit 37. be. Further, in the present embodiment, all of the game balls launched in the right side region are configured to enter the right-handed winning unit 37.

In the right-handed winning unit 37, the area above the first guide passage 112, the second guide passage 113, the third guide passage 114, the fourth guide passage 115, and the second variable shutter 142 of the second variable winning device 32b. The area above the second start shutter 172 of the second start winning device 33b and the area above the first variable shutter 162 of the first variable winning device 32a are included in the gaming area. Further, in any one of the first guide passage 112, the second guide passage 113, and the third guide passage 114, or a combination thereof, the game ball is placed on the outside of the right-handed winning unit 37 (the back side of the game board 30). A branch passage for guiding (basically, it may be arranged so as not to pass through) may be provided.

The opening / closing member that switches the second start winning device 33b, the first variable winning device 32a, and the second variable winning device 32b of the present embodiment between the open state and the closed state is the shutters 172 and 162 that slide in the front-rear direction. , 142, but is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, in the second start winning device 33b, a blade member as an opening / closing member provided so as to be rotatable and displaceable is provided adjacent to the right side portion of the winning opening (starting winning opening) into which the game ball can enter. 2 The start winning device 33b is arranged at a predetermined distance to the left of the left end portion which is the downstream end portion of the second guide passage 113, and the blade member is set to the open position so that the tip portion of the blade member is second. In close proximity to the left end of the guide passage 113, the game ball passing through the second guide passage 113 is guided by the blade member to enter the starting winning opening, while the blade member is set to the open position. The start winning opening is closed by the blade member, and a gap through which the game ball can pass is formed between the second start winning device 33b (blade member) and the second guide passage 113, and the gap is passed through the gap. It may be configured to enter the third guide passage 114.

Further, in the present embodiment, the right-handed winning unit 37 is configured to include a first variable winning device 32a, a second variable winning device 32b, and a second starting winning device 33b. The winning device included in the 37 is not particularly limited, and may be configured to include, for example, a through gate 34 or a general winning device 31, or the first variable winning device 32a may be separated. It should be noted that a configuration in which a plurality of winning devices are connected by one road, such as the right-handed winning unit 37, may be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the right-handed winning unit 37 is configured by arranging the right-handed unit 37a and the left-handed unit 37b side by side, but the right-handed unit 37 may be configured as one unit. It may be configured by arranging two or more units side by side. Further, although the right unit 37a and the left unit 37b are each composed of the rear part 181 and the front part 184, each may be composed of one part or each of three or more parts. You may.

As described above, the right-handed winning unit 37 is individually divided into the second variable winning device 32b (special winning section 145, non-special winning section 146), the second starting winning device 32b, and the first variable winning device 32a, respectively. An LED (not shown) is provided corresponding to the above, and the visual mode of the decorative panel 401 can be changed by changing the light emitting mode of these LEDs and the surface light emitting illumination 188. In the present embodiment, the state in which the LED is turned off or the surface light emitting means 188 is lit without changing the light emitting color corresponds to the normal mode and the normal light emitting mode, and the LED blinks or the basic color is used. The state of lighting with different colors and the state of the surface light emitting means 188 sequentially changing the light emitting color correspond to the changing mode and the changing light emitting mode, and the function of changing each lighting mode corresponds to the mode changing means and the light emitting mode change. It corresponds to the means, and the ball entry detection switch corresponding to each LED or the like corresponds to the detection means. Further, such an LED and a surface light emitting illumination 188 constitute a firing position notification light emitting means.

As shown in FIG. 4, in the upper part of the right side region, a through gate 34 is provided above the right-handed winning unit 37 so that the game balls flowing down the game area can pass through one by one. The through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34. In this embodiment, the through gate 34 is not provided in the left side region.

Further, when the game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry support lottery (open lottery) for whether or not to open the second start winning device 33b is performed, and the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. In order to teach the result of the ball entry support lottery, a variable display is performed. Then, when the ball is won in the ball entry support lottery, the second start winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variation display.

In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability state" in which a jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in a winning / failing lottery, and a "high probability state" in which a jackpot is won with a higher probability than a low probability state in a winning / failing lottery. Further, the second start winning device 33b (second start shutter 172) is opened relatively frequently, and the “high ball entry state” and the high ball entry state, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b, and the high ball entry state. There is a "low ball entry state" in which the time zone in which the second start winning device 33b is opened is reduced. Hereinafter, the state of low probability state and low ball entry state is referred to as "normal mode", and the state of low probability state and high ball entry state is referred to as "time reduction mode (or time reduction mode)", and is referred to as high probability state. And the state of high ball entry is called "probability change mode". It should be noted that a state (latent mode) in which a high probability state and a low ball entry state may be provided may be provided.

The high ball entry state includes, for example, (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low ball entry state, and (2) a single opening time of the second start winning device 33b (2). (Specified time) is longer than in the low entry state, (3) The specified number of game balls that can be entered per opening of the second start winning device 33b is larger than in the low entry state. (4) The number of times the second start winning device 33b is opened per winning of the ball entry support lottery is larger than that in the low ball entry state, and (5) The winning probability of the ball entry support lottery is higher than in the low ball entry state. For example, it should be in a high state. The high ball entry state in this embodiment adopts the configurations of (1), (2), (4), and (5) above. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of these configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high ball entry state". .. As a result, the game ball is likely to be frequently won in the second start winning device 33b, the number of times the winning / failing lottery is executed increases, and the player's holding ball is suppressed from being reduced. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal mode is continued until the jackpot state occurs, whereas the time reduction mode and the probability variation mode are variable displays on the special display devices 43a and 43b even if the jackpot state does not occur. Is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example), the process ends, and the mode shifts to the normal mode.

Further, as the jackpot type of this embodiment, a 10-round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "10RS"), a 4-round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "4RS"), and a 10-round normal jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "10RN") are referred to. ). Regarding "10RS", the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 30 seconds, or the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b has eight pieces. One round is the entry of a game ball, which is repeated 10 times, and then the jackpot state ends. In the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b is opened in the first round, and the first variable winning device 32a is opened in the second to tenth rounds. That is, regarding "10RS", in the first round, by letting the game ball enter the second variable winning device 32b, the game ball enters the special entry section 145, and the "10RS" After the jackpot state ends, the "probability change mode" is given.

Regarding "4RS", in the second to fourth rounds, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 30 seconds, or eight game balls enter the first variable winning device 32a in one round. Then, the first round is performed as one round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 30 seconds or eight game balls enter the second variable winning device 32b. That is, also for "4RS", the game ball can be entered into the special entry portion 145 of the second variable winning device 32b in the first round, and the "probability change mode" is given after the jackpot state ends. It has become.

Regarding "10RN", in the second to eighth rounds, one round is that the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 30 seconds, or that eight game balls enter the first variable winning device 32a. Then, the first round is performed as one round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 0.1 seconds or eight game balls enter the second variable winning device 32b. That is, regarding the "first round" of "10RN", it is a big hit round in which the entry of the game ball into the second variable winning device 32b cannot be expected and the increase of the game ball cannot be expected. Therefore, in the jackpot state of "10RN", the game ball cannot be entered into the special entry portion 145, and the "time reduction mode" is provided after the jackpot state ends.

In addition, even if the game ball enters the second variable specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b in a game other than the first round of "10RS" and the first round of "4RS", the slide of the sorting device 147. The piece 148 is in the closed position so as not to enter the special entry portion 145. That is, except for the first round of "10RS" and "4RS", the distribution device 147 of the second variable winning device 32b is maintained in the closed position, or the ball is entered when the second variable winning device 32b is opened. The configuration is such that the timing at which the game ball can reach the distribution device 147 and the timing at which the slide piece 148 is set to the open position do not match.

Further, adjacent to the upper right portion of the substantially elliptical game area, a special display is performed to teach the result of the winning / failing lottery performed when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a. A second special display means as a first special display device 43a as a means and a variable display for teaching the result of a winning / failing lottery performed when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b. When a game ball is entered into the start winning prize devices 33a and 33b during the variation display on the special display device 43b and the special display devices 43a and 43b, the variation display corresponding to the entry is stored on hold. The first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b as the hold display means, and the variable display for teaching the result of the ball entry support lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 are lined up. When the game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the normal symbol display device 41 as the normal display means and the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display corresponding to the passage is reserved and stored. A normal hold display device 44 indicating the above is provided so as to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, the first hold display device 46a, the second hold display device 46b, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal hold display device 44 will be described later. The display is directly controlled by the main control device 261 as the main control means.

The first special display device 43a is composed of four LEDs (first special figure lamp). Then, with the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a, the switching display (variable display) of the first special figure lamp is performed on the first special display device 43a. The second special display device 43b is composed of four LEDs (second special figure lamp). Then, when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b, the second special display device 43b switches and displays the second special figure lamp (variable display).

Further, after the variable display is performed on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b for a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the winning / failing lottery. That is, the lighting mode when the variation display is stopped (combination of the lit special figure lamps) is associated with various results of the winning / failing lottery, and the winning / failing lottery is performed according to the lighting mode when the variation display is stopped. The result of, that is, "big hit" or "missing" is definitely displayed.

Further, in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, depending on the lighting mode (stop mode) to be stopped, the jackpot type, that is, any of "10RS", "4RS", and "10RN" You will also be taught if there is one. In addition, there are not one but a plurality of stop modes of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b that teach various jackpot types and the fact that they are out of order, and one of them is selected to display the stop. Will be done.

As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, there is a possibility that "4RS" and "10RN" will be won in the winning / failing lottery performed when the game ball enters the first starting winning device 33a. There is a possibility that "10RS" and "4RS" will be won in the winning / losing lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning device 33b. The configuration and installation position of the special display devices 43a and 43b are not particularly limited. For example, each of the special display devices 43a and 43b may be configured by 20 light emitting means, or each may be composed of two 7-segment display devices. It may be configured, or it may be configured by a movable body having a plurality of identification information attached to the outer surface.

Further, the stop display on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is configured to be maintained for a specified time, and the next fluctuation display can be started after the specified time has elapsed (after the fluctuation interval). Has been done. Further, if the next fluctuation display is not performed even after the specified time has elapsed after the stop display on the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b, the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43a or the second. The special display device 43b is configured to switch from a lighting mode indicating the result of the winning / failing lottery to a lighting mode indicating a standby state in which the variable display is not performed. It should be noted that the lighting mode indicating the result of the winning / failing lottery may be maintained as it is.

The first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b are each composed of two LEDs (first hold lamp and second hold lamp). In the present embodiment, the variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a (hereinafter referred to as "first variation display") is configured to be able to be held and stored up to four times. Further, the variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b (hereinafter, referred to as “second variation display”) is also configured to be holdable and memorable up to four times.

Further, for example, when the first fluctuation display is held for one time, the first holding lamp on the left side (inner circumference side of the game area) lights up, and when the first fluctuation display is held for two times, the first fluctuation display is held. , When the left and right 1st hold lamps are lit and the 1st fluctuation display is held 3 times, the 1st hold lamp on the left side blinks and the 1st hold lamp on the right side lights up, and the 1st change When the display is held for 4 times, the left and right first hold lamps blink. If a game ball newly wins a prize in the start winning devices 33a and 33b during the big hit state, the fluctuation display for that amount is also reserved.

In the present embodiment, the reserved variable display is basically digested in the reserved order, but when both the first variable display and the second variable display are reserved, the second variable display is used. The variable display is preferentially digested. That is, if the second variation display triggered by the winning of the second starting winning device 33b is not completely digested, the first variation display triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting winning device 33a is performed. There is no configuration. For example, when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b and one of the second hold lamps is lit in a state where one of the first hold lamps is lit, the first variation display is postponed. The second variation display will be performed first.

The ordinary symbol display device 41 is composed of two LEDs (normal diagram lamps). Then, in the normal symbol display device 41, for example, the normal map lamp on the right side (outer peripheral side of the game area) is blinking (displayed in a variable manner) when the game ball passes through the through gate 34. There is. Further, after the variable display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 for a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the ball entry support lottery. That is, the lighting mode when the fluctuation display is stopped (combination of the lighting normal lamps) is associated with various results of the ball entry support lottery, and the lighting mode when the fluctuation display is stopped depends on the lighting mode. The result of the ball entry support lottery is definitely displayed. For example, lighting both the left and right Fuzu lamps indicates "winning", and lighting only the left Fuzu lamp indicates "off".

The normal hold display device 44 is composed of two LEDs (normal hold lamps). In the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, which is performed based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34, can be held and stored up to four times. For example, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is held for one time, the normal hold lamp on the left side (inner circumference side of the game area) lights up, and when the normal symbol display device 41 is held for two times, the left and right normals are normal. The hold lamp lights up, and when three times are held, the normal hold lamp on the left side blinks, and the normal hold lamp on the right side lights up. When four times are held, the left and right normal hold lamps. Flashes. If the game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the jackpot state, the fluctuation display for that amount is also reserved.

The configuration and installation position of the first hold display device 46a, the second hold display device 46b, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal hold display device 44 are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the hold display devices 46a and 46b may be configured by a 7-segment display device to display the number of holds, or one of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the corresponding hold display devices 45a and 46b may be omitted. Alternatively, a start winning device including an opening / closing member that omits the second start shutter 172 from the second start winning device 33b or allows or restricts the entry of a game ball such as the second start shutter 172. It is also possible to omit the ordinary symbol display device 41 and the ordinary hold display device 44 as a configuration that is not provided.

Further, the variable display device unit 35 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 42 as an effect display means capable of displaying a decorative symbol, which is configured by a liquid crystal display device. The decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to variablely display the decorative symbol as an effect in accordance with the variable display by the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. Hereinafter, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 is also referred to as “effect variable display”. Further, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled by the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub control device 262 is based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the result displayed by the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. Auxiliary display contents are determined, and based on the determination, display is performed by the display control device 45.

The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas (upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, lower symbol display area) of upper, middle, and lower, and a plurality of types of decorations are provided in each symbol display area. Symbols (for example, numerical symbols with numbers 1 to 9) are displayed in sequence (variable display), and then in order for each symbol display area (for example, upper symbol display area → lower symbol display area → middle symbol display). The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (in the order of the area). For example, when the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed by the main control device 261, the first or second special display devices 43a and 43b display the jackpot, and the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the jackpot. (For example, in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed so that the same decorative symbol is lined up on a predetermined effective line), and the jackpot state is displayed. It will be started.

When the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the jackpot, for example, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area as a preliminary step. The Rukoto. In this way, the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and the variable display is still performed in the middle symbol display area, which is the reach state. Of course, just because a reach state occurs does not necessarily mean that it will be a big hit, and it may come off.

In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed on the same effective line. If doublet is displayed (when doublet is stopped), the jackpot state is given. Further, in the normal mode, when the number pattern of the decorative pattern has an odd number of doublets, "10RS" or "4RS" is generated, and when the number pattern has an even number of doublets, "10RS", " When either "4RS" or "10RS" occurs and the number is "7", "10RS" is generated. Further, in the probabilistic mode and the time reduction mode, when the number pattern of the decorative symbol has an odd number of doublets, "10RS" or "4RS" is generated (there is a high possibility that it becomes "10RS"). ) Occurs and even-numbered doublets occur, "10RS" or "4RS" occurs (highly likely to be "4RS"), and "7" doublets occur. , "10RS" is generated.

In the present embodiment, as an effect of teaching or suggesting the game mode in which the player is staying, a plurality of effect stages (with different backgrounds and the like) are prepared in the decorative symbol display device 42. More specifically, the "probability change stage" that confirms that you are staying in the probabilistic mode, the "normal stage" that confirms that you are staying in the normal mode, and the "pull back" that you are staying in the time reduction mode. There is a "stage". That is, when "10RS" and "4RS" are won, the stage shifts to the "probability change stage" after the jackpot state ends. If the player wins the "10RN", the player shifts to the "pull-back stage" after the jackpot state ends. Further, when the variation display is performed 100 times in the probability change stage and the pullback stage, the stage shifts to the "normal stage".

Further, in the present embodiment, the fact that the variable display performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b is suspended (the right to execute the variable display is obtained) is the decorative symbol. It is also taught in the display device 42. As will be described in detail later, as shown in FIG. 42, a hold icon 461 indicating that the variable display is held and stored is displayed at the lower part (hold display area 462) of the decorative symbol display device 42. There is.

The configuration, installation position, and the like of the decorative pattern display device 42 as the effect display means are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of reels may be provided in which a plurality of identification information is attached to the outer surface and the identification information according to the result of the winning / failing lottery is stopped and displayed on a predetermined valid line. It is also possible to omit the effect display means (decorative pattern display device 42).

At the bottom of the left side area, a general winning device 31 is arranged along the peripheral edge of the game area. The general winning device 31 projects forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and a winning opening at which a game ball can always win is opened on the upper side thereof.

Further, the game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and is attached with a rail 50 that guides the game ball launched from the launcher 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. As a result, the game ball launched by the rotation operation of the handle 18 is guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip end portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail component 51. This prevents a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the inside of the rail 50. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially tip portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail component portion 52. The game ball launched with a momentum equal to or higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30.

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. Therefore, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the rail 50 and the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the launcher 60 may flow back through the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail constituent parts 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. Be taken.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the front frame 14, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate continuous passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the lower payout outlet 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate continuous passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the upper plate 19. Further, there is a gap at a predetermined distance between the launch rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame 14 has the gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the more dropped game ball to the lower plate 15. As a result, if the game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball goes to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. It is discharged.

Further, a launch ball passage 74 is provided which allows the upper plate 19 and the ball feeding device 63 to communicate with each other and guides the game ball stored in the upper plate 19 to the ball feeding device 63. In addition, a communication hole (not shown) that communicates with the lower plate communication passage 71 is formed in the launch ball passage 74 (a downstream portion of the upper plate 19 is also possible), and a first shutter that opens and closes the communication hole (not shown). (Not shown) is provided. The first shutter is always urged toward the closed position side that closes the communication hole by an urging means (not shown). Further, the first shutter is interlocked with the ball pulling button 123, and is configured to be displaced to an open position for opening the communication hole when the ball pulling button 123 is pressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the lower plate 15 is formed with a discharge port 15a capable of discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and the discharge port 15a is provided. A second shutter 15b for opening and closing is provided. The second shutter 15b is always urged to the closed position side that closes the discharge port 15a by an urging means (not shown). Further, the second shutter 15b is configured to be interlocked with the ball pulling lever 25 (for example, connected or integrally formed), and when the ball pulling lever 25 is pressed (to the left). Is configured to be displaced to an open position that opens the discharge port 15a.

Further, reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding the game ball paid out by the payout mechanism unit 352 described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and is a payout passage 73 (upper plate 19). It is divided into a passage leading to the lower plate and a passage leading to the lower plate continuous passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring or the like to almost close the outlet of the payout passage 67. There is. Further, in the state where the front frame 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the entrance-side rear end portion of the lower plate connecting passage 71. It should be noted that the entrances (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate connecting passage 71 and the upper plate connecting passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and the respective entrances and the payout passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance in the closed state of the front frame 14. The game ball can pass through the gap between them. Therefore, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate ream passage 73 are full of game balls, the game balls to be discharged flow to the lower plate ream passage 71 side (overflow to the entrance side of the lower plate ream passage 71), and the lower plate ream It will be paid out to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting a game ball located in the lower plate continuous passage 71. By the presence of the fullness detection switch, it is grasped that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are stagnant in the lower plate continuous passage 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the fullness detection switch, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full by using the display and voice on the decorative symbol display device 42 is notified. Is controlled. When the stagnation of the game ball in the lower plate continuous passage 71 is eliminated and the game ball is no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game ball is not continuously detected for a predetermined time), the error notification state is canceled.

Next, the rear surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 6 and the like. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged so as to be arranged vertically and horizontally so as to be partially overlapped in the front-rear direction, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying the game balls. And a protective cover made of resin are attached. Since the payout mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit and the resin portion is generally referred to as a back pack, the unit is referred to as "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from behind is on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30. The 213 is provided so as to project rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative symbol display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262, which are liquid crystal display devices facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, can be attached and detached in a state of being stacked back and forth. It is attached to.

The decorative design display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42a having an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative design display device 42 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is housed in the back surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed to the side. The display control device 45 is housed in the substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (storage box 42a). The sub control device 262 is housed in the board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board or the like for driving the LED or the like built in the center frame 47 is arranged. Further, the housing box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside is visible.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning device 31, the variable winning devices 32a, 32b, the starting winning devices 33a, 33b, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning devices (not shown). The game ball collected by the ball collection mechanism is guided to the discharge passage portion 217, which will be described later, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217.

Further, in the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main control device 261 is mounted is rotatably supported by the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main control device 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member cannot be opened without leaving a predetermined trace. As a result, it is possible to easily detect that the substrate box 263 has been illegally opened.

Further, the game board 30 is provided with a ball entry detection switch that detects a game ball that has entered the various winning devices, corresponding to various winning devices such as the general winning device 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning device 31, and a first variable entry count switch 223a is provided in the first variable winning device 32a. The second variable winning device 32b is provided with a second variable entry count switch 223b, a special entry detection switch 226a, and a non-special entry detection switch 226b. Further, the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are provided with a first starting winning switch 224a and a second starting winning switch 224b. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 includes a general winning switch 221, a first variable entry count switch 223a, a second variable entry count switch 223b, a special entry detection switch 226a, and a non-special entry detection. A first board surface relay board that is electrically connected to the switch 226b and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector is provided. The first board surface relay board relays the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start winning switch 224a and the second starting winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main control device 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

The detection results detected by the various ball entry detection switches are taken into the main control device 261. Then, a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are transmitted based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

In addition, although not shown, on the back surface of the game board 30, a solenoid for a large winning opening that opens the large winning openings of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b and a second starting shutter 172 of the second starting winning device 33b are provided. A solenoid that opens and closes is provided. Further, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and motors to the main control device 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a combination of a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism portion 352. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with the open / close axis extending in the vertical direction as the axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left portion (upper right portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no code is attached, but for example, a terminal for outputting information about the current gaming state (start of variable display, start of jackpot state, start of probabilistic mode, continuation of probabilistic mode, etc.), open detection switch described later. Outputs information on various error states such as terminals for outputting information on the opening of the front frame 14 and inner frame 12 detected by 91 and 92, ball entry error, lower plate full tank error, tank ball no error, and payout error. A terminal for outputting information about the number of prize balls paid out from the payout control device 311 and the like are provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded with, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and forms a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 also covers the upper portion and the right portion (the portion on the left side in FIG. 5) of the substrate box 263. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge portion of the main control device 261 are covered. It will be.

The payout mechanism portion 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover portion 354. That is, a tank 355 opened on the upper side is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two horizontal rows of ball passages and gently inclining toward the downstream side is connected, and a case rail 357 is connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. Has been done. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are appropriately paid out according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor or the like. Then, the game ball paid out from the payout device 358 is supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

Further, in the payout mechanism unit 352, a payout relay board 381 that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 that takes in the main power supply from the outside is installed. There is. For example, an AC 24V main power supply is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game ball collected by the above-mentioned ball recovery mechanism flows in, and the game ball is placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. That is, the game balls that have won each prize device such as the general prize device 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. The out port 36 is also connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning devices is also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In the present embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It may be as such.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the power supply / emission control device 310, the payout control device 311 and the CR unit connection board 314 are detachably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a state of being stacked back and forth. Has been done. The power supply / firing control device 310 includes a firing control circuit 312 and a power supply circuit 313, and is housed in the board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251.

Further, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and is fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (power supply / emission control device 310). The board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 is housed, so that a trace of the opening of the board box 311a remains. There is.

In addition, the CR unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (power supply / emission control device 310). The substrate boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside is visible.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 protruding outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball jam of the payout motor occurs, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions, and the ball jam is cleared (return to the normal state).

Further, the power supply circuit 313 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 323 protruding outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and can maintain the state at the time of power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery). can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored in memory. Therefore, if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 while turning on the power. Is thrown in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front side of the front frame 14, and an inner frame is formed by inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 700 and rotating it to one side. 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame 14 can be unlocked by rotating the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 5). reference). This makes it difficult to allow the wire rod or the like to enter from the back surface side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire rod or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame 14 is provided in the lower right portion of the inner frame 12 on the front side (right side of the launching device 60), and FIG. 5 shows. As shown, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided in the lower right portion on the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 each have a detection unit that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. Then, when the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main control device 261 and the detection unit is pressed toward the switch body, and when the detection unit is immersed in the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main control device 261. That is, when the front frame opening detection switch 91 is closed, the detection unit is pressed by the back surface of the front frame 14 to turn off, and when the front frame 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state and turns on. Become. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by being pressed by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11, and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

The configuration (display device, movable accessory, light emitting means, etc.) for performing various effects and decorations is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. That is, in the present embodiment, the motif is "sea", and a sticker on which a design related to the sea is printed is appropriately (partially) attached to the rear surface of the transparent game board 30, and behind the game board 30. A three-dimensional object related to the sea and the model of the pachinko machine 10 is installed, and a sticker with a design related to the sea is appropriately affixed to the winning device and decorative members installed in the game area, or related to the sea. There is a design part that is made up of shapes and colors. Further, when the game board 30 is made of a transparent material, the display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42 is provided not only in the range corresponding to the opening formed in the game board 30 but also in the rear range of the game board 30. The configuration may be such that it exists (for example, the display by the decorative symbol display device 42 can be executed within a range corresponding to the entire gaming area). In addition, the display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42 is a transmissive display unit, and among the display units, a state in which the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 is visually recognized via the game board 30, and the game board 30 and The state of the decorative portion arranged behind the display unit may be changed to a visible state via the display unit of the decorative pattern display device 42. In this case, it is possible to improve the effectability by appropriately changing the display area. For example, in the display area behind the game board 40, the beach is displayed (displayed to the extent that it does not interfere with the visibility of the game ball moving in the game area) in a state other than the reach state in the normal game state, and after the reach state. Then, the display integrated with the main effect display (as if the display area of the main effect display is expanded to the rear area of the game board 30) may be performed.

Further, for example, a transmissive liquid crystal display device (or an EL display device or the like) may be provided in front of the decorative symbol display device 42 (a part or the whole of the game area). The transmissive liquid crystal display device may be provided in front of the game area (for example, the front frame 14) or may be provided behind the game area (either may be provided). Further, in the display unit of the transmissive liquid crystal display device arranged in front of the decorative pattern display device 42 (game area), the position to be aimed at as the movement destination of the game ball launched into the game area according to the game situation is in front of the display unit. The display indicated by the position may be feasible, or the predetermined portion behind the display unit of the transmissive liquid crystal display device may be invisible or difficult to see (such that the light transmittance is reduced). It may be possible to perform display (for example, display dark characters or display like blackening). Further, the display unit of the transmissive decorative symbol display device 42 and the visual mode of the transmissive display device arranged in front of the game area are combined to appropriately change the visual range behind the game board 30 of the player. (For example, in the rear region of the game board 30, a rock-shaped object, a coral-shaped object, and a wakame-shaped object are arranged so as to be hidden behind the object, for example, to give a predetermined teaching in such a visual mode. A crab character, a shrimp character, a shark character, a whale character, and the like are provided so as to be able to appear from the object, suggesting a different jackpot expectation depending on the prominent character).

In addition, the mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 (including the case where the transmission type display device as described above is adopted) and the avant-garde when the transmission type display device (avant-garde display device) is installed in front of the game area. The mode of the display device may be configured so that the player can change the setting by operating the effect button 125 or the cross button 126. For example, in a normal game state or the like, the mode of the avant-garde display device is a state in which the entire range (including the entire front side of the game board 30) that can be visually recognized through the window portion 101 of the front frame 14 is visually recognized. A translucent or opaque display (for example, not displayed in front of the decorative pattern display device 42 or translucent (as a motif)) in a portion where the game ball does not pass (a part of the center frame is on the outer peripheral side of the game area). It may be possible to change the state to a state in which (moving patterns such as waves, etc.) are displayed, and otherwise opaque (moving patterns, etc., such as marine organisms associated with the motif) are derived. Further, regarding the display mode of the avant-garde display device and the decorative pattern display device 42, the player can determine the display density, display on / off, display content (type), etc. for each part (for example, central part, upper right, lower right, etc.). (For example, in the avant-garde display device, the center is not displayed, the upper right is the background picture of the motif, the lower right is the character display, and the lower left is the guidance regarding the progress of the game (teaching of the notice pattern, motif). (Explanation, etc.) is displayed, and the upper left is a display for improving the decorativeness linked to the launch of the game ball). In a configuration in which the display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42 is extended to the back surface of the game board 30, if opaque display is performed by the avant-garde display device, the decorative symbol display device 42 behind the display device 42 becomes difficult to see, but the player is a little. It is desirable to make it visible by moving the face. Furthermore, when the game ball enters the game area behind the place where the opaque display is displayed on the avant-garde display device (when the detection switch for detecting the game ball is detected), the avant-garde display of the corresponding place is performed. The opaque display of the device may be changed to a transparent display, and the decorative symbol display device 42 and the avant-garde display device may display that the launch position of the game ball should be returned to an appropriate position.

Further, a movable accessory that is displaced between the visible position located in front of the display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the retracted position away from the front of the display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be provided. For example, a pair of left and right shutters are provided as movable accessories, and the shutters are appropriately displaced and stopped so that the entire display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42 can be visually recognized and the entire display unit can be seen (almost). ) As a state that can be changed into a state where it is invisible, a state where only the right half of the display unit is visible, a state where only the left half of the display unit is visible, and a state where only the center of the display unit is visible. It is also good. It should be noted that the front surface of the shutter is provided with a predetermined decoration in order to improve the design of the state in which the shutter is located in front of the display unit, or the rear is semi-transparent so that the visual mode can be seen through. It is desirable that a site be provided.

Further, for example, four movable accessories are provided in the upper left, upper right, lower left, and lower right of the decorative symbol display device 42, and all the movable accessories are set to the visible positions, so that the four movable accessories can be moved up and down. The four movable accessories are substantially in contact with each other vertically or horizontally so as to form two rows on the left and right, and the visual modes of the four movable accessories are combined in a front view so as to form a specific mode as a whole. Here, when the four movable accessories are set to the visible positions, the entire display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be invisible (may stop in the middle), for example. When the four movable accessories are in the visible position, a central opening that penetrates back and forth is formed in a range including the center of the four movable accessories, and the central opening is interposed through the central opening. The display mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 may be configured to be visible.

Further, for example, a transmissive liquid crystal display device may be provided in front of the movable accessory to derive a mode in which the mode of the transmissive liquid crystal display device and the mode of the movable accessory are combined, or a mode of the transmissive liquid crystal display device. And the mode of the movable accessory and the mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be derived. For example, a transmissive liquid crystal display device may be used to display the sea, the movable accessory may be in the shape of a swimmer, and the decorative pattern display device 42 may be used to display the underwater / sea bottom. For example, the movable accessory may be a dragon. The face may be expressed three-dimensionally, the hands, whiskers, and eyes of the dragon may be expressed by the transmissive liquid crystal display device (other parts are transparent), and the body of the dragon may be expressed by the decorative pattern display device 42. ..

Further, at least a part of the inside of the effect button 125 so that the built-in LED is not directly visible when the inside of the effect button 125 is viewed by the player through the operation unit (transparent pressing unit) of the effect button 125. A decorative member having translucency may be installed in the LED, or a display device may be installed in place of the LED. It should be noted that, at least when the effect button 125 is operated, the mode of the operation unit (decoration applied to the transparent pressing portion) of the effect button 125 and the mode of the decorative body built in the effect button 125 are integrated. By making the aspect visible, the design can be improved.

The right-handed winning unit 37 of the present embodiment shares the front wall portion of a plurality of winning devices provided with a receiving portion for guiding the game ball moving in the game area to the opening side provided in the game board 30. (The front wall portion of the first variable winning device 32a, the second variable winning device 32b, and the second starting winning device 33b is shared by the front plate portion 185 of the front part 184). Here, the target of the winning device to which the front wall portion is shared is not particularly limited, and for example, the front wall portions of the plurality of general winning devices 31 are shared (in one front wall portion). The front portion of the receiving portion of the plurality of general winning devices 31 may be closed). It should be noted that between the front wall portion and the game board 30 (between a plurality of winning devices connected by the front wall portion, or for connecting the winning device (receiving part) to the front surface of the game board 30 (screw hole). (Between the base portion and the front wall portion), which is attached in a state of being in contact with the front surface of the game board 30, is a game area in which the game ball can move. In addition, the front surface of the front wall portion may be a design surface (for example, a decorative sticker may be attached to the flat front surface of the front wall portion, or the front surface side of the front wall portion may have an uneven shape. , Coloring, etc.). It should be noted that not only the front wall portion of the plurality of winning devices but also the mounting plate portion to which the receiving portion is connected (with screws or the like) and which is connected to the front side of the game board 30 (with screws or the like) is also standardized. It may be configured as follows. Further, the mounting plate portion may be made of a transparent resin, the mounting plate portion may be decorated, or the mounting plate portion may be decorated (for example, a decorative sticker may be attached to the rear surface side). However, the mounting plate portion may be configured so that a portion capable of seeing through the rear remains. In addition, for example, the front wall part has a shape like a bird opening its wings, and the wings part is colored with an opaque outline etc., but the other parts are exposed with a transparent yellow resin. It may be configured so that the color (for example, gold) of the base of the winning device can be visually recognized through the transparent resin portion.

In addition, when there is a distance from another winning device, etc., the front wall portion is located on the outer side (left and right side, lower side, upper side) of the receiving portion even if it is not shared with another winning device. ) May be configured to overhang. Further, the structure may be such that the front surface of the front wall portion is a design surface (for example, the base material of the front wall portion is made transparent and a decorated seal is attached to the front thereof). Here, a transmissive portion may be provided in the portion of the front wall portion located in front of the receiving portion so that the rear can be visually recognized so that the game ball entered in the winning device can be visually recognized. , A transparent portion is provided in a portion located on the side of the receiving portion, and is located behind the portion located on the side of the receiving portion (when the front surface of the game ball or the game board 30 or the game board 30 is transparent). May be configured so that the back surface (a seal attached to the rear surface of the game board 30, a decorative accessory arranged behind the game board 30, etc.) can be visually recognized.

It should be noted that, in a plurality of winning devices having a common front wall portion, or by providing a light emitting means (LED light source or the like) adjacent to the winning device, the light emitting means corresponding to the case where the entering of the game ball is detected. May be configured to emit light. Further, a transparent or translucent material (resin or the like) may be used as a constituent material for the wall portion or the like constituting each winning device. Of course, the winning device or the like made of the transparent material is decorated with a non-transparent decoration (a part of the prize device is left transparent so that the back side can be seen from the player's side). It may be configured as.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 as the main control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 is a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. And various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, but may be integrated into a chip for each function.

The RAM 503 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I / O, etc. are stored. ) And a backup area 503a.

Further, the RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply circuit 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the data is stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

The backup area 503a is used when the power is turned off (including when a power failure occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power was turned off when the power is turned off again due to a power failure or the like. This is an area for storing the stack pointer, each register, the value of I / O, etc. (same as above). Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and conversely, restoration of each value written in the backup area 503a is the main process when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure resolution). Is executed in. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to input a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not always necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 having the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 built therein via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. The input / output port 505 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub control device 262, first and second special display devices 43a, 43b, a normal symbol display device 41, and the like, which will be described later. With this configuration, the above-mentioned special display devices 43a and 43b and the ordinary symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub control device 262.

In addition, although various relay boards and the like are not shown for convenience, the input / output port 505 has a general winning switch 221, a first variable ball entry count switch 223a, a special ball entry detection switch 226a, and a non-special ball entry detection switch 226b. , Various detection switches such as start winning switch 224a, 224b, through gate switch 225, second variable ball entry count switch 223b, information display device such as hold display device 46a, 46b, normal hold display device 44, power supply / firing. Various boards such as a control device 310, a payout control device 311 and a sub control device 262, and various electric components such as a solenoid (or a motor) for opening and closing the variable winning devices 32a and 32b and the second starting winning device 33b are connected. Has been done. That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output ports 505 are configured by these terminal portions and the like.

The sub control device 262 (sub control board) as the sub control means includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program that is stored in the ROM 552. RAM 553, input / output port 554, bus line 555, which are memories for temporarily storing various data, etc., are provided, and other various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission / reception circuits (not shown) are provided. It is equipped with. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via the bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is connected to the input / output port 554. Further, a speaker SP, an effect button 125, a cross button 126, an annular illumination unit 102, an error display lamp 104, and the like are connected to the input / output port 554.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display control. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is taught that the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b controlled by the main control device 261 have won the jackpot, and the sub control device 262 is used. In the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by the above, the decorative symbol variation display is performed as an effect display in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol in the special display devices 43a and 43b.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the CPU 511, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, and various flags and counters, similarly to the RAM 503 of the main control device 261. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply circuit 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a. Data is backed up. If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a are backed up, it is not always necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

The backup area 513a includes a stack pointer at the time of power off, each register, and the like in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and the restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. Similar to the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured so that the power failure signal SK1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

In the work area, a payout permission flag in which the payout permission of the prize ball by the payout control device 311 is set, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261 There is a command buffer that stores the commands sent from.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and is set as the initial setting. It is turned off when the process is restored or the power is restored before the power is cut off. In the present embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command instructing the payout of the prize ball, and the main control device 261 to be restored. There are three payout return commands sent in case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and like the payout permission flag, initial setting processing or power cutoff. It is turned off when the command is returned to the previous position, and is turned off when the command received by the command judgment process is judged.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control unit 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the start to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all the storage areas, the start of the storage area is used. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erasing switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a power supply / firing control device 310 (launch control circuit 312), a payout device 358, a CR unit connection board 314, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

The CR unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (rental switch 121 and return switch 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 and a CR unit (card reader unit, ball) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. The rental unit) and the payout control device 311 are electrically connected to each other. Then, information on the ball lending operation unit by the player or the ball lending operation to the CR unit is input to the CR unit, and the balance of the game value is stored in the card which is the recording medium inserted in the CR unit. If so, the balance of the card is subtracted, and the payout request signal of the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction is output to the payout control device 311. The recording medium of the CR unit is not limited to the card type, and may be a coin type or a stick type.

Further, the payout control device 311 periodically sends a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply / launch control device 310. It is configured to output (for example, every 2 msec).

The launch control circuit 312 of the power supply / launch control device 310 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60. A handle 18, a payout control device 311 and a main control device 261 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 312. Further, in the launch control circuit 312, the dial position signal from the variable resistor indicating the rotation operation amount (rotation angle) of the handle 18 (rotation operation body 18a) and the player touch the handle 18 from the handle 18. It is configured to be able to input a touch signal from the touch sensor indicating that the player is present and a firing switch signal indicating that the player is not operating the stop lever 18b. Further, the launch control circuit 312 is configured to be able to input a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected from the payout control device 311.

Then, the launch control circuit 312 outputs a launch state signal to the main control device 261 on condition that a touch signal, a launch switch signal, and a CR unit connection signal are input, and the main control device 261 launches. On condition that the status signal is input, the launch permission signal and the ball feed signal are output to the launch control circuit 312. The main control device 261 is configured to output a firing permission signal at intervals of 0.6 seconds while the firing status signal is being input.

Further, the launch control circuit 312 is configured to drive the ball feed device 63 and send the game ball to the launch position when the ball feed signal is input. In the state where the preparatory ball detection sensor provided in the ball feeding device 63 and capable of detecting whether or not the game ball exists at the launching position detects that the game ball already exists at the launching position, the ball feeding device 63 Is not driven (even if the ball feed signal is received, the game ball is not sent to the launch position).

Further, the launch control circuit 312 drives the launch device 60 (launch solenoid) on condition that a touch signal, a launch switch signal, a CR unit connection signal, (dial position signal), and a launch permission signal are input. It is configured to let you. As a result, the game ball set at the launch position is launched by the launch device 60 with a strength based on the dial position signal.

Further, the power supply circuit 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And have.

The power supply unit 541 supplies the operation power required for each of the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24-volt power supply supplied from the outside and generates a + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a + 5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. It should be noted that operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, and the like via the control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure time processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the DC stable 24 volt voltage becomes less than 22 volt, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volt, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the power failure processing. It is configured to maintain a value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (including turning on the power due to the elimination of a power failure), the data of the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. To.

The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with the instruction from the sub control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and a bus line 530, 531. And have. The input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531 and a decorative symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Generation of internal command for VDP526) is carried out. As a result, the display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 521. Is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) incorporated in the decorative pattern display device 42. Since the VDP526 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the decorative symbol display device 42.

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 44, in the present embodiment, a decorative panel 401 as a decorative means is provided in front of the right-handed winning unit 37. As shown in FIG. 47, the decorative panel 401 is made of a transparent resin (in this example, it is made of an acrylic resin, but polycarbonate and other transparent or translucent materials such as polypropylene may be used. A substantially plate-shaped base portion 402 (arranged in parallel with the front plate portion 185 of the front part 184 of the right-handed winning unit 37) and a first configuration attached to the front side of the base portion 402. It includes a front side sheet 403 as a portion and a rear surface side sheet 404 as a second component attached to the rear surface side of the base portion 402. The decorative panel 401 (base portion 402, front side seat 403, and rear side seat 404) has a shape that conforms to the outer shape when the right-handed winning unit 37 is viewed from the front, and is formed with the front surface of the game board 30. It is configured so as not to protrude outward from the outer edge portion of the right-handed winning unit 37 in the parallel direction. In addition, the thickness of the base portion 402 of this embodiment is about 2 mm. Further, the thickness direction of the decorative panel 401 is configured to coincide with the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 (the front surface of the decorative panel 401 faces the front of the pachinko machine 10).

The shape (outer shape, thickness, etc.) of the decorative panel 401 is not particularly limited, but the game area is moved in consideration of the movement of the game area and the influence on the damage of the decorative panel 401. It is desirable that the shape and arrangement are such that they do not come into contact with the game ball as much as possible. Further, the shapes of the base portion 402, the front side sheet 403, and the rear surface side sheet 404 do not have to match, and further, the front side sheet 403 and the rear surface side sheet 404 are each composed of a plurality of sheets. May be. In addition, in this embodiment, the base portion 402 constitutes a spacer. In addition, the variable winning devices 32a and 32b of the right-handed winning unit 37 whose front is covered by the decorative panel 401 and the second starting winning device 33b correspond to the ball winning means.

As shown in FIG. 45, the front side sheet 403 includes a first decorative portion 405 to which the first decoration is applied, and a first transparent portion 406 that makes the other side visible via the front side sheet 403. I have. More specifically, the front side sheet 403 is formed by attaching a seal partially printed as a first decoration to the rear side of the transparent (flexible) sheet. The portion to which the seal is attached is referred to as the first decorative portion 405, and the portion to which the seal is not attached is referred to as the first transmission portion 406. The front side sheet 403 may be configured by directly printing on the transparent sheet, or may be configured such that a sticker is attached to the front side of the transparent sheet. The front side sheet 403 is configured to have a sticker attached to the rear side of the transparent sheet (decorative processing is performed), so that when another member comes into contact with the front side of the decorative panel 401, the front side sheet 403 It is possible to suppress situations such as scraping of decorations.

As shown in FIG. 46, the rear surface side sheet 404 includes a second decorative portion 407 to which the second decoration is applied, and a second transmission portion 408 that makes the other side visible via the rear surface side sheet 404. I have. More specifically, the rear surface side sheet 404 is formed by attaching a seal partially printed as a second decoration to the rear surface side of the transparent (flexible) sheet. The portion to which the seal is attached is referred to as the second decorative portion 407, and the portion to which the seal is not attached is referred to as the second transmission portion 408. The rear surface side sheet 404 may be configured by directly printing on the transparent sheet, or may be configured such that a sticker is attached to the front surface side of the transparent sheet. The rear side sheet 404 is configured to have a sticker attached to the front side of the transparent sheet (decorative processing is performed), so that when another member comes into contact with the rear side of the decorative panel 401, the rear side sheet 404 It is possible to suppress situations such as scraping of decorations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45, in the front side sheet 403, the first decorative portions 405 extending in the vertical direction are arranged at equal intervals in the left-right direction. As a result, the first decorative portion 405 extending in the vertical direction and the first transmitting portion 406 extending in the vertical direction are arranged alternately in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 46, in the rear surface side sheet 404, the second decorative portions 407 extending in the vertical direction are arranged at equal intervals in the horizontal direction. As a result, the second decorative portion 407 extending in the vertical direction and the second transmitting portion 408 extending in the vertical direction are arranged alternately in the left-right direction.

Further, the width of each first decorative portion 405 and each second decorative portion 407 is about 2 mm. In addition, in the present embodiment, the width of each first transmission portion 406 and each second transmission portion 408 (distance between the first decoration portions 405 and spacing between the second decoration portions 407) is also about 2 mm. It has become. The diameter of the game ball is about 11 mm.

In addition, the plurality of first decorative portions 405 and the plurality of second decorative portions 407 are not provided with the same pattern, and originally, one pattern is placed on the left and right in a vertical direction. By alternately distributing the pieces of the pattern divided into a plurality of pieces in the direction into the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407, the pattern of the front side sheet 403 and the pattern of the rear side sheet 404 are configured. ing. In other words, the design of the front side sheet 403 is a design in which the design of the rear side sheet 404 is missing from one design.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first transmission portion 406 is arranged at a position facing the second decorative portion 407 in the thickness direction of the decorative panel 401. Then, when the player brings his / her face closer to the front side of the decorative panel 401 (such as by looking into the decorative panel 401 so that the face faces the decorative panel 401) and visually recognizes the decorative panel 401, FIG. 44 is shown. As described above, the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 visually recognized via the first transmission portion 406 are (almost) adjacent to each other, and the aspect (picture) of the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 (In this example, a picture with a sea motif such as a whale and a school of fish; hereinafter referred to as a "specific mode") can be visually recognized. In the present embodiment, when the player's face is located in front of the decorative panel 401, the player's viewpoint corresponds to the first position.

On the other hand, when the player playing the pachinko machine 10 visually recognizes the decorative panel 401 without changing the position of the face (only the line of sight is transferred to the decorative panel 401), the first decorative portion 405 and the second decoration It is designed to be separated from the portion 407. That is, since the decorative panel 401 is provided at a position shifted laterally from the central portion in the width direction of the pachinko machine 10 (provided in front of the right-handed winning unit 37), the player can decorate the pachinko machine 10. The panel 401 will be visually recognized at an angle. Further, since the front side sheet 403 including the first decorative portion 405 and the rear surface side sheet 404 including the second decorative portion 407 are separated from each other by about 2 mm in the front-rear direction, the second decorative portion 407 is for the player. A part or almost all of the first decorative part 405 is hidden behind the first decorative part 405, and a part or almost all of the first transparent part 406 and the second transparent part 408 are located on the player's line of sight. It has become. In the present embodiment, the player looks at the decorative panel 401 with his face turned sideways from a state in which the player's face faces the central portion of the pachinko machine 10 (game area) and the game is normally progressing. The viewpoint of is corresponding to the second position.

Therefore, when the player sees the decorative panel 401 by moving only the line of sight (from the second position) while playing a normal game, the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are separated from each other. In the gap viewing range visually recognized between them, the configuration on the back surface side of the decorative panel 401, that is, the right-handed winning unit 37 can be visually recognized via the first transmission portion 406 and the second transmission portion 408. Furthermore, since the front parts 184 and the like of the right-handed winning unit 37 are also transparent, a game ball that moves the right-handed winning unit 37 and a second variable winning device 32b (special winning ball) provided in the right-handed winning unit 37. The section 145, the non-special winning section 146), the second starting winning device 33b, and the first variable winning device 32a can be visually recognized. In the present embodiment, the right-handed winning unit 37, particularly the game ball that moves the right-handed winning unit 37, the second variable winning device 32b (second variable shutter 142), the special winning unit 145 (sorting device 147), and the first 2 The starting winning device 33b (second starting shutter 172) and the first variable winning device 32a (first variable shutter 162) correspond to the information means and the state changing means. Further, the game ball that moves the right-handed winning unit 37, the second variable shutter 142, the distribution device 147, and the first variable shutter 162 also correspond to displacement means.

Further, the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are not transparent (the object located behind cannot be visually recognized / discriminated), but have some translucency. Therefore, when the surface-emitting illumination 188 arranged behind the right-handed winning unit 37 emits light, the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 look bright. In addition, the light emitting mode (first light emitting mode) when the LED provided corresponding to each winning device of the right-handed winning unit 37 emits light is also visible when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the first position. You can check with. The LED makes it possible for the player to recognize the light emission mode even from the first position, at least when the corresponding winning device is opened or when the game ball is entered (when light is emitted in this example). It suffices if it is configured, and in the present embodiment, the corresponding winning device is in the closed state, and in the state of being turned off (second light emitting mode), the LED is invisible or difficult to see (the second light emitting mode). For example, the LED body is arranged behind the second decorative portion 407). The LED main body may be visible from the first position, but by making the LED body invisible, the design of a specific aspect can be improved when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the first position.

In the present embodiment, the width of the first transmission portion 406 and the second transmission portion 408 is shorter than the diameter of the game ball, but is the same as the diameter of the game ball (about 11 mm), or It may be configured to be longer than the diameter of the gaming ball so that the entire image of the gaming ball can be visually recognized via the decorative panel 401. Further, the game ball passage (first guide passage 112, second guide passage 113, third guide passage 114, fourth guide passage 115, and second variable identification) of the right-handed winning unit 37 whose front is covered with the decorative panel 401. The first transmission portion 406 and the second transmission portion 408 (transparent portion) may be extended from the entrance of the region 141 along the special entry portion 145). Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the width of the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 is 2 mm, and the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are provided at a pitch of 2 mm via the first transmission portion 406 and the second transmission portion 408, respectively. Therefore, regardless of which of the rear areas of the decorative panel 401 (right-handed winning unit 37) the game ball has passed through, the game ball can be visually recognized by visually recognizing the decorative panel 401 from the second position. It is configured to be possible.

Further, by visually recognizing the decorative panel 401 from the second position, the second variable winning device 32b (second variable shutter 142) and the special winning portion 145 provided in the right-handed winning unit 37 located behind the decorative panel 401. (Distribution device 147), non-special ball entry unit 146, second start winning device 33b, and first variable winning device 32a (first variable shutter 162) are all configured to be visible or easy to see. .. Further, when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the second position, the first decorative portion 405 and the first transmission are between the first variable winning device 32a and the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b. Part 406 is interposed. In addition, "a configuration in which the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are adjacent to each other when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the first position" means the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407. Some gap is formed between the first decorative part 405 and the second decorative part 407 even if any part of the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from a predetermined first position in the configuration. It is difficult to prevent the gap from being visually recognized).

In the present embodiment, the decorative panel 401 is attached to the front side of the right-handed winning unit 37. That is, although not shown, the rear surface side of the base portion 402 of the decorative panel 401 is provided with a screw hole that opens rearward, and the rear surface side sheet 404 is cut to expose the screw hole rearward. A notch is provided. Further, the front part 184 (front plate portion 185) as the mounted portion of the right-handed winning unit 37 is provided with a fixing hole penetrating the front and rear. Then, the front side of the front part 184 and the rear side (rear side sheet 404) of the decorative panel 401 are brought into contact with each other, and the screw holes of the decorative panel 401 and the fixing holes of the front part 184 are aligned with each other to align the front side. By fixing the parts 184 from the rear surface side with screws, the decorative panel 401 and the front parts 184 are connected to each other. After that, the front part 184 and the rear part 181 are connected to form the right-handed winning unit 37, and the right-handed winning unit 37 is attached to the game board 30, so that the decorative panel 401 can be attached to the game board 30. Become.

For example, a screw hole that penetrates the base portion 402 in the front-rear direction is provided, a fixing hole that opens forward in the right-handed winning unit 37 is provided, and the front part 184 and the rear part 181 are connected to the right. Align the fixing hole of the winning unit 37 with the screw hole of the base portion 402 to which the rear side sheet 404 is attached, fix it with a screw from the front side of the base portion 402, and then attach the front side sheet 403. A configuration may be adopted in which the right-handed winning unit 37 is attached to the game board 30 while being worn.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47, on the front side of the game board 30, a portion where the right-handed winning unit 37 is attached (a peripheral portion of an opening provided for installing the right-handed winning unit 37) is provided. The installation recess 409 is provided so as to be displaced rearward by the thickness of the rear plate portion 182 of the rear part 181 of the right-handed winning unit 37 as compared with the general portion of the above. As a result, the front surface of the rear plate portion 182 is substantially flush with the front surface of the game board 30. Further, in the present embodiment, the thickness of the rear plate portion 182 and the thickness of the decorative panel 401 are substantially the same (the decorative panel 401 is slightly thicker).

The distance between the decorative panel 401 and the glass unit 137 (transparent panel on the rear side) is set to be equal to or less than the radius of the game ball. Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative panel 401 attached to the front side of the right-handed winning unit 37 does not protrude outward from the outer edge of the front plate portion 185 of the right-handed winning unit 37. Therefore, the game ball moving in the game area (right-handed winning unit 37) is configured so as not to come into contact with the front surface or the rear surface (front side sheet 403 and rear surface side sheet 404) of the decorative panel 401. There is. In the present embodiment, the front plate portion 185 of the right-handed winning unit 37 and the glass unit 137 (transparent panel on the rear side), which are configured to prevent the game ball from touching the rear side sheet 404 and the front side sheet 403. However, it corresponds to a protective measure. The depth of the installation recess 409 is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set, and the installation recess 409 can be omitted.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means draws lots using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, the hit / miss random number counter C1 as the hit / miss random number generation means used for the hit / miss lottery for whether or not to generate the jackpot state, and the type used for determining the jackpot type (type lottery). The determination counter C2, the variable selection counter C3 used to determine whether to generate the reach state in the decorative symbol display device 42, the initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit / fail random number counter C1, and the first. The first variation type counter CS1, the second variation type counter CS2, and the second start winning device 33b used for determining the variation display time of the second special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) are open. It is decided to use the normal symbol random number counter C4 used for the ball entry support lottery. The variation selection counter C3 is also used for drawing a reach pattern when the decorative symbol display device 42 is displaced and varied. Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for the variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42.

The counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counter returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (excluding the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 has a special variable hold area as a hold storage means for storing the values of the hit / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the change selection counter C3, and a normal symbol random number counter C4 for storing the values. There is a variable hold area. The normal variable hold area includes four hold areas (hold first to hold fourth areas) and one execution area. In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series according to the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 up to four times.

Further, the special variable holding area includes a first special variable holding area having four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas), a second special changing holding area, and one execution area. There is. In each holding area of the first special fluctuation holding area, each value of the winning / failing random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the first starting winning device 33a. Stored serially. In each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area, each value of the winning / failing random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the second starting winning device 33b. Stored serially. By adopting this configuration, the fluctuation display (first fluctuation display and second fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43a and 43b can be held up to four times, respectively.

Explaining each counter in detail, for example, the winning / failing random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 631, reaches the upper limit value as the closing price (that is, 631), and then 0, which is the lower limit value as the opening price. It is configured to return to. Normally, when the hit / miss random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the hit / miss random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the pass / fail random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 631), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the hit / miss random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is stored in the hit / miss random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 stored in the hit / miss random number counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of values of the hit / miss random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is two, and the value is "7,307", which is a high probability. The number of values of the hit / miss random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the state (probability variation mode) is 10, and the values are "7 to 10, 307 to 310". In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two winning / failing determination tables as winning value storage means referred to when determining whether or not the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot. There is a first hit / fail determination table in which "7,307" is stored as a jackpot value, and a second hit / fail determination table in which "8-10, 308 to 310" is stored as a jackpot value.

The type determination counter C2 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, reach the upper limit value (that is, 19), and then return to the lower limit value of 0. Further, the ROM 502 is provided with a type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to (in this example, the first start winning device 33a and the first start winning device 33a). There is only one type determination table because the distribution of the jackpot types is the same regardless of which jackpot corresponds to the entry into either of the second start winning devices 33b). Then, when a big hit is won in the winning / losing lottery, the type of the big hit state to be given is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 (the type lottery is performed), and the big hit state of the decided type is given. The Rukoto.

The type determination counter C2 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. ..

The variation selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, reach the upper limit value (that is, 238), and then return to the lower limit value of 0. In the present embodiment, the variable selection counter C3 causes a reach state for the decorative symbol, and then the final stop symbol shifts by one to the front and back of the reach symbol to stop, and the same reach state occurs. The lottery is to draw "reach other than front and back" where the final stop symbol stops at a position other than before and after the reach symbol, and "completely off" where the reach state does not occur. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 has one reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 and the reach pattern. For example, the game ball to the first start winning device 33a The first reach determination table referred to when determining the reach pattern (when there is no big hit) based on the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 acquired with the ball entering, and the game ball to the second starting winning device 33b. It is also possible to provide a second reach determination table that is referred to when determining a reach pattern (when there is no big hit) based on the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 acquired with the entry of the ball.

The variation selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503. ..

Further, of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is added one by one in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 255, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 255), and then becomes the lower limit value. The other variable type counter CS2 is configured to return to 0, for example, the variable type counter CS2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 31, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 31), and then returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. It has become. In addition, the variation time of the variation display on the special display devices 43a and 43b is associated with the rough variation pattern (reach pattern of normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc.) of the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42. If the fluctuation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is determined, the fluctuation pattern of the decorative symbol display device 42 is also determined (the fluctuation pattern in the decorative symbol display device 42 that exactly fits in the fluctuation time of the variation display in the special display devices 43a and 43b). Is to be selected). For example, the fluctuation time is determined based on the variation type counter CS1, and the stop display mode in the special display devices 43a and 43b is determined by the variation type counter CS2 (for example, in the case of corresponding to a jackpot of 10RS, 10RS is determined. It may be configured to determine one of the stop display modes corresponding to the jackpot).

The counter or the like used to determine the fluctuation time or fluctuation pattern is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately changed for each model. For example, it is possible to determine the reach pattern of the decorative symbol only by the first variable type counter CS1 or to determine the reach pattern of the decorative symbol by combining the first variable type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal processing. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42.

The size and range of each counter are only examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the hit / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the fluctuation selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and are not synchronized in any case.

Further, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 232, the upper limit value (that is, 232) is reached, and then the value returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. The normal symbol random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. The number of winning random numbers in the low ball entry state is 31, and the range is "1 to 31". On the other hand, the number of winning random numbers in the high ball entry state is 232, and the range is "1 to 232". That is, in the present embodiment, for the ROM 502, the low entry support determination table referred to in the entry support lottery in the low entry state and the high entry reference in the entry support lottery in the high entry state. A ball support judgment table is prepared. Then, when the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired, the normal symbol display device 41 performs variable display for a predetermined time, and then (the normal symbol lamps constituting the normal symbol display device 41 blink alternately). After that), the stop display is displayed in the mode (lighting pattern) corresponding to the winning, and the second start winning device 33b is released in a pattern corresponding to the game mode at that time.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of, and for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process, and this process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec. First, in step S301, a process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches (excluding the RAM erasing switch 323) connected to the main control device 261 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process as it is.

If there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is added. Further, in the external output processing of the normal processing described later, the prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and the prize ball is given based on the prize ball command (the game ball is paid out). Ru). Further, when the prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, the random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

Further, in step S303, a random number update process is executed. Specifically, the hit / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

After that, in step S304, the start winning process associated with winning the first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b is executed, and in step S305, the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. To execute. In the following step S306, a firing permission command setting process for performing processing such as transmitting a firing permission signal to the firing control circuit 312 of the power supply / firing control device 310 is performed. After that, in step S307, the remaining ball monitoring process for monitoring the game ball in the second variable winning device 32b is performed, and then the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The RAM 503 has a first hold counter Na that counts the number of holds for the first variable display triggered by a prize in the first start winning device 33a, and a second hold counter Na triggered by a prize in the second start winning device 33b. A second hold counter Nb for counting the number of hold of the variable display is provided. A total number of pending counters may be provided to count the total number of pending variable displays (the total number of pending first variable displays and the number of pending second variable displays).

Further, in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area, a winning / failing random number storage area for storing the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1, a winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, and a variation selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided.

Further, in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area, is it the first variation display based on the entry into the first start winning device 33a, or the second variation display based on the entry into the second start winning device 33b? A variable storage area is provided in which information indicating the above is stored. Hereinafter, "information indicating that the first variable display is stored in the variable storage area" is also referred to as "the first variable flag is set to ON", and "the second variable display is stored in the variable storage area". "The information indicating that the information is stored" is also referred to as "the second fluctuation flag is set on".

First, in step S501, whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning device 33b is determined by the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, the process proceeds to step S511. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the second hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the following step S504, the addition display processing of the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the second variable display by one is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right second hold lamps are both off, the left second hold lamp is turned on, the left second hold lamp is on, and the right second hold lamp is off. If this is the case, both the left and right second hold lamps are turned on, and if both the left and right second hold lamps are in the lit state, the second hold lamp on the right side remains on and the second hold lamp on the left side is turned on. Is blinked, and when the second hold lamp on the left side is in the blinking state and the second hold lamp on the right side is in the lit state, a process for blinking both the left and right second hold lamps is performed.

After step S504, in step S505, each value of the hit / miss random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated in the random number update process of step S303 (hit / miss random number counter buffer, type determination counter buffer, and Each value stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer) is stored in the first area (win / fail random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area) among the vacant hold areas of the second special fluctuation hold area. do. After step S505, the process proceeds to step S506.

In step S506, a hit / fail determination process for determining whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot is performed. The details of the pass / fail determination process will be described later.

In the following step S507, when it is determined in step S506 that the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. Performs type determination processing to determine the type of. The details of the type determination process will be described later.

In the following step S508, when it is determined in step S506 that the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the jackpot, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is used as a deviation. Performs reach determination processing to determine the type of reach at the time of fluctuation. The details of the reach determination process will be described later.

Here, the details of the pass / fail determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5101, whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches with either "7" or "307", which is the value stored in the first hit / miss determination table. To determine. By the way, "7" and "307" are values that are big hits in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

In FIG. 14, for convenience, the process of step S5101 is described in a simplified manner, but in reality, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is "7", and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is "307", and if a positive determination is made by either of these determinations, an affirmative determination is made in the step S5101, and which determination is made. If a negative determination is made even in the above step S5101, a negative determination is made.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the first pass / fail flag is turned on in step S5102, and then this process ends. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5101, in step S5103, the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is the value stored in the second hit / miss determination table "8 to 10". , 308 to 310 ”. By the way, "8-10, 308-310" is a value that becomes a big hit only in the high probability state (probability variation mode). Even in the determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 and each value corresponding to the jackpot match, as described above.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the second pass / fail flag is turned on in step S5104, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the result is "off" even in a high probability state, the present process is terminated as it is.

If the big hit state is not won in the winning / losing lottery, a lottery (small hit lottery) may be performed to determine whether or not the small hit state is won. The small hit state is a state in which the target variable winning device (for example, the first variable winning device 32a) is opened, but the period in which the target variable winning device is opened is shorter than that in the big hit state. (In the small hit state, the round period is short and small, and if there are multiple rounds, the interval period may be shortened, and the opening period and ending period such as the big hit state are shortened. Alternatively, it may be omitted), and the game mode does not change before and after the small hit state.

Here, when the small hit state is provided, for example, in the hit / fail determination process based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, the target holding area is small. The winning flag is set on (of course, it is possible to lower the winning probability of the small hit, and it is also possible to perform the small hit lottery using a random number counter different from the winning / failing random number counter C1). When the small hit flag is set, the fluctuation pattern for teaching the small hit is set in the variation display setting process (FIG. 20) described later, and the small hit state is set in the discrimination information setting process (FIG. 21) described later. Set (for example, if a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag in the execution area is set to ON, and if a positive determination is made, the small hit medium flag is set to ON. , Store "2" in the hit status storage area, set "2" in the round number counter, set a value equivalent to 1.8 seconds for the special variable timer, and set "8" in the winning counter. And end the discrimination information setting process). Further, in the variable winning device control process described later, after step S1215, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag of the execution area is set to ON, and if it is a negative determination, the process proceeds to step S1216, and if it is an affirmative determination. "1" is stored in the hit status storage area, "25" is set in the special variable timer, and then the process proceeds to step S1218. In addition, when a positive judgment is made in step S1213, the small hit flag is set to ON. If it is determined that this is done, the process proceeds to step S1226. In addition, in the end setting process (FIG. 23) described later, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag of the execution area is set on before step S1401, and if affirmative determination is made, the end setting process is performed as it is. Will be terminated.

In addition, only in the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning device 33a (the first winning / failing lottery), the small hit state is won with a probability of 1/632, and in the small hit state, the special winning portion 145. The second variable winning device 32b including the It may be configured so that there are cases where the ball is balled and cases where the ball is not entered. In addition, a small hit lottery is held in both the hit / fail determination process based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a and the hit / fail determination process based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b. You may do it.

Further, for example, in a high probability state, a mode (so-called small hit rush) in which a game ball is inserted into the first variable winning device 32a that is opened by a small hit and the number of balls can be expected to increase, and a small hit and open. The first variable winning device 32a may be configured to be provided with a mode in which the game ball hardly enters the ball and the player's ball is substantially maintained. That is, for example, in the right-handed winning unit 37 in which the game balls move in one row, an opening / closing type first starting winning device is additionally provided in place of the opening / closing type second starting winning device 33b (first starting winning device 33a). Is allowed to exist as it is), and on the upstream side of the right-handed winning unit 37 in the right-hand area, a right-handed game ball enters moderately (about 1 ball is entered every time 3 to 7 balls are hit to the right). ), A non-opening and closing type second variable winning device is provided. In the low ball entry state, the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery is about 9/100, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 41 is 20 seconds, and the opening period of the opening / closing type 1st start winning device is 0.4 seconds. In the high ball entry state, the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery is about 90/100, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 41 is 0.1 seconds, and the opening period of the openable first start winning device is 3. It is assumed that the opening of the second is repeated three times. Further, in the high probability state, the second fluctuation display is about 2 to 10 seconds, the first fluctuation display is about 10 minutes, and in the low probability state, the second fluctuation display is about 10 minutes and the first fluctuation display is about 2. It is set to 2 to 10 seconds. Here, since the open / close type first start winning device is arranged on the upstream side of the first variable winning device 32a, for example, in the high ball-entry state, that is, in the probability variation mode or the time saving mode, the open / close type first start winning device Even if the game ball enters the open / close type first start winning device due to the frequent opening of 33a and the first variable winning device 32a is opened, the first variable winning device 32a is almost in the open state. The game ball does not enter.

Then, in such a configuration, by setting the latent probability mode of the high probability state and the low ball entry state, the game ball can be entered into the non-opening / closing type second start winning device by hitting right. If you win a small hit instead of a big hit in the winning / failing lottery based on entering the second starting winning device, you will pass through the opening and closing type first starting winning device, which is relatively difficult to open, and you will get a small hit. It is possible to put a game ball into the first variable winning device 32a, which is opened in the above state, to generate a state in which an increase in the number of balls held can be expected in a state other than the jackpot state. In the normal mode, even if you hit right, the second fluctuation display is 10 minutes, and it is difficult to enter the ball into the openable first start winning device, so left hit advances the game smoothly. Can be made to.

Next, the second type determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (b). First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first or second hit / fail flag is set to ON in the hit / fail determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5301 (there is no possibility that a jackpot state will occur), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5301 (a big hit state may occur), the type determination counter newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration in the second type determination table in step S5302. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value "0 to 10" corresponding to "10RS". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5302, the 10RS flag is turned on in step S5303, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5302, the 4RS flag is turned on in step S5304, and then this process ends.

Next, the reach determination process in step S508 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first pass / fail flag is set in the hit / fail determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5401, that is, if a big hit occurs in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (a big hit state always occurs), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5401, that is, when a jackpot state does not occur (may be out of order) at least in a low probability state, the reach determination table is newly taken into consideration in step S5402. It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches any of the values "0, 1" corresponding to the "front-back deviation reach". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5402, in step S5403, the front-back flag indicating the occurrence of the front-back off reach is turned on, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5402, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area corresponds to "reach other than front / rear deviation" by referring to the reach determination table in step S5404. It is determined whether or not the value matches any of the values "2 to 21". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5404, this process ends after turning on the flags other than before and after in step S5405.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S5404, that is, if the variation display ends without going through the reach state, the process is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S509 following step S508, a fluctuation time determination process for determining the second variation time of the second variation display is performed. That is, the fluctuation time is grasped based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 with reference to the fluctuation time determination table corresponding to the game mode (here, there is a high possibility of the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode). Further, the grasped fluctuation time is stored in the corresponding holding area in the second special fluctuation holding area (the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 in the holding area is not erased).

In step S510 following step S509, the starting command is set. The starting command includes variation information (information used to determine the content of the variation display) indicating the results of the hit / fail determination process, the type determination process, the reach determination process, and the variation time determination process, and the first command. Information indicating whether the variable information is triggered by entering the starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b is included, and the sub control device is used in the next external output process (see step S201). It is output to 262.

After the process of step S510, or if a negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S511, whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning device 33 is determined by the first start winning switch. It is determined by the detection information of 224a. If a negative determination is made in step S511, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made, in step S512, the value of the first hold counter Na that counts the number of hold of the variable display triggered by winning the first start winning device 33a is the upper limit value (in the present embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is less than "4"). If a negative determination is made in step S512, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S512, the process proceeds to step S513, and the first hold counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step S514, the addition display process of the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the first variable display by one is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right first hold lamps are both off, the left first hold lamp is turned on, the left first hold lamp is on, and the right first hold lamp is off. If this is the case, both the left and right first hold lamps are lit, and if both the left and right first hold lamps are lit, the right first hold lamp remains lit and the left first hold lamp is lit. Is blinked, and when the first hold lamp on the left side is in the blinking state and the first hold lamp on the right side is in the lit state, a process for blinking both the left and right first hold lamps is performed.

After step S514, in step S515, the values of the winning / failing random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are stored in an empty holding area (winning / failing random number storage area, winning type random number storage) in the first special fluctuation holding area. Area, reach random number storage area). After step S515, the process proceeds to step S516.

In step S516, a hit / fail determination process for determining whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot is performed. The details of the pass / fail determination process have already been described above.

In the following step S517, when it is determined in step S514 that the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. The first type determination process for determining the type is performed.

Here, the first type determination process in step S517 will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (a). First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second hit / fail flag is set to ON in the hit / fail determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility that a jackpot state will occur), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (a big hit state may occur), the type determination counter newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration in the first type determination table in step S5202. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value "0 to 9" corresponding to "4RS". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the 4RS flag is turned on in step S5203, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5202, the 10RN flag is turned on in step S5204, and then this process ends. In the present embodiment, the probability change mode is given (right can be obtained) based on the game ball being inserted into the special entry portion 145 of the second variable winning device 32b. Here, when the jackpot state is won with the ball entering the first start winning device 33a, the jackpot state (4RS) in which the ball can be expected to enter the special winning section 145 of the second variable winning device 32b is given. The percentage of the ball is 50%, but if the player wins the jackpot with the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b, the ball enters the special winning section 145 of the second variable winning device 32b. The desired jackpot state (10RS or 4RS) is given at 100%.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S518 following step S517, when it is determined in step S516 that the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, the fluctuation newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area Based on the value of the selection counter C3, the reach determination process for determining the reach type is performed. The details of the reach determination process (see FIG. 16) have already been described above.

In step S519 following step S518, a fluctuation time determination process for determining the first fluctuation time of the first variation display is performed. That is, the first fluctuation time is grasped based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 with reference to the fluctuation time determination table corresponding to the game mode (here, there is a high possibility that the mode is the normal mode). Further, the grasped fluctuation time is stored in the corresponding holding area in the first special fluctuation holding area (the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 in the holding area is not erased).

After step S519, in step S520, the starting command setting process is performed, and this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 or the like is directly stored in the special fluctuation holding area, and then the hit / fail determination process is performed. , The type determination process, and the reach determination process are executed, but the configuration is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, a temporary storage area for temporarily storing the values of the hit / miss random number counter C1 or the like is provided, and the information stored in the temporary storage area is subjected to the hit / fail determination process, the type determination process, and the temporary storage area. After executing the reach determination process, a configuration may be adopted in which the data is stored in the hold area of the corresponding special change hold area.

The process of extracting the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S515 constitutes the discriminant value extraction process, and the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 extracted in steps S505 and S515 is also stored in the special fluctuation holding area. The process constitutes the discriminant value storage process. Further, a function of extracting and storing the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 constitutes an information acquisition means. Further, the process of determining whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 in steps S506 and S516 (step S5101, step S5103) is a value corresponding to winning constitutes the first hit / miss determination process, and the determination result is obtained. The processing of step S5102 and step S5104 to store (set the corresponding flag) constitutes the result storage processing.

Next, the through-gate passage process (step S305) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined by the detection information of the through gate switch 225. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of pending fluctuation displays performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, on the condition that the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step S603 and the normal hold counter is reached. Nc is incremented by 1.

Further, in the following step S604, addition display processing of the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 by one is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right normal hold lamps are both off, the left normal hold lamp is turned on, the left normal hold lamp is on, and the right normal hold lamp is off. If both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left normal hold lamp blinks while the right normal hold lamp is lit, and the left normal hold lamp is lit. If the lamp is blinking and the normal hold lamp on the right side is lit, the process for blinking both the left and right normal hold lamps is performed.

After step S604, in step S605, a random number related to success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in the first free storage area of the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. After that, the through gate passage process is terminated.

Next, the remaining ball monitoring process (step S307) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11) will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball monitoring flag indicating that the game ball is being monitored in the second variable specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S1301, the present process is terminated as it is. In this embodiment, the remaining ball monitoring flag is set to ON when the second variable winning device 32b is opened.

On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the game ball enters the second variable specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b based on the detection information of the second variable entry count switch 223b in step S1302. Determine if the ball has hit. If affirmative determination is made in step S1302, in step S1303, the value of the ball entry counter that counts the number of game balls existing in the second variable specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b is added by 1.

After step S1303 or when a negative determination is made in step S1302, whether or not the game ball has entered the special entry unit 145 based on the detection information of the special entry detection switch 226a in step S1304. To determine. If the affirmative determination is made in step S1304, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not the special entry flag indicating that the game ball has entered the special entry section 145 is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S1305, the special entry flag is set to ON in step S1306. Further, in step S1307, a special ball entry command for transmitting the ball entry to the special ball entry unit 145 to the sub control device 262 is set.

After step S1307 or when affirmative determination is made in step S1305, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1308.

Further, after step S1308 or when a negative determination is made in step S1304, the game ball enters the non-special entry portion 146 based on the detection information of the non-special entry detection switch 226b in step S1309. Determine if it has been done. If affirmative determination is made in step S1309, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1310.

After step S1310 or when a negative determination is made in step S1309, in step S1311, it is determined whether or not the value of the monitoring timer is "0". In the monitoring timer, when the jackpot round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened is started, the ball enters the second variable winning device 32b in the jackpot round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened. A value corresponding to a predetermined time is set with a margin for the time required for the game ball to be ejected from the second variable winning device 32b. If a negative determination is made in step S1311, the value of the monitoring timer is decremented by 1 in step S1312, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1311, it is determined in step S1313 whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1313, the remaining ball monitoring flag is turned off in step S1314, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1313, error processing is performed in step S1315, and then this processing is terminated. The error handling is appropriately set for each model. For example, a signal for notifying the ball jam of the second variable winning device 32b may be externally output via the external terminal board 240, or at the end of the jackpot, In order to prevent the normal game state from starting, an error occurrence state for notifying the occurrence of an error may be set. It should be noted that the ball entry counter may also be configured to acquire a negative value so that error processing corresponding to fraudulent activity is performed when the value is negative.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main control device 261 when the power is turned off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, and in step S401, the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power supply cutoff occurrence information, and the NMI interrupt processing is performed. finish.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 311, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the control device on the sub side (sub control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to be in an operable state. Wait processing is executed for about a second. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, the data backup process is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply circuit 313 of the power supply / emission control device 310 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the backup data is cleared (erased). Therefore, the process proceeds to step S112. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, in the subsequent step S104, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so that the process proceeds to step S112 in this case as well. If the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM judgment value is calculated in step S105, and in the following step S106, whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power cutoff. That is, determine the effectiveness of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process proceeds to step S112 in this case as well.

In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like. After that, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113 and the like). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113 or the like). Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like) in the same manner. That is, in step S113, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the following step S114, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), it is a condition that the power cutoff occurrence information is set and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. In addition, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of power failure restoration) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power off is restored, and in step S108, the power off occurrence information is cleared.

In step S109, a command for returning the control device on the sub side to the gaming state when the power is turned off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S210 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S211 and S212 are executed in the remaining time.

First, in step S201, control signals based on the settings of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the start winning device 33 updated in the previous normal processing are transmitted to each device, and output data such as commands are sent to the sub side. Executes external output processing such as sending to each control device.

For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol, a variation pattern command or the like is transmitted to the sub control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command is used to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to display (effect display) according to the display (variation display of the special symbol) performed on the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b. This is a command output to the sub-control device 262. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 in which the variation pattern command or the like is input is based on the command, and the variation mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 (variation display of the decorative symbol that teaches or suggests the result of the winning / failing lottery, and decoration). An effect display or the like performed together with the variation display of the symbol) is determined, and an instruction is given to the display control device 45 to display (variation display) the variation mode on the decorative symbol display device 42.

The variation pattern command includes information for identifying the variation type of the decorative pattern such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation type of the decorative symbol in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 determines the effect pattern of the variation display based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45, the voice, and the like.

Here, the variation type of the decorative pattern will be described. "Normal reach" is a reach pattern in which no special effect is displayed except for changes in the decorative pattern. In the probabilistic mode and the time reduction mode, the variable display time is shortened as compared with the normal mode even in the case of various reach. For example, the fluctuation display time (variation time) from which the normal reach is derived is "12 seconds" or "15 seconds" in the normal mode, and "9 seconds" or "12 seconds" in the probabilistic mode and the time reduction mode. ". Even in the normal mode, the first fluctuation display starting from the state in which four first fluctuation displays are held is also in a temporary time reduction state, and the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display is normal reach. For example, it is set to "9 seconds" or "12 seconds".

"Super Reach" is a reach in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. It is a pattern. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display from which the super reach is derived is "25 seconds" or "30 seconds" in the normal mode, and "22 seconds" or "27 seconds" in the probabilistic mode and the time reduction mode. It is "seconds". The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display when super reach occurs may be set to "25 seconds" or "30 seconds" in any game mode.

"Premium reach" is an effect mode that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs, and during the variable display of the decorative pattern (after the reach state is established), characters with a pattern different from the super reach, etc. Is displayed, which is a reach pattern that gives the player a sense of expectation. The variable display from which the premium reach of the present embodiment is derived has a longer variable time than the variable display from which the super reach is derived, and has the same length in both the high-entry state and the low-entry state ( For example, 60 seconds).

In addition, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is "completely off" that does not reach any reach state is set to "10 seconds" in the normal mode and "6 seconds" in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode.

Further, the sub control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) of the variation display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern included in the variation pattern command and the information of the variation time. , Stop display after the lapse of fluctuation time. That is, when "10RS" is won, the variable display is stopped and displayed by the combination of decorative symbols consisting of any of 1 to 9 (combination of jackpot symbols), and when "4RS" is won, the variation display is stopped. If the variable display is stopped and displayed by the combination of decorative symbols consisting of doublets 1, 6, 8 or 9 (combination of jackpot symbols), and if the normal jackpot ("10RN") is won, 2, The variable display is stopped and displayed by the combination of decorative symbols consisting of even-numbered doublets (combination of jackpot symbols) of any of 4, 6 and 8.

The combination of the front-back off-symbols corresponds to the "front-back off-reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stops after the reach occurs. The combination of symbols other than the front-back deviation corresponds to the "reach other than the front-back deviation" in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol after the reach occurs. The combination of completely off symbols corresponds to "complete off" in which even reach does not occur. When the sub-control device 262 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the sub-control device 262 determines the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553 as the stop symbol. In the main control device 261, one of a combination of jackpot symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols with time reduction, a combination of front and rear off symbols, a combination of symbols other than front and rear deviation, and a combination of completely out of order symbols is determined and specified. The symbol command to be used may be set and output to the sub-control device 262 together with the fluctuation pattern command.

After step S201, in step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the upper limit values (255 and 31 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. do. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

In the following step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

After that, in step S205, the special display control process is executed. In this process, the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b are controlled, and the jackpot determination and the setting of the variable display in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. The details of this special display control process will be described later.

In step S206, the variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the variable winning device 32 is performed. The details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, the normal display control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. The details of this normal display control process will be described later.

In step S208, the start winning device control process is executed. In this process, control is performed regarding the second start winning device 33b (second start shutter 172). The details of this start winning device control process will be described later.

After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If the power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S210, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal process (4 msec in this example). ) Has passed or not. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counters CINI and the variable type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. It is repeatedly executed (step S211 and step S212).

That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (631 in this example).

Further, in step S212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to the step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (255 and 31 in this example), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and the value varies as well. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

Further, if the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), the power supply is cut off, so that the process after step S213 is performed as the power failure process when the power is turned off. Will be. In the power failure processing, first, the generation of each interrupt processing is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the value of the stack pointer is backed up in the backup area 503a in step S215. Remember in.

After that, in step S216, a power off notification command indicating that the power is cut off is transmitted to another control device (payout control device 311 or the like). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S217 and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. After that, RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and an infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

The process of step S209 is at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in steps S201 to S208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, since the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than that in the case where each processing is in progress. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power is cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. .. Further, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and it is possible to reliably store the state before the power is cut off. ..

Next, the special display control process in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the fluctuation interval set after the fluctuation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is within the period of the fluctuation interval, the value of the fluctuation interval timer is subtracted in step S802, and then this process ends. That is, for example, when the fluctuation interval is set to 1 second (1000 msec) and "249 (" 250 "in the configuration where step S802 is performed before step S801)" is set in the fluctuation interval timer. In the process, the value of the variable interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is not a fluctuation interval, in step S803, the hit situation storage area described later is referred to in detail, and whether or not the state is other than the jackpot state at present. To determine.

During the jackpot state, the opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43a and 43b until the variable winning device 32 is opened, and the variable winning device 32 is in the open state. There is a round period, an interval period in which the variable winning device 32 is closed, and an ending period after the final round until the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b can be started.

In the hit situation storage area of the present embodiment, "0" is stored in a state other than the jackpot state, and in the jackpot state, any one of "1, 4, 5" is stored in the opening period and the interval period. "2" is stored during the round period, and "3" is stored during the ending period. That is, in the step S803, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the hit situation storage area, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot state is in progress.

If a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if the jackpot state is in effect, the present process is terminated as it is, while if an affirmative determination is made in step S803, the special figure described in detail in step S804 will be described later. By observing the setting status of the display flag, it is determined whether or not the variable display is being performed by the first or second special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42). Specifically, when the special map display flag is on, it is considered to be in variable display, and when the special map display flag is off, it is considered to be in stop display, which corresponds to the state in which variable display is stopped. .. As will be described in detail later, the special figure display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b, and the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b are turned on. The variable display is turned off when it is stopped and displayed.

If a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, if neither the jackpot state nor the variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S805, and the second variable display is suspended when the ball enters the second starting winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb for counting the number is larger than "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S805, that is, if even one second variation display is reserved and stored, 1 is subtracted from the second hold counter Nb in step S806. In the present embodiment, when the second variation display is reserved and stored by the discrimination process in step S805, the second variation display is executed without executing the first variation display. That is, even if the first variation display is stored earlier than the second variation display, the second variation display is prioritized and digested (the first variation display is postponed). ing.

In the following step S807, a process of shifting the data stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the second special variable hold area to the execution area side, and is the process of shifting the hold 1st area → the execution area and the hold 2nd in order. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on.

After step S807, in step S808, the second fluctuation flag of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to be turned on. In the following step S809, the subtraction display process of the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp) corresponding to the decrease of the number of hold of the second variation display by one is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right second hold lamps are both blinking, the second hold lamp on the right side is turned on while the second hold lamp on the left side is blinking, and the second hold lamp on the left side is blinking. If the second hold lamp on the right side is lit, both the left and right second hold lamps are turned on, and if both the left and right second hold lamps are on, the second hold lamp on the left side is turned on. Turn off the second hold lamp on the right side while keeping the light on, and turn off both the left and right second hold lamps when the second hold lamp on the left side is on and the second hold lamp on the right side is off. Perform the process to make it.

After step S809, in step S810, a variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if no second variation display is reserved and stored, the first variation triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a in step S811. It is determined whether or not the first hold counter Na that counts the number of holds on display is greater than 0.

If a negative determination is made in step S811, the process proceeds to step S812, and the variable standby state in which the variable display is not performed on both the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. A standby display setting for deriving the corresponding display mode (for example, a mode in which only the first and second first special figure lamps or the second special figure lamp from the right in the lower row is lit) is set. That is, after the fluctuation stop, the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b of the present embodiment are maintained in the stop mode during the fluctuation interval (in a mode showing the result of the winning / failing lottery). However, when the fluctuation interval ends (further, the lapse of a predetermined time may be a condition), the display mode is switched to indicate that the fluctuation standby state is in effect. After step S812, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S811, 1 is subtracted from the first hold counter Na in step S813. In a subsequent step S814, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the 1st special variable hold area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold 1st area → the execution area and the hold 2nd in order. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on.

After step S814, in step S815, the first fluctuation flag of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to be turned on. In the following step S816, the subtraction display process of the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp) corresponding to the decrease of the number of hold of the first variable display by one is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right first hold lamps are both blinking, the first hold lamp on the right side is turned on while the first hold lamp on the left side is blinking, and the first hold lamp on the left side is blinking. When the first hold lamp on the right side is lit, both the left and right first hold lamps are turned on, and when both the left and right first hold lamps are on, the first hold lamp on the left side is turned on. Turn off the first hold lamp on the right side while keeping the light on, and turn off both the left and right first hold lamps when the first hold lamp on the left side is on and the first hold lamp on the right side is off. Perform the process to make it.

After step S816, the variable display setting process is performed in step S810, and then this process ends. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is one, and the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area and the second special fluctuation holding area is used when performing the fluctuation display based on the data. In addition, it will be shifted to a common execution area.

Here, the details of the variable display setting process in step S810 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S901, the mode storage area described later is referred to in detail, and it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (probability variation mode). In the mode storage area, discrimination information for discriminating the game mode is stored. In the present embodiment, any one of "11", "12", and "21" is stored in the mode storage area, "11" corresponds to the normal mode, and "12" is the time. Corresponding to the shortened mode, "21" corresponds to the probabilistic mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not "21" is stored in the mode storage area to determine whether or not it is in a high probability state.

In the case of affirmative determination in step S901, that is, in the high probability state (probability variation mode), in step S902, the first or second random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration. It is determined whether or not one of the hit / fail flags (see the pass / fail determination process in FIG. 14) is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that a big hit has been won in the winning / losing lottery in a high probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, in a low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), in step S903, the hit / miss random number storage area is taken into consideration, and whether the first hit / miss flag is on. Determine if not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that a big hit has been won in the winning / losing lottery in a low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

In step S904, the jackpot confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot state has been confirmed is turned on. In this embodiment, storing a value corresponding to the determination of the occurrence of the jackpot state in the hit / miss random number storage area is referred to as turning on the jackpot confirmation flag.

In the following step S905, it is determined whether or not the 10RS flag (see the type determination process in FIG. 15) is set to ON in consideration of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area.

If the affirmative determination is made in step S905, that is, if it is "10RS", the 10RS pattern setting process is performed in step S906. The 10RS pattern setting process is a process for executing a variation display for teaching the occurrence of "10RS", and is special based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. Fluctuation pattern of display devices 43a, 43b and decorative symbol display device 42 (variation display time, variation display stop mode of special display devices 43a, 43b and decorative symbol display device 42, effect pattern of variation display of decorative symbol display device 42, etc. ) Is determined, and fluctuation pattern commands are set based on the determination and various flags.

The relationship between the numerical values of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2, the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like. That is, in the 10RS pattern setting process, the reach pattern is determined from the normal reach, the super reach, and the premium reach, and the determined reach pattern and the time shortened state (probability variation mode, time shortened mode, or first variable display) are displayed. The fluctuation time in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined based on the determination result of whether or not there are four hold states). Then, the information including the 10RS, the determined reach pattern, and the fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation pattern command, and the information that can grasp the fluctuation time is stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, which of the stop modes of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to 10RS is to be stopped is determined and stored in the corresponding storage area. After step S906, the process proceeds to step S915, which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S905, it is determined in step S907 whether or not the 4RS flag is set on by referring to the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S907, that is, if it is "4RS", the process proceeds to step S915 after performing the 4RS pattern setting process in step S908.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S907, the process proceeds to step S915 after performing the 10RN pattern setting process in step S909.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S902, that is, when the jackpot is not won in the high probability state, or when a negative determination is made in step S903, that is, when the jackpot is not won in the low probability state. Refers to the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area in step S910, and determines whether or not the front-back flag (see the reach determination process of FIG. 16) is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S910, that is, if the reach is "out of front / rear reach", the front / rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S911, and then the process proceeds to step S915.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S910, in step S912, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the flag other than the front and back is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S912, that is, if the result is “reach other than front / rear deviation”, the reach pattern setting process other than front / rear is performed in step S913, and then the process proceeds to step S915.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S912, that is, if the result is "complete deviation", the deviation fluctuation pattern setting process is performed in step S914, and then the process proceeds to step S915.

In step S915, a special figure display flag indicating whether or not variable display is being performed by the special display devices 43a and 43b is set to be turned on. As a result, it is shown that the condition for performing the switching display (variable display) in the special display devices 43a and 43b is satisfied. In the following step S916, a special figure display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43a and 43b is set. The special figure display timer is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

The fluctuation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b in the present embodiment is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. When a control signal to start switching display (variable display) is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the next external output processing of the normal processing based on the setting of the special figure display timer. , The switching display (variable display) is started on the special display devices 43a and 43b. Further, the sub-control device 262 that has received the variation pattern command starts the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command at the same time as the variation start of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the special display devices 43a and 43b. At the same time as the stop display of, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed. After the end of step S916, the variation display setting process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the start winning process, the process of acquiring the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S515 and storing it in the special fluctuation hold area, the pass / fail determination process of steps S506 and 516, and the variation display setting. In the processing, the winning / failing lottery is configured by the processing of steps S901 to S903 for determining the winning / failing based on the winning / failing flag and the situation at that time. Further, the second pass / fail determination process is configured by the processes of steps S901 to S903, and the variable display setting process is configured by the processes of step S906, step S908, step S909, step S911, step S913, and step S914.

Returning to the description of FIG. 19, when affirmative determination is made in step S804, that is, when variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S817 to perform subtraction processing of the special figure display timer. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special figure display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 12 seconds (12000 msec), "3000" is set for the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S818, and it is determined whether or not the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by referring to the value of the special figure display timer after the subtraction. At this time, step S818 is positively determined when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer becomes “0”.

If a negative determination is made in step S818, a switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variation display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed in step S823. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal indicating that the switching display is performed is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the external output processing in the next normal processing. As a result, the timing of the special display control process, that is, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b is realized every 4 ms. After step S823, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S818, the special figure display flag is turned off in step S819, and the stop display setting for performing the stop display on the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed in step S820. Based on the setting contents of this stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the external output processing in the next normal processing. That is, in the special display devices 43a and 43b, the mode corresponding to each jackpot type, deviation, etc. set in the variable display setting process is stopped and displayed.

Further, after step S820, in step S821, a stop command for causing the sub control device 262 to display the stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is set. As a result, the stop timings of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 can be reliably synchronized. However, since the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 by the fluctuation pattern command output at the start of the variation display, information regarding the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 is added again. There is no need. Further, again, the stop display by the special display devices 43a and 43b is the main display, and the display of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only an auxiliary one (for staging).

Subsequently, in step S822, the discrimination information setting process for performing the initial setting of the hit state and the switching setting of the game mode is performed, and then this process is terminated.

Here, the discrimination information setting process in step S822 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1001, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot confirmation flag is set to ON. If affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the jackpot confirmation flag is turned off in step S1002, and the jackpot middle flag indicating that the jackpot state is in progress is turned on in step S1003. Further, in step S1004, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the 4RS flag is set to ON.

If a negative determination is made in step S1004, that is, if the jackpot is "10RS" or "10RN", the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state in step S1005 (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened). ) Is set in the round count counter.

In the following step S1006, "1" is set for the hit situation storage area. Further, in step S1007, a value "2000" corresponding to an opening period of, for example, 8 seconds is set for the special variable timer used for control during the hit state (open / close control of the variable winning device 32). Subsequently, in step S1008, "8" indicating the maximum number of winning balls per round is set to "8" for the winning counter for counting the number of game balls entered in the variable winning device 32. .. The value of the winning counter is determined by the detection information of the count switch 223 to determine whether or not the ball has entered the variable winning devices 32a and 32b during the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt processing, and the variable winning device is used. When it is determined that the ball has entered 32a and 32b, 1 is subtracted.

Then, in step S1009, an opening command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the hit state is set. The opening command includes information on the hit type, and the sub-control device 262 can also grasp the total number of rounds in the hit state. After step S1009, this process ends.

It should be noted that, in the jackpot state, promotion of the appearance of the jackpot type, etc. (for example, when an even number of doublets is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, "10RS" or "4RS" is displayed in the jackpot state immediately after. If the decorative symbol display device 42 displays an odd number of doublets other than "7 symbols", it is taught that "10RS" was won in the jackpot state immediately after. You may do). In the present embodiment, the promotion effect is performed during the opening period (opening effect) of the jackpot state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, "4" is set in the round number counter in step S1010. After step S1010, the process proceeds to step S1006 described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S1001, a value corresponding to the fluctuation interval (for example, 1 second) is set for the fluctuation interval timer in step S1011. In the decorative symbol display device 42, basically, the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of the stop display of the variation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the symbols displayed as stopped by the special display devices 43a and 43b. Continues to be displayed as it is Until the end of the variation interval (until the next variation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is started), the stopped-displayed decorative symbol continues to be displayed. Then, when the variation interval ends and the variation display is reserved and stored, the variation display on the special display devices 43a and 43b and the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 are started at the same time. On the other hand, if the fluctuation display is not stored on hold even after the fluctuation interval ends, the stopped symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 continues to be derived for a while, and then (the specified time elapses with the decorative symbol stopped and displayed). (If this is the case), the display switches to the display waiting for the game (demo screen display). Further, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with an even number of doublets in the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42, the combination of the decorative symbols may be converted into an odd number of doublets during the variable interval period (derivation). In some cases, a re-lottery effect such as (a configuration that is always converted) may be performed.

After step S1011, in step S1012, whether or not either "12" or "22" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not it is either the time reduction mode or the probability variation mode. To determine. If a negative determination is made in step S1012, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when affirmative determination is made in step S1012, in step S1013, after the time reduction mode given after the end of the normal jackpot (10RN) jackpot state and the end of the probability variation jackpot (10RS, 4RS) jackpot state. The value of the fluctuation count counter is subtracted by 1 in order to measure the duration of the given probability variation mode. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot state, the number of fluctuation displays (for example, 100 times) corresponding to the period of the time reduction mode and the probability variation mode is set for the fluctuation count counter, which is special. Every time the variable display of the display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) is performed once, 1 is subtracted in the step S1013.

In the following step S1014, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation count counter is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S1014, that is, after the jackpot state of "10RN" ends, the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode is displayed. If it has not been performed yet, or after the jackpot state of "10RS" and "4RS" ends, the special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the probability change mode. If the variation display has not been performed yet, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1014, "11" indicating that the mode is in the normal mode is set for the mode storage area in step S1015. That is, when the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times on the special display devices 43a and 43b, the time reduction mode or the probability variation mode ends, and the mode shifts to the normal mode. After the step S1015, in step S1016, the support end command for notifying the end of the time reduction mode or the probability change mode is set for the sub control device 262, and then this process ends. It should be noted that the support end command may be configured to be output to the sub-control device 262 by distinguishing whether the time reduction mode ends or the probability change mode ends.

Next, the variable winning device control process for opening and closing the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the hit situation storage area is "0", thereby determining whether or not the state is other than the hit state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if it is not in a hit state, the present process is terminated as it is. Incidentally, at the start of the hit state, "1" is set in the hit status storage area in the above-mentioned discrimination information setting process.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if a hit state is in effect (when any of "1" to "5" is set in the hit status storage area), the process proceeds to step S1202. , The value of the special variable timer is subtracted by 1. Incidentally, at the start of the jackpot state, "2000", which is a value corresponding to the time of the opening effect, is set for the special variable timer in the discrimination information setting process.

In the following step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not "1" is set in the hit status storage area.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, "2" is set for the hit status storage area in step S1205. In the following step S1206, the open state of the variable winning device (in this example, the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b are individually set as described later) is set for the special variable timer. A value "7500" corresponding to the maintenance time (30 seconds) is set.

After step S1206, in step S1207, a process for opening the first variable winning device 32a is performed, and in step S1208, a round command for transmitting information to the sub-control device 262 to start the round is set. After that, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not "4" is set in the hit situation storage area. As will be described in detail later, in the jackpot state of "10RS" and "4RS", the winning situation when the interval period immediately before the jackpot round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened is started. "4" will be set for the storage area.

If a negative determination is made in step S1209, it is determined in step S1210 whether or not "5" is set in the hit situation storage area. As will be described in detail later, in the jackpot state of "10RN", when the interval period immediately before the jackpot round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened is started, the hit status storage area is "5" will be set.

When a negative determination is made in step S1210, it is determined whether or not "3" is set in the hit situation storage area in step S1211. As will be described in detail later, when all rounds in the jackpot state are completed and the ending period is started, "3" is set for the hit status storage area. If a negative determination is made in step S1211, that is, if it is not the time to end the jackpot state, the value of the round number counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1212.

In the following step S1213, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1213, that is, if there are still rounds to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1214, and it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "9".

If a negative determination is made in step S1214, that is, immediately before the start of a jackpot round other than the second round of "10RS" and "10RN" (interval), the value of the round number counter in step S1215. Determines whether or not is "3".

When a negative determination is made in step S1215, that is, when it is immediately before (interval) the start of the second round of "4RS" or the jackpot round other than the second round of "10RS" and "10RN". , In step S1216, "1" is set for the hit situation storage area. After that, in step S1217, the value "250" corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set for the special variable timer.

After step S1217, in step S1218, "8" is set for the winning counter. Further, in step S1219, processing is performed to close the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b that are in the open state, and in step S1220, information that an interval is started for the sub control device 262. Set an interval command to convey. After that, this process ends.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1214, that is, immediately before (interval) the start of the jackpot round of the second round of "10RS" and "10RN", the special fluctuation holding area is set in step S1221. Refers to the execution area of, and determines whether or not the 10RS flag is set to ON.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1221, that is, immediately before (interval) the start of the second round of "10RS", "4" is set for the hit situation storage area in step S1222. After that, the process proceeds to step S1217 described above.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1221, that is, immediately before (interval) the start of the second round of "10RN", in step S1223, "5" with respect to the hit situation storage area. "Is set. Subsequent step S1224 sets the value "25" corresponding to the interval time (0.1 second) for the special variable timer. After that, the process proceeds to step S1218 described above.

Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1215, that is, when it is immediately before (interval) the start of the second round of "4RS" or the big hit round of "10RS" and the eighth round of "10RN". Refers to the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area in step S1225, and determines whether or not the 4RS flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1225, that is, immediately before (interval) the start of the jackpot round of the second round of "4RS", "4" is set for the hit status storage area in step S1222 described above. To set. After that, the process proceeds to step S1217 described above.

Further, in the case of a negative determination in step S1225, that is, immediately before the start of the 8th round jackpot round of "10RS" and "10RN" (interval), (normal jackpot round with an interval, the present In the example, the process proceeds to step S1216 described above (in order to execute a jackpot round in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened for up to 30 seconds).

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if there is time (opening time or closing time) for maintaining the open state or closed state of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the process proceeds to step S1226. , It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter that measures the number of balls entered into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b is "0". The winning counter is set to "8", which is the upper limit (specified number) of the number of winnings per round at the start of the jackpot state and the start of the interval. Then, every time one game ball enters the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, one is subtracted.

If a negative determination is made in step S1226, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1226, that is, if the opportunity to end the round arrives without waiting for the elapse of the round setting period, the process proceeds to step S1212. As a result, if eight game balls are entered into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b during one round, the round ends promptly at that point even if the opening period of 30 seconds has not elapsed. It will be.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1209, that is, when "4" is set for the hit situation storage area and the second round of "10RS" or "4RS" is started, the second round is started. In step S1227, a V winning round command is set to convey information to the sub control device 262 to start a jackpot round in which the game ball should be entered into the second variable winning device 32b in order to acquire the probability variation mode. .. In the following step S1228, "2" is set for the hit situation storage area. After that, in step S1229, the value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the variable winning device (here, the second variable winning device 32b) is set for the special variable timer.

Further, in step S1230, a second opening process for opening the second variable winning device 32b is performed. In the present embodiment, in the second opening process corresponding to "10RS" and "4RS", the special ball-entry portion 145 (distribution device 147) of the second variable winning device 32b is also opened. When the entry of the game ball into the special entry section 145 is confirmed, the special entry section 145 may be closed, or the end of the round (or the period during which the play ball is opened) may be closed. The special ball entry portion 145 may be opened until the predetermined timing). Of course, even if a plurality of game balls enter the special ball entry unit 145 in one big hit state, the right of the probability change mode granted is one time (the period of the probability change mode of this example is in the probability change mode. Until the variable display is performed 100 times, or until the jackpot state occurs until the variation display exceeds 100 times).

In the following step S1231, the remaining ball monitoring flag for executing the monitoring of the game ball in the second variable specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b (remaining ball monitoring process; see FIG. 18) is set to ON. Further, in step S1232, a monitoring timer indicating a period for performing the remaining ball monitoring process is set (for example, equivalent to 33 seconds). After that, this process ends.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1210, that is, when "5" is set for the hit situation storage area and the second round of "10RN" is executed, the special variable is made in step S1233. With respect to the timer, it is determined whether or not the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state. In the second round of the "10RN" of the present embodiment, the "pre-part" in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened for a short time and the first variable winning device 32a are replaced with the second variable winning device 32b. It consists of an open "rear part".

When a negative determination is made in step S1233, that is, when the previous part is completed, the variable winning device (here, the second variable winning device 32b) is shortened with respect to the sub control device 262 in step S1234. Set a short round command that conveys information to start the jackpot round to be released.

In the following step S1235, "5" is set (again) for the hit situation storage area. In the following step S1236, a value "25" corresponding to the time (0.1 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the variable winning device (here, the second variable winning device 32b) is set. After step S1236, the process proceeds to step S1230 described above. That is, the second opening process is performed in step S1230, the remaining ball monitoring flag is set to ON in step S1231, the monitoring timer is set (for example, equivalent to 3 seconds) in step S1232, and then this process ends. However, in the present embodiment, in the second opening process corresponding to "10RN", the special ball-entry portion 145 (sorting device 147) of the second variable winning device 32b is not opened and is maintained in the closed state. To.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1233, "2" is set for the hit situation storage area in step S1237. After that, in step S1238, a value "7000" corresponding to the time (28 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the variable winning device (here, the first variable winning device 32a) is set for the special variable timer.

Further, in step S1239, a second closing / first opening process is performed in which the second variable winning device 32b is closed and the first variable winning device 32a is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step S1231 described above. That is, the remaining ball monitoring flag is set to ON in step S1231, the monitoring timer is set (for example, equivalent to 3 seconds) in step S1232, and then this process ends.

In the jackpot state of "10RS" and "4RS" of the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b is opened for a maximum of 30 seconds in the second round (the special entry portion 145 is also opened). Therefore, if the game is performed as instructed (if the player is hitting right), basically, the game ball enters the special entry section 145 of the second variable winning device 32b, and the jackpot state ends. The right to move to the later probabilistic mode is granted. Even if the jackpot state of "10RS" and "4RS" occurs, if the game ball is not inserted into the special entry portion 145 of the second variable winning device 32b in the second round, the jackpot will be achieved. In the normal game state after the end of the state (a state in which the game ball is launched and the game ball is entered into the start winning devices 33a and 33b, and the winning / fail lottery is received to aim for a big hit), the mode shifts to the time reduction mode instead of the probability change mode. do.

On the other hand, in the jackpot state of "10RS", although the second variable winning device 32b is opened in the second round, the opening time is short, and the special entry portion 145 remains closed (sorting device 147). Since the entry into the special entry section 145 is still restricted), the game ball does not enter the special entry section 145 of the second variable winning device 32b (probability change mode). The right to move to is not granted).

As will be described in detail later, the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 may be taught that the jackpot state is a more desirable type for the player in the first round of the jackpot state. "Promotion challenge production" is performed, and in the second round of "10RS" and "4RS", a guide display prompting the entry of the game ball into the special entry section 145 of the second variable winning device 32b and the entry thereof. A "V-winning challenge production" is performed to generate a V-winning production that accompanies the ball. Regarding the promotion effect, the decorative symbol display device 42 taught that the jackpot of "4RS" was won in the first variable display until the start of the first round of the jackpot state (for example, an odd number of decorative symbols). It was taught by the decorative symbol display device 42 that the jackpot of "10RS" was won in the case of getting doublet (stopped and displayed) and that the big hit of "10RS" was won (for example, the decorative symbol of "7" stopped getting doublet). If it is displayed), it will not be performed (the odd number of doublets in the second variable display will only increase the chances of winning "10RS", so there is a possibility that promotion will be performed).

In the present embodiment, regarding the second round of "10RN", the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 0.1 seconds, and then the first variable winning device 32a is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds. Although it is configured, for example, the second variable winning device 32b is opened for a maximum of 30 seconds like the first variable winning device 32a of other rounds, but the special winning portion 145 is not opened. Alternatively, the second variable winning device 32b may be configured to be opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1213, that is, when all the rounds in the jackpot state have been digested, the process proceeds to step S1240, and "3" is set for the hit situation storage area. After step S1240, in step S1241, the value "2500" corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set for the special variable timer.

After step S1241, in step S1242, "7" is set for the winning counter. When the process of setting the ending after step S1240 is performed in the flow after the affirmative determination is made in step S1226, the value of the winning counter is "0". If the value of the winning counter is set to "0" as it is at the start of the ending period, affirmative determination is suddenly made in step S1226 in the variable winning device control process after 4 msec, and the ending period cannot be completed. Therefore, by inputting a provisional numerical value other than "0" ("7" in this example) to the winning counter in step S1242, the ending period is completed. Of course, another method may be used to complete the ending period.

After step S1242, in step S1243, a process of closing the variable winning device (in this example, the first variable winning device 32a) which is in the open state is performed, and in the subsequent step S1244, the sub control device 262 is subjected to a process. Set the ending command to convey the information to start the ending. After that, this process ends.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1211, that is, when the ending period ends and the time to end the jackpot state comes, the process proceeds to step S1245 and the end setting process is performed. In the end setting process, the mode storage area is set and the fluctuation count counter is set.

Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 23. First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the special entry flag (see step S1305 and step S1306 of the remaining ball monitoring process in FIG. 18) is set to ON.

If the affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the value "21" corresponding to the probabilistic mode is set for the mode storage area in step S1402. As a result, the probability change mode is given after the jackpot state ends.

In the following step S1403, "100" is set for the fluctuation count counter. The fluctuation count counter is for grasping that the upper limit of the number of fluctuations has been reached in the probability variation mode in which the upper limit of the number of fluctuations is set and the time reduction mode. After step S1403, in step S1404, a probability change start command for notifying the sub-control device 262 to start the probability change mode (shift to the probability change stage) is set. After that, the jackpot middle flag is turned off in step S1405, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, a value "12" corresponding to the time reduction mode is set for the mode storage area in step S1406. As a result, the time reduction mode is given after the jackpot state ends. After step S1406, in step S1407, "100" is set for the fluctuation count counter. Subsequently, in step S1408, a time saving start command for notifying the sub control device 262 to start the time saving mode (shift to the pullback stage) is set. After that, the jackpot middle flag is turned off in step S1405, and then this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 22, after the end setting process of step S1245, in step S1246, “0” indicating that the hit situation storage area is not in the big hit state is set. After that, in step S1247, a hit end command for transmitting information to the effect that the jackpot state is terminated is set to the sub control device 262, and then this process is terminated. The hit end command includes information on the number of times of the fluctuation number counter set in the end setting process.

Next, the normal display control process in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step S2101, whether or not the value of the normal map interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the interval (normal map interval) set after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is "0". To determine. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if it is a normal map interval, the value of the normal map interval timer is subtracted in step S2116, and then this process ends. That is, for example, when the normal map interval is set to 1 second (1000 msec) and "249 (" 250 "in the configuration where step S2116 is performed before step S2101)" is set in the normal map interval timer. In the process, the value of the normal interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, when it is not the normal time interval period, the support period flag indicating that the opening / closing control of the second start winning device 33b is in progress is turned on in step S2102. Determine if it is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2102, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the flag displaying the normal map indicating whether or not the fluctuation display is being performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is on. When the flag for displaying a normal figure is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable value.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2104, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is larger than 0. If a negative determination is made in step S2104, that is, if no variation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is reserved, this process is terminated as it is. In addition, for example, when a negative determination is made in step S2104, the standby display setting for deriving the display mode corresponding to the fluctuation standby state in which the fluctuation display is not performed is performed in the normal symbol display device 41. May be. That is, after the fluctuation stop, the normal symbol display device 41 is maintained in the stop mode during the normal map interval period (in a mode showing the result of the ball entry support lottery), but the normal symbol interval period ends. Then, it may be configured to be switched to the display mode indicating that it is in the variable standby state.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2104, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in step S2105. In the following step S2106, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the normal variable hold area to the execution area side, and is a process of sequentially shifting the hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area →. The data in each area is shifted such as the hold 1st area, the hold 3rd area → the hold 2nd area, the hold 4th area → the hold 3rd area, and so on.

After that, in step S2107, the variation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is set, and the normal map variation setting process for starting is executed.

Here, the normal map fluctuation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 25. First, in step S2301, the flag displaying the normal symbol indicating that the normal symbol is being variablely displayed in the normal symbol display device 41 is set to ON. In the following step S2302, the hit situation storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not "0" is stored, that is, whether or not the state is other than the jackpot state at present. If the affirmative determination is made in step S2302, that is, if the jackpot state is not obtained, whether or not the value of "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area in step S2303, that is, high. It is determined whether or not the ball is in the ball entry state (time reduction mode or probability change mode).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, in step S2304, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is set to the normal symbol display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41. Set "100" to 0.4 seconds.

After that, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is “0”. In the high-entry state, the player wins when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which takes a value in the range of "0 to 232", is "1 to 232".

If affirmative determination is made in step S2305, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if the ball entry support lottery for whether or not to open the second start winning device 33b is won, the ball entry support lottery is won in step S2306. Turn on the ball entry support flag to indicate that. After step S2306, this process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, that is, in a jackpot state or a low ball entry state, in step S2307, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is displayed with respect to the normal symbol display timer. Set to "2000" to set the timer to 8 seconds. Further, in step S2308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is "1 to 31". In the low ball entry state, the player wins when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which takes a value in the range of "0 to 232", is "1 to 31". Further, the variable display time of the normal symbol may be determined by lottery.

If a negative determination is made in step S2308, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2308, that is, if the ball entry support lottery is won, in step S2306, after setting the ball entry support flag indicating that the ball entry support lottery has been won on, the present End the process. The variable display time of the normal symbol, the winning probability in the ball entry support lottery, etc. can be set appropriately for each pachinko machine model. For example, the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery in the high ball entry state can be set. , It may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery in the low ball entry state.

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2107, in step S2108, the subtraction display process of the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp) corresponding to the decrease of one hold number of the variation display of the normal symbol display device 41. I do. In other words, if the pair of left and right normal hold lamps are both blinking, the normal hold lamp on the right side is turned on while the normal hold lamp on the left side is blinking, and the normal hold lamp on the left side is blinking and the normal hold lamp on the right side is blinking. When the normal hold lamp is lit, both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, and when both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left normal hold lamp is lit and the right normal hold lamp is lit. When the hold lamp is turned off and the normal hold lamp on the left side is on and the normal hold lamp on the right side is off, processing is performed to turn off both the left and right normal hold lamps. After step S2108, this process ends.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2103, that is, when the fluctuation display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41, the process proceeds to step S2109 to subtract the normal symbol display timer. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the normal map display timer is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the normal map display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2110, the normal map display flag is turned off in step S2111, and the normal map stop display setting for displaying the stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2112. That is, when the ball entry support lottery is won (when the ball entry support flag is set to ON), both the left and right pair of normal map lamps of the normal symbol display device 41 are turned on, and when it is off, both are turned on. Turn on only the normal lamp on the left side.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2113, and the normal map discrimination information setting process is performed. Here, the normal map discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 26.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the entry support flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when affirmative determination is made in step S2401, in step S2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second start winning device 33b is in the open state is set on.

In the following step S2403, it is determined whether or not either "12, 21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the ball is in a high ball entry state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b is set to 1 with respect to the normal variable timer for measuring the opening time (residual time) of the second starting winning device 33b. Set "450" to 8 seconds.

Further, in step S2405, "3" is set to open the second start winning device 33b three times with respect to the opening number counter that counts the number of times (remaining number of times) the second start winning device 33b is opened. After step S2405, in step S2408, the entry support flag is turned off, and in step S2409, the flag during the support period is turned on. Further, in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to be in the open state, and then this process is terminated.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, when the ball is in a low ball entry state, in step S2406, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b is set to 0.4 seconds with respect to the normal variable timer. Set "100". Subsequently, in step S2407, "1" is set for the opening number counter to open the second start winning device 33b once. After step S2407, in step S2408, the ball entry support flag is turned off, in step S2409, the flag is turned on during the support period, and in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to be open. This process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2113, in step S2114, a value corresponding to the normal figure interval period (for example, 1 second) is set for the normal figure interval timer, and then this process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2110, a switching display setting for continuously performing the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 (switching display in which a pair of left and right normal map lamps are alternately turned on) in step S2115. I do. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal indicating that the switching display is performed is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. As a result, the timing of the normal display control process, that is, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized every 4 ms. After step S2115, this process ends.

Next, the start winning device control process in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the flag is on during the support period. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the value of the normal variable timer is usually subtracted by 1 in step S2202.

In the following step S2203, it is determined whether or not the value of the normally variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if it is a period during which the open / closed state of the second start winning device 33b is maintained, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the normally variable flag is on. When the affirmative determination is made in step S2204, that is, when the second start winning device 33b is currently in the open state and the timing for closing the second start winning device 33b has arrived, the normally variable flag is turned off in step S2205. In the following step S2206, the value of the open count counter is subtracted by 1, and in step S2207, the second start winning device 33b is set to be closed.

After that, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the value of the open count counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, the support period flag is turned off in step S2209, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, the winning ball support lottery is performed in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, and the second start winning device 33b is opened three times based on the result. If there is a remaining number of times, a value corresponding to the interval time (for example, "250") is set for the normal variable timer in step S2210, and then this process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, in the interval period between the second start winning device 33b being opened three times (the second starting winning device 33b is in the closed state), the timing for ending the interval period. When the ball arrives, the normal variable flag is turned on in step S2211, and the value corresponding to the open time (in this example, in the high ball entry state; "450") is set for the normal variable timer in step S2212. , Step S2213 sets the second start winning device 33b to be in the open state. After that, this process ends.

When the second start winning device 33b is in the open state and a specified number (for example, one) of game balls are entered into the second start winning device 33b, the second start winning device 33b May be configured to be closed immediately (for example, when a negative determination is made in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the second start winning switch 224b is detected, and a positive determination is made. In some cases, it may be configured to move to step S2205).

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the receive interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG. 29.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interrupting a command transmitted from the main control device 261 when the payout control device 311 receives the command. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the payout control device 311 waits for another process executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the receive interrupt process is executed.

When the receive interrupt process is executed, first, the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 in step S3001 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in order to store the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 in step S3002. Turn on the command reception flag to end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

In the present embodiment, the command reception process transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received, but is shown in FIG. 30, for example. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received, and if a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if the command has not been received, the process may be shifted to the command determination process. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not the command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311, and this main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First of all, in step S3101, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and the interrupt mode is set. Then, in step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, the external interrupt vector is set.

After that, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in the subsequent step S3108, does the RAM determination value match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power-off? Whether or not, that is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 513. It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if a backup error is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the process of initializing the RAM 513 after step S3115 is performed. Transition.

In step S3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S3117, the initial setting of the CPU peripheral device is performed, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to allow interrupts.

On the other hand, on condition that the power cutoff occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, the processing at the time of power restoration (at the time of power failure recovery). Process) is executed. That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power is turned off is restored, in step S3110, the power cut occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag that permits the payout of the prize ball is cleared. Further, in step S3112, the initial setting of the CPU peripheral device is performed, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power cutoff occurrence information is set, the power supply is cut off, so that the process after step S3123 is performed as the power failure process when the power is turned off. In the power failure process, first, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and the command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. After that, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127, and the backup area 513a is calculated. The RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

In the process of step S3122, since the information on the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed after the process performed at the time of turning on the power is completed, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is larger than that in the case where each process is in progress. It is less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power is cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. ..

Next, the timer interrupt process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command from the main control unit 261 is acquired, and the determination processing of the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 31.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main control unit 261 is received in the above-mentioned reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 28).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of the command read from the RAM 513 in the processes of steps S3304 to S3306 is determined. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305, whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306, whether it is a prize ball command. Whether or not it is determined.

If the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on, and if the payout permission flag is turned off, the main control unit is turned on when the power is turned on. Since the control device 261 has instructed to initialize the RAM 513, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. After that, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311, and the payout permission of the prize ball is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 performs the initialization process of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to the initialization timing being shifted, the RAM 513 is initialized and the control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the harmful effects of. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of the prize ball can be surely set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the initialization of the RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. Since the payout initialization command is a command transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it is not received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value setting of the RAM 513 (step S3309) is executed with the payout permission flag turned on, the prize balls will not be paid out if they remain. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being inflicted with a loss.

Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff. In step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on in order to allow the payout of the prize ball. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power failure and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so that the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the number of prize balls received in step S3310 is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , The payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to allow the payout of the prize ball. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in the predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command instructing the payout of the prize balls. .. Further, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so that the prize ball can be paid out at an early stage for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so that the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

Note that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step S3306: NO). The command judgment process is terminated without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the flow chart of FIG. 30 will be returned to the description. When the command determination process is completed, in step S3202, it is determined whether or not a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit is electrically connected is received from the CR unit connection board 314. If affirmative determination is made in step S3202, in step S3203, a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit is electrically connected is transmitted to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply / launch control device 310.

After step S3203 or when a negative determination is made in step S3202, it is determined in step S3204 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this process ends as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S3204, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3205, and when it is determined that the state return operation has started, the state return operation is executed. By this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, the payout motor is jammed, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions, and the ball jam is cleared (return to the normal state). ..

After that, in step S3206, the lower plate full tank state or the lower plate full tank release state is set according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, the full state of the lower plate 15 is determined by the detection signal of the full detection switch, the lower plate is full, the lower plate is full, and the lower plate is not full. Execute the setting of the dish full tank release state. Further, in step S3207, the setting of the tank ball-less state (ball out state) or the tank ball-less release state (ball presence state) is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the state without a tank ball is determined by the detection signal of the switch without a tank ball, the special state without a tank ball, the setting without a tank ball is executed, the special state without a tank ball disappears, and the state without a tank ball is released. Perform the settings.

After that, in step S3208, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, the notification is made.

Subsequently, the payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, the payout number setting process is performed in step S3209, the motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3210, and the motor drive process is performed in step S3211.

In step S3212, the payout motor is driven to execute the ball removal process on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball removal operation is not started and the ball removal operation is not started. In the following step S3213, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is in a jammed state. After that, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control unit 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the start to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all the storage areas, the start of the storage area is used. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

In the following step S3903, a hold information storage process is performed in which the information of the starting command output from the main control device 261 is stored in the hold information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262. As described above, the starting command is a variable display triggered by the entry of the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b (the first variable display or the second variable display). It includes information indicating which one corresponds to), information indicating whether the information is fluctuation information corresponding to a jackpot, information indicating a jackpot type, information indicating a type of loss (reach), and the like.

The hold information storage area of the sub control device 262 is a first hold information storage area having four hold areas (hold 1st to hold 4 areas) and a first hold information storage area, respectively, like the special variable hold area of the main control device 261. It has a second reserved information storage area and one execution area. In the first hold information storage area, information on whether or not a jackpot is made, a jackpot type, a reach pattern, according to the reception history of the starting command based on the first fluctuation display (information stored in the first special fluctuation hold area). In addition, information (variation information) related to fluctuation display such as fluctuation time is stored in time series. Further, in the second hold information storage area, change information is stored in time series according to the reception history of the starting command based on the second change display (information stored in the second special change hold area). By adopting this configuration, the fluctuation information regarding the first variation display triggered by the entry into the first start winning device 33a and the second variation display triggered by the entry into the second start winning device 33b. It is possible to hold and store four fluctuation information about each. As a result, not only the execution area of the first and second special fluctuation holding areas of the main control device 261 but also the fluctuation information stored in the holding area can be grasped by the sub control device 262. ..

Here, the hold information storage process will be described with reference to FIG. 35. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the starting command has been received (whether or not the starting command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4101, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S4101, is the starting command corresponding to the entry into the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special fluctuation holding area) in step S4102? Determine if not. If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the starting command corresponds to the winning ball of the first starting winning device 33a (variation information stored in the first special fluctuation holding area), in step S4103. , The first variable hold counter Nd, which counts the number of variable information held in the first hold information storage area, is incremented by one.

In the following step S4104, the information on whether or not the starting command is a big hit, the information on the big hit type, the information on the reach pattern, the information on the fluctuation time, and the like are first stored in the empty hold area of the first hold information storage area. Remember in the area of.

Further, in the following step S4105, the advance notice information storage process is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a case where a staging display related to each other is intentionally derived (so-called "continuous notice" is performed) in a plurality of continuous variable displays. Here, the value of the continuous advance notice counter for determining whether or not to perform continuous advance notice and the value of the advance notice type counter for determining the type of continuous advance notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first hold information storage. Of the areas, the fluctuation information is stored in the newly stored holding area in step S4104.

The continuous warning counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 49, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 49), and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. The continuous advance notice counter is updated periodically, and the value of the continuous advance notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous advance notice counter buffer) each time.

The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 9, reaches an upper limit value (that is, 9), and then returns to 0, which is a lower limit value. The notice type counter is updated periodically, and the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer) each time.

Then, when the fluctuation information is stored in the hold information storage area in the advance notice information storage process, the value of the continuous advance notice counter and the value of the advance notice type counter stored in the continuous advance notice counter buffer and the advance notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Further, each of the hold area and the execution area of the hold information storage area is provided with a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that the continuous notice is to be derived.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice adequacy determination table that is taken into consideration when deciding whether or not to give a continuous notice, and a notice table that is taken into consideration when deciding the mode of the continuous notice. A plurality of advance notice pass / fail determination tables and advance notice tables are provided, and the advance notice pass / fail determination table and the advance notice table to be taken into consideration are selected according to the fluctuation information.

After step S4105, in step S4106, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice is performed. In the continuous notice lottery process of step S4106, it is confirmed whether or not there is a hold area for which the continuous notice flag is already set to ON. Therefore, when the existence of the holding area for which the continuous notice flag is set is not confirmed, and further, when only the fluctuation information corresponding to the complete deviation (the deviation where the reach state does not occur) is stored in the first holding area. , A lottery for continuous notices is to be held. On the other hand, when the existence of the holding area for which the continuous notice flag is set is confirmed, the lottery for the continuous notice is not performed.

In the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4106, when the value of the first variable hold counter Nd is "2" or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area, Refer to the notice winning / failing judgment table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach pattern, and game mode (the one corresponding to the jackpot is easier to win than the one corresponding to the loss), and decide whether or not to execute the continuous notice. .. Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach pattern, and the game mode is based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first reserved information storage area. Refer to and decide whether or not to execute the continuous notice. In addition, the continuous notice flag of all the holding areas in which the fluctuation information is stored among the holding areas of the first holding information storage area is turned on. However, the continuous notice flag of the execution area is not turned on.

As a continuous notice, for example, the corresponding effect is continuously derived in the variable display which is regarded as "completely off" (for example, the same decorative symbol is in the reach state in the display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42). In the last fluctuation display of the continuous notice, the stop display of the front and back or the big hit is made (when the number of consecutive chance eyes is one, it is continuous). The notice may end with a complete deviation, in the case of 2 times, the continuous notice may end with reach other than the front and back deviation, and in the case of 3 times or more, the continuous notice ends with the front and back deviation or a big hit. It may be).

Further, for example, the pass / fail related information (holding information) newly reserved and stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the main control device 261 has a fluctuation pattern (decorative symbol display) according to the situation when the corresponding fluctuation display is executed. The indefinite hold information that changes the stop pattern of the device 42) and the fixed hold information that basically does not change may be configured to exist (in this example, only the fixed hold information). For example, when the first variable display is suspended, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the information is indefinitely held (when the setting of complete deviation is made), and if the information is indefinitely held, it corresponds. When the first variation display is executed, if two or more first variation displays are reserved and stored, a variation pattern that is "completely off" is selected, and only one or less first variation display is reserved. If it is not stored, a fluctuation pattern that is "out of front and back (normal reach)" may be selected. Further, the starting command also includes information on whether or not the information is indefinitely held, and in the continuous notice lottery process, the indefinite hold information is included in the already stored variable display that is the target of the continuous notice. If so, it may be configured to cancel the setting of continuous notice. In addition, it is also possible to set the variable display to only the indefinite hold information, and in that case, the indefinite hold information is "completely off" if one or more of the first variable display is held and stored. By setting, even if the indefinite hold information is targeted (if the last variable display of the continuous notice is stored, the indefinite hold information stored before that should be selected to be completely out of order). It is possible to make continuous notices.

After step S4106, in step S4107, a hold icon setting process for additionally displaying one hold icon 461 indicating that the variable display is held and stored in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

As shown in FIG. 42 (a), a hold icon 461 imitating a "floating ring" is displayed in the hold display area 462 provided at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 42. The hold display area 462 of the present embodiment is executed first of the execution support area 462a corresponding to the execution area of the hold information storage area and the hold area of the hold information storage area (first and second hold information storage areas). It is provided with a hold correspondence area 462b corresponding to the four hold information, and can display up to five hold icons 461. In the present embodiment, the hold icon 461 corresponding to the first variable display and the hold icon 461 corresponding to the second variable display are in a common mode, and the first variable display can be obtained only by visually recognizing the hold icon 461. It is not possible to identify which of the second variable display and the hold icon 461 corresponds to. The maximum number and mode of display of the hold icon 461 is not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, the mode of the hold icon 461 may be configured so that the first variation display and the second variation display can be distinguished.

In addition, the hold icon 461 may be derived in a manner suggesting a jackpot expectation of the corresponding variable display. Hereinafter, the hold icon 461 in such an embodiment is also referred to as a “look-ahead hold icon 463”. The look-ahead hold icon 463 of this embodiment is derived in a manner in which the character uses a "buoy". Further, a plurality of types of characters of the look-ahead hold icon 463 are prepared, and the pattern of the look-ahead hold icon 463 is associated with the winning expectation degree (big hit expectation degree) for the occurrence of the jackpot state. As a result, the look-ahead hold icon 463 is ranked according to the mode of the jackpot expectation, and by deriving the look-ahead hold icon 463, the jackpot expectation is suggested (pre-reading hold notice effect is performed). It is configured.

Further, when the look-ahead hold icon 463 is derived, the pattern of the look-ahead hold icon 463 changes until the variation display corresponding to the look-ahead hold icon 463 is exhausted (the hold change effect is derived). There are cases.

That is, in the hold icon setting process of step S4107, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to derive the look-ahead hold icon 463, and in the case of no winning, the pattern of the hold icon 461 is determined to be the default (floating ring only). Will be done. On the other hand, in the case of winning, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to perform the hold change effect, and in the case of winning, the hold change flag of the corresponding hold area is set to ON, and the look-ahead hold icon 463 is used as a pattern. The upper limit pattern that may be finally displayed and the tentative pattern that is a mode (lower rank) with a lower jackpot expectation than the upper limit pattern and is displayed first are determined. In the temporary pattern, there may be an option to display the default hold icon 461 at first. On the other hand, in the case of no winning, one pattern is determined as the pattern of the look-ahead hold icon 463.

Then, basically, the process of displaying the hold icon 461 of the determined pattern by arranging the hold icons 461 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 on the right side of the rightmost one is performed. Will be. In the present embodiment, since the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, when the second variation display is newly suspended while the first variation display is suspended. In the hold support area 462b, the hold icon 461 corresponding to the newly held second change display is displayed at the position on the left side of the leftmost hold icon 461 among the hold icons 461 corresponding to the first change display. It has become so.

Further, in the present embodiment, in step S4107, when the look-ahead hold icon 463 is derived to the hold display area 462, the look-ahead hold effect in progress flag is set to ON. After step S4107, this process ends.

Further, when a positive determination is made in step S4102, that is, when the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special fluctuation holding area). , Step S4108, and the second variable hold counter Ne, which counts the number of variable information held in the second reserved information storage area, is incremented by one.

After that, in step S4109, information on whether or not the starting command is a jackpot, information on the jackpot type, information on the reach pattern, information on the fluctuation time, and the like are stored in the first vacant hold area of the second hold information storage area. Remember in the area. In the following step S4110, the value of the continuous advance notice counter and the value of the advance notice type counter are acquired, and the counter values are stored in the hold area in which the fluctuation information is newly stored in step S4109 of the second hold information storage area.

After step S4110, in step S4111, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice is performed. In the continuous notice lottery process of step S4111, it is confirmed whether or not there is a hold area for which the continuous notice flag is already set to ON. When the existence is confirmed there, the lottery for continuous notice is not performed, and it is determined whether or not the hold area for which the continuous notice flag is turned on is the first hold area. If it is determined to be the first hold area, the continuous notice flag of the first hold area is turned off, and the display mode of the final continuous notice is derived in the second hold area where the new fluctuation information is held and stored. Set the flag to make it. That is, if the second variation display is suspended while the continuous advance notice is being performed for the first variation display, the continuous advance notice effect of the first variation display is interrupted by the second variation display. In the second variable display, a display mode for ending the continuous advance notice effect is derived.

On the other hand, when the existence of the holding area for which the continuous notice flag is set is not confirmed, and further, only the fluctuation information corresponding to the complete deviation (the deviation where the reach state does not occur) is stored in the second reservation area. If there is, a lottery for continuous notice will be held. The continuous advance notice lottery process of step S4111 only corresponds to the continuous advance notice lottery process of step S4106 corresponding to the entry into the second start winning device 33b, and the description thereof will be omitted.

After step S4111, in step S4112, the hold icon setting process is performed, and then this process ends. It is also possible to make a configuration in which continuous notice is not performed and a configuration in which the hold icon 461 is not displayed (instead, a lamp or the like different from the hold display devices 46a and 46b may be used to display the hold icon 461).

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3904 following step S3903, a continuous-changing counting process for counting the number of game balls (total number of payouts) to be paid out in a series of consecutive jackpot states with a high entry state intervening is performed. conduct.

Here, the continuous change counting process will be described with reference to FIG. 41. First, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not the continuous-changing flag, which is set on during the period from the start of the jackpot state to the transition to the low-entry state (during continuous-changing), is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S4901, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S4901, it is determined in step S4902 whether or not the ball has entered the variable winning devices 32a and 32b. If a negative determination is made in step S4902, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4902, in step S4903, "15" is added to the continuous-changing counter that counts the total number of payouts in the continuous-changing.

In the following step S4904, the value of the teaching trigger counter for determining that the total number of payouts in the continuous channel has reached a predetermined predetermined number is subtracted by "15". In the present embodiment, every time the total number of payouts in the consecutive chan increases by 2500, a specific payout number display (2500 ball arrival display, 5000 ball arrival display, 7500) that teaches that the total number of payouts has reached a predetermined predetermined number has been reached. (Ball arrival display, etc.) is derived to the decorative symbol display device 42. The specific payout number display is displayed in the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 42. The decorative pattern display device 42 includes a plurality of layers, and in the layer on which the specific payout number is displayed, an area other than the display of characters and numbers is set as a transparent area, and in the transparent area, the lower side (back side). The display mode of the layer is visible.

After step S4904, in step S4905, the payout number display process for displaying the count value of the continuous change counter on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, basically, the number of game values (game balls) given by the pachinko machine 10 is displayed between the start of the jackpot state and the transition to the low ball entry state (game ball). The number of payouts is displayed), and the displayed contents are updated as appropriate according to the count value of the counter during consecutive chans. It should be noted that the display of the number of payouts may be temporarily suspended (hidden) during the variable display after the reach state occurs, the opening of the jackpot state, the promotion effect, and the V prize effect.

After step S4905, in step S4906, it is determined whether or not the value of the teaching trigger counter is "0" or less. If a negative determination is made in step S4906, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S4906, the specific payout number display process for deriving the specific payout number display is performed in step S4907. It should be noted that a counter for counting the number of times the specific payout number display is executed may be provided, and the corresponding specific payout number display may be performed based on the number of such counters. In addition, if the timing of deriving the specific payout number display overlaps with the variable display after the reach state occurs, the opening of the jackpot state, the promotion effect, and the V winning effect, the specific payout number display is canceled or is performed. It may be turned after the corresponding production (the derivation timing is shifted).

In step S4908 following step S4907, "2500" is set again for the teaching trigger counter. After step S4908, this process ends. In the present embodiment, only the number of game balls paid out based on the winning balls into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b during the continuous chan is counted in the continuous chan counter, but the starting winning device 33b and the general It may be configured to count the game balls paid out based on the balls entered into the winning device 31 or the like.

The first variable winning device 32a is set to a two-round probability variation big hit state and a small hit state in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened for a short time (1.8 seconds twice), and the decorative symbol display device 42 sets the two-round probability variation. The opening effect and ending effect of the big hit state and the small hit state are omitted, and the payout number display is mainly updated based on the entry of the game ball into the first variable winning device 32a which is in the open state. A configuration that is only available may be adopted. In this case, if a two-round probability variation jackpot state occurs, the remaining number of fluctuations in the probability variation mode is reset. However, the display of the remaining number of times in the probability variation mode on the decorative symbol display device 42 is not reset. Further, due to the existence of the small hit state, it is difficult to grasp the occurrence of the two-round probability change big hit state, and even if the small hit state occurs, the remaining number of fluctuations in the probability change mode is not reset. If the two-round probability change jackpot state is won by the time the display of the remaining number of times in the probability change mode becomes 0, the probability change mode does not end and continues when the display of the remaining number of times in the probability change mode becomes 0. Here, when the display of the remaining number of times in the probabilistic mode becomes 0, or before that, the effect of whether to increase the display of the remaining number of times in the probabilistic mode and the effect of increasing are derived to improve the effectability. Can be planned.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, if a negative determination is made after step S3904 or in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3905, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed from. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S3906, while if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to step S3914.

In step S3906, various counter update processes are executed. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying the decorative symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the upper / middle / lower upper / middle / lower symbols used for setting the decorative symbol counter CO at the time of a big hit and the outlier symbols of the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO determines the symbol (big hit symbol) at the time when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped when the jackpot state occurs, and in the present embodiment, it is used as the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO. Is prepared with 9 (0 to 8) counter values. That is, the decorative symbol counter CO at the time of a big hit is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 8, reach the upper limit value (that is, 8), and then return to 0.

Then, when a variation pattern command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is received from the main control device 261, for example, if the counter value is 0, it is "1" based on a table (a table that associates the counter value with the decorative symbol) (not shown). The combination of jackpot symbols is determined, such as (doublet) and 1 if it is "2" (doublet). The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3906, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub control device 262 receives the fluctuation pattern command, as will be described later. In the present embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but it is not stored in the buffer and the counter value is referred to at the timing when the variation pattern command is received. You may do so.

Further, when a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a normal jackpot is received, for example, if the counter value is 0 or 1, it is "2" (doublet), and if it is 2 to 4, it is "4" (doublet). The combination of jackpot symbols is determined, such as "6" (doublet) for 5 and 6, and "8" (doublet) for 7 and 8.

The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combination of the stopped symbols in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the winning / failing lottery is missed, and each column. In, since any of the nine decorative symbols is displayed, nine (0 to 8) counter values are prepared for each. The upper symbol counter CL determines the stop symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol counter CM determines the stop symbol in the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol counter CR determines the stop symbol in the lower symbol display area.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. .. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the front-rear reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than the front-rear, and the complete off. It is stored in one of the symbol buffers.

Here, the update processing of each symbol counter CL, CM, and CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is the update time of the upper symbol counter CL, and in step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is the update time of the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment is made in step S4001. Further, when the upper symbol counter CL is updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment is made in step S4002. Then, if the update time of the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process proceeds to step S4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. If the update time of the middle symbol counter CM (YES in step S4002), the process proceeds to step S4004 to update the middle symbol counter CM. Further, if the update time of the lower symbol counter CR (both steps S4001 and S4002 are NO), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the lower symbol counter CR. In the update of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 8 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. The calculation result is used as the current value of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the CL, CM, CR update process, the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update times of the counter values overlap. There is no. As a result, one set of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated every time the update process is executed three times.

After that, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbol in the upper symbol display area and the symbol in the lower symbol display area are the same). , In the case of a combination of reach symbols (YES in S4006), in step S4007, it is determined whether or not the combination of jackpot symbols (the symbols in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbols in the middle symbol display area are the same). .. If affirmative determination is made in step S4007, the present process is terminated as it is without storing the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of front-back and out-of-bounds symbols. When the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front-rear and front-rear symbols (front-rear and front-reach) (YES in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is the front-rear and front-reach reach of the RAM 553. It is stored in the symbol buffer and this process is terminated. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols other than the front-back deviation (reach other than the front-rear deviation) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is used as the RAM 553. Stores in the reach symbol buffer except for the front and back deviations of, and ends this process.

Further, when the combination is other than the reach symbol (S4006 is NO), the combination of the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of the off symbols (completely off symbols). The combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in the completely off symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and this processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, the hold process is performed in step S3907. Hereinafter, the hold process will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been received (whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is larger than "0". If a negative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if the fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is not stored on hold, the process proceeds to step S4203, and the value of the first fluctuation hold counter Nd is subtracted by 1.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, and when the second variation display is reserved and stored, the first variation display is digested. There is no such thing. That is, when the variation information of the second variation display is reserved and stored in the second reserved information storage area, the variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display is not sent. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in step S4202, by determining whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is larger than "0", the fluctuation pattern command displays the first fluctuation and the second fluctuation. Which of the fluctuation information is possessed is determined. Of course, the fluctuation pattern command is provided with information on which of the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation information corresponds to, and the fluctuation pattern command is based on the fluctuation pattern command and the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display. It may be determined which fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is possessed.

After step S4203, in step S4204, a process of shifting the data stored in the first reserved information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the first hold information storage area to the execution area side, and is the hold first area. → Execution area, Hold 2nd area → Hold 1st area, Hold 3rd area → Hold 2nd area, Hold 4th area → Hold 3rd area, and so on. After step S4204, the process proceeds to step S4207.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S4202, that is, when even one fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is reserved and stored, the value of the second fluctuation holding counter Ne is subtracted by 1 in step S4205.

In the following step S4206, a process of shifting the data stored in the second reserved information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the second hold information storage area to the execution area side, and is a process of sequentially shifting the hold 1st area → execution area, hold second. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. After step S4206, the process proceeds to step S4207. In the present embodiment, the reserved information storage area has only one execution area, and the data stored in the first reserved information storage area and the second reserved information storage area are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the data. When it is done, it will be shifted to a common execution area.

In step S4207, a notice setting process for determining the type of display effect used for continuous notice is performed. In the notice setting process of step S4207, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process of step S4106) of the execution area of the reserved information storage area is on, and if it is negatively determined, the continuous notice is given. Is not performed, so this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if affirmative judgment is made, whether or not it is a big hit, what kind of type is it if it is a big hit, what is the reach pattern if it is not a big hit, etc. are determined based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command. , Refer to the corresponding table to determine the type of continuous notice. The continuous notice of the type determined here will be derived at the desired timing in the corresponding variation display.

After step S4207, in step S4208, a hold icon shift process for shifting the hold icon 461 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. The hold icon storage area for storing the type of the hold icon 461 is provided in each hold area and the execution area of the hold information storage area, and the above-mentioned hold information storage is also provided for the information related to the hold icon 461. It is designed to be shifted by the data shift process of the area.

The hold icon shift process is a process for redrawing the hold icon 461 in response to such a data shift, and in the decorative symbol display device 42, the most variable display is digested (executed) one by one. The hold icon 461 located on the left is deleted, and the hold icon 461 placed on the right side of the hold icon 461 is shifted to the left (the display location is moved). After step S4208, this process ends.

In the present embodiment, if there is a hold area in which the hold change flag is set to be on prior to the process of redrawing the hold icon 461 in step S4208, the hold change effect of the look-ahead hold icon 463 is performed. A lottery is performed to decide whether or not to do so, and if a winner is won, the pattern of the look-ahead hold icon 463 is changed to a higher rank one (however, the rank of the upper limit pattern is not exceeded). In addition, when it is determined that the hold area for which the hold change flag is set does not exist, the look-ahead hold effect in progress flag is turned off. Further, by changing the pattern of the look-ahead hold icon 463, when the look-ahead hold icon 463 reaches the upper limit pattern, the look-ahead hold effect in progress flag is turned off and the hold change flag is turned off. ing.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, the display setting process is performed in step S3908. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when a variation pattern command is received, the sub-control device 262 sets the game state (game mode), variation type (big hit type in the case of a jackpot, reach pattern in the case of a miss), variation time, and the like. Based on this, the corresponding table is referred to, and the effect pattern of the effect display including the variable display of the decorative pattern is determined. Then, control such as outputting the determined item to the display control device 45 as a display command is performed.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to a command from the sub control device 262, and starts variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, once the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the symbol is designed in cooperation with the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses. The fluctuation display of is continued.

Further, when starting the variation display, when the continuous advance notice flag of the execution area of the hold information storage area (see the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4106) is on, each situation is based on the variation information of the variation pattern command. With reference to the table corresponding to, the type of continuous advance notice to be derived to the variable display is determined, the derivation of the advance notice effect different from the continuous advance notice is determined, and the display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125 or the like is performed. Or something. Further, in the display setting process of step S3908, a process of performing effect control during a big hit (hit display process) is also performed.

Here, the variable display setting process performed in the display setting process of step S3908 will be described with reference to FIG. 39.

First, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been received. The various fluctuation information included in the fluctuation pattern command may be configured to be stored in the execution area of the reserved information storage area, or may be configured to be stored in a separate storage area. Further, for example, the flag corresponding to the case where the processing corresponding to the reception of the fluctuation pattern command is performed in the hold processing (see FIG. 36) is turned on, and the fluctuation display is set in the display setting processing. It may be configured so that the flag is turned off, and by checking the flag, it may be determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been received.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, it is determined in step S4502 whether or not the mode is in the probability variation mode. If affirmative determination is made in step S4502, in step S4503, a process (probability change mode pattern setting process) for setting an effect display (variation display of decorative symbols) in the probability change mode is performed. In addition, here, the setting related to the continuous notice is also made.

The effect display (variable display of the decorative pattern) of the decorative pattern display device 42 is basically a variable display of the decorative pattern, a moving image effect display (hereinafter, also referred to as "main effect"), a cut-in effect, and a button effect. It is configured in combination with a temporary (for example, still image) staging display (hereinafter, also referred to as “sub staging”) such as. Further, the effect display of the decorative pattern display device 42 is basically set based on the information of the fluctuation pattern command, but the one related to the continuous advance notice is additionally set based on the information of the hold information execution area. ..

The effect display develops with the passage of time from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is one of the three symbol display areas divided in the display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42 from the start of the variation. "Scene 1" until the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol in the symbol display area that is stopped first is called the first symbol) is stopped and displayed in one symbol display area, and "first stop" where the first symbol is stopped and displayed. "Scene 2" until the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol in the symbol display area to be stopped second is called the second symbol) is stopped and displayed in two of the symbol display areas. From the "second stop" where the symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol in the symbol display area that is stopped third is called the third symbol) is stopped and displayed in all three symbol display areas of the symbol display area. It is composed of "scene 3" up to the "third stop". In particular, "Scene 3" is "Scene 3-1" from "second stop" to the timing of development from "super reach production" (hereinafter, simply referred to as "super development"), and from "super development" to "super development". It can be divided into "Scene 3-2" up to "Final production" and "Scene 3-3 (last scene)" from the start of "Final production" to the end of variable display (third stop) (of course). If the reach state is not reached, the super reach effect may not occur). Up to scene 2, moving images and the like along the motif of the pachinko machine 10 are derived, and suggestions such as whether or not to reach is also made. Furthermore, if there are multiple production stages (the background and the way the production is shown up to the super reach are different), or if the volume and amount of light can be changed, it can be changed from the start of fluctuation to the end of scene 2. However, it cannot be changed after scene 3. Scene 3-1 is basically the same mode as long as the stop mode of the decorative symbol at the time of the second stop and whether or not it develops into the super reach effect are the same.

Here, the "settlement effect" is a continuation of the "result teaching effect" of whether or not the effect display (main effect) ends in the form of success, and the animation of the super reach effect immediately before the result instruction effect. , It is composed of "Kiwa production" that discourages the derivation of the result teaching production and fuels the super reach production. Regarding the variable display of decorative symbols, the movement speed of the third symbol (decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area) that is still variablely displayed is slowed down during the period when the "Kiwa effect" is derived, and the third symbol is displayed. The third symbol is emphasized, such as the size of the is enlarged (the mode of voice and illumination also changes). Also, instead of emphasizing the third symbol, the animation showing the result of the winning / failing lottery (for example, the final action of the character's predetermined challenge) is emphasized (for example, slow motion or still image, or the character's There is also a pattern (the face and the part where the result of the challenge can be seen are highlighted or deformed). It should be noted that the kiwa effect of the final effect is configured such that the same moving image is repeatedly derived, the same still image is continuously derived, or a predetermined moving image is derived in slow motion.

After step S4503, in step S4504, the value of the fluctuation number grasping counter for grasping the remaining period of the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode is subtracted by 1 in the sub control device 462. In the following step S4506, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation number grasping counter is a specific value. If a negative determination is made in step S4506, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4506, the remaining number of times specific display setting is performed in step S4506, and this process is terminated. More specifically, at the start of the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, a value indicating the upper limit of the variation display that can be performed in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode is set in the variation count grasping counter, and the probability variation mode, And, 1 is subtracted every time the variable display is performed in the time reduction mode. Further, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays a display corresponding to the value of the fluctuation number grasping counter, that is, the probability variation mode and the remaining number of fluctuations in the time reduction mode. The remaining number of times display is basically always displayed in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode (it is not displayed after the reach of the variation display).

Further, for example, when the specific value in step S4505 is set to "50, 10, 3, 2, 1", in step S4506, in addition to the remaining number of times display, comparison is made in the decorative symbol display device 42 at the start of fluctuation. The process for deriving the remaining number of times specific display including the characters "remaining 50 times, remaining 10 times, remaining 3 times, remaining 2 times, last" is performed so as to be conspicuous.

If a negative determination is made in step S4502, it is determined in step S4507 whether or not the time reduction mode is used. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4507, in step S4508, a process (time saving mode pattern setting process) for setting an effect display (variable display of decorative symbols) in the time reduction mode is performed. In addition, here, the setting related to the continuous notice is also made. After the step S4508, the process proceeds to step S4504 described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S4507, a process (normal mode pattern setting process) for setting an effect display (variable display of decorative symbols) in the normal mode is performed in step S4509. In addition, here, the setting related to the continuous notice is also made. After the step S4509, this process ends. When the remaining number of times of the probability change mode and the time reduction mode reaches a specific number from the main control device 261, a corresponding command is output to the sub control device 262, and the sub control device 262 is based on the command. The remaining number of times may be specified and displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 performs an effect display in which the character A, the character B, the character C, the character D, the character E, the character F, the character G, and the character H appear. In particular, in the present embodiment, one of them can be specified by the player. That is, the menu screen is opened by operating the effect button 125 in a state where the fluctuation display of the normal game state, which is not a hit state, is performed, and the character as shown in FIG. 42 (b) is further opened from the menu screen. By opening the selection screen, operating the cross button 126 to move the cursor to a predetermined character icon, and operating the effect button 125, the selection information of the corresponding character is stored in the specific character selection storage area.

Then, the effect of deriving the character (hereinafter, also referred to as "specific character") shown in the specific character selection storage area (hereinafter, also referred to as "specific character display") is derived from other characters (general characters). It is derived with priority over the production. It should be noted that preferentially deriving a specific character is associated with the occurrence of a state that is easier to derive than other characters, has more opportunities to be displayed, or is desirable for the player (for example, a jackpot expectation). The degree will increase). For example, once in the jackpot state, the jackpot movie from which the specific character is derived is derived, and while the specific character is displayed, basically, the visual mode of the specific character display is not obstructed by other displays. Or, in a normal game state, a specific character is selected as a display that continues to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 across a plurality of variable displays. Furthermore, when a specific character is selected in the cut-in effect as a sub effect (character, character, and predetermined background are displayed superimposed on the main video), compared to the case where other characters are selected. The jackpot expectation increases, or if multiple super reach effects are selectively displayed and the options include a specific character, the jackpot expectation increases, and if a specific character is selected, the jackpot expectation increases. May be adopted such that the number increases. In addition, a part of the decorative symbol derived from the decorative symbol display device 42 is composed of a character image, and the character identified as a specific character by the player is configured to correspond to the decorative symbol of the number pattern "7". You may.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), a specific character display area 465 is provided in the lower right portion of the display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42, except for the jackpot state and the standby state in which the game is not performed for a predetermined time. In the state, the specific character selected by the player is displayed. In the specific character display area 465, a display in which a specific character or the like operates is derived, and in some cases, a game suggestion or the like (whether or not a reach is achieved, whether or not a jackpot is achieved, and a jackpot probability can be set in a plurality of stages. In the configuration, it suggests and teaches the current settings, etc.). When a mobile interlocking game in which data is exchanged between the pachinko machine 10 and the server is performed via the mobile communication terminal, the password issued by the server can be input to the pachinko machine 10 to obtain the previous time. It may be configured so that the memory of the specific character display of the game is reflected in the current game. In addition, points and the like may be added by performing the mobile interlocking game, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the points and the like, the items that can be set by the player for the specific character may be increased. ..

Further, regarding the setting of the specific character, it is not reset only when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and on, but it is reset by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while operating the RAM erasing switch 323. ing. For example, in the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, the character C is set as a specific character (the decorative symbols of "3" and "7" become the character C). The number of characters appearing in the decorative pattern display device 42 is not particularly limited, and the number of characters that can be specified as specific characters among the appearing characters is not particularly limited, and is not particularly limited for each model. It is configurable. Further, the specific character may be configured to be reset only when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and on, and the specific character set when setting the specific character in the initialization process is not particularly limited. , For example, it may be decided at random (lottery).

In addition, for example, by accumulating a specific number of points for the effect, the corresponding effect may be derived. For example, a point counter is provided in which "1" is added every 100 times of variable display, "1" is added every time a front-back off reach is performed, and "2" is added for each big hit, and the value of the point counter is set. By setting it to a specific value, the ban on predetermined customization of the character may be lifted, and the value of the point counter may be reset to "0". In addition, the player may select a customization that can be selected within the range of the number of possessed points and lift the ban, or a state in which points of the point counter are likely to be accumulated (for example, a transition with a probability of 1/3 after a front-back off reach). However, in the case of transition, it will continue until the fluctuation display is performed 10 or 20 times, and the points for the front-back off reach and the jackpot occurrence during that time will be 5 times, and 1/3 for each fluctuation will be "1" points. It may be configured to be added (the degree of addition of points may be taught at any time, may be given collectively, may not be taught in part or in whole, or may be combined as appropriate. ), In the time reduction mode, "1" points may be added even if the reach is not out of front and back).

In addition, even if the menu screen is not opened, an operation means that can directly change the volume and the amount of light is provided by performing an operation during the non-variable display, or an operation means that directly opens the character selection screen is provided. It may be that. Further, the operation means (effect operation means) is not limited to the button type, and may be configured by a touch panel capable of grasping the contact position or the proximity position.

As an extra game, there are suggestions and teachings about the game (variable display, suggestions for the contents of the jackpot state, suggestions for settings in a configuration where the hit probability can be set in multiple stages, etc.), or simply unusual modes or players. By operating the effect button 125 at a specific timing of the variable display or the jackpot state with the intention of showing the mode of the selected character, the corresponding mode is derived (at the specific timing, the corresponding correspondence is provided. In order to make it derivable, the corresponding mode may be generated regardless of whether it is actually displayed or not).

Next, the hit display process performed in the display setting process of step S3908 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot state has been received from the main control device 261. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, in step S4702, the sub-side jackpot middle flag for confirming that the sub-control device 262 is in the jackpot state is set on. After step S4702, in step S4703, a value corresponding to the jackpot type (number of rounds) is set for the round grasping counter for grasping the number of rounds in the jackpot state (based on the information included in the opening command). That is, "10" is set for "10RS" and "10RN", and "4" is set for "4RS".

After that, in step S4704, the opening effect for 8 seconds is set (the image of the decorative symbol display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, and the setting of the lighting mode of various lamps).

In the following step S4705, the remaining time of the effect in the jackpot state (in this embodiment, the opening effect, the ending effect, and each jackpot movie performed from the end of the opening effect to the start of the ending effect) is measured (update timing). (Measure) Set the value "2000" corresponding to the time of the opening effect to the remaining time measurement timer.

After step S4705, in step S4706, it is determined whether or not the continuous-changing flag indicating that the consecutive-changing state is being repeated while intervening the high-entry state is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S4706, that is, if it is a so-called "first hit" in which the jackpot state is won in the normal mode, the continuous-changing flag is set to ON in step S4707.

In the following step S4708, the value of the continuous chan counter that counts the number of game balls (total number of payouts) paid out based on the balls entered into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b during the continuous chan is set to "0". .. During the continuous change, the “payout number display” is derived in the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the value of the continuous change counter. Further, in step S4709, "2500" is set for the teaching trigger counter for grasping the timing when the total number of payouts has increased by 2500 (2500 shots) during the continuous chan. Every time the value of the teaching opportunity counter becomes "0", as a turning point of the game (continuous chan state), "specific payout number display" ("2,500 balls reached", "5,000 balls reached", " Display such as "7500 balls reached") is derived.

After step S4709, or when affirmative determination is made in step S4706, in step S4710, a jackpot moving image setting process for setting the jackpot moving image derived from the decorative symbol display device 42 in the jackpot state is performed.

In the present embodiment, basically, during the round period of the jackpot state (from the end of the opening effect to the start of the ending effect), the 15-second uniform jackpot moving image is sequentially played. As a jackpot movie, there are 3 individually specialized patterns for characters A to H (24 patterns in total), 3 patterns for characters A to D, and 3 patterns for characters E to H. There are three patterns in which characters A, C, E, and G appear, three patterns in which characters B, D, F, and H appear, and four patterns in which all casts appear. In a jackpot movie in which multiple characters appear, not all of the target characters are always displayed. Furthermore, other characters do not appear in the jackpot movie that corresponds to each character individually. In the jackpot moving image setting process of step S4710, the combination of the jackpot moving images is determined and stored in the jackpot moving image combination storage area so that the execution order can be understood. In addition, set a pointer that indicates the type of jackpot video to be executed. The combination of the jackpot moving images may be a configuration in which one is selected from a predetermined combination (scenario), or a configuration in which the combination is completely randomly determined. Also, the jackpot of the maximum length for 10 rounds corresponding to the jackpot of 10 rounds (the time obtained by multiplying the time obtained by adding the maximum time of the round period (30 seconds) and the time of the interval period by the total number of rounds). The combination of moving images may be set, or the combination may be configured to loop, although it is not enough for 10 rounds.

Also, in the jackpot state, in addition to the jackpot movie and the like, an event production is performed. As will be described in detail later, in the first round, a "promotion challenge" that teaches whether or not the jackpot type is a more desirable type for the player, and that there is a corresponding variable display that corresponds to the jackpot. "Direction" is performed, and in the second round, a guide display for prompting the entry of the game ball into the special entry portion 145 of the second variable winning device 32b is performed, and a V winning effect accompanying the entry is performed. "Winning challenge production" will be performed. In this example, since the event production (promotion challenge production and V winning challenge production) is performed using the entire display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42 in the first and second rounds, the first and second rounds are performed. The jackpot video for use is not set.

After step S4710, in step S4711, the jackpot moving image waiting flag indicating that the state is waiting for the start of the jackpot moving image is set to be turned on, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined whether or not the sub-side jackpot middle flag is set to ON in step S4712. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4712, it is determined in step S4713 whether or not a round command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4713, a round display setting for displaying a round indicating the current number of jackpot rounds is performed in step S4714. For example, in "10RS", if the value of the round grasp counter is "10", "first round" is displayed, and if the value of the round grasp counter is "1", "final round" is displayed.

In the following step S4715, whether or not it is the first round (whether or not the value of the round grasp counter is "10" if it is a big hit of 10 rounds, or if it is a big hit of 4 rounds, the value of the round grasp counter is "". 4 ”or not) is determined.

If affirmative determination is made in step S4715, it is determined in step S4716 whether or not the jackpot type has already been deterministically taught in the decorative symbol display device 42. That is, for example, in the normal mode, there is a possibility of winning either "4RS" or "10RN", and "4RS" is the more desirable jackpot type for the player. Further, although the decorative symbol display device 42 is only a display for staging, even if the decorative symbol display device 42 is displayed, for example, after it is displayed that the player has won the jackpot state of the type desired by the player, in fact, It is designed so that it does not occur that the player is in a jackpot state of the type that is not desirable for the player. That is, the decorative symbol display device 42 teaches that the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player among the jackpot types that can occur in the situation where the jackpot state occurs is taught, so that the jackpot type is definitely taught. It will be dressed up.

In step S4716, when the decorative symbol display device 42 has already taught that the mode is "4RS" in the normal mode (such as when the odd-numbered decorative symbols are aligned), the probability variation mode, and the time reduction are performed. When the decorative symbol display device 42 teaches that the mode is "10RS" (such as when the doublets of the decorative symbol of "7" are aligned), a positive determination is made.

If a negative determination is made in step S4716, the promotion challenge effect is set in step S4717. In the normal mode, the promotion challenge production may actually be "4RS" in a state where the decorative symbol display device 42 does not teach which of "4RS" and "10RN" was won (successful production). In the probabilistic mode and the time reduction mode, the decorative symbol display device 42 teaches which of "10RS" and "4RS" was won. In the state where it is not done, it may actually be "10RS" (it is taught that it is "10RS" by the success of the production). In step S4718 following step S4717, the in-event flag indicating that the event is being produced is set to on. After that, the process proceeds to step S4737 described later.

In addition, in the promotion challenge production, when the second variation display corresponding to the jackpot (may be limited to 10RS) is reserved and stored (the high ball entry state after the end of the jackpot state), this is the case in the promotion challenge production. It may be configured to teach (so-called "holding consecutive hits"). For example, even if an affirmative determination is made in step S4716, a promotion challenge effect may be performed as long as information indicating a big hit is stored in the storage area of the second reserved information storage area (affirmative determination in step S4716). If so, you can know the pending consecutive hits when the promotion challenge production occurs). Further, the mode of promotion challenge production is not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, the result is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 125. For example, when teaching the winning of "4RS" by the jackpot in the normal mode, after a predetermined effect, a display prompting the operation of the effect button 125 is displayed. Then, the "name given to the probability change mode" is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 125, and further, in the case of a hold consecutive hit, the display prompting the operation of the effect button 125 is displayed again, and the operation of the effect button 125 is performed. It may be displayed as "V. stock" or the like based on.

Further, if the affirmative determination is made in step S4716, the process proceeds to step S4737 described later without setting the promotion challenge effect. In the present embodiment, when a positive determination is made in step S4716, a normal jackpot moving image is derived, but a dedicated effect display (moving image) may be derived. ..

If a negative determination is made in step S4715, it is determined in step S4719 whether or not it is the final round (whether or not the value of the round grasp counter is "1"). If a negative determination is made in step S4719, that is, if it is an intermediate round, the process proceeds to step S4737 described later. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S4719, the setting for executing the final round effect (such as dedicating the music) is made in step S4720, and then the process proceeds to step S4737 described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S4713, it is determined in step S4721 whether or not the V winning round command has been received. If affirmative determination is made in step S4721, a round display setting is made in step S4722 (in this embodiment, a V winning round command is output at the start of the second round of "10RS" and "4RS". Therefore, the "second round" is displayed).

In the following step S4723, the setting for deriving the V winning challenge effect is made. In particular, here, a guide display for encouraging the entry of a game ball into the special entry portion 145 of the second variable winning device 32b is performed. After that, in step S4724, the event in-event flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S4737 described later. If the big hit movie is derived by setting the flag during the event to ON, the big hit movie will be stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S4721, it is determined in step S4725 whether or not a short round command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4725, a round display setting is made in step S4726 (in this embodiment, a short round command is output at the start of the second round of "10RN", so that the "second round" is performed. Is displayed). After that, the process proceeds to step S4737 described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S4725, it is determined in step S4727 whether or not an interval command has been received. If affirmative determination is made in step S4727, the value of the round grasp counter is subtracted by "1" in step S4728. Further, in step S4729, the round display is erased, and in step S4730, the in-event flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S4737 described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S4727, it is determined in step S4731 whether or not a hit end command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4731, the sub-side jackpot middle flag is turned off in step S4732, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4731, it is determined in step S4733 whether or not the ending command has been received. If the affirmative determination is made in step S4733, the process of subtracting the value of the round grasp counter by "1" is performed in step S4734. Further, in step S4735, the jackpot moving image is ended and the ending effect is set. In the following step S4736, a value corresponding to the ending effect time (for example, 10 seconds) is set for the remaining time measurement timer. After that, this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S4733, a positive determination is made in step S4716, or in step S4718, step S4720, step S4724, step S4726, and step S4737 that shifts after step S4730, the event-in-event flag is set. Determines if it is set to ON.

If affirmative determination is made in step S4737, it is determined in step S4738 whether or not a special entry command has been received. When the affirmative determination is made in step S4738, that is, when the game ball enters the special entry portion 145 of the second variable winning device 32b, the game ball enters the special entry portion 145 in step S4739. This process ends after setting the V winning effect that teaches the player that (the right of the probability change mode has been granted). In this embodiment, it is taught that the special ball entry section 145 is in the open state and that the game ball has entered the special ball entry section 145 (guide display and V winning effect are performed). The display device 42 constitutes a mode teaching means and a ball entry teaching means. Further, the decorative symbol display device 42 constitutes a ball entry teaching means from the viewpoint of displaying (displaying the number of payouts) corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b.

If a negative determination is made in step S4737, the value of the remaining time measurement timer is subtracted by "1" in step S4740. In the following step S4741, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining time measurement timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S4741, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4741, it is determined in step S4742 whether or not the jackpot moving image standby flag is set to ON. If affirmative determination is made in step S4742, the jackpot moving image standby flag is turned off in step S4743.

After step S4743, in step S4744, a process of starting a jackpot moving image is performed. The type of jackpot video to be started is set by referring to the pointer in the jackpot video combination storage area. In the following step S4745, a value corresponding to the time of the jackpot moving image (uniformly 15 seconds) is set for the remaining time measurement timer. After that, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4742, it is determined in step S4746 whether or not the ending is in progress (whether or not the value of the round grasp counter is "0"). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4746, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S4746, the process of updating the jackpot moving image is performed in step S4747. That is, the pointer of the jackpot moving image combination storage area is set to indicate the next jackpot moving image.

After that, in step S4744 described above, the process of starting the jackpot moving image indicated by the pointer of the jackpot moving image combination storage area is performed, and in step SS4745, the value corresponding to the time of the jackpot moving image is set in the remaining time measurement timer, and then this End the process.

In addition, in order to increase the player's interest in the effect, the effect button 125 or the cross button 126 (as a modification, a sensor that detects the approach or contact of an object to a predetermined part) is appropriately used for the effect (button). It may be (providing a production). For example, as a button effect, a button operation valid period in which the operation of the effect button 125 is reflected in the effect is provided, and the operation method of the effect button 125 in the button operation valid period is appropriately set for each button effect (for example, repeated hitting or pressing). (Continue, press a predetermined number of times, press / release at the specified timing, etc.), as a result of the button effect, the pattern that succeeds after the effect button 125 is properly operated, and the operation of the effect button 125 are appropriate. It is also possible to derive different modes of staging depending on the pattern in which the staging button 125 is performed and the pattern is disengaged, and the pattern in which the staging button 125 is not properly operated. Further, the pattern of the effect in which the visual mode is switched by the operation of the effect button 125 is not particularly limited. For example, in addition to the configuration for switching the display of the decorative symbol display device 42, for example, the front position of the decorative symbol display device 42. Then, the movable accessory that can be displaced is displaced to the position where it is retracted from the front position (for example, the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is temporarily hidden by the movable accessory, and the movable accessory is triggered by the operation of the effect button 125. Is displaced to the retracted position so that the result of the effect display can be visually recognized), and the display mode of the transmissive avant-garde display device provided so as to cover the front of the game area changes (for example, the decorative pattern display device). In 42, a display prompting the operation of the effect button 125 is performed, and when the effect button 125 is operated, the entire display unit of the avant-garde display device is blacked out (a jackpot is displayed later). It is possible to set as appropriate, such as generating the attached sound effect.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3909, the fluctuation stop processing relating to the stop of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is executed. Here, the fluctuation stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 40.

First, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not a stop command (see step S821 of the special display control process) has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4401, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4401, in step S4402, a process of stopping and displaying the variation display in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

After step S4402, in step S4403, it is determined whether or not the support end command (see step S1016 of the determination information setting process) has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4403, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S4403, the process of changing the effect stage displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 from the "probability change stage" or "pull-back stage" to the "normal stage" in step S4404. I do.

In the following step S4405, the continuous chan middle flag is turned off, and in step S4406, the continuous chan end count display process for teaching the contents of the continuous chan (total number of payouts, etc.) is performed, and then this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in the lamp setting process of step S3910, the lighting pattern of the lamp / illumination is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

In the voice setting process of step S3911, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, when commands related to voice such as notification of error occurrence are transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for performing these controls are also made in step S3911.

In step S3912, other processing such as control setting of the customer waiting effect is performed. In the present embodiment, even if the variable display is not performed and the hit state is not performed, if the detection is performed based on the contact with the handle 18 or the operation of the staging button 125, the stop display is finally displayed. The aspect in which the decorative design is displayed is maintained. On the other hand, when the player is not playing (a state in which detection based on contact with the handle 18 or operation of the effect button 125 is not performed) continues for a specified time, the standby mode (energy saving mode). In the decorative symbol display device 42, for example, a demo screen display including a series of moving images or still images is derived instead of the decorative symbol. In the demo screen display, the screen may be darkened (or may be configured to be dark after a lapse of a specified time after shifting to the demo screen display. In the standby mode, the touch to the handle 18 or the effect button 125 may be pressed. By performing detection based on operations, etc. (when the screen is dark, a bright demo screen display is once derived, and in that state, it is based on contact with the handle 18 or operation with the effect button 125, etc. (By detecting), the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed is derived.

In the state where the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed is derived (the state is neither the hit state nor the variable display), the menu screen can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 by operating the effect button 125. Is. By opening the menu screen, it is possible to change the production stage, adjust the amount of light, adjust the volume, display the explanation of the game method, and display the explanation of characters and motifs. However, the menu screen cannot be displayed during the variable display and the hit state. In addition, the menu screen is closed not only when the cross-shaped button 126 and the effect button 125 are operated to close the menu screen, but also when the variable display is started. .. By opening the menu screen, you can enter a password (the mode changes according to the entered password) and display a two-dimensional code (the two-dimensional code is based on the content of this game). Information may be included so that it can be confirmed on a mobile communication terminal owned by the player).

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode can be switched directly (without opening the menu screen) by operating the effect button 125 in a state where the variable display is being performed and reach is not generated. It has become. Further, it is possible to directly adjust the amount of light by operating the up and down of the cross-shaped button 126 while the variable display is in progress and no reach is generated, and the left and right of the cross-shaped button 126 are operated. This makes it possible to adjust the volume directly.

In step S3913, an external output process for transmitting a control signal based on the setting contents of steps S3906 to S3913 to each device is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

After the processes of steps S3906 to S3913 performed every 2 msec are executed, or if a negative determination is made in the above step S3905, the process proceeds to step S3914 and whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. To determine. The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 261.

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3915, and it is determined whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to the process of step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3914 that the power cutoff occurrence information is stored, the power cutoff process is executed in step S3916. In the power off processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased. After executing the power off processing, the processing loops infinitely.

As described in detail above, in the present embodiment, the decorative panel 401 is provided in front of the right-handed winning unit 37 provided at the lower right of the gaming area, and the player is in front of the pachinko machine 10 and is decorated. By visually recognizing the decorative panel 401 from the first position, which is the position of the viewpoint when the player's face is located in front of the panel 401, the first decoration of the front side sheet 403 provided on the front side of the decorative panel 401 The portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 of the rear surface side sheet 404 provided on the rear surface side of the decorative panel 401 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and the aspect of the first decorative portion 405 and the aspect of the second decorative portion 407 are The combined specific mode (in this example, a picture of a whale and a school of fish) is visible. That is, for example, when the player visually recognizes the pachinko machine 10 from a position substantially above the front of the decorative panel 401 when the player searches for and moves the pachinko machine 10 playing a game in the game hall, a specific mode can be shown. It is possible to promote the motivation to play.

Further, the player is in front of the pachinko machine 10 and at a position of a viewpoint where the player's face faces the substantially central portion of the pachinko machine 10 (game area) and looks down at the decorative panel 401 on the right side. By visually recognizing the decorative panel 401 from a certain second position, the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 of the decorative panel 401 are separated from each other to the left and right, and the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are separated from each other. The right-handed winning unit 37 arranged behind the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized via the first transmission portion 406 and the second transmission portion 408. That is, if the player sits in a posture almost straight to the chair provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 and turns only his face toward the right-handed winning unit 37, the player is provided in the right-handed winning unit 37. The open / closed state of various winning devices (first variable winning device 32a, second variable winning device 32b, distribution device 147, second starting winning device 33b) and the behavior of the gaming ball moving the right-handed winning unit 37 (to the winning device). It is possible to visually recognize the entry of the game ball, etc.), and it is possible to immediately grasp the game situation behind the decorative panel 401.

That is, in recent pachinko machines, the display device (decorative symbol display device 42) installed in the center of the game area has become larger, and the winning unit (right-handed winning) is a collection of a plurality of winning devices capable of entering a game ball. A unit 37) is provided. Along with this, while the gaming area is expanded, the range of the front surface of the pachinko machine on the outer side of the gaming area (front surface of the front frame 14 and the like) is narrowed. For this reason, it is difficult to secure a cohesive area (relatively large area) where decoration can be performed on the front side of the pachinko machine. It is also conceivable to decorate the game board or make the game board transparent and install decorative members behind it, but a game ball that moves in the game area, a winning device installed in the game area, etc. Visibility is easily obstructed behind the pachinko machine (a large range cannot be secured), and the position is relatively far from the player located in front of the pachinko machine, so that the visibility is reduced (game area). It is more difficult to see if the light is reflected on the decoration provided in the back of the slingshot).

In this respect, in the present embodiment, the decorative panel 401 is installed in front of the right-handed winning unit 37 in the game area. That is, when the player visually recognizes the decorative panel 401 from the second position, the area behind the decorative panel 401 (right-handed winning unit 37) can be visually recognized via the decorative panel 401. It is possible to install it in a relatively wide range in a game area that is easily noticed (there is a high possibility that the game area is visually recognized even when searching for a pachinko machine that plays a game). Therefore, without reducing the game area (without reducing the installation location of the right-handed winning unit 37), while ensuring the visibility of the right-handed winning unit 37 (the area on the player side of the right-handed winning unit 37). The decorated decorative area can be secured as wide as possible.

Also, for the player playing the pachinko machine 10, if the face is slightly moved to the decorative panel 401 side (for example, the sitting chair is slightly rotated to move the face to the right side), the decorative panel 401 is also used. It is possible to enjoy a specific aspect of the above (taking the first position), for example, in a state where the player does not confirm the right-handed winning unit 37 (a state in which the left-handed winning unit 37 is performed), the decorative panel 401. It is also possible to proceed with the game while keeping the specific aspect of the above in sight.

As a result, on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, the place where the right-handed winning unit 37 is installed and the place where the decoration is desirable can be shared between the right-handed winning unit 37 and the decorative panel 401, and the right side. It is possible to efficiently decorate while fully exhibiting the playability of using the winning unit 37 or the like. Further, as compared with the case where the decoration is performed behind the right-handed winning unit 37, the decoration can be performed closer to the player, which is easier to see and gives a stronger impression. In addition, in order to make the rear of the decorative panel 401 visible, the design is reduced as compared with the case where the whole or a part of the specific aspect is thinned (semi-transparent or transparent). It can be avoided.

Further, while the diameter of the game ball is about 11 mm, the width of each of the first decorative portion 405, the first transmission portion 406, the second decorative portion 407, and the second transmission portion 408 is about 2 mm, and the second When the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the position, the entire game ball is not hidden by the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 while the game ball displaces the right winning unit 37 (a part of the game ball). Can always be seen). Therefore, if the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the second position, the effect of being able to follow (continue to visually check) the displacement of the right-handed winning unit 37 is more reliably achieved.

Further, a surface emitting illumination 188 is provided behind the decorative panel 401 (and the right-handed winning unit 37), so that the decorative panel 401 and its peripheral portion can be brightened. In particular, since the second decorative portion 407 can be visually recognized via the first transparent portion 406 and the first decorative portion 405 is located on the front side of the second transparent portion 408, the decorative panel 401 can be visually recognized from the first position. In the state where the specific mode is visually recognized, the presence of the first transmitting portion 405 and the second transmitting portion 408, which are also light passages, is well hidden by the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407. Since the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are in an adjacent positional relationship, even if the light of the surface emitting illumination 188 is directed toward the player side, the light is directed to the player. Direct incident is suppressed. Therefore, the specific aspect of the decorative panel 401 can be preferably visually recognized.

On the other hand, when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the second position, the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are visually recognized separately from each other. Therefore, the decorative panel 401 and the right-handed winning unit The light emitted from the surface emitting illumination 188 arranged behind the 37 is efficiently irradiated to the periphery of the decorative panel 401 via the first transmitting portion 406 and the second transmitting portion 408 (decorative panel). Of the routes of light passing through 401, the route where attenuation is suppressed is secured). Therefore, the right-handed winning unit 37 can be reliably visually recognized without making the surface-emitting illumination 188 too bright, and the decorative panel 401 is provided to prevent the peripheral portion from becoming dark. It is possible to secure as wide a decorative area as possible (an area where a specific aspect of the decorative means is visually recognized).

In addition, the player can appropriately select whether or not to check the information behind the decorative panel 401 (such as the status of the right-handed winning unit 37 entering various winning devices) according to the gaming situation (left). There is no need to check when hitting, etc., and check appropriately when hitting to the right), and it is also necessary to perform a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine 10 to switch between the state where the rear of the decorative panel 401 is visible and the state where it is not visible. It can be done quickly. That is, it does not prohibit the player from visually recognizing the right-handed winning unit 37, and it is visible if the player tries to visually recognize it, but when the necessity of visual recognition is not recognized, that is, for example, the right-handed winning is won. The result of the game is taught by visually recognizing the unit 37, and the result of the game obtained from the behavior of the game ball in the right-handed winning unit 37 is produced by another effect means (decorative symbol display device 42, etc.). If you want to enjoy the production more in such a case, you can choose not to look at the right-handed winning unit 37 (to avoid getting into the view or getting into the edge of the view). It will be possible. Further, when the right-handed winning unit 37 is not visually recognized, a specific aspect can be visually recognized on the decorative panel 401, and the front of the right-handed winning unit 37 can be effectively utilized as a decorative area.

Further, the decorative panel 401 is used in front of a plurality of winning devices (second variable winning device 32b (special winning unit 145), second starting winning device 33b, and first variable winning device 32a) of the right-handed winning unit 37. However, by visually recognizing the decorative panel 401 from the second position, the plurality of winning devices can be visually recognized at once. Therefore, for example, from the second position, a predetermined winning device among the plurality of winning devices can be visually recognized, but another winning device cannot be visually recognized, and in order to visually recognize the other winning device. It is possible to avoid a very troublesome situation in which the winning device to be visually recognized cannot be easily visually recognized (it takes time to visually recognize), such as a configuration in which the decorative panel 401 needs to be visually recognized from the third position. As a result, the decorative area can be expanded by utilizing the area extending in front of the plurality of winning devices while ensuring the visibility of the plurality of winning devices.

In particular, in the jackpot state in which the probability variation mode is given after the jackpot state ends, the second variable winning device 32b (first information means) is opened in the first round, and the first variable winning device is set in the second and subsequent rounds. Since 32a (second information means) is in the open state, it is desired to keep both the second variable winning device 32b and the first variable winning device 32a in the field of view in the period near the end of the first round. The situation. In this regard, by visually recognizing the decorative panel 401 from the second position, both the second variable winning device 32b and the first variable winning device 32a can be visually recognized. It is possible to confirm the first variable winning device 32a while grasping (counting the number of winning balls of the game ball). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience in the situation where the second variable winning device 32b and the first variable winning device 32a are visually recognized.

For example, if the winning / fail lottery (big hit lottery) is not won based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b, the small hit lottery is performed, and the winning probability in the small hit lottery is the big hit. It is higher than the winning probability in the lottery (for example, if you do not win the big hit, you will win almost the small hit), and in the low ball entry state, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 corresponding to the ball entry support lottery is displayed. In addition to being long, the variable display of the special symbol display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to the winning / failing lottery is short in the high winning state, and when the small hit lottery is won, the second variable winning device 32b (or the first variable winning device 32a). Is configured to be open for a relatively short time (compared to the jackpot round) (when the second variable winning device 32b is open, the special entry portion 145 remains closed). The behavior of the game ball entering the second starting winning device 33b (first information means) and the interlocking with the second variable winning device 32b (first information means) become more remarkable, and the second starting winning device Both 33b and the second variable winning device 32b are in a state of wanting to be in sight. Further, for example, in a configuration in which the special ball-entry portion 145 is opened during a part of the period during which the second variable winning device 32b is opened, the second variable shutter 142 (second variable shutter 142) of the second variable winning device 32b is opened. Both the 1 information means) and the distribution device 147 (second information means) of the 2nd variable winning device 32b are in a state of wanting to be in the field of view. Therefore, when embodied in such a configuration, the action and effect such as improvement of convenience in a high ball entry state are more remarkable.

Further, by providing the decorative panel 401 in front of the game area, it is possible to make the decorative panel 401 more visible as compared with the case where the decorative panel 401 is arranged behind the game area. Further, for example, as compared with the configuration in which the game ball can come into contact with the front side of the decorative panel 401, damage, deterioration, etc. of the decorative panel 401 can be suppressed, and the design can be improved.

In addition, by providing the base portion 402 in the decorative panel 401, it is possible to prevent or suppress foreign matter from entering between the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404. Further, by attaching the front side sheet 403 and the rear surface side sheet 404 to the base portion 402, the front side sheet 403 and the rear surface side sheet 404 can be held in a separated state, and the front surface side sheet 403 can be held. Even if the side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 are not relatively displaced, the player can change his / her posture to visually recognize a specific mode on the decorative panel 401, or a right-handed winning unit behind the decorative panel 401. 37 can be visually recognized. Further, the decorative panel 401 can provide a three-dimensional and more complicated (unusual) visual mode (decoration), and can improve the design. In particular, it is possible to prevent the positional deviation between the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404, and the distance between the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 is narrowed or separated to visually recognize a specific mode. It is possible to avoid a situation where it becomes difficult to do. Therefore, the specific aspect of the decorative panel 401 can be visually recognized more reliably. Further, since the misalignment of the first transmissive portion 406 and the second transmissive portion 408 is prevented, the visibility of the right-handed winning unit 37 when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the second position should be well maintained. Can be done. Further, since the base portion 402, the front side sheet 403, and the rear surface side sheet 404 are unitized, the base portion 402, the front side sheet 403, and the rear surface side sheet 404 are united with respect to the right-handed winning unit 37. It can be attached and detached at once, and the workability of attaching and detaching the decorative panel 401 can be improved. In addition, the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 can be reinforced.

Conventionally, a cel image is attached to the front surface of the game board 30 that defines the rear part of the game area, but a ball-entry unit (right-handed winning unit 37) including a winning device and a guide passage to the winning device. It is not possible to decorate the game board 30 at the part where the game board 30 is attached, and the ball entry unit cannot be sufficiently decorated so that the behavior of the game ball can be visually recognized. It was a situation. Further, the decoration on the front surface of the game board 30 may be worn due to contact with the game ball, and the design may be deteriorated. In this regard, by providing the decorative panel 401 in front of the right-handed winning unit 37, such concerns can be dispelled, and further, the player is closer to the player in the front-rear direction and the player's line of sight. The decorativeness can be improved at a position closer to the front of the.

Further, in the present embodiment, the distance between the front surface of the decorative panel 401 and the glass unit 137 is shorter than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball cannot contact the front side sheet 403 of the decorative panel 401, and the decoration Since the panel 401 is attached to the front surface of the right-handed winning unit 37 in an abutting state, the panel 401 moves in the game area by the front plate portion 185 of the right-handed winning unit 37 (passes through the right-handed winning unit 37). The contact of the game ball with the rear seat 404 is prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 from coming into contact with the game ball and causing the visual appearance to be diminished due to wear. Therefore, the visual aspects of both the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are protected, and the preferred visual aspect of the specific aspect can be maintained for as long as possible. It is desirable that the protective means is a material that is not easily scratched and has high transparency, and that it is detachable (configured separately from the game board and the transparent body unit). .. Further, in the above embodiment, since the print sticker constituting the first decorative portion 405 of the front side sheet 403 is attached to the rear surface side of the transparent sheet constituting the main body of the front side sheet 403, the decorative panel 401 It is possible to prevent a situation in which the first decorative portion 405 is damaged during installation or carrying. Therefore, it can be said that the portion of the transparent sheet of the front side sheet 403 corresponding to the print sticker is also a protective measure. In addition, in the above embodiment, the print sticker of the rear surface side sheet 404 is attached to the back surface side of the transparent sheet constituting the main body of the rear surface side sheet 404, but it is attached to the front surface side. It can be said that the portion of the transparent sheet of the rear surface side sheet 404 corresponding to the print sticker is also a protective measure.

Further, on the front side of the game board 30, an installation recess 409 is provided at a position corresponding to the decorative panel 401. Therefore, it is possible to avoid shortening the front-rear width of the game area by installing the decorative panel 401 in the game area. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the movement of the game ball is hindered by providing the decorative panel 401.

Further, the variable winning devices 32a and 32b of the right-handed winning unit 37, the special winning section 145, and the starting winning device 33b are turned on when they are in the open state, and further when the game ball enters. An LED (and each detection switch) that causes a mode change (blinking, color change, etc.) is provided. That is, although the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the special winning portion 145, and the starting winning device 33b can be visually recognized via the decorative panel 401, they can be visually recognized as compared with the case where the decorative panel 401 is not provided. In addition to the fact that the characteristics are reduced and that there are a plurality of winning devices on the back side of the decorative panel 401, all the game balls that move behind the decorative panel 401 instantly when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized. It may be relatively difficult to grasp the behavior. In this regard, the LED provided corresponding to each winning device of the right-handed winning device 37 is instructed to enter the game ball into the winning device, thereby confirming the condition of entering each winning device. In this respect, the decrease in visibility can be more than compensated for, and the player can concentrate on the game without increasing the concern for the decorative panel 401. At the same time, the LED provided corresponding to each winning device makes it easier to understand that each winning device is in the open state or that there is a winning device in the open state, and it is possible to win a prize. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the user is too careful in checking the device.

Further, the first guide passage 112, the second guide passage 113, the third guide passage 114, and the fourth guide passage 115 of the right-handed winning unit 37 are provided with delay means for delaying the moving speed of the game ball. There is. Therefore, the behavior of the game ball moving in the right-handed winning unit 37 is more reliably visually recognized (when the player wants to visually recognize the right-handed winning unit 37, the player's face is seen in the right-handed winning unit 37. You can earn time to move to the front).

In addition, when the player playing the pachinko machine 10 sees the decorative panel 401 diagonally while the game is progressing so that the face faces the center of the pachinko machine 10 in the width direction, the first one is used. The second decorative portion 407 is suitably visible via the transmissive portion 406. Therefore, while the game is progressing, the behavior of the game ball in the right-handed winning unit 37 located behind the decorative panel 401 can be visually recognized. That is, it is possible to grasp the game situation without moving the face significantly, and it is possible to improve convenience and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, a surface emitting illumination 188 as a light emitting means is provided behind the decorative panel 401 (in this example, behind the transparent right-handed winning unit 37 behind the decorative panel 401). As a result, it is possible to brighten the area where the decorative panel 401 is provided while avoiding direct light to the player. That is, when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the first position (the posture in which the face is shifted to the right from the posture located in front of the center of the pachinko machine 10 (game area) and the face is close to the decorative panel 401), the first decoration is performed. Since the portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are in an adjacent positional relationship, even if the light of the surface emitting illumination 188 is irradiated toward the player side, the light is directly incident on the player. Is deterred. On the other hand, the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 include the first transmission portion 406 and the second transmission portion 408, and are located in front of the center of the second position (pachinko machine 10 (game area)). When the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the posture of the decorative panel 401, the positional relationship is such that the area behind the rear surface side sheet 404 can be visually recognized via the first transmission portion 406 and the second transmission portion 408. Therefore, the light emitted from the surface emitting illumination 188 is efficiently emitted to the periphery of the decorative panel 401 via the first transmitting portion 406 and the second transmitting portion 408 (of the light passing through the decorative panel 401). Of the routes, the route where attenuation is suppressed will be secured). Therefore, while avoiding a situation in which the peripheral portion of the decorative panel 401 is darkened by providing the decorative panel 401, the decorative panel 401 in which the decorated decorative area (the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are combined) is combined. An area where a specific aspect can be visually recognized) can be secured as wide as possible. By emitting light from the surface light emitting illumination 188, it is possible to brighten the area where each winning device of the right-handed winning device 37 is installed, and it is possible to make it easier to recognize the existence of each winning device or the like. ..

Further, the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 have translucency, although they are lower than those of the first transmissive portion 406 and the second transmissive portion 408. Therefore, by making the surface-emitting illumination 188 emit light, the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 can also be visually recognized brightly. That is, for example, as in the case where the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 do not have translucency, the first transmissive portion 406 (the second decorative portion 407 visually recognized via the) is bright while the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 do not have translucency. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first decorative portion 405 from appearing dark and the second decorative portion 407 from forming a shadow (at a portion separated from the second transmitting portion 408). Further, for example, when one of the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 does not have translucency, the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 have a large appearance. It is possible to prevent a situation where the difference occurs.

Further, since the surface emitting illumination 188 that emits surface light is used as a light source, it is possible to emit light with uniform brightness over a relatively wide range behind the decorative panel 401. It is possible to suppress the difference in brightness of each part of the decorative panel 401. Therefore, it is possible to improve the design of the peripheral portion of the decorative panel 401 (particularly, when the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 also have transparency). Further, the design of the surface-emitting lighting 188 itself, which is a means for irradiating the decorative panel 401 with light, is enhanced, and the design can be arranged so that the surface-emitting lighting 188 is visually recognized when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the second position. It is possible to prevent deterioration of sex.

In addition, in the front side sheet 403, the first decorative portion 405 extending in the vertical direction and the first transmitting portion 406 extending in the vertical direction are alternately arranged in the left-right direction, and the rear side sheet 404 extends in the vertical direction. The second decorative portion 407 and the second transmission portion 408 extending in the vertical direction are alternately arranged in the left-right direction. In this way, the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 are configured in a grid pattern extending vertically, so that, for example, as compared with the case where the front side sheet 403 and the rear surface side sheet 404 are configured in a grid pattern extending to the left and right, depending on the height of the player. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the ease of taking the first position and the second position with respect to the decorative panel 401 is different (the appearance is different due to the height difference).

Further, the surface light emitting illumination 188 is provided behind the right-handed winning unit 37, that is, behind the game board 30. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front-rear width of the game area from being narrowed by the surface-emitting illumination 188.

In the decorative panel 401, the base portion 402 is fixed to the right-handed winning unit 37 (front part 184) as the attached portion. For this reason, for example, the decorative panel is compared with a configuration in which the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 are attached to the attached portion (for example, the rear surface side sheet 404 is adhered to the right-handed winning unit 37 with an adhesive). It is possible to standardize the mounting structure (between multiple models) to mount the 401 to the mounted part (the right-handed winning unit 37 and the decorative panel 401 can be reused), simplify it, and stabilize the mounting state. can.

Further, the first decorative portion 405 and the first transparent portion 406 are integrally provided, and the second decorative portion 407 and the second transparent portion 408 are integrally provided. Therefore, the first decoration portion 405 and the first transmission portion 406 are displaced from each other, or the second decoration portion 407 and the second transmission portion 408 are displaced from each other. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a specific mode in which the portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are combined is not suitably visible. In addition, "integral" is intended to be a configuration in which relative displacement is not possible.

Further, the first decorative portion 405 and the first transmission portion 406 are composed of a film-shaped front side sheet 403, and the second decorative portion 407 and the second transmission portion 408 are composed of a film-shaped rear surface side sheet 404. Therefore, the decorative panel 401 can be made as thin as possible, the degree of freedom in the installation location can be improved, the installation space for other game members, and the front-rear width of the game area can be suppressed from being reduced. In addition, since the rear surface of the decorative panel 401 is a smooth surface (for example, a flat surface), it is possible to avoid narrowing the front-rear width of the game area by contacting the right-handed winning unit 37 as compared with the case where the decorative panel 401 is made uneven. be able to.

Further, when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the second position, the first decoration is provided between the first variable winning device 32a and the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b among the plurality of information means. The portion 405 is interposed. Therefore, even when the distance between the first variable winning device 32a and the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b is relatively long, between the plurality of first decorative portions 405. The distance can be prevented from being too wide, and a particular aspect of the decorative panel 401 can be made more suitable. Further, for example, as compared with the configuration in which the second decorative portion 407 is not provided, the portion corresponding to the first transmission portion 406 between the first decorative portions 405 (the portion having no visual recognition mode related to the first decorative portion 405) is visually recognized. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is forced to make a large change in posture in order to take the second position so that the mode can be relied on the player's imagination or the visual mode of the first decorative portion 405 can be seen almost continuously. can.

In addition, the front side sheet 403 includes a plurality of first decorative portions 405 that extend in the vertical direction and are provided in the left-right direction with the first transmission portion 406 interposed therebetween. Further, the rear surface side sheet 404 includes a plurality of second decorative portions 407 that extend in the vertical direction and are provided in the left-right direction with the second transmissive portion 408 interposed therebetween. Therefore, in the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404, the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are provided like a vertical striped pattern. Therefore, for example, the first decorative portion 405 and the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are provided. By providing the second decorative portion 407 like a horizontal striped pattern, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it becomes difficult to take the first position or the second position depending on the physique (sitting height) of the player. Therefore, regardless of the physique, it is possible to enjoy the configuration in which the visual appearance mode of the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the first position while ensuring the acquisition of information from the second position.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the decorative symbol display device 42 as the staging means, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 32b of the right-handed winning unit 37, the hold icon 461 is displayed and decorated. When a game ball enters the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b, the number of payouts is displayed by adding the number corresponding to the winning ball, and the special entry is made. When a game ball enters the ball portion 145, a V winning effect is performed (various winnings or an effect display that teaches information corresponding to the winning is derived. ). As a result, it is possible to improve the effectability. Further, even if the right-handed winning unit 37 is not confirmed, if the decorative symbol display device 42 is visually recognized, the information obtained from the right-handed winning unit 37 can be obtained from the decorative symbol display device 42, so that the right-handed winning unit It is possible to avoid a situation in which the player cannot concentrate on the confirmation of 37 and enjoy the game. Further, for example, when it is desired to enjoy the effect of the decorative symbol display device 42 without obtaining the information from the right-handed winning unit 37, by maintaining the first position with respect to the decorative panel 401, such a request is relatively made. It can be easily realized. Of course, it is also possible to obtain information from the right-handed winning unit 37 and enjoy the production of the decorative pattern display device 42.

It should be noted that the timing at which predetermined information is obtained from the right-handed winning unit 37 and the timing at which the content of the predetermined information is taught (suggested) in the staging display of the decorative symbol display device 42 corresponding to the predetermined information are approximately the same. Matching pattern (display of hold icon 461, payout number display, V winning effect), slower (later) pattern of effect display (newly held variable display with hold already), effect display It may be set appropriately for each model, such as a faster (earlier) pattern (a pattern in which the content of the variation display waiting for the end of the variation display corresponding to the earlier hold is suggested by the hold icon 461 etc.). ..

In particular, when the decorative symbol display device 42 teaches or suggests the information obtained by visually recognizing the right-handed winning unit 37, the decorative symbol is given after the timing when the right-handed winning unit 37 obtains predetermined information. As it may be performed after sandwiching the effect display on the display device 42 (for example, in the V winning effect, the notification of the ball entry is not performed immediately after the game ball enters the special ball entry section 145, but the ball entry is notified. The distribution device 147 may be configured (to notify that a game ball has entered the special entry unit 145 in the next round of the jackpot round in which the distribution device 147 is opened). In this case, the effectability can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 42 is provided at a position not covered by the decorative panel 401, but a liquid crystal display device may be provided at a position where the front is covered by the decorative panel 401. The decorative panel 401 may be configured to be displaceable between a visible position located in front of the decorative symbol display device 42 and a retracted position retracted from the front.

Further, the second variable winning device 32b (special winning section 145, non-special winning section 146), the second starting winning device 32b, and the first variable winning device 32a of the right-handed winning unit 37 are shown individually. No LED is provided and lights up during the period when these winning devices are open, and the corresponding LED blinks based on the entry of the game ball into each of these winning devices (detection of the corresponding detection switch). Alternatively, it emits light in a color different from the basic color and turns off after 1 second. Further, the surface-emitting illumination has a basic light-emitting mode (normal mode) in which the same color continues, and the game ball enters the second starting winning device 32b or the special ball-entry section 145. If this is the case, the mode is changed so that the plurality of colors are sequentially turned on, and then the original normal mode is used after a specified time. For this reason, the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the right-handed winning unit 37 can enter each winning device, that the game ball has entered each winning device, and in some cases, information such as the probability change mode is given. be able to. Further, in the state where the game ball does not enter the winning device of the right-handed winning unit 37, the light emitting mode by these light emitting means is considered to be a relatively calm mode (at least the surface light emitting illumination 188 basically continues in a single color). It emits light and has less flicker, and even when the special ball entry unit 145, the second start winning device 32b, and the first variable winning device 32a are in the open state in a right-handed situation, the corresponding LED lights up. (Although it is not flashy), in the normal mode, it is possible to make it easier to visually recognize a specific mode (in this example, a picture of a marine organism or the like) composed of the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407. In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, it is possible to make it as easy as possible to visually recognize the game ball moving the right-handed winning unit 37. Therefore, it is possible to make the progress of the game smoother while improving the decorativeness. Further, in the normal mode, it is set as a light emitting mode that enhances a specific mode (in this example, it emits blue light in the image of the sea and locally emits white light in the image of reflection of light) to improve the decorativeness. be able to.

The content is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Further, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is required to improve the interest by appropriately devising an analog structure, a digital structure, and the like.

(A; Other gaming machine) It may be carried out as a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a movable means that can be changed into a specific area in which a gaming ball moving in a gaming area can enter, an open state that allows entry into a specific area, and a closed state that prohibits entry into a specific area ( Detects variable ball-entry means provided with a wing member), special ball-entry means and non-special ball-entry means that allow a game ball that has entered a specific area to enter, and a game ball that has entered the special ball-entry means. Detects special ball entry detection means (condition detection means), special starting means that is provided outside the specific area and allows game balls that move in the game area to enter, and game balls that have entered the special starting means. It is provided with a special start detecting means for detecting the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means, and when a game ball enters a specific area, the game ball is the special ball entry means and the non-special ball entry means. A predetermined number of game values (game balls) are given to the player regardless of which of the balls is entered, and the main control means uses the variable ball entry means for the first time based on the detection of the special start detection means. A specified number of variable winning means that are opened only once or multiple times, or that the variable ball-entry means are opened for a second time longer than the first hour, or are opened. One round is until the game ball enters, and a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state in which this is repeated a specified number of times. If a big hit is won in the winning / failing lottery, or if the special ball entry detection means is detected, a big hit state is generated, and if the special ball entry detection means is detected in the small hit state, the big hit state is generated. It may be applied to a gaming machine such as generating. It should be noted that the movable means may be omitted (although it is possible to always enter the game ball into the specific area, the entrance to the specific area is made relatively small to make it difficult to enter).

In addition to pachinko machines, it is also implemented as an arrange ball machine, various similar game machines such as sparrow balls, slot machines as rotating cylinder type game machines, and game machines that combine slot machines and pachinko machines. You may.

As a basic configuration of a slot machine (rotating machine), "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and an operation means for starting (for example, operation) is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the lever), and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button). It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the information is specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

Further, in the slot machine, a plurality of (for example, three) rotating bodies are rotated based on operating the start lever in a state where the game value is separately operated by operating the (max) bet button, and the operation is performed. In the lottery conducted based on the above, when a small winning combination that can be aligned by hitting the stop order of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button for stopping the corresponding rotating body is won. In addition, a state in which the order is taught and a state in which the order is not taught may be provided.

Furthermore, when a prize is won, the probability of establishing a predetermined small winning combination with the addition of game value is greatly increased, and the bonus state ends when the number of the first specified number of games is exhausted or the number of the first specified number is exceeded (the first). 1 Special game state), a winning / failing lottery that generates a bonus state, and a small winning combination (if the winning / failing lottery is missed or performed in parallel with the winning / failing lottery), a child role (allowing a small role to win) A lottery is held, and it is configured to be able to stop in a stop mode based on the result of the applicable / non-applicable lottery and the child role lottery. ) Is performed, the normal game is replayable without using the game value, the winning probability is increased, and the multiple rotating bodies used by the normal game. If you win a small winning combination that can be arranged by hitting the order to stop, at least one of the states in which the order is taught is given, and due to the exhaustion of the second specified number of games or the excess of the second specified number of games. There is a second special game state (replay time, assist time, or assist replay time) that ends, and a lottery to shift to the second special game state (for example, in the normal game and at least the normal game among the bonus states). A lottery for small roles that may be used as a transition opportunity) may also be performed. Even if the bonus state or the second special game state is won, the bonus state or the second special game state will not start unless the corresponding winning combination is won (the rotating body is stopped by the combination of the bonus symbols, and the bonus is given. When you win a prize, the bonus state starts). Here, the bonus lottery is not performed during the period from the bonus winning to the bonus winning, but the bonus winning is taught by displaying "bonus confirmed" etc., and in each game, the small role lottery and the second special A lottery for the game status is held. In addition, during the period from the winning of the transition to the second special gaming state to the start of the second special gaming state, a display such as "Preparing for the second special gaming state" is displayed and the second special gaming state is won. In addition to teaching, a bonus lottery, a small role lottery, and a lottery regarding the period of the second special game state (a lottery for adding the number of games that can be the upper limit of stay and the number of game value acquisitions, for example, the second special game state is 1 for a predetermined game. When it is performed as a set, a lottery for adding the number of sets, etc.) is performed, and a lottery for starting the second special game state is not performed.

A gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine (ball-using spinning machine), that is, a slot machine that has a ball insertion and ball payout function like a pachinko machine instead of a medal insertion and medal payout function. It may be used as a pachinko / pachislot machine. As a basic configuration, a plurality of identification information includes a loading device that provides a ball tray (upper plate, etc.) and performs a loading process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray, a payout device that dispenses the game ball to the ball tray, and a plurality of identification information. A variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information string and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the game ball is thrown by the throwing device, and the starting operation means ( For example, the dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the operation lever), and the identification information is dynamically displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A ball is used as a gaming medium, provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the display is stopped and the definite identification information at the time of the stop is the specific identification information. (Sharing the game balls of the pachinko machine), a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and a large number of game balls are paid out in the special game state. It becomes a machine. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game ball is paid out as a game value to the upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15 on which the player can put in and take out the game ball. For example, the launching device 60 is used. The game ball that is launched and guided to the game area is circulated and used inside the pachinko machine (or it is also possible to intervene a device for cleaning the game ball), and the player (of the pachinko machine 10) It may be configured so that the game ball cannot be taken out (from the front side). That is, while the configuration related to the tank 355 to which the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall is replenished becomes unnecessary, the game balls discharged from the game area reach the launching device 60 (ball feeding device 63). Mechanism for feeding (storing part of the game ball, mechanism for sending the game ball from the storage part to the launching device 60; it may also serve as a storage part, or basically it may be possible to send the game ball only by the height difference, or it is electric. The game ball may be fed by the feeding device of the above), and the pachinko machine will be provided with a configuration for discharging and filling the game ball for maintenance and movement of the game ball and the pachinko machine. Further, in the mechanism for causing the game ball discharged from the game area to reach the launching device 60 (ball feeding device 63), the game ball is placed at a position where the player can see the game ball as in the upper plate 19 of the above embodiment. It is assumed that a configuration is provided to be derived (as many as the corresponding number) so that the game ball of the upper plate 19 cannot be touched by the player (covered with a transparent plate-like body or the like). May be good.

(B; Conditions for transitioning to the probability variation mode, etc.) In the above embodiment, the probability variation mode is given after the jackpot state ends, provided that the game ball enters the special entry portion 145 of the second variable winning device 32b in the jackpot state. It is configured so that the right to be awarded is obtained, but when it is associated with a predetermined jackpot type (for example, "8RS" and "4RS") and the jackpot state of the predetermined jackpot type is won, It may be configured so that the right to be granted the probabilistic mode is obtained after the jackpot state ends. Further, in the above embodiment, the upper limit of the number of fluctuations is set for the probability variation mode, but for example, the probability variation mode may be maintained until a jackpot state occurs.

Further, in the above embodiment, the right of the probabilistic mode can be obtained only by one game ball entering the special entry unit 145 in one big hit state, but for example, a plurality of (for example,). It may be configured so that the probability variation mode is given by the entry of three) game balls. Further, it is desirable to teach the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like how many more times the game ball should be inserted into the specific entry portion before the privilege is granted, but the rest is to enhance the effect. It may be configured so that the number of times is not taught (it may be limited to suggestions). In addition, when entering the specific entry section of the time when the benefit is granted, when entering the specific entry section before the benefit is granted, and after the benefit is granted. The corresponding sound effect or display may be different depending on the time when the ball enters the specific ball entry section.

Further, an upper limit of the number of game balls entering the special entry portion 145 per round may be set. In this case, it is possible to surely enjoy the game such as letting the game ball enter the special ball entry unit 145 over a plurality of rounds. Further, the configuration is such that the entry of the game ball into the special entry section 145 of the game ball of a plurality of times (for example, two times, which is a plurality of times less than the specified number) in one round is permitted (counted). So, (even if there is only one opening opportunity for the special entry section 145 and the number of entry of the game ball into the special entry section 145 is only once), the special entry section has hope until the end. The game can be played aiming at entering the ball into the part 145. Basically, it is conceivable to make the upper limit of the count of balls entering the special entry section uniform in any round, but for example, only the opening of the last special entry section 145 may have no upper limit of the count. The upper limit of the count may be larger when the opening is in the latter half than when the opening is in the first half, or the upper limit of the count may be increased as the opening becomes later.

Further, when the number of balls of the game ball entering the special ball entry unit 145 exceeds the specified number for which the privilege is to be granted, the special effect may be derived so as to be derivable. In this case, a special effect can be derived as a privilege when the number of game balls enters the special ball entry unit 145 in excess of the specified number. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the impression that the number of game balls entering the special ball entry unit 145 exceeds a predetermined number is completely useless. If it is relatively difficult to understand the entry into the special entry section 145, it is also difficult to know that the game ball has entered the special entry section 145 more than a specified number of times. By not performing the special effect, the player does not have to know that the game ball has entered the special ball entry unit 145 more than a specified number of times.

In addition, a configuration of a guidance means (switching means) for entering the second variable winning device 32b and switching the movement destination of the passage of the game ball guided to either the special entry portion 145 or the non-special entry portion 146. Is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, guidance for repeatedly guiding a game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 32b to the non-special entry section 146 for the first specified number of times and for guiding the game ball to the special entry section 145 for the second specified number of times. Means may be provided. Further, for example, an RFID chip may be embedded in the guiding means, and a reading device for reading the RFID chip and a driving device capable of returning the posture (phase) of the guiding means to the initial position may be provided. Further, a stopping device for temporarily stopping the game ball may be provided. For example, a rotating body having a plurality of first and second ball entry portions capable of entering one ball at a time is provided, and the rotating body is first inserted after the game ball enters the first ball entry section. By rotating the angle, the game ball is guided to the special entry portion 145, and after the game ball enters the second entry portion, the rotating body is rotated by the second angle to make the game ball non-special. It may be configured to be guided to the ball entry portion. It should be noted that, in front of the stopping device, the visual mode changing means (transmissive type) capable of changing the state of the stopping device (parking game ball) into a state where it can be visually recognized or easily and a state where it cannot be visually recognized or is difficult. Display means, half mirror + lighting, shutter, etc.) may be provided. Alternatively, when the stop device is visually recognized from the first position in front of the stop device (for example, the face is moved to the front of the stop device and then visually recognized), the stop device is made invisible or difficult to see, and the stop device is stopped. When the device is visually recognized from a second position different from the first position (for example, the stop device is visually recognized diagonally from a position when the center of the game area is viewed from the front), the stop device should be visible or easy to see. It is also possible to provide a means for changing the appearance mode (decorative means for making the specific mode applied to the front side visible when visually recognizing from the first position).

Further, the timing at which the second variable winning device 32b is opened (the number of rounds and the number of times the second variable winning device 32b is opened) and the timing at which the ball can be entered into the special entry portion 145 are not particularly limited. , Can be changed as appropriate. For example, in a single jackpot state, there may be a configuration in which a game ball can be entered into the special entry unit 145 multiple times. Further, for example, in a configuration in which a probability variation mode is not provided (there is no change in the jackpot probability) and the mode shifts to the time reduction mode or the normal mode after the jackpot ends, the special entry unit 145 is provided with the "time reduction mode". It may be a "privilege" according to the specified number of game balls entered into the game.

In addition, there are multiple types of benefits (the game mode that shifts after the end of the jackpot state is different, the number of rounds in the jackpot state is different, etc.), and a specific period (specific round in the jackpot state, specific opening of the second variable winning device) , Anytime during the jackpot state, etc.) The privilege to be granted is determined according to the number of times the game ball is entered into the special entry unit 145 (the privilege is configured to be able to grant a different privilege). May be good. For example, if the number of times the game ball has entered the special entry section 145 in a specific period is 2 or less, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the jackpot state, and if 3 or 4 times, the mode shifts to the time reduction mode after the jackpot state ends. If it is more than once, it may be configured to shift to the probabilistic mode after the jackpot state ends. In this case, the playability for a specific period can be further improved.

Further, for example, when it is determined in the winning / failing lottery that the jackpot state is not won (neither the first winning / failing flag nor the second winning / failing flag is set to ON), it is determined whether or not the small winning state is won, and the small winning is determined. When the state is won, the second variable winning device 32b (V attacker) having the special entry portion 145 opens, for example, 1.8 seconds each, four times, sandwiching the closed state for 0.5 seconds to 3 seconds. During the small hit state, 80% of the game balls that entered the second variable winning device 32b while the distribution device 147 was in the small hit state were able to enter the special entry portion 145. When the game ball is entered into the special entry portion 145 four times, for example, the probability variation mode may be imparted (opening pattern of the second variable winning device 32b for small hits and privilege granting conditions ( The number of balls entered) can be changed as appropriate). Here, a jackpot state may be generated instead of assigning the probability variation mode. In addition, it is desirable to explain the small hit state (guidance display) during the opening period of the small hit state, and to teach and suggest the open state of the second variable winning device 32b.

Further, it is possible to appropriately set the relationship between the opening period in which the second variable winning device 32b (V attacker) having the special entry portion 145 is in the open state and the guidance period in which the sorting device 147 is in the allowable state. , The pattern in which the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 32b (almost) always enters the special entry section 145, and the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 32b is in the specific entry section ( Not only a pattern that does not enter the ball (almost), but also a pattern that is relatively easy to enter the special entry section 145 and a pattern that is relatively difficult to enter the special entry section 145 may be set. ..

In addition, the distribution device 147 may be configured to be in a regulated state when a game ball enters the special ball entry unit 145 and the right to grant a privilege is generated, or after the right is generated. However, the period in which the distribution device 147 is set to the permissible state may be configured to be the permissible state (the number of game balls exceeding the specified number enters the special ball entry unit 145). However, no additional benefits will be granted).

Further, for example, a plurality of routes for a game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 32b (V attacker) having the special entry portion 145 to the special entry portion 145 are provided, and the route to the special entry portion 145 is provided. It may be configured so that the time, the possibility of reaching the special entry portion 145, and the like are different. In addition, the distribution device 147 is provided, and the game ball that has entered the second variable specific area 141 may or may not enter the special entry portion 145, thereby increasing the production opportunity. Can be done.

In a configuration in which only one variable winning device is provided, the variable winning device can be a variable winning device (V attacker) having a special winning portion (when the probability change mode is not set after the jackpot state ends). Keep the sorting device in a regulated state during the jackpot state). Further, when a plurality of variable winning devices are provided, it is also possible to use the plurality of variable winning devices as a variable winning device (V attacker) having a special winning portion.

In addition, the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like may be able to teach or suggest the period during which the sorting device is allowed. Further, such teachings or suggestions are not always given, and may or may not be given.

The arrangement of the special ball entry unit 145 and the non-special ball entry unit 146 is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the special entry portion 145 and the non-special entry portion 146 may be arranged so as to be arranged side by side (whichever may be the front). In this case, since the special entry section 145 and the non-special entry section 146 overlap each other in the front-rear direction from the viewpoint of the game, the game ball entered in the second variable winning device 32b enters the special entry section 145. It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether or not the ball has hit, and in that regard, it is possible to perform a staging (such as whether or not a game ball has entered the special ball entry section 145) by another staging means. Can be improved.

(C; A configuration in which a big hit state is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the special entry section) In the above embodiment, in the winning / fail lottery performed when the game ball enters the start winning prize devices 33a and 33b. Although it is configured so that the jackpot state is generated only when the jackpot is won, it may be configured so that the jackpot state can be generated by another conditional device. For example, if a big hit is not won in the winning / losing lottery, a small winning lottery is performed, and if the small winning is won, the second variable winning device 32b is opened and the second variable winning device 32b is entered. Even when the ball is entered into the special entry section 145, a big hit state is generated in which the first variable winning device 32b is opened (when the game ball enters the special entry section 145). , It is also possible to apply it to a gaming machine such as (the right to generate (continue) a jackpot state is granted instead of the probability change mode). The jackpot type may be configured to determine the jackpot type when a small hit is won, or the 8RS type entry section and the 4RS type entry section where the game ball entered in the special entry section 145 can enter. A ball portion and an 8RN type entry portion may be provided so that a jackpot type corresponding to the type entry portion into which the game ball has entered is given.

Further, for example, in the first winning / failing lottery based on the entry into the first starting winning device 33a, the first variable winning device 32a is won in the jackpot state in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened with the first probability, and the normal mode and the time are shortened. Of the modes, the ratio in which the time reduction mode is given is the first ratio, and in the time reduction mode in which it is easy to win the ball entry support lottery and it is easy to enter the second variable winning device 32b, the second start is performed. In the second winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b is won in the small hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened, and the second variable winning device 32b is opened. The game ball that has entered the ball enters the special entry section 145 at a second rate, and a jackpot state occurs (the first variable winning device 32a continues to the jackpot state in which it is opened). It is also possible to apply. In addition, when this configuration is adopted, the small hit state is won in the time reduction mode and the game ball is placed in the special entry section 145, as compared with the case where the big hit state is won in the first win / fail lottery or the second win / fail lottery. It is easier to generate a big hit state by letting the ball enter, and it is shorter when the small hit state is won and the game ball is put into the special entry section 145. It is also possible to make it easy to select the jackpot type to which the mode is given.

Even in a gaming state in which a transmissive display device (avant-garde display device) is provided in a range including the front of the second variable winning device 32b and the game ball is aimed to enter the second variable winning device 32b. When the effect display such as translucency is appropriately derived even in the range including the front of the second variable winning device 32b (the second variable winning device 32b is not completely hidden from the player), the player's By operation, it may be possible to set the effect display in front of the second variable winning device 32b to be restricted (not derived).

(D; Simultaneous fluctuation) In the above embodiment, when one of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is performing the fluctuation display, the fluctuation display of the other is not performed (standby). ), But the variable display of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b may be configured to be feasible at the same time. That is, if there is a hold for each of the first variable display and the second variable display, the corresponding variable display is executed (except during the hit state). In the state where the variation display that teaches the occurrence of the jackpot state is performed, the variation display that overlaps with the variation display may be configured so as not to be newly started. Further, when one fluctuation display is stopped and displayed in a manner that teaches the occurrence of a jackpot state, even if the other fluctuation display is changing, the other fluctuation display is interrupted (restarted after the jackpot state ends). ) Or may be erased.

Further, for example, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the first variable display and the variable display by the decorative symbol corresponding to the second variable display (hereinafter, the first staging variable display and the second staging variable display) are simultaneously displayed. It may be displayed, or one of them (the second variable display or the one that is stopped and displayed first) may be displayed preferentially, or both may be visually recognized and only one may be visually recognized. It may be configured to be appropriately switched to the state in which it is to be performed. Further, for example, in the case where the variation display corresponding to the deviation of one of the first variation display and the second variation display is started, the variation display which is the hit of the other is started, and the decorative symbol display device 42 In, it is determined whether or not the remaining time of the one variable display is shorter than the time of the connecting effect when at least the effect display corresponding to the one variable display is performed, and if it is long, it is determined. The one-sided effect display may be switched to the connecting effect, and after the end of the connecting effect, the effect display corresponding to the other variable display may be configured to connect to the connecting effect and derive a close-up effect. When a plurality of display devices for displaying the effect are provided, the display device to be closed up is appropriately switched (which display device is used to derive the first variation display and the second variation display as appropriate). The display device on which the variable display for close-up is performed may be displaced to the player side, or the effect display for close-up may be performed on all the display devices.

In addition, in the high entry state, the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display may be set to be relatively short, or only the fluctuation time of the second fluctuation display is relatively short. It may be configured to be set short. Further, in the low ball entry state, the first fluctuation time is relatively short while the second fluctuation time is set to be relatively long, and in the high ball entry state, the second fluctuation time is relatively short while the first fluctuation time is relatively long. It may be configured to be set longer. In addition, it may be possible to derive the remaining time display that suggests or teaches the first fluctuation time and the remaining time of the second fluctuation time.

Further, when the jackpot state is started, the jackpot round may be waited for as long as the game ball is not passed through the through gate 34 after the opening period ends. In this case, the player can take a break before the start of the big hit.

(E; Duration of Probability Change Mode and Time Reduction Mode) In the above embodiment, the variation display is performed 100 times in each game mode of the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, so that the mode shifts to the normal mode. However, the upper limit may be a number other than 100, or the upper limit may be configured to be provided in a plurality of patterns. Further, the probability variation mode may be configured to continue until the next big hit state occurs.

Further, although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, when the upper limit of the number of fluctuations is set in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the target variation display or the staging variation corresponding to each variation display is set. At least at the beginning of the display, it may be configured to derive the remaining number display that teaches the remaining number of times in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode (for example, the remaining half, the remaining 10 times, the remaining 10 times, the 2 times, the last, etc.). ..

In addition, in the above embodiment, the jackpot is given as the upper limit of the high-probability state (a series of high-probability gaming states in which the high-probability states are continuous across the jackpot state; the continuous-chan state). When a specified number of jackpot states including the state (first jackpot state) occur, the configuration may be such that the state shifts to the low probability state after the end of the jackpot state. In this case, if the jackpot state is won in the high probability state, the jackpot type that shifts to the high probability state after the jackpot state ends is selected, and if the high probability upper limit is reached, the jackpot state shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot state ends. The jackpot type to be played may be selected. The high probability upper limit may be reset when the state shifts to the low probability state and the low ball entry state (that is, the normal mode).

In the above embodiment, the jackpot state (first time) is triggered by the high entry state as the upper limit of the high entry state (a series of high entry game states in which the high entry state is continuous across the jackpot state). When a specified number of jackpot states are generated, including the jackpot state), the configuration may be such that the ball enters a low ball state after the end of the jackpot state. In this case, if the jackpot state is won in the high-entry state, the jackpot type that shifts to the high-entry state after the jackpot state ends is selected, and if the high-entry upper limit is reached, the low-entry after the jackpot state ends. The jackpot type that shifts to the ball state may be selected. The upper limit of the high ball entry may be reset when the ball enters the low probability state and the low ball entry state (that is, the normal mode), or when the ball enters the low ball entry state (latent probability). It may be reset (even when the mode is changed).

The start timing and end timing of the high-probability gaming state and the high-entry ball gaming state do not necessarily have to match, and the types of gaming modes set for each model (normal mode, time reduction mode, etc.) There is a possibility that you will win the jackpot that shifts to the time reduction mode or the jackpot that shifts to the probability variation mode, and the probability variation mode in the time reduction mode. There is a possibility of winning the jackpot that shifts to the probability change mode, and in the probability variation mode, there is a possibility of winning the jackpot that shifts to the time reduction mode or the jackpot that shifts to the probability variation mode, and the high probability upper limit is 5 times, which is high. The upper limit of the ball entry is 10 times, etc.), etc.) and can be changed as appropriate. In the normal mode, in the case of a configuration in which either the jackpot that shifts to the normal mode or the jackpot that shifts to the probabilistic mode is won, the start timings of the high-probability gaming state and the high-entry ball gaming state can be aligned. In addition, it is desirable to derive a high probability upper limit and a limit display indicating the number of remaining jackpots until the high entry upper limit is reached. Furthermore, if the limit display is not displayed (it can be displayed when a specific jackpot type is won or the player succeeds in a mini game, etc.), or if it is only suggested (more than the number of times displayed). It may be configured so that there may be cases (such as the number of remaining times).

In addition, in the above embodiment, the normal mode is configured to continue until the next jackpot state, but when the fluctuation display is performed a specific number of times (for example, 800 times, 1000 times, etc.) in the normal mode, the time It may be configured to shift to the shortened mode (the upper limit of the normal mode may be set). In this case, the time reduction mode may be continued until the next jackpot state occurs, or may be configured to shift to the normal mode when the variable display is performed a specified number of times in the time reduction mode (normally). When the time reduction mode that has been changed by reaching the upper limit of the mode is changed to the normal mode again, even if the normal mode is configured to shift to the time reduction mode by performing the fluctuation display of the specific number of times. Alternatively, it may be configured to shift to the time reduction mode by performing the variable display of the auxiliary specific number of times (for example, 100 times) shorter than the specific number of times. Further, the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like may be configured to teach the remaining period (number of fluctuations) until the mode shifts to the time reduction mode.

(F; display of payout number, display of specific payout number) In the above embodiment, in the state from the occurrence of the jackpot state to the transition to the normal mode (continuous chan state), based on the ball entering the variable winning devices 32a and 32b. The number of game balls to be paid out (given) (total number of payouts) is counted, the number is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the total number of payouts is a predetermined number each time the total number of payouts increases by about 2500. The specific payout number display that teaches that the number exceeds the above is displayed extensively in the center of the decorative symbol display device 42, but the present invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, not only the number of game balls paid out based on the winning of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b during the jackpot state, but also other winning devices (starting winning devices 33a, 33b, general winning device 31, etc.). The number of game balls paid out based on the ball entered may be counted, or the number of game balls paid out based on the ball entered into the winning device in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode may be counted. .. In the special payout number display, a symbol is displayed together with the total number of payouts of the game balls, and a plurality of patterns are set for the specific number of payouts, and predetermined information (for example, a predetermined jackpot or the like) is set according to the symbol. Settings when multiple winning probabilities of the lottery are set, including those set by game hall officials and those set by gaming machines such as pachinko machines 10 according to the game situation) are taught and suggested. You may do it. Further, such suggestions and teachings may be configured to be derived at other timings such as an opening screen and an ending screen in a jackpot state.

In addition, the total payout count (payout count display) may be configured to not only increase but also decrease (subtract the number of fired game balls) (player pays out total number or It may be possible to switch which of the total number of acquisitions is displayed). Further, for example, a "small hit" may be won in a winning / losing lottery performed based on a ball entering the second starting winning device 33b, and if the small hit is won, the first variable winning device 32a or the first variable winning device 32a or , Either of the second variable winning device 32b may be opened for a short time (so that the ball is not allowed to enter the special ball entry portion 145 of the second variable winning device 32b). It is also possible to omit the derivation function of the specific payout number display. In addition, the derivation timing of the specific payout number display overlaps with the display that has priority over the specific payout number display (for example, the variable display period after the reach state, the ending effect (maker logo effect, alert effect), error display, etc.). In this case, the derivation of the specific payout number display may be stopped, or the derivation may be performed after the priority display is completed.

In addition, when the jackpot state in which the number of game balls that can be acquired during the hit state such as the 2nd round jackpot is small is the first hit in the continuous chan state, the payout number display in the jackpot state is on standby while paying out. It may be configured to count the number and start the payout number display in the continuous Chan state after the end of the jackpot state. Furthermore, if the total number of payouts (total number of acquisitions) is less than the predetermined number at the end of a series of consecutive chan states, the total number of payouts (total number of acquisitions) will not be displayed on the result screen derived at the end of the continuous chan state. (On the result screen, at least the number of big hits during consecutive chans may be displayed. Further, the number of times the ball has entered a high-entry state such as a probability change mode may be displayed).

Also, for example, in the ending of the jackpot state, the number of game balls (game value) acquired (or paid out) in the current jackpot state, and if the jackpot is in the continuous chan, in the continuous chan. In the result display that displays the number of acquired game balls and ends the continuous chan state (probability change mode, time reduction mode), the number of big hits during the continuous chan (stacked without sandwiching the normal mode), acquired during the continuous chan The configuration may be such that the number of game balls played is displayed.

(G; Production during jackpot) In the above embodiment, V winning challenge production and promotion challenge production (including teaching of pending consecutive hits) are performed in the jackpot state, but the configuration is particularly limited to such. It is not a thing, and it is possible to embody it in a pachinko machine that does not have a special ball-entry part in the variable winning device, and the jackpot type is surely taught by the decorative symbol display device 42 by the start of the round in the jackpot state. It may be configured so that the promotion challenge effect is not performed during the round of the big hit state, or the instruction of the pending consecutive hit may not be performed.

In addition, for example, in the jackpot state, the contents of characters and motifs related to the pachinko machine 10 (derived from the effect display of the decorative pattern display device 42) can be introduced, and the player can produce a promotion challenge effect or a V prize challenge effect. Production type (for example, the teaching timing is different (either of multiple rounds, teaching over multiple rounds, teaching in the first round, or teaching in the ending), whether to use the effect button 125, etc. ) May be configurable (at the opening or on the menu screen).

(H; Specific character display) In the above embodiment, the specific character display in which the character selected by the player appears is specified as a specific effect display that is preferentially displayed over other effect displays. The target to be displayed as a specific effect is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. Further, in the above embodiment, by selecting a predetermined character, the character display in which the character appears is comprehensively specified as a specific character display, but such a function may be omitted. However, it may be configured so that it can be set individually (for example, character A in the normal mode, character B in the continuous channel, etc.). The display content of the specific character in the specific character display area 465, the location of the specific character display area 465, and the like are not particularly limited. For example, the display device is provided separately from the decorative symbol display device 42. It is also possible to display a specific character in (the specific character display area).

Further, for example, in the state where the character A is specified, the jackpot state is won and the continuous chan state and the probabilistic mode are set, and when the character A is specified, the jackpot state is won and the continuous chan state and the probabilistic mode are set. In this case, it may be configured so that it is forced to specify a character different from the character A (when all the characters are selected, the continuous chan state continues, and the probabilistic mode is set. , The effect during the probability change mode and the subsequent jackpot state become a special display state in which all characters appear and congratulate, and after the jackpot state in the display state ends, the character A is specified. May be configured to return to).

The target of the specific effect display is not limited to the character, and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, it may be possible to set a specific effect display in association with a predetermined advance notice effect or a predetermined reach effect. Further, it is also possible to omit the function of displaying the specific effect and the function of preferentially displaying the specific character (including the specific character display area 465).

Further, a specific effect display having a low derivation probability may be provided for each character. In addition, a function that can redisplay the specific effect display (for example, within a certain period of time, the player can select and view the selectable specific effect display by performing a predetermined operation during the jackpot state). May be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment, the sub-control device 262 includes a progress information storage means capable of storing information related to the progress of the game performed at least in a state where the specific character display is derived, and after the specific character display, The information stored in the progress information storage means may be configured to be viewable on the decorative symbol display device 42. In this case, the event that occurred during the display of the specific character can be confirmed later. Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on the specific character display without worrying about it. In addition, for example, the specific character display is set from the beginning to the end of the jackpot state of a specific type, and the display that overlaps with the specific character display in the special character state is a permission display that allows duplication with the specific character display ( Even if it is a notification display, it is considered to be a mode that does not hinder visibility so much), or it is displayed as a specific character, automatically after the end of the jackpot state, or from the menu screen etc. after the end of the jackpot state, information during the jackpot state, For example, in the case of a pachinko machine, a display may be configured to be able to derive information such as whether the game ball has entered the upper limit in each round or the time required for digestion in each round.

Further, in the above embodiment, the setting of the specific character is not reset only when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off / on (the specific character at the time of power off is inherited as the specific character even after the power is turned on, and the RAM is erased. It is reset by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while operating the switch 323, and in the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, a predetermined character (character C in the above example) is configured to be set as a specific character. However, the configuration is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, a specific character may be configured to be reset only when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and on, or a specific character may be specified in the initialization process. The specific character set at the time of setting the character is not particularly limited, and may be determined at random (lottery), for example.

Further, the player may be configured to not specify a specific character by operating the effect button 125, the cross button 126, or the like. When this configuration is adopted, it is possible to meet the demands of the player who wants to confuse the effect display related to the specific character display or to see the effect display evenly (for any character). In addition, even if there is a desire to set a specific character display, it is possible to respond to a request such as first looking at various effect displays that can be specified as a specific character display and then setting a specific character display (mobile interlocking). When playing a game, the game may automatically proceed in such a flow). In addition, when adopting this configuration, the decorative symbol corresponding to the specific character may not be provided individually, or the character corresponding to the "7" symbol may be set randomly or fixedly. It may be configured as.

Further, the specific effect notice effect that gives notice (teaching) that the specific effect display (specific character display) is derived may be configured to be derivable. In this case, it is possible to prevent the display of a specific character from being overlooked. In addition, the specific character display (including the specific character display area 465) may not be derived in the demo screen display so that the game can proceed more efficiently.

Further, for example, the specific character display is determined by lottery or the like, and for example, in the case of a configuration that is easily derived when it is suggested that the jackpot expectation is high, the specific character display is not derived for a certain period of time. However, in order to avoid such a situation, the specific character display may be configured to be derivable (or increase the derivation probability) based on the fact that the specific character display is not derived for a specified period (specific). If the character display is derived, the counter for the specified period is reset). In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the user is looking forward to displaying a specific character but is not derived too much, resulting in a decrease in interest.

It should be noted that the specified period is defined as one variation (one game) from the start to the end of the variation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b that teach the result of the winning / failing lottery that determines whether or not the jackpot state is generated. The case where the specified number of times is performed, the case where the jackpot state (of a predetermined type) is performed a specified number of times, and the like can be mentioned. That is, for example, a counter capable of counting the number of fluctuation displays (number of fluctuations) for which the specific character display has not been derived is provided, 1 is added according to the start of fluctuation, and the counter is reset based on the derivation of the specific character display. For example, if it is determined whether or not the number of times exceeds 100 times and affirmative determination is made, the specific character effect may be selected in the effect in which the specific character effect can be selected. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that a specific character display that is not related to the jackpot expectation degree or the like is derived.

(I; Production using specific character display) In the above embodiment, basically, even if the specific character display (specific character moving image from which the specific character is derived) is always derived once in the jackpot state. good. In addition, for example, when setting a specific character moving image, whether or not the reserved variable display includes a (specific) big hit (so-called "holding continuous hit"). If it is determined and it is determined that the character is on hold, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to make a setting not to derive the specific character moving image. In addition, when a specific character moving image is not derived in response to the pending sequence, it is desirable not to teach the pending sequence in the promotion challenge production or the like. Further, in addition to the configuration in which the specific character video is not derived in response to the hold consecutive hits, or instead, the specific character video of the pattern that is not selected when the hold consecutive hits are not derived can be derived. good.

Further, in the above embodiment, the promotion challenge effect is configured so that the hold consecutive hit is taught, but the effect that teaches the hold consecutive hit may be made independent as the hold consecutive challenge effect. Furthermore, the hold consecutive challenge effect is set at the start of the jackpot state, and suggests / teaches that the fluctuation information held at the start of the jackpot state includes the one that becomes the jackpot. It may be good, and the fluctuation information that is held at the time when the hold consecutive challenge effect is derived includes the one that is a hit (that is, the fluctuation display that is held after the start of the jackpot state is also included in the judgment). It may be suggested / taught that there is.

In the example of the embodiment, the content taught by the unusual effect (uncomfortable effect) is defined as "holding continuous hit", but another thing (for example, the probability change mode is given after the big hit state). May be configured to be taught. Further, the discomfort effect may be derived even in the normal game state, and the content of the teaching may be the occurrence of a jackpot state or the occurrence of a reach state.

(J; Setting of Winning Probability) It may be provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10 (inner frame 12 or the like) and provided with a setting changing means capable of setting the winning probability (big hit probability) of the winning / losing lottery in a plurality of stages. Further, it may be configured so that the effect of suggesting or teaching the setting of the winning probability can be derived. For example, the jackpot probability can be set and changed in 6 stages, and as an effect that can suggest the setting of the jackpot probability, there are three modes (for example, 6 types) that do not include the suggestion of the setting and the one with the highest jackpot probability. A mode showing that the settings are up to (for example, 1 type), a mode suggesting that the settings are likely to be from the one with the highest jackpot probability to 3 (for example, 2 types), and the one with the higher jackpot probability. A mode showing that the settings are up to two (for example, one type), a mode indicating that the setting has the highest jackpot probability (for example, one type), and the first and third from the one with the highest jackpot probability. And the fifth aspect (for example, one type) may be provided.

In addition, after the jackpot state ends, if the variable display is executed a specified number of times (for example, 800 times) without intervening the jackpot state, the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery increases (it is regarded as a high ball entry state). Such a configuration, for example, a value corresponding to the specified number of times is set for the ceiling counter after the jackpot state ends, and the value of the ceiling counter is subtracted for each fluctuation display to be "0". It may be configured to shift to a state. The high ball entry state may be terminated by displaying a specified number of fluctuations (shift to a low ball entry state), or may be configured to continue until a jackpot state occurs. .. Further, the value of the ceiling counter may not be reset only when the power is turned off (it is reset when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323), or the power is turned off (except for a power failure). It may be configured to be reset in the event of a failure.

(K; Hold icon) The mode and display position of the hold icon 461 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 and the effect using the hold icon 461 (the content of the change information is grasped at the stage where the change information is held and stored). , The hold look-ahead effect for performing the corresponding effect (suggestion of jackpot expectation, etc.) in the mode of the hold icon 461 can be appropriately set for each model. For example, in a configuration that can be set by a person involved in the game field such as a jackpot probability, the hold icon 461 may be used to suggest or teach the setting. Further, in the above embodiment, in the aspect of the hold icon 461, it is not taught which of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b is the variable display based on the ball, but for example, , The hold icon 461 may be configured to have information on whether it corresponds to the first variable display or the second variable display, or may be configured to have such an aspect. good. It is also possible to omit the hold icon 461.

Further, as the form of the hold icon 461, the normal hold icon 461, the look-ahead hold icon 463 that suggests the content of the effect variation display, and the derivation preparation hold icon 463 that may change to the look-ahead hold icon 463 (deriving preparation teaching means). It may be configured to have. It should be noted that the look-ahead hold icon 463 may be derived without going through the derivation preparation hold icon.

In addition, in a configuration in which the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b can be held and stored multiple times, the decorative symbol display device is in a state where the number of held variable displays of the special display devices 43a and 43b is less than a predetermined number. When the hold icon 461 is displayed on the 42 in a normal manner and the number of hold of the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is equal to or more than the specified number, the hold icon 42 is held and stored at that time. With respect to the hold icon 461 corresponding to the variable display, the mode of the hold display area 462 and the hold icon 461 may be configured to be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

(L; Composite variation effect display) In the above embodiment, the composite variation effect display in which the effect displays of the decorative symbol display device 42 corresponding to the variation display of the special display devices 43a and 32b are performed a plurality of times in succession is executed. It may be configured as possible. For example, by making the compound fluctuation effect display corresponding to a plurality of consecutive fluctuation displays of the continuous chan state including the last fluctuation display of the continuous chan state, the fluctuation time can be secured relatively long and multiple times. It is possible to match the jackpot expectation of the variable display of (the compound variable effect display can be successfully terminated if it hits with any of multiple variable displays), and the interest in the compound variable effect display is further increased. Can be done.

(M; Button effect) Further, for example, using the effect button 125, predetermined information (for example, whether or not super reach occurs, whether or not a jackpot state occurs, and whether or not a probability change mode is given. Etc.), which is a button effect that can be taught or suggested, and the effect button 125 is operated a specified number of times or more during the button operation acceptance period of the button effect (detection of the effect operation detecting means for detecting the operation of the effect button 125). However, the configuration may be such that the predetermined information is taught or suggested based on the above-specified number of times or more. Further, the number of achievements of the condition in which the predetermined information is taught or suggested may be different. Further, the operation of the effect button 125 may be counted only when the lottery performed when the effect button 125 is operated is won. In addition, as a button effect in which a predetermined instruction or suggestion is given based on the operation of the effect button 125, a hidden button effect in which a guide for urging the operation of the effect button 125 in the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like is not derived can be executed. You may. Of course, the hidden button effect is an effect that cannot be derived unless the effect button 125 is operated at the corresponding timing.

In addition, it is close to a predetermined position in front of the pachinko machine 10, for example, a glass unit 137 (front portion of the decorative symbol display device 42, etc.) which is a front position of the game area, or a proximity that can detect an object in contact with the pachinko machine 10. A detection means (sensor, camera, touch panel, etc.) may be provided, and the proximity detection means may be used to perform an effect such as a button effect.

Further, for example, there is a super reach effect in which a button effect for operating the effect button 125 is interposed a plurality of times in the effect variation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 performed in response to the variation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b. Based on operating the effect button 125 (or by lottery based on the operation of the effect button 125), a predetermined effect is derived based on the opportunity of each button effect of the reach effect (all or more than once specified). (If the lottery is won), a special effect may be derived at the last button effect opportunity. That is, the button effect A (the effect display expands well) is derived corresponding to the first button effect of the predetermined variable display (by operating the effect button 125), and the button effect A (the effect display expands well) is derived, and the second button effect is supported. When button effect B (effect display develops well) is derived and button effect C (effect display develops well) is derived corresponding to the third button effect, it corresponds to the fourth button effect. The button effect D that teaches the jackpot is derived, and the button effects A to C (the button effects A to C may have multiple patterns instead of one pattern) are derived for each of the first to third button effects. If not, the button effect D may be configured not to be derived even if the jackpot is taught. In a configuration that also determines whether or not the probability variation mode is granted by the winning / fail lottery, the instruction on whether or not the probability variation mode is granted when the button effect D is derived, and the jackpot probability, etc., are provided by the game hall personnel. It may be possible that the setting is suggested or taught in a configuration that can be set (if the button effect D is not derived, it is not taught or is difficult to be taught).

In addition, in the button effect, if the effect button 125 is operated, the corresponding reaction effect is basically derived immediately, but when the reaction effect is derived with a slight delay, or an object close to the effect button 125 is derived. A detectable sensor may be provided so that the reaction effect may be derived before the effect button 125 is operated based on the detection of the sensor. Further, for example, the place where the reaction effect is executed is not particularly limited, and is arranged behind the decorative symbol display device 42, the annular illumination unit 102, the handle 18, the effect button 125, and the right-handed winning unit 37. It is appropriately derived by a light emitting means (surface emitting illumination 188) or the like. Furthermore, even if the reaction effects of the same button effect are performed at the same timing, there are patterns in which the number of execution points is different, or only the patterns in which the mode of the content that matches all of the reaction effects performed at multiple locations is derived. Instead, there are different patterns (for example, in the decorative pattern display device 42 and the effect button 125, a reaction effect corresponding to "failure / miss" was derived, but in the handle 18, it corresponds to "success / hit". The reaction effect to be performed may be derived, and then the reversal effect corresponding to "success / hit" may be derived from the decorative symbol display device 42 or the effect button 125).

Further, for example, a means capable of detecting the contact or proximity of the player is provided in the part where the reaction effect is performed, and among the parts where the reaction effect is performed in the reaction effect, the other parts are "failed / disengaged". Where the aspect of "success / hit" is derived, all the parts have the aspect of "success / hit" based on the fact that the player touches / approaches the part from which the aspect of "success / hit" is derived. It may be configured to be derived. Furthermore, in the part where the reaction effect can be performed, in the configuration where there is a pattern in which the reaction effect is not derived even when the reaction effect is performed in other parts, the reaction effect is performed in the state where the reaction effect is performed. The reaction effect may be generated in the portion based on the fact that the player touches and brings the hand close to the portion of the possible portion where the reaction effect is not performed. In addition, as the button effect, the reaction effect may be configured to be generated based on the player touching and bringing the hand close to the portion where the reaction effect can be performed. When such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to have the player participate more actively in the production, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

(N; Use of the effect in a part that can be operated by the player such as an effect button or a handle) Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, the operation is enabled to generate a predetermined reaction operation by the operation. However, the visual mode of the effect button 125 or its vicinity may be changed depending on the operation invalid state in which the reaction operation does not occur. For example, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means built in the button may be configured to change, or the button may be configured so as to be retractable so that the protrusion amount becomes large in the operation enabled state, or the attached portion is mounted in the operation disabled state. It may be configured to be immersed in (the upper surface of the upper plate 19).

Further, the arrangement, number, configuration, shape, etc. of the effect buttons 125 are not particularly limited and can be appropriately changed. For example, a handle effect button capable of performing the same input as the effect button 125 may be provided at a position (at or near the handle 18) where the handle 18 can be operated without releasing the hand. good. Further, for example, the effect button 125 (effect operation means) may be provided with a lever handle-shaped, joystick-shaped, handle-shaped, or rotary type (reel-shaped, spherical) effect operating means. In addition, a movable portion that can appear and disappear in the handle 18 may be provided.

In addition, it is equipped with a means other than visual communication that conveys information to the player without checking the hands of the player who operates the handle 18 or the effect button 125, such as vibration or wind, and is provided with a predetermined effect, suggestion, or instruction. (For example, it may be configured to enhance the sense of presence in conjunction with the effect of the decorative pattern display device 42, to suggest success by the effect of success or failure, etc.). Further, the information obtained by visually recognizing the winning device other than the decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured to be able to be transmitted to the player by changing the mode of the transmission means other than the visual sense (reaction mode transmitted by a sense other than the visual sense). .. For example, a vibration generator is embedded in the upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15, and the vibration generator vibrates once every time a game ball enters the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b in a jackpot state. It may be generated one by one, and when the game ball enters the special ball entry portion 145, the handle 18 may be vibrated, blown, or deformed (the movable portion protrudes). That is, in order to advance the game, in the case of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to put the game ball into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, and in the jackpot state, the game is played against the variable winning devices 32a and 32b. It is advantageous for the player to let the ball enter efficiently. Therefore, although the decorative symbol display device 42 also produces the effect (for example, a moving image of a specific character display is derived), the behavior related to the (analog) part related to the progress of the game (for example, the game ball start winning device). I'm also worried about whether I was able to get the ball into 32a and 32b well, etc.), so I may shift my eyes to that, which may lead to a situation where I can not fully enjoy the specific character display etc. Is a concern.

In this respect, according to the present embodiment, even if the specific character display derived from the decorative symbol display device 42 is continuously visually recognized, it is possible to grasp the ball entering or the like into a predetermined winning device depending on the reaction mode. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game ball can be successfully entered into the predetermined winning device without shifting the line of sight to the predetermined winning device, and the specific character display and the accompanying voice can be displayed. As a result, the specific character display can be more enjoyed without any hindrance.

On the contrary, a reaction mode (vibration of the effect button 125 or the handle 18 indicating that the game ball has entered the starting winning devices 33a, 33b, the variable winning devices 32a, 32b, etc.) may occur. Situations where you have to look towards the configuration related to a given winning device, such as no reaction mode at all in the situation (the aim of the game ball fired into the game area is not good, the game area or It is also possible to grasp that the ball is jammed in any of the configurations for launching the game ball, there is no game ball on hand, etc.), and by proceeding with the game without noticing these, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage.

The reaction mode may be confirmed while keeping the line of sight on the specific character display of the decorative symbol display device 42, for example, so as to enter the player's field of view to visually recognize the sound effect and the specific character display. Examples thereof include light emission by a light emitting means capable of emitting light, a specific effect display, a display in the vicinity thereof, a change in the tactile sensation of a portion touched by a player, and the like. However, by transmitting the reaction mode by tactile change, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the specific character display and the accompanying voice are disturbed by the light emission or voice for the reaction mode, and the specific character display can be enjoyed. The action and effect such as getting a voice is more surely played. Further, it is also possible to set a reaction mode other than entering the ball into the start winning devices 33a and 33b and the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, for example, a reaction mode corresponding to the passage of the through gate 34 (detection of the through gate switch 225). It is possible. Further, the content transmitted by the operation of the transmission means other than the visual sense is not particularly limited, and may be configured to be able to teach the occurrence of various error states.

(O; effect means) The number, shape, and type of display means for effect are not particularly limited and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, a liquid crystal display device, a dot matrix display device, an EL display device, or the like may be mounted in addition to or instead of the decorative pattern display device 42. Further, in the above embodiment, between the functional position located in front of the decorative symbol display device 42 as the effect display means (of the display unit) and the retracted position of the decorative symbol display device 42 away from the front (of the display unit). A movable accessory (movable accessory) may be provided as a displaceable effect means, and the movable accessory may be configured to be displaceable to a functional position in response to a button effect or the like. Further, the movable accessory may be a display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

In addition, a light guide plate is provided in front of the game area, and a light source for incident light on the light guide plate is provided so that the light source is emitted according to a predetermined opportunity so that a predetermined display mode is visually recognized on the light guide plate. It may be configured. Regarding the display of the light guide plate, a disapproval display or the like may be set for each model, and when the disapproval display is used, the display may be configured to avoid duplication with the specific character display.

Further, a transmissive display device (transmissive liquid crystal display device or the like) may be provided in front of the game area (for example, on the rear surface side of the front frame 14) so as to cover almost the entire front of the game area. For example, in the area in front of the area in the game area (in the current situation) where the game ball is unlikely to pass, a predetermined effect display or a display of a transmissive display device corresponding to a predetermined game state. May be configured to be performed. Further, the transmissive display device may be hidden when the trajectory of the game ball is not fixed (the handle 18 is moving by a predetermined amount or more within a predetermined period).

In addition, a covering means that can be displaced between the covering position located in front of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the retracted position away from the front of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be provided. For example, as a covering means, a pair of left and right substantially plate-shaped shutter accessories are provided, and the pair of shutter accessories abut against each other to make the display portion of the decorative symbol display device 42 invisible or difficult to see. Not only does the state change between the state and the fully open state in which the entire display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42 is exposed to the front, but also the one-sided closed state in which only one shutter accessory covers the front of the decorative symbol display device 42. The state may be changed to a partially closed state in which both shutter accessories are separated from each other by a predetermined distance and cover the front of the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, even in the partially closed state or the partially closed state, a plurality of patterns may be provided so as to have different exposed areas in front of the display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42, or a pair of shutters may be provided in the partially closed state. It is also possible to provide a visual position change effect such that the two are relatively displaced with respect to the decorative symbol display device 42 while maintaining a state of being separated from each other by a certain distance. In the visual position change effect, the relative positional relationship between the player, the decorative symbol display device 42, and the pair of shutter accessories (gap between the shutter accessories) changes. Therefore, if the player is immovable when the visible position changing means is executed, the visible portion of the display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42 changes.

When the visual position change effect is executed, for example, each shutter accessory is configured in a bellows shape or the like, and each shutter accessory can cover more than half of the display portion of the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, as a configuration of each shutter accessory, three plate-like bodies that can be slid to the left and right are provided. The plate-shaped bodies may be configured to be interlocked with each other so that the area where the plates overlap each other in the front-rear direction is reduced. The cross section is substantially U-shaped, and the horizontal cross section is approximately I-shaped with protrusions protruding forward and backward with respect to both sides of the central plate-shaped body, and both sides of the rearmost plate-shaped body. The horizontal cross section is roughly U-shaped with a protrusion that protrudes forward, and the frontmost plate-shaped body is slid by the driving means, and as the plate-shaped body slides to the left and right, the front and rear plates The protrusions of the shaped bodies may be appropriately hooked to each other so that the plate-shaped bodies are interlocked with each other. In addition, the visibility of each part of the decorative pattern display device 42 visually recognized through the gap of the shutter accessory may be improved. In order to improve this, the shutter accessory at the covering position may be configured to have a horizontal cross section and an arc shape in which the central portion in the lateral width direction is located rearward.

In the visual recognition position change effect, a visual mode in which the visual mode and operation of the shutter accessory and the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 are linked is derived. For example, in the display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42, three doors (aspects and successful effects, and by extension, the expectation of big hits are different) are displayed, and the front side of the pair of shutter accessories is the decorative symbol display device 42. It is a picture of a wall similar to the wall provided with the door displayed in, and the pair of shutter accessories is displaced to the left and right (it may be moved back and forth to the left and right), and between the shutter accessories. The door may be configured to open through the gap between the doors.

It should be noted that the visual mode of the shutter accessory may be changed. For example, each shutter accessory may be configured by a movable display device (for example, a sliding movable accessory equipped with a liquid crystal display device), or a movable accessory may be mounted on the shutter accessory. You may. In addition, the position (target) where the shutter is installed can be set as appropriate. In particular, when the shutter is translucent (the rear can be seen through), it can be installed in the game area or the shutter is closed. It is also possible to install it so as to cover the front of the information means that is desirable to be visually recognized even in the state where it is displayed. Further, a transparent portion (for example, a translucent portion, an opening, etc.) of the shutter may be partially provided. For example, by forming the shutter in a grid pattern, a displacement means (movable) for moving the back side of the shutter. It is possible to grasp the behavior of (ceremonial characters, game balls, etc.).

Further, for example, as a kind of button effect, the effect button 125 is a shutter accessory that can be displaced between the closed position located in front of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the open position displaced from the front of the decorative symbol display device 42. It may be configured so that the closed state may be changed to the open state or the open state may be changed to the closed state based on the operation of. Further, a configuration may be successful if the shutter reacts in response to the operation of the effect button 125, a pattern may be provided to intervene a teasing operation, or a lottery is performed based on the operation of the effect button 125. We (you can win only if you can succeed), and the shutter may react when you win the lottery.

Further, the structure of the shutter accessory is not particularly limited, and a flat plate shape, a grid shape, a bellows shape, a strip shape to be wound and accommodated, a plate shape, etc. may be connected so as to be relatively displaceable. It is possible. Further, for example, the shutters may be configured to overlap each other in the front-rear direction. For example, by providing a pair of left and right front shutters in a vertical grid pattern and a pair of left and right rear shutters in a vertical grid pattern and closing both the front shutter and the rear shutter, the rear decorative symbol display device 42 can be used. It is completely invisible, and one of the front shutter and the rear shutter is slightly displaced with respect to the other, so that a gap desired for the decorative symbol display device 42 is formed (when one is opened). May be configured such that the decorative pattern display device 42 can be visually recognized from the opening of the other lattice). The operation of the shutter is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, the effective line of the decorative symbol (the line in which three decorative symbols are displayed side by side) in the decorative symbol display device 42 may be changed depending on the stop position of the shutter accessory. In the rear region of the shutter, the decorative pattern may not be displayed, or the shutter may be translucent so that the outline of the decorative pattern can be grasped, or a hole is formed in the shutter. It may be configured so that each part of the decorative symbol located behind the shutter can be visually recognized. Further, a lower shutter that can appear and disappear from below the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front of the lower part of the display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42 is provided to cover at least a part of the front of the hold icon 461, and the entire hold icon 461. It may be configured so that the state can be changed to the state where the is exposed. A space is provided between each shutter and the decorative symbol display device 42. For example, even if the lower shutter is in a state of protruding in front of the decorative symbol display device 42, the back side of the lower shutter is displayed. Except from above, at least a portion of the hold icon 461 may be visible. That is, when the visual object, the shutter, and the player's viewpoint are lined up in a straight line, the visual object is invisible or difficult to see from the player, and when any of them deviates from the straight line, the visual object is from the player. Visible or easy to see. In addition to or in addition to the shutter, a transmissive display device provided in front of the game area may be configured to show or hide the display on the decorative symbol display device 42 in the same manner.

In addition, a plurality of shutters are provided so as to be arranged in a direction parallel to the display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42, and a shutter to be displaced by the operation of the player is selected, and the decorative symbol exposed with the displacement of the shutter is selected. A predetermined effect / suggestion / teaching may be performed in the area of the display device 42. It may be possible to select with the cross-shaped button 126, or the shutters that appear to shine may be changed in order so that the shutters that appear to shine are selected at the timing when the effect button 125 is operated.

(P; Approach detecting means) Further, in the above embodiment, it is possible to detect the proximity or contact of an object with a predetermined position on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a plurality of locations of the decorative symbol display device 42), and the sub. Proximity detection means (for example, a proximity detection sensor or a touch panel having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit) connected to the input / output port 554 of the control device 262 may be provided. For example, when the player brings a finger or the like close to the hold icon 461 displayed in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42, the mode of the hold icon 461 is based on the detection of the finger or the like. It may be configured to change or move. In this case, the interest in the hold icon 461 can be increased. Further, for example, in a configuration in which a big hit state is generated when a game ball enters a special ball entry portion instead of producing an effect such as touching the glass unit 137, the proximity detection sensor is used to reach the glass unit 137. When the contact or proximity of the player is detected, a warning to prohibit shaking the pachinko machine 10 and a guidance display may be derived.

(Q; Staging changes depending on how the game balls are hit) The first prize-winning device and the second prize-winning device (a through gate is acceptable instead of the prize-winning device) have the same value (prize ball, etc.) of the information that detected the game ball. Further, when a ball is entered into the first winning device (or when the ball is moved to the left side area and entered into the first variable winning device 32a) by providing a plurality of balls other than the two), the second winning device is provided. Alternatively, it may be configured so that a different effect display is selected depending on whether the ball is entered in the first variable winning device 32a by moving the right side region (or the ball is entered in the first variable winning device 32a). In this case, it is possible to provide a new effect such that the effect display changes depending on the winning destination of the game ball, instead of directly operating the effect button 125 or the like. It is desirable that the first winning device and the second winning device can be separated by operating the handle 18 of the player. In this case, the player can arbitrarily select the effect display that changes depending on the winning destination, instead of randomly selecting the effect display.

(R; AR) In the pachinko machine 10 of the above embodiment, the functions of augmented reality and virtual reality (mixed reality) may be provided. That is, when the player installs the AR application provided by the server of the gaming machine manufacturer on the mobile communication terminal and points the mobile communication terminal at the pachinko machine 10 with the AR application activated, the mobile communication terminal is photographed. A virtual image object (character moving image, etc.) added by the function of the AR application is synthesized with the image of the pachinko machine 10 taken by the means (camera), and the display means (display such as a liquid crystal display) of the mobile communication terminal. To be displayed with. Further, the marker for recognizing the type and location of the image object to be derived for the AR application may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, for example. Then, when the mobile communication terminal is pointed at the pachinko machine 10 with the AR application activated so that the marker is included in the shooting range, for example, the character is displayed as if it pops out in front of the decorative symbol display device 42. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, for example, by wearing goggles (VR headset) for virtual reality brought by the player and aligning the VR headset with the pachinko machine 10 by a method such as reading a marker, basically. , An image related to the motif of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, an image under the sea) is displayed in an area other than the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 (game area, upper plate 19, handle 18, lower plate 15, etc.), and the world of the motif is displayed. A simulated experience of moving is provided. In addition, if the VR headset is attached and the VR function is turned on, the player's sensitivity to reality will decrease, so the mechanical error of the pachinko machine 10 and the detection of earthquakes using the vibration detection function, etc. Is desirable to be displayed (notified) on the image visually recognized by the player via the VR headset. In addition, the virtual reality is displayed in a range of about 180 degrees centered on the decorative symbol display device 42 (or the marker is removed from the shooting range when the marker is photographed as a display condition). ) Etc., it is desirable to configure it so that the real world can be seen.

(S; Mobile interlocking game) In the above embodiment, data is exchanged between the pachinko machine 10 and a server operated by a game machine maker or the like via a communication mobile terminal or the like owned by the player (so-called mobile). It may be configured so that interlocking games) can be performed. Further, when the mobile interlocking game is terminated, the two-dimensional code including the game information of this time is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the player reads the two-dimensional code on the mobile communication terminal and the mobile communication terminal. In a configuration in which the game information is transmitted to the server by accessing the server, the pachinko machine 10 counts the number of fluctuation counters for counting the number of fluctuations of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the number of occurrences of various jackpot states. A jackpot counter or the like may be provided, and the two-dimensional code displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 at the end of the mobile interlocking game may be configured to include information indicating various values of the counter. Furthermore, the information on the total number of shots of the game ball, the type of the derived effect, the number of times, the number of times the player operates the effect button 125 during the button effect, etc. are also included in the two-dimensional code. May be good. In this case, the gaming machine maker can grasp the gaming situation.

The value of the counter is erased by being two-dimensionally coded, and other than that, it is accumulated (even if the power is turned off) (it is erased by turning on the power while operating the RAM erase switch 323). ) May be. Further, the password may be input at the start of the game and the password may be output at the end of the game, so that a part of the previous game information can be handed over to the next game without going through the server.

Further, when the mobile interlocking game is performed, the number of big hits (may be for each big hit type), the number of fluctuations, and the like of the player in this game may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. Furthermore, when playing a mobile-linked game on a slot machine, the number of bonuses for the player's current game (may be for each bonus type), the number of small wins with different winning probabilities for each setting, the number of games, etc. Further, the probability of winning a bonus or a small winning combination with respect to the number of games may be configured to be displayable on the display device of the slot machine (output to the server via the mobile communication terminal). In addition, the data of today's slot machine before the mobile interlocking game may be displayed on the display device. Even if the mobile-linked game is not performed, the information may be configured to be displayable on the display device of the game machine.

(T; real-time clock) A real-time clock capable of grasping the date and time may be provided so that the effect mode corresponding to the information on the date and time of the real-time clock can be derived. Further, it may be configured so that the effect that is easy to be selected changes (the table for the effect that is easy to select changes) depending on the time and date. For example, a real-time clock is provided in the sub-control device 262, and a plurality of settlement time setting tables to be referred to when it is decided to lengthen the settlement effect are provided, and the time when it is decided to lengthen the decision effect is in the morning. If there is, the first settlement time setting table is referred to, and if it is afternoon (until night), the second settlement time setting table, which is easier to set a longer time than the first settlement time setting table, is referred to. If the closing time of the game hall is approaching at night (for example, after 21:00), the first settlement time setting table or the third settlement time, which is easier to set than the first settlement time setting table, is set. It may be configured to refer to the time setting table. A real-time clock is provided in the main control device 261 and a plurality of fluctuation time determination tables referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b are provided, and it is relatively short at night (for example, after 21:00). It may be configured so that the fluctuation time determination table in which the fluctuation time can be easily set can be easily selected.

(U; jackpot specification) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 of various jackpot types, and the like are not particularly limited and can be appropriately set for each model. Further, in the jackpot state, which of the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b is opened, and both the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b At what timing (the order and number of jackpot rounds) the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b are opened in the jackpot state that is in the open state (the first variable winning device 32a in the jackpot state). , And the opening / closing pattern of the second variable winning device 32b) is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, the second variable winning device 32b may be opened in the second round and the seventh round, and the first variable winning device 32a may be opened in the other rounds. Further, the variable winning devices 32a and 32b may be opened and closed a plurality of times in one round. The jackpot states in which the opening and closing patterns of the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b are different are set as individual jackpot types and are associated with the stop symbols of the special display devices 43a and 43b. May be.

Furthermore, for example, when the jackpot state is won in the normal mode (normal staging mode; until the next jackpot), 80% of the jackpot types shift to the probabilistic mode (precursor staging mode; until the next jackpot). Is a 2-round normal jackpot that shifts to the normal mode (normal staging mode), and 80% of the jackpot types when the jackpot state is won in the probabilistic mode (precursor staging mode or probabilistic staging mode) is the probabilistic mode (probabilistic staging mode). 8 round probability change jackpot that shifts to 8 rounds, 20% is a normal jackpot that shifts to the time reduction mode (pull-back effect mode; until the next jackpot), and is a jackpot when the jackpot state is won in the time reduction mode (pull-back effect mode). The type may be a two-round probability change jackpot in which 80% shifts to the probability variation mode (probability change effect mode) and a two-round normal jackpot in which 20% shifts to the time reduction mode (pull-back effect mode).

Further, a state in which the ball is in a high probability state and a low ball entry state (“latent mode”) may be provided. In addition, in the above embodiment, the winning probability in the winning / losing lottery is changed, but the winning probability does not change (is constant), and the period of the high-entry state given after the end of the big hit state ( The above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns (number of fluctuations) are prepared. Further, the winning probability in the ball winning support lottery, the opening / closing pattern of the second starting winning device 33b when winning, and the like can be appropriately set for each model.

(V; Priority digestion of the reserved variable display) In the above embodiment, the second variable display held after the first variable display already held is digested before the first variable display. In addition, the second variation display is configured to be preferentially digested over the first variation display by changing the reserved order, but the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a. The first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b regardless of whether the first variation display based on the above or the second variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b. The corresponding variation display may be reserved in the order of entry of the game ball into the ball, and the variation display may be configured to be digested in order from the previously reserved variation display.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the jackpot is won in the winning / failing lottery performed based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a and the case where the ball is entered into the second starting winning device 33b are performed. The distribution ratio of the jackpot types that can be given is different depending on whether the jackpot is won in the win / fail lottery, but it may be configured to be the same. In addition, in the above embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the first start winning device 33a and the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second start winning device 33b are the same. May be configured to be greater than the other. It is also possible to configure the first variable display and the second variable display so that at least one of the variable displays cannot be stored on hold.

(W; Processing of the main control device) In the above embodiment, the main control device 261 is configured to perform the normal processing (see FIG. 10) after the main processing (see FIG. 9). It is not limited to the configuration. For example, after step S111 of the main process, processing such as updating the counter value performed in steps S209 to S218 of the normal process in the above embodiment is performed, for example, in the timer interrupt process performed every 2 msec. The processing performed in steps S201 to S208 of the normal processing in the embodiment and the processing in step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt processing in the above embodiment may be performed. In this case, as the process of step S401, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and when the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, the power failure occurs. There is a configuration in which the flag indicating the occurrence of is turned on. Further, the process of step S401 may be separately performed as NMI interrupt process as in the above embodiment.

In addition, in the above embodiment, at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, it is reconfirmed whether or not the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1 corresponds to the winning, and the result of the confirmation processing (the winning / failing flag or the like). It may be configured so that the determination of whether or not to generate the jackpot state and the determination of the variable display pattern are performed according to the state).

Further, in the above embodiment, the main control device 261 determines the launch timing (launch interval) of the launch device 60, but the configuration is not particularly limited to this, and the launch timing is determined by the launch control circuit 312. It may be configured to measure (launch interval). In this case, the control load of the main control device 261 can be suppressed.

(X; setting by the player) In the above embodiment, by operating the effect button 125 in a state where the game is not performed, the menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the effect on the decorative symbol display device 42. It is configured to be able to change the pattern, change the volume, change the brightness, enter the password when performing mobile interlocking games, output the two-dimensional code, etc., but the player can set it for staging etc. The contents of the items can be changed as appropriate for each model. It may be possible to change the derivation ratio of a predetermined effect type, set to increase the derivation frequency of a predetermined character, or to configure a configuration in which a mobile-linked game is not performed. Further, a button capable of setting the volume and a button capable of setting the brightness may be provided so that the adjustment can be set without opening the menu screen (reference posture and). It may be one button that can take an increasing posture and a decreasing posture, or it may be composed of an increasing button and a decreasing button). Further, the size, color, etc. of the characters displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 may be configured to be changeable based on the operation of the player. Further, the LED built in the effect button 125 is in a button invalid state in which the visual aspect of the pachinko machine 10 does not change even if the effect button 125 is operated, and the visual aspect of the pachinko machine 10 by operating the effect button 125. The light emitting mode (light emitting color, etc.) is configured to be different depending on the button enabled state in which the change occurs and the operation state (state during operation or after operation) in which the effect button 125 is operated in the button enabled state. May be good.

As an input means that can be used when making various settings, for example, a touch panel may be provided at a position where the player can contact (sensual adjustment is possible), or a plurality of input buttons may be provided. (A finer adjustment can be made more preferably).

(Y; game points) In the above embodiment, game points are given by advancing the game (for example, 1 point for one variable display, 30 points for super reach occurrence, 1000 points for one jackpot), and game points. By accumulating a specified number of games, or by consuming a specified number of game points based on the player's operation input, it is possible to derive new effects (variable display, effects in a jackpot state, arrangement of a specific character, etc.). It may be configured to be. In addition, it becomes easy to accumulate game points (for example, if the variable display exceeds 400 times from the end of the jackpot state, the game points are doubled due to the occurrence of super reach or the jackpot state, and if it exceeds 500 times, the game is played even with the variable display. It may be configured so that points are accumulated twice).

In addition, it is configured so that predetermined suggestions (suggestion of jackpot, suggestion of probability variation mode, suggestion of the setting in a configuration in which the jackpot probability can be set in multiple stages, etc.) may be made in the production using the game points. You may.

(Z; How to create a moving image) In the above embodiment, a moving image is generated by reading moving image data in which the contents from the beginning to the end are defined in advance, but 3DCG (three-dimensional computer) that renders in real time is performed. Like the animation of graphics), it may be configured to generate a moving image according to the situation in real time (for example, create a key frame at any time according to the situation and connect the images). In addition, it is not necessary to use multiple layers, and only the video to be visually displayed is played (the video is generated at any time, or the key frame is recreated when there is a change). It may be possible (multiple layers are conceptualized and image objects are appropriately combined to generate).

(Aa; winning device) The arrangement and number of the first starting winning device 33a, the second starting winning device 33b, the through gate 34, the first variable winning device 32a, the second variable winning device 32b, etc. provided in the game area are particularly important. It is not limited and can be arranged as appropriate for each model. For example, in the above embodiment, the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b are both provided in the right side region of the game area, but the arrangement and configuration of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b are particularly limited. It is not something that is done, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the first variable winning device 32a may be arranged in the left side region, and the second variable winning device 32b may be arranged in the right side region. Further, it is also possible to omit the second variable winning device 32b and the second starting winning device 33b.

Further, for example, the first start winning device, the second starting winning device, and the game ball that has entered the entry section are the first. A starting winning unit may be provided, which is provided with a starting winning device and a guiding means for alternately guiding the second starting winning device. When this configuration is adopted, in addition to the first start winning device corresponding to the first variation display and the second start winning device corresponding to the second variation display, the second variation display is supported and the blade member is used. An openable / closable third start winning device (a state can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter) may be provided.

(Bb; non-electric accessory) A first open / close type ball entry device and a second open / close type entry device that can change the state between an open state in which a game ball moving in a game area can enter and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter. A ball device and a third open / close type ball entry device are provided, and an actuated ball entry device capable of constantly entering a game ball moving in the game area is provided, and when the game ball enters the actuated ball entry device, When the first open interlocking member interlocking with the game ball opens the first open / close type entry device and the game ball enters the first open / close type entry device, the first closure interlocked with the game ball. The interlocking member closes the first open / close type ball entry device, and the second open interlocking member linked to the game ball that has entered the first open / close type ball entry device opens the second open / close type ball entry device. , When a game ball enters the second open / close type entry device, the second closing interlocking member interlocking with the game ball closes the second open / close type entry device and the second open / close type entry device. When the third open interlocking member interlocking with the game ball entered into the device opens the second open / close type entry device and the game ball enters the third open / close type entry device, the third open interlocking member interlocks with the game ball. The third closing interlocking member may be configured to close the third opening / closing type ball entry device. Here, the privilege given to the player differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first and second open / close type entry devices and the game ball enters the third open / close type entry device. (For example, when a game ball enters the first and second opening / closing type entry devices, the opening / closing type entry device that is subsequently interlocked is only opened, but the third opening / closing type entry device is opened. When a game ball enters the device, the variable winning device is opened multiple times when the game ball enters the special ball entry portion provided inside the third open / close type ball entry device. A special gaming state may occur).

The number of open / close type ball entry devices is not particularly limited, and for example, two sets of an actuated ball entry device and an open / close type winning device may be provided. In addition, the operation winning device is omitted, and the game ball can be inserted into the open / close type entry device in the closed state. The ball device may be configured to be in the open state, and the open / close type ball entry device may be closed when the game ball enters the open / close type entry device in the open state. Further, the actuated ball entry device may be openable and closable so as to be released by winning the ball entry support lottery.

In addition, the actuated ball entry device, the first open / close type entry device, and the second open / close type entry device are provided, and the actuated ball entry device includes a game ball that has entered the actuated ball entry device and the first opening / closing device. The first open interlocking member that interlocks with the type entry device, the second open interlocking member that interlocks the game ball that has entered the actuated ball entry device with the second open / close type entry device, and the actuated ball entry device. It is provided with a guiding means for guiding the balled game ball to either the first opening interlocking member or the second opening interlocking member, and when the game ball enters the first opening / closing type entry device and the second opening / closing. The privilege given to the player may be different depending on the case where the game ball enters the formula ball entry device (the game ball is attached to the first open interlocking member in the open state and the second open interlocking member). When the ball enters, the first opening interlocking member and the second opening interlocking member are closed).

(Cc; Countermeasures against fraud) In the above embodiment, a vibration detecting means for detecting the vibration of the pachinko machine 10 and a magnetic detecting means for detecting the magnetism generated in the pachinko machine 10 (gaming area) are provided, and the alert level is set to a plurality of stages. It may be configured to be configurable with. That is, for example, a specific area where a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a special entry section where a game ball entering the specific area can enter are provided, and the game ball enters the special entry section. In a configuration in which a predetermined privilege is given by playing a ball, when the game ball is present in a specific area, the alert level of the vibration detecting means or the magnetic detecting means is raised (compared to a state where the game ball does not exist in the specific area). It may be configured to generate an error state even with smaller vibrations or weaker magnetism). Further, for example, the alert level may be raised in a state where the opening / closing means for opening / closing a specific area where it is desirable to enter a game ball moving in the game area is in the open state.

For example, at the normal alert level, in vibration detection, the vibration generation flag is turned on, the vibration monitoring counter is set (for example, 5 vibrations can be detected), and the vibration monitoring timer is set (for example, 10 seconds can be monitored). ), And when vibration is detected when the vibration generation flag is on, the value of the vibration monitoring counter is updated (value is subtracted by 1) and the vibration monitoring timer is reset, and the vibration monitoring counter is set to a predetermined number. If this is the case, a warning (for example, warning display of the decorative symbol display device 42, derivation of a warning sound) is issued, an error state is set when the value of the vibration monitoring counter is "0", and vibration is generated when the value of the vibration monitoring timer is "0". It may be configured to turn off the flag. On the other hand, when the alert level is increased, an error state is set by one vibration detection (depending on the strength of vibration, for example, a warning is given when it is weaker than a predetermined threshold value (second time). If it gives a warning, it will be in an error state), and if it is strong, it will be in an error state).

That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is unintentionally vibrated or the like when the pachinko machine 10 is seated, left, or the game ball is rented out from the chair installed for the player who plays the pachinko machine 10. It is conceivable that the above will be added, and if the error state is set one by one, there is a concern that it may cause troublesome thoughts and troubles for the pachinko and pachislot players and the players. In this regard, by changing the alert level of the vibration detecting means as described above, it is possible to suppress such concerns and simplify the control. Regarding magnetism (possession itself is suspicious), monitoring may be performed at a certain level without changing the alert level.

(Dd; error state) In the error state, the lottery, the granting of benefits, etc. during that period may be invalidated. Further, the error state may be configured so as not to be resolved unless the person concerned with the game hall performs the corresponding operation, or the error state may be configured to be automatically resolved after a specified time from the occurrence of the error state due to the occurrence of vibration or the like. Depending on the degree of detection of vibration, magnetic force, etc. (for example, the magnitude of vibration can be detected, the length and number of vibrations can be measured, and the specified threshold value is not exceeded or exceeded. It may be configured to be divided into a case where the problem is solved automatically and a case where the problem is not solved automatically. However, in a state where the alert level is raised, it is desirable that the error state can be resolved by a person involved in the amusement park performing a cancellation operation. The method of resolving the error state by a person involved in the amusement park is not particularly limited, and the power is turned on while operating the RAM erase switch 323, the error resolving button is operated by a predetermined method, and the like. It can be designed.

Further, for example, a specific area where a game ball moving in a game area can enter is provided, and a special ball entry section and a non-special entry section where a game ball moving to the specific area can enter are provided. , In a configuration in which a predetermined privilege is given when a game ball enters the special entry section, the special entry section and the non-special entry section even if there is an error state due to ball clogging in a specific area. The detection information of the ball entering the ball may be stored. In this case, if the player is in an error state due to the occurrence of a defect-free ball jam or the like and the game is interrupted, it is possible to count the number of balls entering the special ball entry section during the error state. Therefore, the game can be restarted so as not to be disadvantageous to the player, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

(Ee; Other Adjustment Functions) Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an adjuster capable of changing the inclination angle of the pachinko machine 10 installed on the installation surface. The pachinko machine 10 can be suitably installed regardless of the inclination or unevenness of the installation location of the pachinko machine 10. Further, a master setting means may be provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10 to set upper and lower limits of volume and brightness that can be set by the player.

When a movable accessory is provided so as to appear and disappear in the front area of the decorative symbol display device 42, and a transmissive display device is provided in front of the movable accessory, the decorative symbol display device depends on the height of the player. There is a concern that the aspect in which the aspect of 42, the movable accessory, and the aspect of the transmissive display device are combined cannot be visually recognized well. In this respect, for example, the visual mode of the transmissive display device and the position of the movable accessory may be adjusted by the operation of the player from the menu screen or the like, and the grasping means capable of grasping the physique of the player and the like. (A sensor for measuring the position of both eyes is provided so that the height and the like can be grasped from the viewpoint position), and the setting suitable for the player may be made (manually or automatically).

(Fl; Game board) In the above embodiment, the game board 30 is made of a transparent resin, but it may be made of an opaque resin, or a transparent resin portion and an opaque resin portion are mixed. It may be made of wood or it may be made of wood. When the game board 30 is transparent, a movable accessory, a fixed accessory, a display means, special display devices 43a and 43b, a hold display device 46a and 46b, a normal symbol display device 41, and a normal symbol display device 41 are on the back side of the game board 30. A hold display device 44 or the like may be provided. Further, when the game board 30 is transparent, the game ball moving in the game area in front of the game board 30 passes through the back side passage extending to the back side of the game board 30 through the opening provided in the game board 30. It is also possible to return to the game area in front of the game board 30 through the opening provided in the game board 30.

(1-a; Arrangement of Information Means and Decorative Panels) In the above embodiment, the decorative panel 401 is provided in front of the right-handed winning unit 37, but the present invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration, and the decorative panel is not particularly limited. The installation location of 401 can be changed as appropriate for each model. The decorative panel 401 has a feature that the area covered in the front by the decorative panel 401 can be visually recognized while the decorative panel 401 is decorated by itself. Therefore, the decorative panel 401 can be arranged in front of the configuration that is relatively important for the player such as information means, and as a result, the installation location and size of the decoration by the decorative panel 401 can be set relatively freely. be able to.

Further, in the above embodiment, the right-handed winning unit 37, in particular, each winning device provided in the right-handed winning unit 37 and the game ball moving the right-handed winning unit 37 are considered to correspond to the information means. However, the information means can be changed as appropriate for each model. Here, the information means means that the pachinko machine 10 is in a predetermined state (for example, during the probability change jackpot, during the probability change mode) in the progress of the game, and that a predetermined state occurs (it is determined that after a predetermined time). Or, it is scheduled to occur based on a predetermined opportunity, for example, a variable display that teaches the occurrence of a jackpot, or a variable display that causes a reach state in the staging display), or a predetermined Information such as the fact that a state is likely to occur (a high probability state, a high ball entry state, or a state in which the derivation of a predetermined effect is easily selected) is taught or suggested to the player. .. As a specific example of the information means, for example, display means (special display devices 43a, 43b, ordinary symbol display device 41, decorative symbol display device 42, hold display devices 46a, 46b, ordinary hold display device 44) for displaying predetermined information. Etc.), a light emitting means indicating that the corresponding ball entering means is in the open state, a state changing means for changing the state between the first state and the second state (for example, variable winning devices 32a, 32b, second starting winning). Device 33b, movable accessory, etc.), moving means that have different results depending on the destination (game ball that moves in the game area, probability change mode is given by entering the game ball, and the jackpot state is It is determined in advance by using a game ball that enters a variable winning device having a specific winning portion to be given and moves in a specific area of the variable winning device, or a pseudo ball that imitates a game ball as an effect. Pseudo-spheres, etc. in the case of performing a pseudo-sphere effect that teaches the contents by the behavior of a pseudo-sphere) and the like can be mentioned. Further, the decorative panel 401 may be provided in front of the through gate 34 and the general winning opening 31. Further, information such as model specifications (big hit probability, distribution ratio of big hit type, duration of high ball entry state, etc.), model name, copyright source, etc. may be adopted as information means.

As the decorative panel 401, it is easy to perform more impressive decoration by securing a relatively large area, and as in the above embodiment, the front of the plurality of ball entry means is put together by one decorative panel 401. The area of the decorative panel 401 may be secured by covering or the like. Further, not only the front of the plurality of information means is covered by the decorative panel 401, but also the front of one information means may be covered by the decorative panel 401. When the front of the plurality of information means is covered with a continuous decorative panel 401, for example, when the front of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is covered by the decorative panel 401, the first special A direction other than the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the display device 43a and the second special display device 43b are lined up (the direction in which the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b are lined up, preferably). The first decorative unit 405 and the second decorative unit 407 are arranged so as to be lined up along the direction in which the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b are 45 degrees or less with respect to the line-up direction). , At least one of the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 may be arranged between the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. In this case, even if the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b are separated from each other by a relatively large distance, the specific aspect of the decorative panel 401 can be reliably visually recognized. Further, regardless of the number of information means installed in the area covered in front of the decorative panel 401, the change in the state of the information means can be surely grasped (for example, the opening / closing member of the winning device is in the closed position). It shall be configured so that it can be seen both when it is in the open position and when it is in the open position. In addition, the number of decorative panels 401 is not particularly limited, and can be installed at a plurality of locations.

Further, for example, when a plurality of information means whose fronts are covered by the decorative panel 401 are interlocked with each other, by visually recognizing the decorative panel 401 from the second position, any of the interlocking information means can be visually recognized. It is desirable that it is done. As the "interlocking", for example, the first information means as the plurality of information means and the second information means are light emitting means, and the first information means emits light to teach that the first privilege is given. The first information means may be configured so that the second information means emits light after the first information means emits light, thereby giving a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, or the first information means. Is the start winning device 33a, 33b and the through gate 34, and the second information means can be opened by the result of the winning / failing lottery, the variable winning devices 32a, 32b, and the ball entry support lottery. It may be the start winning device 33b.

Further, for example, even if the decorative panel 401 is installed in a range of the game area where the winning device (ball winning means) does not exist, the behavior of the game ball passing behind the decorative panel 401 (movement route, the predetermined entry). Whether or not the game ball enters the winning device provided on the downstream side of the decorative panel 401 or is easy to enter (and by extension, a privilege) depending on the arrival timing when the ball means is an openable type. Is given or not), so that the game ball corresponds to an information means, and in a situation where the game ball is passed through the back side of the decorative panel 401, the game ball on the back side thereof is passed through the decorative panel 401. You can check the route and adjust the firing strength of the game ball.

Further, the decorative panel 401 is not limited to a configuration in which the entire decorative panel 401 is provided in the game area, but a part of the decorative panel 401 is provided in the game area and other parts are provided outside the game area. Alternatively, the entire decorative panel 401 may be provided outside the game area, or the game ball may not be visually recognized through the decorative panel 401. For example, in a predetermined portion of the front frame 14 (for example, below the window portion 101, on the side of the upper plate 19, or in an enclosed pachinko machine that prevents the player from contacting the game ball, the upper plate 19 is covered with a lid. A decorative panel may be provided in such a manner as such), and a decorative means (decorative panel) may be provided in the effect button 125 or the like. For example, the effect button 125 has a button base attached to the front frame 14, a transparent operating body having a shape that allows relative displacement up and down with respect to the button base and closing the upper opening of the cylindrical body, and an operating body. It is equipped with an operation detection switch that detects that the pressing operation has been performed, and an effect body provided inside the operation body. By operating the operation body and the effect body approaching the operation surface of the operation body, the operation body is provided. The mode of the decorative sticker attached to the back surface of the operation surface and the mode of the effect body are combined to form a specific mode, the operation body is not operated, the operation body is set as the reference position, and the effect body is operated. By separating from the operation surface of the body, a gap is formed between the decorative seal of the operating body and the effect body, and the form of the decorative body provided behind the effect body through the gap. (Or, when the decorative body is used as a light emitting means, the light of the decorative body is irradiated to the outside of the effect button 125).

In the above embodiment, the entire front surface of the right-handed winning unit 37 (front plate portion 185 of the front part 184) is configured to match the area covered by the decorative panel 401, but the right-handed winning is won. A wider area than the unit 37 may be covered with the decorative panel 401, or the front of a part of the right-handed winning unit 37 may not be covered with the decorative panel 401. Further, for example, the entrance of the right-handed winning unit 37 may be configured so that the front is not covered by the decorative panel 401. In this case, at the moment when the game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 37, the game ball can be easily visually recognized unconditionally, and whether or not the game ball has entered the right-handed winning unit 37 can be determined. It can be made easier to recognize.

Further, even if the entire front of the right-handed winning unit 37 is covered with the decorative panel 401, the front of the right-handed winning unit 37 is not covered with the specific mode (first decorative portion 405 and second decorative portion 407). By doing so, the same action and effect can be achieved. Therefore, for example, as in the above embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b is incorporated in the right-handed winning unit 37, and the entire front part 184 of the right-handed winning unit 37 is covered with the decorative panel 401. Further, in the portion corresponding to the entrance of the second variable winning device 32b, the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are omitted (or, it is said that the transparency is enhanced), so that the second decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are omitted. It is possible to make it easier to recognize whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning device 32b.

Further, the decorative panel 401 may be provided so as to cover (a part of) the decorative pattern display device 42. Further, the decorative panel 401 may be configured to be displaceable between the front position of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the position away from the front of the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, the decorative panel 401 may be configured to be rotatable (tilted) so that the first position or the like changes.

In the case of a configuration in which the decorative panel 401 (a part of the decorative panel 401) is displaced, the emission color is changed, or the like, the visual mode can be changed, depending on the effect of the decorative pattern display device 42 (for example, super reach is generated, etc.). (Timing of step-up) The mode may change, or the mode may change according to the change in the gaming state (normal mode, probability change mode, time reduction mode, jackpot state, and customer waiting state). Etc., the pattern, emission color, brightness, position, etc. may be different).

(1-b; 1st position) In the above embodiment, when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the front surface (corresponding to the 1st position) of the decorative panel 401, the pattern of the front side sheet 403 and the pattern of the rear surface side sheet 404 are displayed. The pattern (specific mode) combined with is visible, but when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the front of the decorative panel 401 (this time corresponding to the second position), the rear of the decorative panel 401 The right-handed winning unit 37 arranged in may be configured to be visible. That is, in the above embodiment, it is possible to visually recognize the right-handed winning unit 37 side only by turning the face sideways from the posture in which the player normally plays the game, but from the posture in which the player normally plays the game. When the face is turned sideways, the configuration may be such that a specific aspect of the decorative panel 401 can be visually recognized. That is, it can be appropriately changed according to the information means (importance in the progress of the game) covered in front by the decorative panel 401 and the game machine concept (such as wanting to fully display the decoration and production of the character). .. When the player changes the posture in which the game is normally performed so that the specific aspect of the decorative panel 401 can be visually recognized when the face is turned sideways, the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are used. Examples include changing the relative position and changing the orientation of the decorative panel 401 inward.

(1-c; Illumination, light emitting means) The decorative panel 401 (decorative means) is mainly used to visually recognize a specific aspect of the decorative panel 401, and the light emitting means is arranged behind the decorative panel 401 to form the decorative panel 401 and. It may be installed for the purpose of brightening the peripheral portion (using the decorative panel 401 like lighting). That is, if a decorative means not provided with the light emitting means is installed, there is a concern that the decorative means and its peripheral portion may become dark, so that the pachinko machine 10 is located at a position that is relatively easy for the player to see. It may be difficult to install decorative means (especially relatively large ones). Further, when the lighting for brightening the decorative means is provided, the design is deteriorated due to the direct visual recognition of the lighting, or the light of the lighting is directly incident on the eyes of the player. There is concern that it will be a burden on people's eyes.

In this regard, by installing the light emitting means (surface emitting illumination 188) behind the decorative panel 401 as in the above embodiment, the surface emitting illumination 188 is directly visually recognized, and the light of the surface emitting illumination 188 is seen by the player. The decorative panel 401 and its peripheral portion can be efficiently brightened while suppressing direct incident light. In particular, by configuring the pachinko machine 10 so that the position corresponding to the central portion in the lateral width direction is the first position, such an action effect is further exhibited. As a result, for the player who plays the pachinko machine 10 in a normal posture (the face faces the substantially central portion of the game area), the specific aspect of the decorative panel 401 and its peripheral portion can be visually recognized brightly. In particular, it is possible to prevent the decorative panel 401 from becoming too bright, or by directly visually recognizing the light emitting means for brightening the decorative panel 401, which causes a deterioration in design.

Regarding the decorative panel 401 installed in a place where information means or decorations that are visible to the player behind the decorative panel 401 are not installed, the rear of the decorative panel 401 can be visually recognized via the decorative panel 401. In this case, the second transmissive portion 408 is translucent and has translucency, but the opposite side of the rear surface side sheet 404 cannot be visually recognized via the second transmissive portion 408. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that it is difficult to see.

Further, the light emitting means provided corresponding to the decorative panel 401 is not limited to the surface light emitting illumination 188, and a point light emitting means may be provided. Further, when the configuration is adopted, the light emitting means may be provided at a position deviating from the extension line of the virtual straight line passing through the first transmission unit 406 and the second transmission unit 408. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the light emitting means is visually recognized when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the second position, and the light emitting means is also visible to the player (eyes) visually recognized from the second position. While avoiding the situation where the direct light of the light is incident on the surface, it is possible to avoid the deterioration of the design due to the visual recognition of the light emitting means. In addition, derivable emission colors, patterns such as lighting, blinking, and extinguishing can be appropriately set.

Further, the light emitting mode and the change in the light emitting mode of the light emitting means are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately changed for each model. For example, in a low ball entry state, that is, in a state where it is not necessary to visually recognize the right-handed winning unit 37, the surface light emitting illumination 188 as a light emitting means is made to emit blue light in a blue color matching a motif of a specific embodiment, and a high ball entry state. That is, in a state where it is necessary to visually recognize the right-handed winning unit 37, the surface-emitting illumination 188 may be made to emit light in white, which does not hinder the visual recognition. Although an LED as a light emitting means is provided corresponding to each winning device provided in the right-handed winning unit 37, it may be omitted. However, the light emitting mode of the corresponding LED may be changed according to the open / closed state of the winning device or the winning of the game ball to the winning device, or the light emitting mode of the surface light emitting illumination 188 may be changed according to the game state. Therefore, various states of the right-handed winning unit 37 and the like can be grasped without directly visually recognizing the right-handed winning unit 37, and convenience can be improved.

Further, even in the jackpot state, the player will be hit to the right, but in the jackpot round in which the first variable winning device 32a is in the open state, the surface emitting illumination 188 emits yellow light and the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state. The jackpot round to be performed, that is, the jackpot round to which the probability variation mode is given is the start of the jackpot round in which the second variable winning device 32b is normally opened when the surface emitting illumination 188 is configured to emit red light. The timing (opening timing of the second variable winning device 32b) coincides with the timing at which the surface-emitting illumination 188 emits red light, but as an effect, the timing at which the surface-emitting illumination 188 lights up in red is advanced or delayed. It may be configured so that it may occur. In this case, it is possible to improve the effectability. In particular, in a situation where it is not taught whether or not the probability change mode is given, and the surface emission illumination 188 is preceded by a change of mode to red, the player is surprised and the player is given a second. It is possible to respond more quickly by opening the variable winning device 32b. On the other hand, when the start of the round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened (the state change of the second variable winning device 32b) precedes (the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b at the start of the round). You can enjoy the effect that the moment of joy that the probability change mode is given (which you do not notice unless you visually recognize the device 32b) is delayed.

It should be noted that even in the jackpot state of the probabilistic jackpot, basically, when it is not taught that the jackpot state is the probabilistic jackpot in the variable display (effect display) of the decorative symbol display device 42 or the jackpot state of the decorative symbol display device 42. Is considered to be a corresponding emission color even in the surface emission illumination 188, but prior to the teaching that it is a probability variation jackpot in the decorative pattern display device 42, a pattern for deriving the emission color corresponding to the probability variation jackpot in the surface emission illumination 188 is provided. It may be provided.

In addition, instead of the surface light emitting illumination 188, a liquid crystal display device as a light emitting means is provided, and the movement route of the game ball to the winning device in which the game ball can be entered in the right-handed winning unit 37 is set to other parts. It may be configured to show brighter than. For example, in the jackpot round in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state, a white glowing line is extended from the entrance of the right-handed winning unit 37 to the second variable specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b. At the same time, it may be configured to blink a glowing yellow arrow pointing to the special ball entry unit 145 (slide piece 148 of the distribution device 147). Further, in the jackpot round in which the first variable winning device 32a is in the open state, a white glowing line is extended and displayed from the entrance of the right-handed winning unit 37 to the first variable specific area 161 of the first variable winning device 32a. In the ball entry state, a white glowing line may be extended and displayed from the entrance of the right-handed winning unit 37 to the second starting specific area 171 of the second starting winning device 33b. Further, when it is configured so that the entry of the game ball into the right-handed winning unit 37 can be detected, a cross mark is displayed in red over a relatively wide range of the right-handed winning unit 37 by the liquid crystal display device as a light emitting means. It may be configured.

Further, the light emitting means provided corresponding to the decorative panel 401 may be configured so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the decorative panel 401. For example, a driving means (stepping motor or the like) that displaces the light emitting means (rotation, slide / tilt displacement in the up / down / left / right / front / back direction) may be provided. In this case, it is possible to diversify the visual appearance of the decorative panel 401, and by extension, to diversify the staging by utilizing the change in the mode of the decorative panel 401. Further, the decorative panel 401 side may be displaceable. As a more specific example, an outer component portion having a substantially box-shaped or spherical shape that opens downward and having a frame portion and a cloudy translucent decorative portion attached to the frame portion, and an inner side of the outer component portion. A production decorative body including a model of a predetermined character and an internal component including a projection unit provided on the peripheral portion of the model is provided, and the projection unit projects a predetermined visual recognition mode onto the decoration unit to decorate the decoration unit. The aspect projected on the portion may be configured to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the decorative portion. The projection unit is a pair of first projection units (for example, a transparent body with an opaque pattern and a lamp placed on the back side) and a pair of second projection units on the left and right sides of the model. It is equipped with a part (for example, a transparent body with a colored transparent pattern and a lamp placed on the back side), and the projection mode by the first projection unit (in this example, the part corresponding to the pattern is dark like a shadow picture). , The shape is determined by the contour) and the projection mode by the second projection unit (colored pattern in this example), and whether or not to emit light is appropriately determined based on a lottery or the like. The outer component portion is provided with a transmissive portion in which the decorative portion is not attached in the area partitioned by the frame portion in a frame shape, and the model can be visually recognized through the transmissive portion. In this example, the inner component and the outer component are configured to be rotatable, respectively, and a stepping motor is provided to rotate and displace the inner component and the outer component, respectively. The aspect of the effect decorative body can be appropriately changed according to the effect, etc., and the position between the position where the model is visible or easy to see through the transmissive part and the position where it is invisible or difficult to see with respect to the outer component portion. The first projection unit and the first projection unit, and the first projection unit, and , A state in which one of the second projection units is made to emit light, a state in which both are turned off, or a state in which one of the first projection unit and the second projection unit is made to emit light, the first projection unit, and By rotating and displacing the second projection portion, it is possible to make the projection mode move the decorative portion.

While the light emitting means provided corresponding to the decorative panel 401 is fixedly provided, the light emitting means is also configured to be displaceable relative to the decorative panel 401 by configuring the decorative panel 401 to be displaceable. .. In this case, for example, by unitizing the decorative panel 401 and the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the relative positional relationship between the decorative panel 401 and the light emitting means deteriorates and the visual mode is not suitable. Can be done.

Further, for example, in at least one of the first component portion including the first decorative portion 405 and the first transparent portion 406, the second decorative portion 407, and the second component portion including the second transparent portion 408. On the other hand, a decorative side light emitting means capable of changing the light emitting mode may be provided. In this case, the first component and the second component can also be decorated and produced by changing the light emitting mode, and can improve the design and the effect. When the first component and the second component are each thick (for example, the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 are attached to different base parts), they are individually attached. The decorative side light emitting means can be mounted, and as in the above embodiment, the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 are attached to one base part 402, and the first component part and the first component part and the first. 2 When the thickness of the constituent portion is thin, the decorative side light emitting means is attached to the base portion 402, so that the decorative side light emitting means is provided on both the first constituent portion and the second constituent portion. .. In addition, by installing the decorative side light emitting means on the back surface side of the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407, it is possible to avoid direct visibility of the decorative side light emitting means, and the decorative side light emitting means can directly be used. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the design is deteriorated due to being visually recognized.

Further, instead of or in addition to the surface emitting illumination 188, a light emitting means capable of irradiating the decorative panel 401 with light from diagonally forward of the decorative panel 401 may be provided. Further, the light emitting color of the light emitting means such as the surface light emitting means 188 is not particularly limited, and for example, using a three-color LED as the light emitting means, the light emitting mode (brightness, light emitting color, lighting / extinguishing) depending on the effect or the like. The switching pattern, orientation, etc.) may be changed. Further, the light emitting means may be configured so that its own light reaches the decorative panel 401, and the light of the light emitting means is reflected not only by the structure of directly irradiating the decorative panel 401 but also by the reflecting means. It may be configured to be incident on the decorative panel 401.

Further, a beam splitter may be provided between the decorative panel 401 and the light emitting means. In this case, if the light emitting means is not made to emit light, the rear part of the beam splitter can be made invisible through the decorative panel 401, and the members arranged behind the beam splitter such as the light emitting means can be visually recognized. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the design is deteriorated.

Further, in a configuration in which a predetermined information means behind the decorative panel 401 can be visually recognized via the decorative panel 401, an irradiation means for irradiating the decorative panel 401 from the side or the front of the decorative panel 401 is provided. It may be that. For example, light is emitted toward between the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 (for example, the base portion 402 is used as a light guide plate to diffuse the light inside the base portion 402, or the front side sheet 403 and the like. A space may be provided between the rear surface side sheet 404 (whole or a part) so that light can be irradiated to the space).

Further, an irradiation means capable of irradiating light may be provided on the front side of the information means (in the above embodiment, each winning device of the right-handed winning unit 37 and the game ball passing through the right-handed winning unit 37). .. In this case, even if the information means is backlit due to the light emission of the surface light emitting illumination 188, the visibility of the information means can be improved by the lighting means. The light emitting mode (brightness, light emitting color, lighting / extinguishing switching pattern, direction, etc.) of the irradiation means can be appropriately changed. Further, the light emitting means such as the surface light emitting illumination 188 may or may not be included in the object that can be adjusted by the brightness adjusting function, and is one of the cases where the brightness can be adjusted individually. It may form a group. Further, the lighting mode can be appropriately changed such as turning off, lighting, emission color, and lighting rhythm.

In addition, in order to illuminate and decorate a predetermined portion, a first component having a first transparent portion and a first opaque portion, and a second transparent portion arranged behind the first component (first). In the case of providing a lighting means including a second component having a second opaque portion (visible through the transmissive portion) and a light emitting means arranged behind the second component, the first opaque portion. , And the aspect in the second opaque portion may be a simple design (for example, the whole may be monochromatic (for example, the metallic image (silver) and the first component and the second component are hemispherical). It may be a pattern such as a camouflage pattern or a checkered pattern). Further, the first constituent portion and the second constituent portion are relatively displaced, and the first transparent portion is blocked by the second opaque portion, and the light of the light emitting means is transmitted through the first transparent portion and the second transparent portion. It may be configured so that the state can be changed to the irradiation state in which the light is irradiated forward. Further, a pattern is provided in which the lighting means is closed, the emission color of the light emitting means is changed, and then the irradiation means is changed to the irradiation state (for example, the state is changed when the effect button 125 is operated a predetermined number of times). May be. In particular, the lighting means is applied so that the front frame 14 is provided with the first component, the second component, and the light emitting means, or the front frame 14 is provided with the first component, and the inner frame 12 ( It is applied so that the game board 30) is provided with the second component and the light emitting means, and the inner frame 12 (game board 30) is provided with the first component, the second component, and the light emitting means. It is possible to apply it to.

A blower is provided behind the decorative panel 401 to form a first opening and a second opening in the first transmission portion and the second transmission portion, and the wind of the blower is the first opening. And, it may be configured to be fed to the front of the decorative panel 401 through the second opening. A speaker is provided behind the decorative panel 401 to form a first opening and a second opening in the first transmission portion and the second transmission portion, and the sound from the speaker is the first opening and the first opening. 2 It may be configured so as to easily reach the front of the decorative panel 401 through the opening (the wind generated by the vibration based on the sound output of the speaker is sent to the front of the decorative panel 401). A drive means (motor, control board, etc.) is provided behind the decorative panel 401 to form a first opening and a second opening in the first transmission portion and the second transmission portion, and the heat of the drive means is generated. It may be configured to be discharged in front of the decorative panel 401 through the first opening and the second opening.

(1-d-1; Structure of Decorative Panel) In the above embodiment, as the decorative means, the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 are provided with respect to the front surface and the rear surface of the transparent plate-shaped base portion 402. Although the decorative panel 401 attached is adopted, the present invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, as shown in FIG. 48, the front side sheet 403 is attached to the front surface of the front plate portion 185 of the front part 184 of the right-handed winning unit 37, and the rear surface side sheet 404 is attached to the rear surface of the rear plate portion 182 of the rear part 181. By attaching it, the decoration means may be configured by the right-handed winning unit 37. As described above, the front side sheet 403 (first decorative part 405, first transparent part 406) as the first component and the rear side sheet 404 (second decorative part 407, second transparent part 406) as the second component are used. Even when a game area through which the game ball can pass is interposed between the 408) and the right-handed winning unit 37, for example, by visually recognizing the right-handed winning unit 37 with the front position of the right-handed winning unit 37 as the first position as a viewpoint. , The first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 have a relative positional relationship adjacent to each other, and it is possible to visually recognize a specific aspect in which the aspect of the first decorative portion 405 and the aspect of the second decorative portion 407 are combined. Also, for example, by visually recognizing the right-handed winning unit 37 with the front position of the center portion in the width direction of the pachinko machine 10 as the second position as a viewpoint, the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 can be seen. The positional relationship is such that they are separated from each other, and between the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407, that is, in front of the second transmission portion 408 and in front of the first decorative portion 407, the front plate portion 184 and the rear. The behavior of the gaming ball moving between the plate portion 182 and the guide plate portion 186 can be visually recognized.

Behind the right-handed winning unit 37, a surface-emitting illumination 188 (not shown in FIG. 48, see FIG. 47) is provided as a light emitting means for brightening the right-handed winning unit 37 as a whole. Further, in this embodiment, the first transmissive portion 406 is colorless and transparent, while the second transmissive portion 408 is cloudy and translucent, and although the light of the surface emitting illumination 188 is transmitted, the second transmissive portion is transmitted. It is almost impossible to visually recognize the rear side of the rear side sheet 404 via the 408. The game ball moving the right-handed winning unit 37 is illuminated by the light of the surface-emitting illumination 188 that has entered the inside of the right-handed winning unit 37 via the second transmission unit 408 to obtain recognizable brightness. Become. In particular, for the game ball passing in front of the second transmission portion 408, the apparent contrast with the second transmission portion 408 becomes clear, and it becomes relatively easy to see. In this embodiment, the passage component is composed of the guide plate portion 186, the front plate portion 185, and the portion of the rear plate portion 182 that defines the upper region of the guide plate portion 186 in the front-rear direction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the LED board 433 is attached to the rear plate portion 182 of the rear part 181 individually corresponding to the special entry portion 145 (special entry detection switch 226a). In the figure, a boss projecting rearward from the rear plate portion 182 is provided, and the LED substrate 433 (light emitting means) is fixed to the boss with screws. The LED board 433 is predetermined by detecting the special ball entry detection switch 226a when the detection of the special ball entry detection switch 226a is effective (the jackpot round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened). It emits light continuously for a period of time, and when the detection of the special ball entry detection switch 226a is disabled, the special ball entry detection switch 226a is detected, blinking until the error state is cleared, and the special ball entry detection switch. When the detection of 226a is invalid, the special ball entry detection switch 226a is not detected, so that the light is turned off. Although not shown, the LED board 433 that individually corresponds to the other winning portions (non-special winning portion 146, second starting winning device 33b, first variable winning device 32a) of the right-handed winning unit 37 is provided. It may be provided.

Even when this configuration is adopted, the information means (various winning devices of the right-handed winning unit 37 and the right-handed winning unit 37) are moved from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 in the same manner as the decorative panel 401 of the above embodiment. It is possible to share the installation location of the pachinko ball, etc.) and the desirable place as a place to decorate with the information means and the decoration means, and the efficiency while fully demonstrating the playability using the information means, etc. The effect of decoration is achieved. Further, since the decorative means is composed of the right-handed winning unit 37 (means constituting the guide passage of the game ball), the decorative means (decorative panel 401) is provided in the game area separately from the right-handed winning unit 37. In comparison with the above, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the front-rear width of the portion of the game area that overlaps the decoration means is narrowed by installing the decoration means. Further, regarding the point of visually recognizing the game ball, it can be made easier to see than the case of visually recognizing the game ball passing behind the second decorative portion 407. Regarding the configuration between the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 (position of the installation object and the distance between the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407), the first decorative portion 405, Further, it can be appropriately changed depending on the shape of the second decorative portion 407, the extent to which the object to be visually recognized via the decorative means is shown, and the like.

Further, in the embodiment of FIG. 48, the front side sheet 403 is attached to the front surface of the front plate portion 185, the rear surface side sheet 404 is attached to the rear surface of the rear plate portion 182, and the front surface side sheet 403 and the rear surface side. The seat 404 is configured so as not to come into contact with the game ball, but is not particularly limited to such a configuration. However, in order to prevent wear caused by contact with the game ball, it is desirable that at least one (more preferably both) of the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 does not come into contact with the game ball. When the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 are formed by printing on the transparent sheet, the transparent sheet is attached to the front plate portion 185 and the rear plate portion 182 with the printed side as an adhesive surface. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball rubs against the printed surface and the decorativeness is deteriorated. Further, when the transparent sheet of the front side sheet 403 and the rear surface side sheet 404 is compared with the object to which the front side sheet 403 and the rear surface side sheet 404 are attached, the transparent sheet is less likely to be scratched. In the case of (hardness, low friction, etc.), it is desirable to use the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 as contact surfaces with the game ball (in this case, the transparent sheet serves as a protective portion). That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the object to which the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 are attached is damaged and the second decorative portion 407 or the like becomes difficult to see.

A visual object such as an information means or a decorative accessory may be installed behind the rear side sheet 404 (right-handed winning unit 37). In that case, the second transparent portion 408 may be made transparent or may be transparent. The visual object may be visually recognizable through the first transmissive portion 406 and the second transmissive portion 408.

(1-d-2; Decorative panel structure 2) Further, for example, the front side sheet 403 is attached to the glass unit 137 (for example, the rear surface of the transparent body that divides the front side of the game area), and a right-handed prize is won. The decorative means may be configured by attaching the rear surface side sheet 404 to the unit 37 (for example, the front surface of the front plate portion 185). Further, the front surface side and the rear surface side of the transparent plate-shaped body are formed with uneven shapes, and the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are provided by coloring, and further, the front side of the plate-shaped body is provided. By providing the first transparent portion in the plate-like body, the mode in which the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are combined may be visually recognized when the plate-shaped body is viewed from the front. In this case, the colored portion also becomes three-dimensional, and three-dimensional decoration can be performed. Further, by providing the second transmission portion on the rear surface side of the plate-shaped body, the back side region can be made visible through the plate-shaped body, and in addition, the light emitting body is installed behind the plate-shaped body. It is possible to make the plate-shaped body and its peripheral portion brighter. Further, by combining the first panel and the second panel, in which the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are integrally provided by the uneven shape and coloring, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are combined in the front-rear direction. It is also possible to configure the decorative panel 401. In this case, in the case of manufacturing another series of pachinko machines 10, one of the first panel and the second panel is only replaced, and the third panel is combined to improve versatility. be able to. Further, the first panel and the second panel can be displaced relative to each other or installed apart from each other.

When the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 are separate bodies, the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 are in contact with each other between the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404. Alternatively, an adjacent transparent or translucent spacer may be provided. In this case, even if the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 are attached to different members, the distance between the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 becomes too close. While avoiding it, the distance between the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 can be made appropriate by using the spacer as a star.

Regarding the configuration in which the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are separated when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the second position, for example, when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the second position, information means (even if fixed). (Movable) is placed (temporarily) between the first decorative part and the second decorative part, and the information means hides a part of the second decorative part, so that the first decorative part and the second decorative part are hidden. A configuration in which the portions are visually recognized apart from each other (if the information means is not arranged between the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion, there is a gap between the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion. May not occur).

In addition, in the above embodiment, by visually recognizing the decorative panel 401 from the second position, the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b of the right-handed winning unit 37 whose front is covered by the decorative panel 401 ( All of the special ball winning portion 145) and the second starting winning device 33b are visually recognizable, but the configuration is not particularly limited, and for example, the first variable winning device 32a can be visually recognized. The position and the position where the second variable winning device 32b can be visually recognized may be different from each other.

Further, regarding the configuration in which a space is formed between the front side seat 403 and the rear side seat 404, for example, a game ball can pass between the front side seat 403 and the rear side seat 404, or the front surface can be passed. Movable accessories may be allowed to pass and be accommodated between the side sheet 403 and the rear surface side sheet 404, or the front surface side sheet 403 and the rear surface side sheet 404 may be relatively displaceable.

Further, the decorative means (decorative panel 401) may be provided with variable means that can be displaced relative to the decorative means main body (decorative panel 401). For example, the decorative panel 401 is configured to be separable up and down, and a sword-shaped movable accessory is provided so as to be slidable to the left and right on one side of the decorative panel 401. The decorative panel 401 may be displaced so as to be vertically separated from each other so that the sword accessory may pass between the upper and lower decorative panels 401. Further, for example, a mechanism may be provided behind the decorative panel 401 so that a pseudo ball imitating a game ball (a game ball for an effect that does not move in the game area) passes through. Further, for example, when the position of the game ball entering the rear region into the decorative panel 401 is determined, for example, the decorative panel 401 is arranged in front of the right-handed winning unit 37 as in the above embodiment. A movable accessory that is displaced when hitting to the right may be provided corresponding to the approach position (a lamp or the like may be provided in the sense of notifying the entrance). In addition, for example, a movable accessory is provided in a distance with respect to the decorative panel 401, and the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 are configured by a transmissive liquid crystal display device, or the decorative panel 401 is configured to be displaceable. The display mode of the decorative panel 401 may be changed according to the displacement behavior of the movable accessory (for example, at least a part of the three types of movable accessory is normally displayed behind the decorative panel 401. It may be possible to suggest and teach the degree of expectation of a big hit by making a movable accessory appear in response to a winning / failing lottery based on a ball entering the second starting winning device 33b). The decorative panel 401 may be displaced (for example, the decorative panel 401 may be displaced when a movable accessory approaches, and when the decorative panel 401 is displaced, a mode different from the mode visually recognized through the decorative panel 401 can be visually recognized. It may be). Further, a movable accessory that can have a first relative position and a second relative position is provided on the decorative panel 401 (single or plural), and the movable accessory is normally set as the first relative position and is not visible. Possible, difficult to see, or the movable accessory and the decorative panel 401 are in an independent visual mode, and the movable accessory is set to the second relative position in order to give a predetermined suggestion / teaching, so that the decorative panel 401 is used. It may be configured so that an integrated mode in which the visual mode of the movable accessory and the visual mode of the movable accessory are integrated (a mode different from each independent visual mode) is derived.

When such a configuration is adopted, the visual aspect in the peripheral portion of the decorative panel 401 can be made more interesting by the variable means. For example, it is possible to make a predetermined suggestion such as associating a state in which the variable means is visually recognized with a predetermined privilege being given, and it is possible to improve the playability. Further, since the movable means is provided in the decorative means including the decorative panel 401, even if the variable means is displaced, the front side sheet 403 (first decorative portion 405) and the rear side sheet 404 (second decoration) are provided. It is easy to maintain a good positional relationship with the portion 407), and even if the decorative panel 401 vibrates due to the displacement of the movable means, the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 are integrally configured. Since the relative displacement is avoided, it is possible to more preferably visually recognize the specific mode and the mode in which the mode of the variable means is added to the specific mode.

Further, in the above embodiment, the thickness direction of the decorative panel 401 is configured to coincide with the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 (the front surface of the decorative panel 401 faces the front of the pachinko machine 10). In order to direct the decorative panel 401 provided at the lower right to the player side, the front surface of the decorative panel 401 may be configured to be slightly inclined rearward toward the central portion in the width direction of the pachinko machine 10.

In the above embodiment, the decorative panel 401 includes a front side sheet 403 as a first component and a rear side sheet 404 as a second component. For example, the game area is provided in front of the center of the game area. The viewpoint position to be visually recognized corresponds to the first position, and one of the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 is omitted (for example, the rear side sheet 404 is omitted), and the player usually performs. When the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized (obliquely) in the posture (when the first visible state is set), the space between the first decorative portions 405 of the front side sheet 403 is narrowed, and the adjacent first decorative portions are adjacent to each other. When the 405 is visually recognized as if they are almost connected, and the face is moved to the front of the decorative panel 401 to visually recognize the decorative panel 401 (when the second visible state is set), the first decorative portions 405 are separated from each other. Then, the right-handed winning unit 37 may be configured to be visually recognized via the first transmission portion (for example, the rear side sheet 404 may be set to the gaming area so that such an action effect is more prominently exhibited. It may be configured to tilt backward toward the outward side of the.

Further, the configuration is not limited to such that the size (installation range) of the front side sheet 403 and the size (installation range) of the rear side sheet 404 substantially match. In the installation range of the front side sheet 403 (when viewed), there may be a place where the rear side sheet 404 is not installed. Further, a plurality of rear surface side sheets 404 (with a smaller area than the front surface side sheet 403) may be provided with respect to the installation range of the front surface side sheet 403.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the rear surface side sheet 404 is provided with the second transmission portion 408, but for example, the second transmission portion 408 is omitted, and the rear surface side sheet 404 is a single (lump) second. Information means that is composed of only the decorative portion 407, and only the second decorative portion 407 can be seen through the first transparent portion 406, or is located behind the rear side sheet 404 via the side of the second decorative portion 407. May be a structure that can be visually recognized.

Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative panel 401 has a three-layer structure of the front side sheet 403, the base portion 402, and the rear side sheet 404, but may have four or more layers or two layers. .. For example, a decorative panel is attached to the front surface of the first base portion and the first base portion, and is attached to the front surface of the first sheet and the rear surface of the first base to which the first decoration is applied to the front surface side. A second sheet with a second decoration on both sides (the front and rear surfaces have the same aspect), a second base portion to be attached to the rear surface of the second sheet, and an affixed to the rear surface of the second base portion. And may be configured to include a third sheet with a first decoration on the rear surface side. In this case, the same visual mode can be obtained even if the decorative panel 401 is turned upside down, and workability when attaching the decorative panel can be improved. By making the aspect of the first sheet different from the aspect of the third sheet and making the aspects of the front surface and the back surface of the second sheet correspond to the embodiments of the first sheet and the third sheet, respectively, two types of specific embodiments can be obtained. Can be provided.

In addition, the decorative panel 401 (decorative means) does not have to be flat, and may be, for example, dome-shaped, box-shaped, or the like, or may be shaped according to the portion to which the decorative panel 401 is applied. Further, a relatively hard resin molded product may be adopted as the first component portion and the second component portion including the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407. When such a configuration is adopted, the decorative panel may be attached to the attached portion (for example, the right-handed winning unit 37) in the first constituent portion and the second constituent portion, respectively. However, in order to prevent the positions of the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion from being displaced, the first constituent portion and the second constituent portion hold the first constituent portion and the second constituent portion at regular intervals. It is desirable that the base portion is attached to the base portion and the base portion is attached to the attached portion. When the first component and the second component are attached to the base, the positional relationship between the first component and the second component can be maintained even if the base is displaced. Further, the first component and the second component may have a three-dimensional shape such that irregularities are formed in the front-rear direction as well.

Although the decorative panel 401 is attached to the right-handed winning unit 37, a mounting base for attaching the decorative panel 401 to the game board 30 may be separately provided, and the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) or the front frame may be provided. 14 may be configured to attach the decorative panel 401. In addition, for example, the decorative panel 401 may be attached to the glass unit 137, or may be attached to a portion constituting the outer periphery of the game board 30 or the gaming area (or a portion in the vicinity thereof). The decorative panel 401 is integrally provided and can be attached to and detached from the attached portion. Therefore, for example, the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 can be attached and detached at once when maintenance occurs. It is possible, it can be replaced relatively easily, and it is possible to improve the convenience when reusing the attached portion.

In addition, regarding whether to make the second transmissive portion 408 transparent or semi-transparent to some extent to reduce the visibility or omit it, make the rear of the decorative panel 401 relatively clear or only light. It can be appropriately changed depending on whether it should be passed through or it looks blurry, or whether the rear side of the decorative panel 401 is not to be visually recognized. When the visibility of the second transmissive portion 408 is reduced, for example, frosted glass, shoji paper, a resin containing lame powder or beads, a bright colored member, or the like, the light is diffusely reflected (multiple times). (Reflects and exits forward), and those containing materials that allow light to pass through but are difficult to see through. Even if the second transmissive portion 408 is omitted, if the second decorative portion 407 (and the first decorative portion 405) has translucency, a light emitting means is installed behind the decorative panel 401 to decorate the decorative panel. It is possible to make the specific mode of 401 brightly visible. Further, when the second transparent portion 408 is omitted to make the second decorative portion 407 opaque, when the light emitting means is provided with the decorative panel 401 (the right-handed winning unit 37 is provided between the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404). It may be provided inside or on the side of the right-handed winning unit 37). In addition, when the second transmissive portion 408 is omitted, for example, the entire area of the rear surface side sheet 404 is set as the second decorative portion 407, or the second decorative portion 497 is different from the second decorative portion 497 and is translucent. -There is a configuration in which the portion does not have transparency.

(1-d-3; Visible state changing means) In the decorative means in which the first component and the second component are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, they are arranged behind the first component and in front of the second component. , A visible state that is visible or easy to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the first transmission portion, and a non-visible state that is invisible or difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It may be provided with a visual state changing means capable of changing the state.

For example, the decorative means 453 shown in FIG. 54 includes a first decorative portion 454a on which a picture of a rock is drawn and a transparent first transparent portion 454b as the first constituent portion 454, and the second constituent portion 455 is used. It is located behind the first transmission section 454b and has a second decorative section 455a on which a picture of a samurai facing right forward and its background is drawn so as to face the rock, and is behind the first component section 454 and the second component section. An arm accessory 456 and a sword accessory 457 are rotatably provided in front of the 455 corresponding to a samurai facing to the right, and an arm accessory 456 and a sword accessory 457 are provided in front of the first component 454. A cutting edge accessory 458 that slides up and down in conjunction with the above is provided, and is not connected to the arm accessory 456 and the sword accessory 457, and can operate independently. Normally, the arm accessory 456 is visible through the first transmission portion 454b, and the sword accessory 457 is located behind the first decorative portion 454a (picture of rock) and is invisible or difficult to see. (Invisible state).

Then, when the corresponding effect is started, the arm accessory 456 rotates counterclockwise and comes into contact with the lower end portion of the sword accessory 457, and further, while maintaining the contact state, the arm accessory 456 and the arm accessory 456 and , The sword character 457 is displaced upward in the appearance of being swung up above the samurai's head, and the sword character 457 is exposed (it is in a visible state). A star picture 459 is provided as a part of the second decorative portion 455a at a position corresponding to the cutting edge of the sword accessory 457 that has been swung up in the second component portion 455. When the sword character 457 is not swung up, the star picture 459 can recognize the star shape, while when the sword character 457 is swung up, the sword character is in front of the star picture 459. The tip of 457 is located. As a result, a part of the picture 459 of the star is covered with the sword accessory 457, and the cutting edge of the sword accessory 457 is shining. In this embodiment, the sword accessory 457 corresponds to the visual state changing means and the displacement means, and the arm accessory 456 and the star picture 459 correspond to the decoration addition portion. It should be noted that the star picture 459 is visually recognized by focusing on one point as much as possible in any light mode, such as by making the light emitting means (even if it is a three-color LED, as close as possible, or providing a funnel-shaped reflective material in front of it). It may be possible).

After that, there is an effect that the sword accessory 457 is swung down, and in the case of success, the cutting edge accessory 458 falls from an invisible position, is located in front of the first component portion 454, and is located in front of the first decorative portion. An aspect in which the picture of the rock of 454a is divided into left and right is derived. In this embodiment, the first component 454 is composed of a pair of left and right plate-shaped bodies, and the right side member is slidable to the left and right. Further, a drive mechanism for the cutting edge accessory 458 provided behind and to the side of the first component portion 454 positions the cutting edge accessory 458 in front of the first component portion 454 through a crevice in the rock. Further, when the effect of the decorative means 453 is performed, the display of the explanation is derived by the decorative pattern display device 42 as the effect means, and even after the effect of the decorative means 453, a display indicating success or failure of the effect is displayed. Derived.

In addition, an LED as an information means (not shown) is provided behind the gap formed when the rock picture is broken, and when the rock picture is cracked, the LED turns rainbow-colored. It is designed to emit light. Further, the sword accessory 457 has a built-in LED, and can be changed into a light emitting mode in which the LED emits light and a non-light emitting mode in which the LED emits light. That is, when the sword accessory 457 is set to the exposed position, it is set to the light emitting mode, and when the sword accessory 457 is set to the retracted position hidden behind the first decorative portion 454a, it is set to the non-light emitting mode. In addition, lighting is provided to illuminate the front of the decorative means 453, and the visible cutting edge accessory 458 is also illuminated by such lighting. In this embodiment, the cutting edge accessory 458 corresponds to the effect addition means.

In this embodiment, the part other than the rock picture is the first transmission part 454b in the first component part 454, but the part other than the rock picture is also provided with the first decorative part such as the background. May be good. However, the first decorative portion 454a is arranged so that the sword accessory 457 can be exposed (the first transmission portion 454b is at least along the displacement direction of the sword accessory 457 which is the exposed position). prepare). Further, regarding the star picture 459 in the second component 455, a slightly yellow transparent part in the shape of the star picture is formed as the second transmission part, and the star picture 459 is configured to shine by shining light from behind. (The pattern in which the star picture 459 shines may increase the chance, and the blinking or different color emission may increase the chance). Further, for example, by using the first component 454 as a light guide plate and allowing light to enter from the side, cherry blossoms are scattered around the samurai's picture in the first transmission section 454b, and the cherry blossoms are in front of the tree picture. It may be configured so that a display that blooms is derived (chance up).

As described above, it is possible to perform an effect, a predetermined suggestion / instruction, etc. by utilizing a mode change in which the sword accessory 457 is shown or not shown according to the state change of the visual state changing means (sword accessory 457). can. Therefore, it is possible to make effective use of the space as compared with the case of providing a decoration that shows a mode that does not change. Further, a second component 455 is arranged behind the first component 454 and the sword accessory 457, and when the sword accessory 457 is in the retracted position (invisible state), the first component 454. The second decorative portion 455 can be visually recognized as it is via the first transmission portion 454b of the above. Therefore, when the sword accessory 457 is in the retracted position, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the mode of the first transmission portion 454b is only empty and the design is deteriorated. In particular, since the aspect of the first decorative portion 454a and the aspect of the second decorative portion 455a are combined to form a specific aspect, it is possible to further improve the decorativeness and the like.

Further, when the sword accessory 457 is displaced to the exposed position, not only the sword accessory 457 is visually recognized, but also the arm accessory 456 as a decoration addition part and the arm accessory 456 as a decoration addition part at the destination of the movement of the sword accessory 457 to the exposed position. , The picture 459 of the star makes it possible to visually recognize the aspect in which the aspect related to the aspect of the sword accessory 456 is added. In addition, when the sword accessory 457 is displaced to the retracted position, not only the pattern in which the sword accessory 457 simply disappears, but also the cutting edge accessory 458 is linked to the movement of the sword accessory 457 to the retracted position. A pattern of displacement can be provided so as to be visible. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effectability while suppressing the complicated and large-sized structure of the sword accessory 457 itself.

Further, the LED is built in the sword accessory 457, and the brightness of the sword accessory 457 arranged between the first component 454 and the second component 455 can be secured, and the sword accessory 457 can be secured. Can be sufficiently conspicuous. Further, the brightness, color development, and the like of the peripheral portion of the decorative means 453 including the sword accessory 457 can be adjusted, and the decorativeness and the directing property can be improved. Further, the sword accessory 457 in the retracted position can be made inconspicuous as a non-light emitting mode.

The modes of the first decorative portion 454a and the second decorative portion 455a are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the second decorative portion 455a, the portion located behind the sword accessory 457 when the sword accessory 457 (visualization state changing means) is in the visible position is limited to a configuration in which only decoration is applied. It may be configured so that the model information and the description associated with the motif of the model are described instead of the ones. Further, the specific aspect of the decorative means 453 is not only the case where the first decorative portion 454a and the second decorative portion 455a are combined to positively perform decoration, but also the second aspect so as not to impair the aspect of the first decorative portion. The purpose is to include the case where the decorative part has the same aspect. Further, the sword accessory 457 (visual state changing means) may be connected to the decorative means 453. In this case, the relative positional deviation can be prevented, and the designed visual recognition mode can be maintained.

When a decorative means provided with a displacement means that displaces between the first component and the second component is arranged in front of the right-handed winning unit 37 or the like, the right-handed winning unit 37 may be arranged in front of the right-handed winning unit 37 or the like. There is a concern that it may interfere with the visibility of the moving game ball. In this regard, by grasping the movement path of the game ball to be used based on the detection of various detection switches provided in the right-handed winning unit 37, the displacement means is displaced so as not to cover the front of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the game ball from being deteriorated by the displacement means while providing the displacement means in the decorative means. The configuration is not limited to the decorative means provided with the displacement means for displacing between the first component and the second component, but the displacement means for displacing the rear of the first component and the second component. It is also applicable to the decorative means provided with the above, the decorative means provided with the displacement means for displacing the front of the first component and the second component, and the decorative means provided with a transmissive display device in place of the displacement means. ..

(1-d-4; Visible state changing means 2) Further, for example, as a decorative means in which the first component and the second component are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, a transparent material (resin, glass, etc.) forming portion or an opening is provided. A first component having a first transmissive portion composed of a portion and a first decorative portion composed of a decoration on a peripheral portion of the first transmissive portion, and arranged behind the first component portion via the first transmissive portion. A visible second decorative part, a light emitting part as an information means located behind or to the side of the second decorative part when the decorative means is viewed from the front, a first component part, and a second component part. A visible state (a state in which a light source emits light and a visible part that changes the reflection direction of light to make a predetermined shape emerge) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 and is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. ) And a light source as a visible state changing means that can change the state from the front of the pachinko machine 10 to an invisible state that is invisible or difficult to see (a state that is totally transparent when the light is off). It may be configured to include a light guide plate of the above.

That is, when the decorative means is visually recognized from a predetermined position (first position, for example, the front) in front of the pachinko machine 10, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are separated from each other, and the first decorative portion and the first decorative portion are separated from each other. The light emitting portion is visually recognized or easily visible between the second decorative portion and the second decorative portion. On the other hand, when the decorative means is visually recognized from a position different from the predetermined position (for example, a predetermined side with respect to the decorative means) in front of the pachinko machine 10, the predetermined position of the first decorative portion is specified. The light emitting portion is invisible or difficult to see because the space between the portion and the second decorative portion is clogged. Further, even if the light guide plate is in a light emitting state, the transparent portion of the light guide plate is not configured so that the visible portion of the light guide plate covers the entire visible range of the second decorative portion, but at least when the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position. (In this example, even when the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position, the second decorative portion is visible through the transparent portion of the light guide plate in the light emitting state. The predetermined part of the is visible). Further, even when the light guide plate is in the light emitting state, the light emitting portion as the information means can be visually recognized through the transparent portion of the light guide plate by visually recognizing the decorative means from the second position.

As described above, even when the light guide plate is in the light emitting state, when the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position, the light emitting portion is made visible so that the light emitting portion can teach predetermined information. In addition to being able to prevent information from being overlooked, as an aspect of the decorative means, an aspect in which a light guide plate (visible portion) and a light emitting portion are combined is derived, and it is possible to improve the design. In particular, when the light guide plate is in the light emitting state, the visible part of the light guide plate can be visually recognized regardless of whether the decorative means is visually recognized from either the first position or the second position, so that the light guide plate is in the light emitting state. The aspect of the visible part of the light guide plate is combined with the specific aspect in which the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are combined, in such a manner that the player appropriately selects the aspect of the decorative means when the light guide plate is used. It is possible to visually recognize the aspect, or to visually recognize the aspect in which the visible portion of the light guide plate and the light emitting portion are combined.

Further, in the configuration in which the transition to a state advantageous to the player (giving a privilege) is taught by the light emitting unit emitting light, the visual recognition state changing means (light emitting unit) is used in the decorative symbol display device 42 as the staging means. It may suggest or teach the timing that can be regarded as a visual state. In this case, since the decorative symbol display device 42 suggests the timing at which the decorative means (light emitting unit) should be visually recognized, it is possible to prevent the light emitting unit from being overlooked and to further change the state of the light emitting unit. You can enjoy it. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which too much attention is paid to confirming the state change.

Further, in the decorative design display device 42, the explanation corresponding to the state change of the light emitting unit (visual recognition state changing means) may be given. In this case, the player can relatively easily grasp the meaning of the state change of the light emitting unit, and the game can proceed without any confusion. Further, since the information can be obtained from the decorative pattern display device 42 even if the state change of the light emitting unit is overlooked, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game cannot be enjoyed by concentrating on the confirmation of the visual state change means. .. Further, for example, it is possible to respond to a request for enjoying the effect of the decorative pattern display device 42 without obtaining information from the visual state changing means. It should be noted that the explanation includes an explanation when the state change of the visual state changing means occurs and an explanation before the state change occurs, and it is configured so that either explanation is given. good.

It should be noted that the timing and meaning of the change visible in the decorative means (light emission of the light emitting portion, change to the open state of the opening / closing member, etc.) may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 42 as the staging means.

Further, for example, as the first component part, a first decorative part imitating a window frame and a first transmission part which is an opening of the window frame are provided, and as a second component part, a landscape through a window is drawn. (2) A decorative portion may be provided, and a transmissive display device may be provided so as to close the window. The display device performs operations such as displaying a character inside the window frame (window portion). Further, the second decorative portion can change the pattern visually recognized through the first transparent portion, and is appropriately changed as the display is switched in the window portion. Further, the decorative means having the said configuration is arranged on the side of the decorative symbol display device 42 as a whole, and is configured to be relatively displaceable by changing the area overlapping in the front-rear direction, and the decorative means and the decorative symbol are configured. It is possible to increase the sense of solidarity with the display of the display device 42.

Even when this configuration is adopted, it is possible to perform an effect of making the mode of the visual recognition state changing means (display of the transmissive display device) visible or not visible through the first transmissive portion, and the effectability is achieved. Can be improved. Further, even if the visual state changing means is set to the non-visible state (non-display), the second decorative portion is visually recognized via the first transmissive portion. Therefore, when the visual state changing means is set to the non-visible state. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the design is significantly deteriorated.

(1-d-5; decoration addition part) Further, it can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 in front of the decoration means, behind the first component and in front of the second component, or behind the decoration means. Or, in a configuration provided with a displacement means that can be displaced between an exposed position that is easily visible and a retracted position that is invisible or difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the exposed position is used. It is also possible that a decorative addition portion is provided at a position adjacent to the displacement means and has an aspect related to the aspect of the displacement means which is the exposed position. For example, in the first decorative part of the first component part, a decorative additional part on which a star picture is drawn is provided, and a glove accessory as a displacement means that can be expanded and contracted to the left and right in front of the decorative means is provided. When is stretched to the exposed position, the glove part is located in front of the star picture, and a jagged pattern (a cartoon-like picture like a glove hitting an object) is displayed around the glove. (When the glove accessory is arranged between the first component and the second component and the glove accessory is extended to the exposed position, the glove accessory of the glove accessory may be configured to be The portion is made visible from the front via the first transmissive portion provided on the inner peripheral side of the star picture, and when the glove accessory is contracted and is in the retracted position, the portion is made visible through the first transmissive portion. A second decorative part of the same color as the star picture may be visible).

In this case, when the displacement means is displaced to the exposed position, not only the displacement means can be visually recognized, but also the aspect in which the aspect related to the aspect of the displacement means is added can be visually recognized by the decoration addition portion. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effectability while suppressing the complexity and size of the configuration of the displacement means itself.

(1-e; 1st component, 2nd component) The shapes of the 1st decorative part 405 and the 1st transparent part 406 (2nd decorative part 407 and 2nd transparent part 408) are particularly limited. It is not something that is done, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the above embodiment, the first decorative portion 405 and the first transmission portion 406 are alternately arranged in a vertical grid pattern, but they may be configured to be arranged in a horizontal grid pattern or in a circular shape. They may be arranged alternately, or the shape of the first decorative portion 405 or the like may be defined (like stained glass) depending on the design of a specific embodiment, or the first transparent portion having a substantially circular shape may be defined in the first decorative portion. A configuration in which a portion is provided and a second decorative portion having a larger area than the first transmissive portion is provided in the rear surface side sheet (a configuration that widens the view when viewed, for example, the first position (compared from the decorative panel 401). In the second position (position relatively close to the decorative panel 401), the second decorative part is visually recognized as a part of the first decorative part, and in the second position (position relatively close to the decorative panel 401), the third decorative part is surrounded by the second decorative part. Is visible, and the second decorative portion is visually recognized as a part of the third decorative portion). The entire main part of the specific aspect of the decorative panel 401 may be housed in either the first decorative part 405 or the second decorative part 407.

Further, the first transmissive portion 406 and the second transmissive portion 408 are not limited to transparent or translucent portions, and may be configured to ensure visibility by providing openings. Further, the first component attached to the front surface side of the base portion 402 is not limited to a sheet shape, but has a structure having an uneven shape (for example, a resin molded product having a three-dimensional character and having an opening). It may have a portion and have transparency, for example, an eye portion is provided in the second component). In addition, only one of the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 may be in the form of a sheet. In this case, compared to the case where both the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are thickened in the front-rear direction or have a three-dimensional shape, the installation space is reduced and the front-rear width reduction of the game area is suppressed. Etc. can be planned.

Further, in the above embodiment, the width of the second decorative portion 407 visible through the first transmissive portion 406 may be wider than the width of the first transmissive portion 406. In this case, when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the first position, the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are compared with the case where the first transparent portion 406 and the second decorative portion 407 have the same width. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the second transmission portion 408 is visually recognized between the two. Further, it is possible to further prevent the light from the surface emission illumination 188 from being directly applied to the front of the pachinko machine 10 (player) via the first transmission unit 406 and the second transmission unit 408. The difference in width is determined according to how far the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are.

The second decorative portion 407 should be adjacent to the first decorative portion 405 so that when the second decorative portion 407 is visually recognized from the first position, the visual recognition modes are (almost) connected to each other. Of the second decorative portion 407, the portion located outside the peripheral edge of the first transmission portion 406 when the second decorative portion 407 is visually recognized from the first position is overlapped with the portion in the front-rear direction. It may be in the same mode as the first decorative portion 405 (a mode in which it is connected to a portion located inward from the peripheral portion of the first transmissive portion 406), or in a configuration in which the second transmissive portion 408 is omitted, the first transmissive portion is used. It may be in a mode (for example, a single color) that is not connected to a portion located inward from the peripheral portion of the 406.

The front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 may be in the form of a sticker on which a pattern is printed on a transparent resin mount and provided with an adhering surface, or may be printed directly on the mount. However, a film-like (sheet-like) transmissive display (which can be curved / bent) may be used. Further, for example, the first decorative portion 405 (first constituent portion) is configured in a seal shape, the second decorative portion 407 (second constituent portion) is configured by a film-shaped display, and the second decorative portion is behind the second constituent portion. 3 components may be provided. In this case, when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the first position, the first specific aspect in which the aspects of the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are combined is visually recognized, and the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the second position. When visually recognized, the second specific aspect in which the aspects of the first decorative portion 405 and the third component portion are combined is visually recognized. By forming the third component as a seal, it is possible to save space in the front-rear direction. Further, by making the second component part a transmissive display, it is possible to switch between a state in which the second decorative part is visible and a state in which the second decorative part is not visible, and there is a gap between the first component part and the second component part in the front-rear direction. By arranging the third decorative portion behind the first transparent portion, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion can visually recognize the first specific mode, and the first decorative portion and the third decorative portion can be visually recognized. It is possible to switch to a state in which the second specific aspect is visually recognized by the decorative portion. However, in order to use the transmissive display of the second component more efficiently, the transmissive display is also used for the first component, and the front of the second component is not covered by the first component. It is desirable to configure it so that it can be done. When the first component (front side sheet 403) and the second component (rear side sheet 404) are configured by a transmissive and sheet-like display device (liquid crystal display device, etc.), the first decorative unit 405, The shape (width, shape, position, etc.) of the second decorative portion 407 (specific mode), the first decorative portion 405, the second decorative portion 407, the first transparent portion 406, and the second transparent portion 408. Can be appropriately changed (switched, displaced, etc.), and a state in which the first transmission unit 406 and the second transmission unit 408 are eliminated can be derived.

The mode of the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, characters or a fine pattern such as a floral pattern (for example, may be adopted). By combining the aspects of the first decorative part 405 and the second decorative part 407, the flower field is expanded). Further, the areas and arrangements of the first decorative portion 405 (first transparent portion 406) and the second decorative portion 407 (second transparent portion 408) can be appropriately changed.

Further, the decorative panel 401 (decorative means) provided in the central portion of the pachinko machine 10 in the horizontal direction is regarded as the second position from the side of the pachinko machine 10 (the player seated in the adjacent gaming machine), which is a specific embodiment. Is invisible or difficult to see, while the specific mode is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as the first position (basically, only the player playing the pachinko machine 10 has the specific mode). (Structured to be visible), and further, by approaching the decorative means, it may be possible to visually recognize the additional modes around the specific mode (the configuration may be such that additional information can be obtained by the additional mode, or the addition. The embodiment may be a structure that is merely a decoration).

In addition, with respect to the decorative means provided in the central portion of the pachinko machine 10 in the width direction, the rear side of the decorative means is visually recognized as the first position from the side of the pachinko machine 10 (the player seated in the adjacent gaming machine). While it becomes impossible or difficult, the information means or the decorative part arranged behind the decorative panel 401, which is the second position from the front of the pachinko machine 10, is visible (basically, the pachinko machine 10 is used). Only the player who is playing can see the information means or the decorative part behind the decorative panel 401), and by approaching the decorative means, the additional mode around the information means or the decorative part can also be seen. (The additional mode may be a configuration in which additional information can be obtained, or the additional mode may be a configuration in which it is merely a decoration). For example, a small window portion (a portion made of transparent resin so that the back side can be visually recognized) is provided in the central portion of the front frame 14 in the width direction, and a first decorative portion is provided on the peripheral portion of the small window portion. A second decorative portion and an information means may be provided at a position where the window portion can be seen and visually recognized. Further, for example, the decorative panel 401 and the information means may be provided at a substantially central portion in the width direction of the pachinko machine 10, and a polarizing panel may be provided in front of the decorative panel 401. In this case, the player himself / herself can visually recognize the information means, but the adjacent player cannot visually recognize the information means, and it is possible to impart a playability that cannot be imagined without playing the game by himself / herself. It is desirable that the first decorative portion, the second decorative portion, (additional mode), and the information means are unitized into one, for example, a cylindrical base portion extending in the front-rear direction and a base portion. A first decorative part that protrudes outward from the front end of the base and is decorated on the front side, a second decorative part that has a polarizing part that is fitted at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the base part, and a portion near the front end of the base part. It is provided with a transparent lid portion that is fitted into the second decorative portion and a light emitting means that is fitted into the base portion behind the second decorative portion. An additional aspect portion which is a base for attaching the light emitting means to the base portion and whose front side is decorated may be visually recognized via the transparent portion).

In the above embodiment, by visually recognizing the decorative panel 401 from the second position, all the winning devices (second variable winning device 32b, second starting winning device 33b, first variable winning device) provided in the right-handed winning unit 37 The device 32a and the special entry unit 145) are configured to be visible at once (the state of entry of the game ball can be confirmed; the entry detection lamp provided corresponding to each may be visible). However, for example, by visually recognizing the decorative panel 401 from the second position, the second variable winning device 32b and the special ball-entry portion 145 can be visually recognized, and the first position and the second 2-1 can be visually recognized. The front is covered with the decorative panel 401, such as by configuring the decorative panel 401 to be visible from the second starting position, which is different from the position, so that the second starting winning device 33b and the first variable winning device 42a can be seen. The winning device may be configured so that it cannot be visually recognized at one time (a slight visible degree is included).

However, if the decorative panel 401 does not have the intention of making it difficult to visually recognize all the information means covered in the front, it may take time and effort to confirm each information means. Therefore, the decorative panel is displayed from the second position. By visually recognizing the 401, it is desirable that all of the plurality of information means whose front is covered by the decorative panel 401 can be visually recognized. When visually recognized from the second position, the first and second information means (first variable winning device 32a and second variable winning device 32b) that are desired to be visually recognized in the first state (for example, the jackpot state) are The third information means (for example, the second start winning device 33b), which is visible or easy to see but is desired to be visually recognized in the second state (for example, a high ball entry state), is invisible or is not visible. It is considered difficult to see, and if it is visually recognized from the third position, the third information means may be visible or easy to see, but the first and second information means may be invisible or difficult to see.

Further, for example, a second decorative portion is provided on one surface inside the V-shaped cross section, and a third decorative portion is provided on the other surface, and the V-shaped portion is arranged corresponding to the first transparent portion. It may be configured as follows. In this case, for example, when the decorative means is visually recognized from one side, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are adjacent to each other in the first specific mode, and when the decorative means is visually recognized from the other side, the first decoration is performed. The portion and the third decorative portion may be configured to be adjacent to each other in the second specific mode. Further, the decorative means is configured to be displaceable by the driving means so that the visual mode of the decorative means is switched between the first specific mode and the second specific mode with respect to the viewpoint of the player located in front of the pachinko machine 10. You may. In this case, the attractiveness of the decorative means can be improved. Further, by separating the first decorative portion from the second decorative portion and the third decorative portion, the light of the light emitting means arranged behind the decorative means can be transmitted through the gap, or the first decorative portion can be transmitted. A predetermined information means arranged behind the decorative means can be visually configured via the transparent portion and the second transparent portion.

(1-f; base portion) The base portion 402 does not have to be a transparent or translucent plate shape, and is formed by, for example, appropriately providing an opening, for example, a frame shape (annular) or a grid shape to form a base. The visibility of the unit 402 itself may be ensured, or the first component portion including the first decorative unit 405 and the second component unit including the second decorative unit 407 are composed of the first component unit and the second component unit. The structure may be such that a gap is formed between the portions and the portions (for example, a structure that holds the outer peripheral portions of the first constituent portion and the second constituent portion). Further, when the base portion 402 itself has transparency, a part or all of the base portion 402 may be uneven, curved, or partially different in thickness. For example, when the first component portion is provided with a convex portion projecting rearward, or the second component portion is provided with a convex portion projecting forward, the convex portion is accommodated (or fitted). It may be configured to have a recess. Further, the base portion may be in the shape of a transparent box. In addition, the base portion 402 may be provided with a passage through which the game ball can pass between the first constituent portion and the second constituent portion, or may be provided with a region in which the movable accessory can move and be accommodated. ..

The base portion 402 is not colorless and transparent, but can be colored transparent or translucent so as to be slightly turbid. Further, the base portion 402 may be a transmissive liquid crystal display device or a light guide plate. However, in the case of the configuration in which the specific portion of the display object is manually displayed by the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 as in the above embodiment, at least the second decorative portion of the base portion 402 is displayed. The portion located between the 407 and the first transparent portion 406 is configured to have high visibility so that the visual aspect of the second decorative portion 407 does not differ significantly from the visual aspect of the first decorative portion 405. It is desirable to be done (make it as transparent as possible or make it a space where no objects are installed).

Further, a transmissive display device or a light guide plate is used as a means for changing the visual recognition state between the first component unit (front side sheet 403 in the above embodiment) and the second component unit (rear surface side sheet 404 in the above embodiment). In the configuration in which the display is installed, the display is normally turned off to make the mode of the visible state changing means invisible or difficult to see, and a state advantageous for the player or a state advantageous for the player occurs. In the state of teaching, the mode of the visual recognition state changing means may be visually recognizable or easily visible through the first transmission unit.

In this case, it is possible to perform an effect, suggestion, teaching, or the like by utilizing a mode change in which the visual state changing means is shown or not shown in accordance with the state change of the visual state changing means. Therefore, it is possible to make effective use of the space as compared with the case of providing a decoration that shows a mode that does not change. Further, a second component is arranged behind the first component and the visible state changing means, and when the visible state changing means is in the non-visible state, the second component is passed through the first transmissive part of the first component. Therefore, the second decorative part can be visually recognized as it is. Therefore, in a state where the visible state changing means is in the non-visible position, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the mode of the first transmission portion is only empty and the design is deteriorated. In particular, since the aspect of the first decorative portion and the aspect of the second decorative portion are combined to form a specific aspect, it is possible to further improve the decorativeness and the like.

(1-g-1; Configuration that makes the decorative means movable) The front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 of the decorative panel 401 are separated, and at least one of them is attached to the pachinko machine 10 main body (game board 30 or the like). On the other hand, the decorative panel 401 may be configured to be relatively displaceable, or the entire decorative panel 401 may be configured to be relatively displaceable with respect to the main body of the pachinko machine 10 (game board 30, etc.). In this case, the first decorative portion 405, the first transparent portion 406, the second decorative portion 407, and the second transparent portion 408 can be displaced to change the orientation of the specific mode, the shape of the specific mode, and the like. .. Further, when the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 (or the first component and the second component corresponding thereto) are composed of a plurality of parts, some of the parts are replaced with different parts. On the other hand, relative displacement may be possible. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the display mode of the decorative panel 401, improve the staging by using the decorative panel 401, and the like.

As an example of the embodiment, as shown in the horizontal cross-sectional view of FIG. 52 (a), a decorative body as a decorative means is provided by a vertical lattice-shaped first panel 482 and a substantially plate-shaped second panel 483 having an uneven front surface. 481 may be configured. That is, a printed sheet is attached to the front surface side of the first panel 482, and the sheet constitutes the first decorative portion 405. Further, the first panel 482 is formed with an opening that penetrates back and forth, and the opening constitutes the first transmission portion 406. The first transmission portion 406 (opening portion) is opened back and forth without being covered with the sheet. The first panel 482 may be transparent or opaque.

The second panel 483 is provided with a flat plate-shaped body and a convex portion of the plate-shaped body that protrudes forward from a position corresponding to the first transmission portion 406 (opening portion) of the first panel 482. A printed sheet is attached to the front side of the convex portion, and the second decorative portion 407 is configured by the sheet. The second panel 483 is transparent, and the second permeation portion 408 is composed of a portion to which the sheet is not attached, that is, a portion that is not a convex portion.

Further, the first panel 482 is fixed so as not to be displaceable. On the other hand, a drive mechanism 484 that slides and displaces the second panel 483 back and forth is provided. By displacing the second panel 483 forward, the convex portion of the second panel 483 is inserted into the opening (first transmission portion 406) of the first panel 482, and the first decorative portion 405 and the first decorative portion 405 are inserted in the front-rear direction. The position is almost the same as that of the second decorative portion 407 (approximately one surface). As a result, it is possible to visually recognize the specific mode in which the mode of the first decorative portion 405 and the mode of the second decorative portion 407 are combined with each other with almost no front-back deviation.

Further, by displacing the second panel 483 rearward, the second decorative portion 407 is separated rearward from the first panel 482. A surface emitting illumination 485 is provided behind the second panel 483, and by locating the second panel 483 in the rear, the surface emitting illumination is provided via the second transmitting portion 408 and the first transmitting portion 406. It is possible to irradiate the front of the decorative body 481 with the light of 485. However, depending on the positional relationship between the decorative body 481 and the player's viewpoint, the rear region of the decorative body 481 may be visible or easy to see, or may not be visible, even when the second panel 483 is located rearward. It may be possible or difficult to see.

Further, the game ball can pass behind the second panel 483 and in front of the surface emitting illumination 485. That is, the decorative body 481 is provided in front of the right-handed winning unit 37 (not shown), and the surface emitting illumination 485 is provided behind the right-handed winning unit 37. In this embodiment, if the second panel 483 is located in the front, the rear of the decorative body 481 becomes invisible, so that the game ball passes behind the decorative body 481 (the game ball is hit to the right). The second panel 483 is fixed to the rear position. Further, in a state where the game ball does not pass behind the decorative body 481 (a state in which the game ball is hit to the left), the position of the second panel 483 can be changed by the player performing a predetermined operation. .. As in the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 appropriately produces the winning device in response to the opening of the winning device of the right-handed winning unit 37 and the entry of a game ball into the winning device. And the display of records, etc. are performed.

As described above, by displacing the second panel 483 forward, the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 can be made flush with each other, and the design can be improved. Further, by displacing the second decorative portion 407 rearward, the game ball moving behind the decorative body 481 can be visually recognized via the decorative body 481. Further, the player can appropriately select whether or not to confirm the area behind the decorative body 481 according to the game situation and the like. That is, it does not prohibit the player from visually recognizing the area behind the decorative body 481, and it is visible if the player tries to visually recognize it, but when the necessity of visual recognition is not recognized, that is, for example, the decoration. The result of the game is taught by visually recognizing the area behind the body 481, and the effect is obtained when the result of the game obtained in the area behind the decorative body 481 is produced by another effect means. If you want to enjoy more, you can choose not to look at the area behind the decoration 481 (to avoid getting into the view or getting into the edge of the view). Further, when the area behind the decorative body 481 is not visible, a specific aspect can be visually recognized in the decorative body 481, and the front of the area behind the decorative body 481 can be effectively utilized as a decorative area. can.

In the configuration in which the decorative body 481 is provided in front of the right-handed winning unit 37, when the occurrence of the jackpot state is determined, the second panel 483 is displaced rearward before the occurrence of the jackpot state. It may be that. Further, a movable accessory may be allowed to enter behind the second panel 483 and in front of the surface emitting illumination 485. Further, when the movable accessory can enter the rear of the second panel 483 (when the effect that the movable accessory may move is performed and the movable accessory does not move even if the effect is performed). The second panel 483 may be configured to be displaced rearward.

For example, when the second panel 483 is located rearward, a movable accessory may be allowed to enter between the first panel 482 and the second panel 483, or a game ball may be allowed to pass through (for example). , The decorative body 481 is provided in a specific area provided in the game area, and the specific area is provided with an opening / closing means for switching between a state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the specific area and a state in which the game ball is restricted. The second panel 483 may be displaced rearward when the means are opened).

(1-g-2; Configuration that makes the decorative means movable Part 2) As another example, as shown in the horizontal cross-sectional view of FIG. 52 (b), a transparent square tubular body extending vertically. The decorative means by the 492 and the decorative portions 405a, 405b, 407a, 407b, and the transmissive portions 406a, 406b, 408a, 408b provided on the outer surface side or the inner surface side of the four wall portions constituting the main body 492. 491 may be configured as a decorative body. That is, the first transparent portion 406a is formed in the range including the lateral central portion of the outer surface of one of the pair of facing wall portions of the main body portion 492, and the first decorative portion 405a is formed on both the left and right sides thereof. Has been done. On the other hand, the second decorative portion 407a is formed in a range including the central portion in the width direction of the outer surface of the other wall portion, and the second transmission portions 408a are formed on both the left and right sides thereof. Further, the first transparent portion 406b is formed in the range including the horizontal central portion of the inner surface of one of the other wall portions of the main body 492, and the first decorative portion 405b is formed on both the left and right sides thereof. There is. On the other hand, the second decorative portion 407b is formed in a range including the central portion in the width direction of the inner surface of the other wall portion, and the second transmission portions 408b are formed on both the left and right sides thereof. In the present embodiment, the decorative portion and the sheet provided with the transmissive portion are attached to the wall portion of the main body 492 to form the decorative portions 405a, 405b, 407a, 407b, and the transmissive portions 406a, 406b, 408a, 408b. Is provided.

The decorative body 491 (main body 492) is configured to be rotatable about the vertical direction passing through the central portion of the main body portion 492 as an axis. For example, gears are connected to the upper part and the lower part of the main body portion 492 so that the power of the stepping motor is transmitted to at least one gear (the inside of the main body portion 402 is hollow and another member is provided. Not).

When the wall portion provided with the first decorative portion 405a is in a posture facing forward, the player can visually recognize the first decorative portion 405a (the aspect of the outer surface thereof) and the first transparent portion 406a. The second decorative portion 407a (the aspect of the inner surface thereof) is visually recognized as if it is lined up side by side. Further, when the wall portion provided with the second decorative portion 407a is in a posture facing forward, the player can visually recognize the second decorative portion 407a (the aspect of the outer surface thereof) and the second transparent portion 408a. The first decorative portion 405a (the aspect of the inner surface thereof) is visually recognized as if it is lined up side by side. Further, when the wall portion provided with the first decorative portion 405b is in a posture of facing forward, the player can see the second decorative portion 405b via the first decorative portion 405b and the first transparent portion 406b. It is visually recognized as if the decorative portion 407b is lined up side by side. In addition, when the wall portion provided with the second decorative portion 407b is in a posture facing forward, the player sees the second decorative portion 407b (the aspect of the outer surface thereof) and the second transparent portion 408a. The second decorative portion 405b (inner surface aspect) to be visually recognized is visually recognized as if it is lined up side by side. Further, different patterns are drawn on the outer surface and the inner surface of the decorative portions 405a, 405b, 407a, and 407b, respectively, and the decoration is visually recognized side by side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As for the patterns on the outer surface and the inner surface of the portions 405a, 405b, 407a, and 407b, when the patterns arranged side by side are combined, a sense of solidarity and a sense of unity that can be visually recognized as one pattern are obtained.

Further, behind the decorative body 491 (position on the opposite side of the decorative body 491 from the player), a display device (not shown) having a display unit having substantially the same size as the side surface of the decorative body 491 is provided. When each wall portion of the decorative body 491 is oriented to face the front surface (player) of the pachinko machine 10 (glass unit 137), the display device is displayed by the player by the decoration (specific mode) in the decorative body 491. Is (almost) invisible. On the other hand, when each wall portion of the decorative body 491 faces obliquely with respect to the player, the player can visually recognize a part of the display device through the transmissive portion. Further, even if the decorative body 491 is oriented to face the player, the player can visually recognize a part of the display device through the transparent portion by moving the face sideways.

In this embodiment example, when the decorative body 491 is stopped, a predetermined suggestion or teaching is given according to the type of the specific mode visually recognized by the player, or when the decorative body 491 is rotating or stopped, a predetermined display device is displayed. It is supposed to give suggestions and teachings. Further, the display device is housed in a case that opens upward, downward, and in the decorative body 491, and is configured to be visible only through the decorative body 491 (transparent portion). When the decorative body 491 or the display device can be displaced vertically or horizontally so that the visual recognition mode of the display device can be clearly seen, the decorative body 491 is configured to be in a relative position away from the front of the display device. You may.

As described above, the square cylindrical decorative body 491 can be visually recognized by the player in four specific modes by the decorative portions 405a, 405b, 407a, and 407b in accordance with the rotation of the decorative body 491. Therefore, since at least four pieces of information can be taught and suggested, the staging can be improved, and the decorativeness can be improved by changing the visual mode. In addition, the player can appropriately select whether or not to check the display device behind the decorative body 491 according to the gaming situation, etc., and the state in which the area behind the decorative body 491 is visually recognized and the state in which the display device is not visually recognized can be visually recognized. The switching to the pachinko machine 10 can be quickly performed without requiring a predetermined operation or the like for the pachinko machine 10. Further, when the area behind the decorative body 491 is not visible, a specific aspect can be visually recognized in the decorative body 491, and the front of the area behind the decorative body 491 can be effectively utilized as a decorative area. can.

In the main body 492, the formation positions of the first decorative portions 405a, 405b, the second decorative portions 407a, 407b, etc. can be appropriately changed. For example, the first decorative portion 405a is on the outer surface side, and the second decorative portion 407a May be the inner surface side. Further, by printing different prints on both the front and back surfaces of the first decorative portions 405a and 405b and the second decorative portions 407a and 407b, it is possible to visually recognize the specific modes of the four patterns. Further, the configuration in which the specific mode is changed by changing the relative orientation for visually recognizing the decorative means (decorative body) is not particularly limited to the above configuration, and can be appropriately changed. For example, the main body 492 has a substantially circular cross section in a solid shape, and a sheet having a plurality of decorative portions (prints on both the front and back surfaces) and a plurality of transmissive portions is wound and attached to the outer surface of the main body 492. A decorative body may be constructed. Further, for example, an outer cylinder portion having a substantially arcuate cross section in which a cylindrical body extending vertically is halved vertically so as to leave the front side thereof, and three outer cylinders arranged one above the other are provided. A substantially cylindrical inner cylinder portion is provided inside the portion, and the outer cylinder portion is provided with a first decorative portion and three first transmissive portions arranged one above the other, and three inner cylinders. Each portion is provided with a driving means so as to be rotatable, and a plurality of second decorative portions are provided on the outer peripheral surface. For example, instead of alternately providing the second decorative portion and the second transmissive portion one by one, three second decorative portions are provided side by side along the outer circumference of the inner cylinder portion, and the second transmissive portion is provided. May be provided by one. Then, a predetermined instruction or suggestion may be given depending on which of the second decorative portions is to be visually recognized (the inner cylinder portion is stopped) via the first transparent portion. Further, a second transmissive portion is provided in the inner cylinder portion, and the inner mode of the inner cylinder portion (either a fixed mode or a changeable configuration) can be visually recognized via the first transmissive portion and the second transmissive portion. It may be configured as such. It should be noted that a light emitting means for illuminating the inside of the inner cylinder portion may be provided. In this case, when the first transmissive portion and the second transmissive portion coincide with each other, it looks bright (it may be turned off before the inner cylinder portion is stopped), or the inside of the inner cylinder portion may be easily visually recognized. In addition, a pattern (small pattern, fine decoration such as embedding glitter or beads) or the like is inserted in the transmissive portions 406a, 406b, 408a, 408b so as not to hinder the transparency so much, and the decorative portions 405a, 405b, 407a, It is also possible to provide a configuration for adding the same pattern as the pattern on the outer surface side and the inner surface side of the 407b (the side in contact with the wall portion of the main body 492 corresponds by adding the pattern to the wall portion of the main body 492. May be).

It is desirable not to provide a shaft for rotating the decorative body 491 inside the square cylindrical decorative body 491. In this case, the shaft is visually recognized in a specific mode of the combination of the decorative portions 405a, 405b, 407a, and 407b (particularly, a specific mode of the rotation phase in which the decorative portion 407a and the decorative portion 405b cannot cover the front of the shaft). It is possible to avoid deterioration of design. For example, a shaft protruding downward from the central portion of the closed portion that closes the lower portion of the decorative body 491 is provided, the shaft is connected to a stepping motor, and an annular body is provided (integrally formed) on the upper portion of the decorative body 491. It may be connected or connected), and a guide portion that rotatably supports the annular body may be provided.

Further, a movable accessory that can appear and disappear may be provided inside the decorative body 491. For example, the movable accessory can be displaced to a visible position inserted inside the decorative body 491 through an opening above the decorative body 491 and a retracted position located outside the decorative body 491, and is a big hit. It may be configured to be displaced to the visual recognition position when it is suggested that the degree of expectation is high. In addition, the mode of viewing the movable accessory from the front may be changed. For example, the direction and posture (pose) of the movable accessory may be changed, the type of the movable accessory may be changed, the emission color of the light emitter built in the movable accessory may be changed, and the like.

Further, in the above embodiment, since the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 are integrally provided (both are attached to the base portion 402), the decorative panel 401 is configured to be displaceable. However, it is possible to reliably prevent the displacement of a specific aspect after or during the movement of the decorative panel 401. Further, the displacement of the decorative panel 401 causes the first position and the second position to change, which can change the visual mode of the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and improve the decorativeness and the directing effect. Can be planned. Further, it is also possible to configure the relative positional relationship with the decorative panel 401 to be the first position or the second position without the player moving. That is, in the left-handed state, the specific mode of the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized, and in the right-handed state, the right-handed winning unit 37 is visible via the decorative panel 401. You may. The direction of displacement, the type of displacement, the displacement speed, and the like of at least one of the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404, or the entire decorative panel 401 are not particularly limited. For example, the decorative panel. The first decorative portion 405 or the like may be configured to have a horizontal stripe pattern by rotating the 401 by 90 degrees. Further, for example, the front side sheet 403 may be configured to be relatively displaceable back and forth by increasing the distance between the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404.

Further, at least one of the first component portion (front side sheet 403) and the second component portion (rear surface side sheet 404) is provided so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the base portion 402, whereby the decorative panel 401 is provided. It is possible to diversify the display mode and make it gorgeous. Therefore, for example, it is possible to give a variation to the visual aspect, and it is possible to further increase the interest in the aspect including the decorative panel 401. Further, for example, by attaching the first component portion and the second component unit to the base unit 402, it is possible to easily prevent the deviation of a specific mode. Further, when at least one of the first component and the second component is displaced, the first position and the second position are changed, which causes a change in the visual recognition mode on the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to improve the decorativeness and the directing effect.

Further, for example, a visual mode switching sheet is provided in front of the front side sheet 403 at a predetermined distance, and the visual mode switching sheet has a plain (black-painted or the like) opaque portion having the same width as the first decorative portion 405. , Transparent portions having the same width as the first transparent portion 406 are alternately provided in the left-right direction, the front side sheet 403 is configured to be slidable to the left and right, and the first decorative portion 405 is the 1-1 decorative portion. And the 1-2 decorative portion provided with the first transparent portion 406 sandwiched between the 1-1 decorative portion, and the 1-1 decorative portion is provided via the transparent portion of the visual recognition mode switching sheet. The state of being visually recognized (the 1-2 decorative portion is located behind the opaque portion of the visual mode switching sheet) and the 1-2 decorative portion are visually recognized (the 1-1 decorative portion is the visual mode switching sheet of the visual mode switching sheet). (Located behind the opaque portion) and the rear surface side sheet 404 (further rearward via the second decorative portion 407 or the second transmission portion 408) via the first transmission portion 406) can be visually recognized. It may be configured to be switchable (it is also possible to omit the first transmission portion 406 and the rear surface side sheet 404).

The relative displacements of the first component (first decorative part 405) and the second component (second decorative part 407) include slide displacement and rotation (for example, including directions such as up / down, left / right, and front / back). , Tilt) displacement of a plurality of plate-like bodies such as louver windows, and the configuration may be such that the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 can be displaced in whole or in part. .. The overall angle of the decorative panel 401, the angle of the front side sheet 403, and the angle of the rear side sheet 404 may be adjustable based on the operation input of the player. In addition, the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are relatively displaced, so that the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the second position, so that the first transparent portion 406 and the second transparent portion 408 can be seen. A predetermined mode behind the decorative panel 401 may be visible and a predetermined mode behind the decorative panel 401 may be invisible. The state may be changed between a state in which the aspect is visually recognized and a state in which a mode behind the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized but different from the predetermined aspect. By configuring the player to change the state of the rear of the decorative panel 401 into a visible state and an invisible state, the information means provided behind the decorative panel 401 is not intentionally visually recognized, and the information is concerned. It is also possible to select a way of enjoying the content taught by the means, such as enjoying the aspect of the teaching means to be taught with the effect, and the playability can be expanded.

Further, for example, in the case of variable display or the like, the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 may be relatively displaced so that an effect of being able to stand still in a plurality of relative arrangements may be executed. A lottery for determining the relative arrangement of stationary is performed, and when the operation of the effect button 125 or the operation period of the effect button 125 has elapsed, the first decorative portion 405 and the first decorative portion 405 are arranged relative to each other based on the result of the lottery. , The second decorative portion 407 is made stationary. When the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 match, a specific mode is visually recognized. The degree of perfection of the specific aspect is considered to be a suggestion of the degree of expectation of a big hit (for example, it may be a trigger for the transition to super reach), and the variable display in the big hit state is better than the variable display in which the jackpot is out of order. Also, in the lottery, it is easy to select a relative arrangement in which the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 match.

Further, for example, the information means whose front is covered with the decorative panel 401 may be configured to be displaceable. Here, for example, not only a configuration in which a lamp or a display device (segment display device or the like) as an information means is displaced, but also a configuration in which a specific display position as an information means in the display unit of the display means can be changed. It is intended to include.

Further, for example, the first decorative unit 405 and the second decorative unit 407 include a first symbol display unit on which the first symbol is displayed and a second symbol display unit on which the second symbol is displayed, and are displaced. By doing so, the symbol display unit that is visually recognized when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the first position is switched, and when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the first position, the first decorative unit 405 is the first. 1 The symbol display unit is visually recognized, and the first symbol display unit is visually recognized in the second decorative unit 407, whereby the first specific mode is visually recognized, and when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the first position, the first decoration is performed. The second specific mode may be visually recognized by visually recognizing the second symbol display unit in the unit 405 and visually recognizing the second symbol display unit in the second decorative unit 407. In this case, variations can be increased to the pattern of a specific embodiment. The first decorative portion includes a transparent plate-shaped body, a first symbol display portion provided on the front surface of the plate-shaped body, and a second symbol display portion provided on the back surface of the plate-shaped body. A rotation shaft is provided so as to extend on an extension of a virtual straight line extending through the central portion of the shape and extending along the longitudinal direction of the plate, a pinion is provided on the rotation shaft, and a plurality of first decorations are provided. A rack (or belt) is attached to the pinion of the unit and displaced by a motor so that the symbol display units of the plurality of first decorative units 405 can be switched between the first symbol display unit and the second symbol display unit at once. You may. Further, for example, the first component is composed of a substantially annular reel, and the second component is composed of a substantially annular reel that is one size smaller than the first component, and the rotation axis extends to the left and right. , The second component is configured to be housed inside the first component. Further, the first decorative portion 405 (second decorative portion 407) and the first transparent portion 406 (second transparent portion 408) are arranged alternately on the left and right with respect to the first constituent portion (second constituent portion). May be provided at a plurality of locations in the circumferential direction of the reel (the first decorative portion may be provided on the front surface or the back surface of the transparent annular body so that the first transmission portion is formed). The first decorative part, which is a position facing forward among the first decorative part of a plurality of types of the first component part, and the second decorative part, which is a position facing forward among the second decorative parts of a plurality of types of the second component part. There are cases where the types match with the decoration part and cases where they do not match (for example, the first component has a picture on the left side of a citrus, a melon, a watermelon, a strawberry, and a banana, and the second component has a picture on the left side. , A picture on the right side of a citrus, a melon, a watermelon, a strawberry, and a banana is described, and the same pattern or a different pattern may be combined depending on the production or the like).

Further, for example, the rear side sheet 404 is omitted from the decorative panel 401, and the decorative panel 401 can be displaced (displaceable between the front position of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the position away from the front of the decorative symbol display device 42). It is configured so that when the decorative panel 401 is displaced, the figure visually recognized via the first transmission portion 406 of the decoration panel 401, and by extension, the specific mode visually recognized in combination with the first decoration portion 405 changes. You may.

Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative means including the decorative panel 401 may be configured to be displaceable, and the visual mode of the decorative means may change as the orientation of the decorative means changes. For example, the decorative means may be provided in a substantially box shape having a plurality of decorative panels 401 as wall portions, or a plurality of decorative panels 401 may be arranged and connected in a slidable direction, and the decorative means may be displaced to the front of the pachinko machine 10. The decorative panel 401 exposed to the side may be configured to be changeable.

Further, for example, the specific mode can be visually recognized by visually recognizing the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 from the first position, but the first decoration can be visually recognized by visually recognizing from another position. Even if the portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 are visually recognized, the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 cannot be recognized even as a part of a specific embodiment (for example, a simple wire-like or uneven block). It may only look like a wire). In addition, at least one of the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 is formed by printing a decorative portion on a flexible strip-shaped (film-shaped) transparent base, and is deformed (curved, bent). May be good. Further, for example, instead of the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404, the first component and the second component are formed by attaching a print seal to a substantially E-shaped transparent resin molded product. The decorative means is configured by providing the component parts, and the other component part enters the gap formed between the one component part of the first component part and the second component part, and the first component part, In addition, the front surface of the second component is substantially flush with each other, and the first component and the second component are separated from each other in the front-rear direction to form a gap between the first component and a gap between the second components. The area behind the decorative means may be configured to be visible and state-changeable.

(1-h; Passage Component) Further, as an example in which the decorative means is provided with a passage component through which the game ball can pass and the decorative means itself can be displaced, it may be configured as shown in FIG. 53. good. That is, the decorative body 493 as a decorative means forms a substantially cylindrical body, and notches 494 are formed so as to include the lower edge portion of the cylindrical body at three positions in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical body. It has three legs 495. Further, the outer surface side and the inner surface side of each leg portion 495 are decorated (the first to third outer decorative portions 496 and the first to third inner decorative portions 497 are provided). .. Further, the decorative body 493 is rotatably configured (a shaft portion protruding upward from the center of the upper surface of the closed wall portion that closes the upper side of the decorative body 493 is connected to a stepping motor as a driving means). A passage component 498 through which a game ball can pass is provided between the legs 495.

In the game area, a winning unit (not shown) including a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter is provided, and the decorative body 493 is installed in the specific area. The winning unit is provided with an opening / closing member provided at the entrance to the specific area, and the opening / closing member is opened so that the game ball can enter the specific area. In this embodiment, the decorative body 493 starts to rotate when the opening / closing member is opened. More specifically, when the decorative body 493 is viewed in a plan view, it is rotated 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction and then stopped for 0.2 seconds repeatedly. At the time of the stop, the central portion of the predetermined leg portion 495 in the lateral width direction is in front of the pachinko machine 10 (the position where the player's viewpoint is relatively the first position), or between the leg portions 495. The central portion of the gap in the lateral width direction is configured to be a position in front of the pachinko machine 10 (a position where the player's viewpoint is relatively the second position). In addition, the rotation of the decorative body 493 is stopped in the standby state in which the game ball is discharged from the specific area and then shifts to a predetermined time. At the time of the stop, the predetermined leg portion 495 is rotated to a position where the central portion in the lateral width direction is in front of the pachinko machine 10 (a position where the player's viewpoint is relatively the first position) and then stopped. Will be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative body 493 is provided so as to be slightly inclined downward toward the front, and the game ball is notched from the rear or side of the decorative body 498 with respect to the passage component 498. It is possible to enter via the 494, and the game ball can be ejected from the passage component 493 via the notch 494 in front of or to the side of the decorative body 493 (the game ball that has entered the specific area). There is also a pattern in which the passage component 498 is discharged without entering the passage component (498). A special winning device as a special ball-entry means and a discharge port are provided in front of and below the decorative body 493, and when a predetermined notch 494 faces the front of the pachinko machine 10. When the game ball is ejected from the notch portion 494, the game ball enters the special winning device and a big hit state is generated. In addition, the gaming ball is ejected from the notch portion 494 that does not face the front of the pachinko machine 10 (facing diagonally forward), or the gaming ball that has entered a specific area passes forward on the side of the decorative body 493. In such a case, the game ball will enter the discharge port, and a big hit state or the like will not occur.

When the above configuration is adopted, the aspect of the outer surface side of the leg portion 495 (outer decorative portion 496) and the aspect of the inner surface side of the leg portion 495 visually recognized through the gap between the leg portions 495 (inner decorative portion). It is possible to visually recognize the mode in which the combination with 497) is used, and the combination mode changes with the rotation of the decorative body 493 by the driving means (stepping motor) (not shown), which makes the visual mode interesting. Can be added. In addition, since the game ball can pass between the legs 495 in which the combination mode exists, it is possible to enhance the attractiveness of the behavior of the game ball while increasing the visibility opportunity of the decorative body 493. As a result, decoration can be preferably performed while effectively utilizing the space. Further, the passage of the game ball is sequentially changed by the rotation of the decorative body 493 (the guide direction of the game ball in the passage component 498 of the decorative body 493 is changed). That is, since the visual mode of the decorative body 493 changes and the passage of the game ball also changes, it is possible to avoid one pattern of the behavior of the game ball in the passage component 498. The action and effect of deriving an interesting visual recognition mode by combining the behavior of the game ball is further achieved. As a result, it is possible to improve the playability and the like. Further, in the standby state in which the decorative body 493 is not rotated, the decorative body 493 is stopped at a phase in which the viewpoint of the player sitting in the normal posture in front of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the first position. Further, even in a state where the decorative body 493 is rotationally driven, the phase in which the viewpoint of the player sitting in the normal posture in front of the pachinko machine 10 is the first position and the viewpoint of the player is the second position. It is designed to be temporarily stopped at the phase. Therefore, even in the configuration in which the decorative body 493 is displaced, the first to third outer decorative portions 496 as the first decorative portion and the first to third inner decorative portions 497 as the second decorative portion are used. It is possible to positively visually recognize a specific mode in which the above is combined, and it is possible to improve the design. In particular, by configuring the pachinko machine 10 so that the specific mode can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 in the standby state, it is possible to promote the game to the players who will play the game from now on. Further, since the game ball passing through the passage component 498 can be visually recognized to move (pass between the first component and the second component) so as to dive under the decorative body 493, for example. The behavior of the game ball can be made more interesting than the configuration in which the game ball only passes in front of or behind the decorative body 493.

In this embodiment, of the leg portions 495 of the decorative body 493, the leg portion 495 in which the outer surface side is visually recognized corresponds to the first component portion, and the leg portion 495 in which the inner surface side is visually recognized corresponds to the second component portion. Further, the outer decorative portion 496 visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 corresponds to the first decorative portion, and the decorative portion 497 visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 corresponds to the second decorative portion. Further, in the cutout portion 494, the range in which the outer peripheral side of the upper edge portion faces (exposes) toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 corresponds to the first transmission portion, and the outer peripheral side of the upper edge portion is on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. The facing range corresponds to the second transmission portion.

The shape (design, etc.) of the decorative means is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, by forming a concavo-convex shape such as a sculpture on the leg portion 495, the first to third outer decorative portions 496 and the first to third inner decorative portions 497 may be provided. That is, in the above embodiment, the main body of the decorative body 493 corresponds to the base portion, but in the configuration in which the leg portion 495 itself is the decorative portion, the portion connecting the leg portions 495 of the decorative body 493 corresponds to the base portion. do. Further, the displacement of the decorative means can be appropriately set for each model such as tilting, sliding, and rotating. Further, in the case of electric displacement, the decorative means performs a constant displacement operation so that the guiding direction of the game ball changes regularly. In the case of non-motor displacement, it may be configured to move from the reference position to another position in conjunction with the game ball and then return to the reference position by a return means (spring, etc.), or like a roulette wheel. Eventually, a configuration that can return to the reference position (a configuration that can stand still at a position different from the reference position) may be used.

Further, a passage detection switch is provided as a passage detection means for detecting a game ball passing through the passage constituent portion 498 of the decoration body 493, and the decoration body 495 moves differently from the normal movement based on the detection of the passage detection switch. (For example, reverse rotation, reverse rotation and then forward rotation may be executed a predetermined number of times). In this case, the retention of the game ball (ball clogging) in the decorative body 493 can be automatically eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid bothering the hands of the game hall related persons and to prevent the occurrence of troubles when the ball jam is resolved by the game field related persons. In addition, based on the detection of the passage detection switch, the light emitting means provided at or near the decorative body 493 may be configured to irradiate the game ball passing through the passage component 498, or a sound effect may be produced. It may be generated.

In addition, the shape, arrangement, number, and the like of the decorative body 493 are not particularly limited and can be appropriately changed. For example, four legs may be provided at equal positions. In this case, the position corresponding to the front of the pachinko machine 10 and the central portion in the width direction of the pachinko machine 10 (normal posture when playing a game while sitting straight on a chair installed in front of the pachinko machine 10). When the game ball passes through the passage component 498 of the decorative body 493 in the state where the player's viewpoint in the above position is the second position, a state advantageous to the player may occur (for example, of the game ball). A special ball entry portion that generates a big hit state based on the ball entry of the game ball may be provided at the destination of the passage). In this case, the viewpoint of the player in a posture in which the game is normally performed is set to the second position, so that the passage component 498 existing between the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion can be easily visually recognized. , The game ball that has passed through the course constituent portion 498 can be made easier to see. Therefore, by making it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the desired route, the player's uplifting feeling can be more reliably enhanced. Further, when the light emitting means is installed behind the decorative body 493, the passage constituent portion 498 becomes brighter due to the rotation phase in which the pair of cutout portions 494 are lined up in the front-rear direction, and the game ball in the passage constituent portion 498. You can make a better impression of passing.

Further, for example, instead of providing the shaft portion on the upper portion of the decorative body 493, the shaft portion may be provided on the disk portion connected to the lower end portion of the leg portion 495. Further, the rotation axis direction may be configured to extend in the front-rear direction or the left-right direction instead of the vertical direction, or the axis direction may be changed depending on the situation. Correspondingly, it may be configured so that the rotation direction is opposite. In addition, a course influence part that affects the traveling direction of the game ball (for example, convex in information) is provided at the bottom of the area surrounded by the leg part 495 (passage component part 498), and the course influence part can also be displaced. It may be configured.

Further, a decorative member as a third decorative portion (third component) behind the decorative body 493 (for example, a plate-shaped body to which a print sticker is attached, an accessory formed with unevenness and colored), etc. May be configured so that the decorative member can be visually recognized when the decorative body 493 is visually recognized from the second position. In this case, the decorativeness can be improved. In addition, an information means (for example, a display device capable of deriving a display that teaches or suggests the result of a predetermined lottery) as a third decorative unit (third component unit) is arranged behind the decorative body 493, and the first is When the decorative body 493 is visually recognized from two positions, the information means may be visually recognized. In this case, the amount of information when the decorative body 493 is visually recognized can be increased. Further, since the predetermined information means can be visually recognized even if the decorative body 493 is arranged in front of the predetermined information means, the installation location of the decorative body 493 can be set more freely.

Further, when the pachinko machine 10 detects vibration, magnetism, or the like and shifts to an error state, the decorative body 493 may be stopped so as to be in a position where the game ball is not guided by the special winning device. When the pachinko machine 10 detects vibration, magnetism, or the like and shifts to an error state (for example, the decorative body 493 is stopped at a position where the game ball is guided to the special winning device by the course component 498). It is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball enters the special winning device.

(1-i; Movable accessory) A movable accessory may be provided corresponding to the decorative panel 401. The movable accessory may be provided in front of the decorative panel 401, may be provided in a range where the front is covered by the decorative panel 401, a position where the decorative panel 401 covers the front, and a decorative panel. It may be provided so as to be displaceable at a position where the 401 projects outward and is exposed forward. The movable accessory provided in the range covered by the decorative panel 401 may be displaceably provided at a visible position visible to the player and a retracted position not visible to the player. However, the movable accessory in the evacuation position is completely invisible to the player (for example, a door or the like is provided, or the movable accessory is largely separated from the entrance / exit of the member that blindfolds the movable accessory. The configuration is not limited to the configuration such as (displacement to the displaced position)), and the movable accessory in the retracted position may be visually recognizable by the player tilting and visually recognizing. Further, by displacing the movable accessory provided behind or in front of the decorative panel 401, a predetermined object or the decorative panel 401 arranged behind the decorative panel 401 can be visually recognized. A predetermined object may be configured to be state-changeable so as to be invisible or difficult to see.

Further, at least the first decorative portion 405 of the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 is configured to be displaceable (including the case where the entire decorative panel 401 is tilted and displaced), and the like. It may be possible to switch between a state in which a specific aspect of the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized and a state in which the right-handed winning unit 37 is visually recognized without moving the viewpoint.

In addition, a possible accessory that is linked to a predetermined operation of the player may be provided. For example, a predetermined teaching / suggestion may be given by a predetermined movable accessory performing a predetermined operation in response to an operation of the effect button 125 at a predetermined timing. Further, a state in which the movable accessory performs a predetermined operation may be set based on the operation of the handle 18. For example, in the standby state in which the game is not performed (the state in which the demo screen is displayed), the front surface of the decorative panel 401 is set as the first position, and the game is being performed (for example, the game ball is placed in a predetermined winning device). In the state where the specified time has not passed since the ball entered, the specified time has not passed since the launch of the game ball was confirmed, etc.), the front of the central part of the pachinko machine 10 (game area) is the first. The decorative panel 401 may be configured to be displaced, deformed, or changed so as to have one position.

A variable information means that can be displaced between the visible position, which is a position visible through the decorative panel 401, and the retracted position, which is invisible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, is provided to teach the occurrence of a jackpot state. Alternatively, the variable information means may be configured to be displaced to the visual recognition position when it is suggested that the jackpot expectation is high. In this case, if the appearance of the variable information means is noticed, predetermined information (big hit, etc.) can be obtained, so that it is possible to increase the enjoyment of looking behind the decorative panel 401 at the time of variable display. Further, in the case of the big hit state, in the state where the instruction as to whether or not the probability change big hit is not given, the variable information means may be configured to be displaced to the visible position in the case of the probability change big hit. In addition, instead of the variable information means that is displaced, information means that change the visual mode (light emitting means / display means that changes the light emitting mode and display mode, a movable body that changes its appearance from the front by rotating on the spot, etc.) ) May be installed. The configuration, number, and the like of the information means arranged behind the decorative panel 401 are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a first information unit, a second information unit, a first light emitting means capable of emitting light from the first information unit, and a second light emitting means capable of emitting light from the second information unit are provided as predetermined information means. Both the 1st information unit and the 2nd information unit emit light to teach the granting of the 1st privilege or the 2nd privilege, and only one of the 1st information unit and the 2nd information unit emits the 2nd privilege. It may be configured to teach the granting of. Further, the variable information means may be displaceable, a plurality of variable information means may be provided, and the variable information means for teaching the same contents may be determined by lottery or the like.

(1-j; Decoration around the decorative panel) In addition, in the range visible through the decorative panel 401, not only the information means but also the display means for improving the decorativeness and the directing property (for example, the rear of the game board 30). The display unit of the liquid crystal display device is arranged in the entire area of the above, and in the part corresponding to the decorative panel 401, the display dedicated to the part or the display with a sense of unity as a whole may be performed). A movable accessory, an immovable accessory, a printed matter, or the like may be provided. In this case, the visual mode of the decorative panel 401 can be further diversified. Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, the positions of the decorative panel 401 in the vertical and horizontal positions (a tape with a pattern attached to the game board 30, a decorative accessory placed behind the transparent game board 30, and a game board). The decorative accessory or the like attached to the front side of the 30) is also provided with a predetermined decoration with an underwater motif as in the specific aspect of the decorative panel 401.

Further, on the back side of the decorative panel 401, for example, the mode may change only during the variable display that is a big hit (for example, it may be won in the corresponding lottery and the effect button 125 may be operated). (Movable accessories, lamps, etc.) may be provided. It should be noted that the information means is composed of a plurality of lamps, when the lamp as the information means emits light, the other lamps also emit light, and a movable accessory whose brightness does not change is adopted as the information means. Even if the information of the information means is not visually recognized through the first transmission portion 406 of the decoration panel 401, the information by the information means can be read only by changing the brightness of the corresponding position from the front of the decoration means 401. It is possible to avoid such a situation.

Further, a decorative panel 401 is provided in front of the game area or the game area, and a third component portion having a third decorative part is provided at a position on the opposite side of the decorative panel 401 (behind the game area) across the game area. When the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the second position, the third decorative portion may be visible via the first transmissive portion 406 and the second transmissive portion 408. In this case, it is possible to improve the design when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the second position. Further, the third decorative portion (for example, by making the design simple) makes it easy to visually recognize the game ball moving in the game area in front of the decorative portion. It is also possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the game ball moving in the game area in front of the third decorative portion (for example, to make a polka dot pattern similar to the game ball). Further, by displacing the visual mode (polka dot pattern) of the third decorative portion, such an action effect is further exhibited. Further, the installation range of the third decorative portion is set wider than the installation range of the decorative panel 401, and when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the first position, the specific mode is visually recognized in the third decorative portion. When the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the second position, the configuration may be such that almost the entire installation range of the third decorative portion including the installation range of the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized as an aspect of the third decorative portion. That is, even when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the first position, the mode of the third decorative portion (polka dot pattern, etc.) can be visually recognized in the peripheral portion of the decorative panel 401, whereby the specific mode of the decorative panel 401 (ocean) can be visually recognized. Organisms) can be complemented. When the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the second position, the first decorative portion 405 and the third decorative portion are adjacent to each other so that a specific second aspect different from the specific aspect can be visually recognized. You may. In this case, the attractiveness of the decorative panel 401 can be improved. The first decorative portion 406 is configured by holography or the like whose viewing mode changes depending on the viewing angle, and when the first decorative portion 406 is visually recognized from the first position, the first decorative portion 406 is visually recognized as a component aspect of the specific aspect and visually recognized from the second position. Then, the first decorative portion 406 may be configured to be visually recognized as a mode different from the constituent elements of the specific mode. In addition, each first decorative portion 406 is rotated to switch the surface visible from the front, and in a situation where the time zone for viewing from the first position is expected to be long, from the front of the first decorative portion 406. The mode (plane) to be visually recognized is the mode of the component of the specific mode, and the mode to be visually recognized from the front of the first decorative portion 406 is different from the specific mode in the situation where it is expected to be visually recognized from the second position. It may be configured to be an embodiment. Further, the mode of the third decorative portion is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, instead of interposing a game area (a space through which a game ball can pass) between the third decorative portion and the second decorative portion, a plate-like body having transparency may be interposed, and the game may be played. A space through which the sphere does not pass may be interposed.

(1-k; Configuration in which the decorative panel is a transparent display device) For example, at least one of the base portion 402, the front side sheet 403, or the rear side sheet 404 of the decorative panel 401 may be used as a transparent display device. good. In this case, it is possible to change the specific mode, make the specific mode a moving image, add another mode to the specific mode as appropriate, and the like. Further, the first decorative portion 405, the first transparent portion 406, the second decorative portion 407, and the second transparent portion 408 configured by the display of the display device are deformed or displaced (displayed), and the orientation of the specific embodiment is , It is also possible to change the shape of a specific embodiment.

Further, as an example of use for improving the effectability, the right-handed winning unit 37 is provided with the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b, and the first variable winning device 32a and the second. A special ball entry section 145, a non-special entry section 146, and a distribution device 147 are provided on both of the variable winning devices 32b, and a probability change mode is provided when a game ball enters either special entry section 145. The right to be granted. Further, as a type of jackpot state, the number of patterns in which the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b are sequentially opened in one round is increased, and the pattern includes the first variable winning device. When the 32a and the second variable winning device 32b are opened, the special winning portion 145 may be opened or may be maintained in the closed state. In this case, it is relatively difficult for the player to confirm whether or not the game ball has entered the special entry section 145, but instead, whether or not the game ball has entered the special entry section 145. By the end of the jackpot state, the player is surely instructed whether or not the game ball has entered the special entry unit 145. For example, if the promotion challenge effect is successful, the first variable prize device 32a is opened in the V prize challenge effect, and the game ball enters the special ball entry section 145. On the other hand, when the promotion challenge production fails, the second variable winning device 32b is opened and the special winning portion 145 of the second variable winning device 32b is opened (opening for 15 seconds). Or, after being closed with four balls, the first variable winning device 32a is opened (the special ball entry portion 145 is closed) and opened for 15 seconds or closed with four balls. ) Provide a pattern. Here, it is decided that the effect is performed without immediately teaching the entry of the game ball into the special entry section 145 of the second variable winning device 32b. Further, at a predetermined timing after the promotion challenge fails during the jackpot state, the image in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened is displayed in front of the first variable winning device 32a in the transmissive liquid crystal display device. A moving image of the game ball moving, entering the first variable winning device 32a, and further entering the special entry section 145 is displayed in front of the corresponding passage or entry section. By adopting such a configuration, the entry of the game ball into the special entry section 145 can be further excited by the production.

When the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 are configured by a transmissive flexible sheet-shaped liquid crystal display device, an effect that involves deforming the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 itself, etc. May be done. For example, the front side sheet 403 is curved so that the displayed character or the like is curved (a device that can slide back and forth and up and down is connected to the upper edge portion and the lower edge portion of the front side sheet 403, and the front and back are connected. (Displace it to bend it in a wavy shape, shake it by hitting the wind of the blower means against the front side sheet 403, etc.), or bend (fold) the front side sheet 403, and the displayed character etc. bends and disappears. (Swallowed by another character, etc.) may be performed.

(1-l; Configuration on the back side of the decorative panel) In the above embodiment, LEDs are provided corresponding to the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the special winning section 145, and the starting winning device 33b, and the corresponding winning devices are provided. Is lit when the is opened, and is configured to cause further morphological changes (blinking, color change, etc.) when the game ball enters. For example, instead of the LED or the LED. In addition to the above, a movable accessory is provided, and the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the special winning section 145, and the starting winning device 33b are changed in the mode and the game ball is placed in a place different from the decorative panel 401. A display means (LED or the like) for teaching the entry of a ball may be provided. Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, when a game ball enters the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the special winning section 145, and the starting winning device 33b, a sound effect may be generated. desirable.

In the above embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b (special winning section 145, non-special winning section 146), the second starting winning device 33b, and the first variable winning device 32a of the right-handed winning unit 37 are individually supported. An LED is provided so that the lighting mode changes when a ball can be entered or when a game ball enters, but the lighting mode is not particularly limited to this, and the LED is lit in a state where the ball can be entered. The configuration may be omitted, or the LED may be omitted. Further, in addition to or instead of teaching the entry of the game ball into the special entry section 145 by the LED, the decorative panel 401 is provided with a movable accessory in such a manner that at least a part thereof overlaps back and forth. (For example, the front leg of the whale, which is a specific aspect of the decorative panel 401, is configured to move), the movement is started based on the entry of the game ball into the special entry portion 145, and the movement is stopped in the reference posture after a specified time. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the aspect of the decorative panel 401 in which the movable accessory is in the reference posture (as much as possible without reducing the visibility through the first transmission portion 406 and the second transmission portion 408) is the normal aspect, and the movable accessory is a movable accessory. The changing mode is during the operation of, and the function of operating the movable accessory is the mode changing means.

Even when this configuration is adopted, the decorative panel 401 can notify that the game ball has entered the special ball entry unit 145, and can assist the player in grasping the situation. Further, by adopting the normal mode, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the inside of the right-handed winning unit 37 through the decorative panel 401 from being deteriorated. Therefore, it is possible to make the progress of the game smoother while improving the decorativeness. As the means for changing the mode, a light emitting means installed behind or inside the decorative panel 401, or a movable accessory provided so as to be overlapped with a part of the decorative panel 401 in the front-rear direction (such as a shutter is also possible). A lamp (LED) as a decorative irradiation means capable of irradiating the front side of the decorative panel 401 with light, a transmissive display device, or the like may be adopted.

In the above embodiment, the installation recess 409 is provided in the portion of the game board 30 corresponding to the right-handed winning unit 37, but the installation recess 409 may be omitted. Further, for example, instead of omitting the installation recess 409, the right-handed winning unit 37 is inserted from the rear of the game board 30 into the corresponding opening, and the portion connected to the rear plate portion 182 or the rear plate portion 182 is formed. It may be configured to be fixed to the game board 30 in a state of being in contact with the rear surface of the game board 30.

(1-m; Configuration in which the decorative means is provided on the glass unit) In the above embodiment, the decorative panel 401 is configured to be attached to the front side of the right-handed winning unit 37, but as shown in FIG. 49, it is transparent. The glass unit 137 as a body unit may be configured to be provided with a decorative unit as a decorative means corresponding to the decorative panel 401. The glass unit 137 includes a main body portion 441 and a decorative unit 442 that is detachably provided with respect to the main body portion 441. The main body portion 441 is provided with a notch portion 443 in the lower right portion including the front of the right-handed winning unit 37, and the decorative unit 442 corresponds to (fills) the notch portion 443. It is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 50, the main body portion 441 and the decorative unit 442 have a pair of front and rear transparent bodies 444 and a rear transparent body 445, and a front transparent body 444 and a rear transparent body 445, respectively. It is provided with a holding portion 446 as a holding means for holding in a separated state. Of the holding portions 446, the portion provided corresponding to the portion where the main body portion 441 and the decorative unit 442 abut against each other, and the one on the main body portion 441 side is referred to as a main body side contact holding portion 447 and is decorated. The unit 442 side is referred to as a decorative side contact holding portion 448.

A fitting recess 449 is provided on the contact surface of the main body side contact holding portion 447 with the decorative side contact holding portion 448, and the contact surface of the decorative side contact holding portion 448 with the main body side contact holding portion 447. Is provided with a fitting convex portion 450 that is substantially fitted in the fitting recess 449 when the glass unit 137 is attached to the front frame 14. The main body portion 441 and the decorative unit 442 are basically attached to the front frame 14 by sandwiching and fixing the holding portion 446 to the front frame 14 at a portion corresponding to the entire outer circumference of the glass unit 137. As for the connecting portion between the main body portion 441 and the decorative unit 442, the main body side contact holding portion 447 and the decorative side contact holding portion 448 are put into a fitted state to prevent misalignment in the front-rear direction. It is supposed to be done. As the front transparent body 444 and the rear transparent body 445, tempered glass, a transparent resin plate, or the like can be used. The holding portion 446 is made of a resin (polycarbonate, reinforced plastic, acrylic resin, synthetic rubber, etc.), and may be transparent or translucent (particularly, the portion where the main body portion 441 and the decorative unit 442 meet). desirable. Further, the main body side contact holding portion 447 and the decorative side contact holding portion 448 may be integrated.

Further, the decorative unit 442 is provided with the front side sheet 451 attached to the rear surface of the front transparent body 444 and the rear surface side sheet 452 to the front surface of the rear transparent body 445. The front side sheet 451 and the rear side sheet 452 are the same as those in the above embodiment, and by visually recognizing from the first position, the aspect of the front side sheet 451 and the aspect of the rear surface side sheet 452 can be seen. By visually recognizing the integrated specific aspect and visually recognizing it from the second position, a gap is formed between the aspect of the front side sheet 451 and the aspect of the rear side sheet 452, and the rear game is played through the gap. The area becomes visible.

As described above, by providing the decorative unit 442 in the glass unit 137, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the front-rear width of the game area is narrowed by the decorative unit 442 (even if the installation recess 409 is not provided as in the above embodiment). can do. Further, since the decorative unit 442 is detachably attached to the main body portion 441, the front side sheet 451 or the like may be changed due to a model change, or the front side sheet 451 may have a problem and should be replaced. The decorative unit 442 can be replaced with the decorative unit 442 as it is relatively easily, and maintainability, reusability, and the like can be improved. Further, since the front side sheet 451 is attached to the rear surface of the front transparent body 444 and the rear surface side sheet 452 is attached to the front surface of the rear transparent body 445, the effect of not narrowing the front-rear width of the game area is further improved. In addition to being played reliably, contact between the game ball moving in the game area and the rear side seat 452, and contact between an object (player or the like) touching the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and the front side seat 451 are avoided. be able to. Further, the holding portion 446 prevents the front transparent body 444 and the rear transparent body 445 from being displaced from each other, so that the specific mode can be more preferably visually recognized.

(1-n; lenticular lens) As shown in FIG. 51, a transparent substantially sheet-like lens (hereinafter referred to as “lenticular lens 471”) having a plurality of denticular convex lenses 472 arranged side by side is used. The display object 474 of the decorative sheet 473 arranged behind the lenticular lens 471 may be visually recognized, or the rear thereof may be visually recognized via the lenticular lens 471 and the decorative sheet 473. You may. That is, the decorative sheet 473 is configured by printing on one side of the transparent sheet on which a figure or the like constituting the display object 474 is drawn (a printed sticker is attached). May be done). The printing is performed in the direction in which the convex lenses 472 of the lenticular lens 471 are lined up (hereinafter referred to as the left-right direction) corresponding to the area of the right half of each convex lens 472 (hereinafter, each printed figure or the like). Is referred to as "divided object 475"), the divided object 475 is not printed in the left half area, and the transparent sheet is exposed back and forth to have transparency (hereinafter, the transparent part is referred to as "transparent"). Part 476 "). Further, the divided object 475 does not delete a part of the display object 474 (overall mode, specific mode) as in the front side sheet 403 of the above embodiment, but has a mode in which the display object 474 is separated. By connecting the adjacent divided objects 475 to each other, the display object 474 can be visually recognized.

Then, the decorative sheet 473 is attached to the back surface (flat surface) of the lenticular lens 471 to form the decorative unit 477. At this time, the divided object 475 and the transmissive portion 476 are set to fit in the width of the convex lens 472 one by one. Further, by installing the decorative unit 477 so that the convex lens 472 of the lenticular lens 471 is convex forward, the first position in front of the pachinko machine 10 (position slightly shifted to the right from the front of the decorative unit 477). When the decorative unit 477 is visually recognized, the display object 474 of the decorative sheet 473 is visually recognized, and when the decorative unit 477 is visually recognized from the second position (the position to the left of the decorative unit 477) different from the first position, the decoration is displayed. The area behind the unit 477 will be visible.

(1-o; approach detection) An approach detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered or can enter a portion of the game area that is covered in front of the decorative panel 401 (right-handed winning unit 37 in the above embodiment). In addition to providing an approach detection switch as an approach detection switch, the normal light emission mode (for example, white light emission, extinguishing, etc.) and the approach detection means switch are detected corresponding to the range including the entrance of the right-handed winning unit 37. In some cases, a notification means capable of changing to a change light emission mode (for example, blinking light emission, light emission in a different color, etc.), which is a normal light emission mode after a lapse of a specified time, and an approach notification lamp as an approach light emission means may be provided. good. That is, when the game ball as an information means is made visible through the decorative panel 401, the game ball is visible but difficult to see through the decorative panel 401, so that the game ball is decorated. By creating an opportunity for the player to notice that he / she has entered the back side of the panel 401, it is possible to make it easier for the player to confirm the game ball moving on the back side of the decorative panel 401. Further, in a state where the game ball is not launched on the back side of the decorative panel 401, that is, in a state where it is not necessary to confirm the whereabouts of the game ball through the decorative panel 401, the light emitting mode of the approach notification lamp is set to the normal light emitting mode. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to visually recognize the specific mode composed of the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407 of the decorative means.

The mode of notification when the approach detection switch is detected is not particularly limited, and a sound effect is generated from the speaker, or a movable accessory provided in or near the right-handed winning unit 37. May be configured to be displaced. Further, the approach detection switch may be one that detects all of the game balls that have entered (entered) (immediately after) the right-handed winning unit 37. The configuration of the approach notification lamp is not particularly limited, and may be partially provided at the entrance of the right-handed winning unit 37, or a light emitting means that emits surface light may be provided behind the entire area of the right-handed winning unit 37. May be.

Further, as an aspect of the approach notification lamp (launch position notification light emitting means), it is not necessary to launch the game ball on the right-handed unit 37 side (the game ball can be entered into the winning device provided in the right-handed winning unit 37). Or, when it is impossible to enter the game ball into the approach detection switch or it is difficult to enter the game ball so as to distinguish it from the first light emitting mode set in (when the state is set to be easy to enter). It may be configured to be changeable to the second light emitting mode (a mode different from the light emitting mode of the first light emitting mode, for example, red light emission in the probabilistic mode and green light emission in the time reduction mode) set to. In this case, the light emitting mode of the approach notification lamp and the visual mode of the decorative panel 401 are displayed depending on the state in which the game ball is launched into the area where the decorative panel 401 is provided (right-handed winning unit 37) and the other states. It can be changed (for example, the decorative panel 401 is in a bright state and a dark state), and the recognition and sharpness of switching the state of the game can be made clearer.

In addition, as an aspect of the approach notification lamp, the approach notification lamp stands by when the state shifts to a standby state (for customer waiting effect or energy saving measures) that shifts when the game is not performed for a predetermined time. It may be configured to be in the mode (extinguished or dimmed).

A discharge detection switch is provided in the discharge unit 116 of the right-handed winning unit 37, and is added by the detection of the approach detection switch. A residual grasping counter that is subtracted by the detection of the winning count switch 223a and the discharge detection switch may be provided so as to be able to grasp whether or not a game ball exists inside the right-handed winning unit 37. When the special ball entry detection switch 226a is detected, it is determined whether or not the value of the residual grasp counter is "1" or more before subtraction of the residual grasp counter, and when it is "1" or more. Further, the probability variation mode may be set on the condition that no abnormality of the remaining spheres in the second variable specific region 141 is confirmed (residual sphere monitoring process; see FIG. 18). In this case, it is possible to double-check the presence or absence of fraudulent acts that cause the special ball entry detection switch 226a to malfunction due to radio waves or the like, and it is possible to improve crime prevention.

In addition, light emitting means (passage light emitting means) are installed along the passages (first guide passage 112, second guide passage 113, third guide passage 114, fourth guide passage 115) of the game ball of the right-handed winning unit 37. , The passage light emitting means is made to emit light based on the detection of the approach detection switch, and the passage light emitting means is turned off after a specified time has elapsed from the detection of the approach detection switch or the detection of the emission detection switch (the aspect of the surface light emitting illumination 188 is not changed). ) It may be configured. Further, detection switches are provided at the entrance and exit of the first guide passage 112, the second guide passage 113, the third guide passage 114, and the fourth guide passage 115 (the outlet detection switch on the upstream side and the entrance detection switch on the downstream side). Is common, the entrance of the first guide passage 112 is an approach detection switch, the exit of the fourth guide passage 115 is an discharge detection switch, and a counter for counting the remaining balls of each guide passage is provided), and a guide in which a game ball exists. It may be configured so that only the passage light emitting means of the passage emits light.

In the above embodiment, the right-handed game ball is almost always configured to enter the right-handed winning unit 37, but there are cases where the right-handed game ball does not enter, that is, the right-handed game ball wins the right-handed prize. It may be configured so that the ball can enter the out port 36 without passing through the inside of the unit 37. When adopting this configuration and changing the mode of the decorative panel 401 based on the detection of the approach detection switch, it is necessary to create an opportunity for the player to notice that the game ball has entered the back side of the decorative panel 401. Can be done.

In addition, when the number of game balls given to the player reaches a predetermined predetermined number and the specific payout number is displayed in the continuous Chan state, the surface emitting light 188 is configured to blink in red. Then, the surface emission lighting 188 flashes in yellow triggered by the detection of the first variable ball entry switch 223a and the second variable ball entry count switch 223b of the right-handed winning unit 37, and the detection of the second start winning switch 224b is detected. The surface emission illumination 188 may be configured to blink in white as a trigger, and the surface emission illumination 188 may be configured to sequentially change the emission color when the special ball entry detection switch 226a is detected. Alternatively, in each round in the jackpot state, blue light is emitted until the number of game balls entered into the variable winning device, which is the upper limit of the round, reaches 3 remaining, green light is emitted until the remaining 1 ball, and the remaining 1 ball. May be configured to emit yellow light, and the remaining 0 balls emit red light and then emit white light at the transition of the interval period.

(1-p; Passage detection) A passage detection switch is provided as a passage detection means for detecting a game ball moving in the passage of the right-handed winning unit 37, which is a game area behind the decorative panel 401 (the above-mentioned approach detection switch). Including). For example, the above-mentioned approach detection switch and the discharge detection switch for detecting the game ball discharged from the right-handed winning unit 37 (fourth guide passage 115) are provided, and the addition is added and discharged based on the detection of the approach detection switch. Detection switch, second variable entry count switch 223b (instead of the second variable entry count switch 223b, special entry detection switch 226a and non-special entry detection switch 226b may be used), first variable entry A right-handed winning ball remaining counter that is subtracted based on the detection of the ball switch 223a and the second starting winning switch 224b may be provided. In this case, it is possible to grasp the ball jam behind the decorative panel 401 (right-handed winning unit 37). If the value of the right-handed winning ball remaining counter is other than "0" after the specified time has elapsed from the detection of the approach detection switch, error processing (notification in the pachinko machine 10, output of error information to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, etc.) ) May be performed.

Further, it is also possible to provide a passage notification means that changes the visual mode when the passage detection switch is detected. For example, a light emitting means as a passage notification means may be provided corresponding to the entrance of the right-handed winning unit 37, and the light emitting means may be configured to emit light based on the detection of the approach detection switch described above. A light emitting means as a passage notification means may be provided in the vicinity of the variable shutter 142, and the light emitting means may be made to emit light and a sound effect may be output based on the detection of the second variable incoming ball count switch 223b. .. In addition to providing the above-mentioned approach detection switch and discharge detection switch, the second detection switch as a passage detection means at each entrance of the second guide passage 113, the third guide passage 114, and the fourth guide passage 115. A third detection switch and a fourth detection switch are provided, and a first passage counter that is added by the detection of the approach detection switch and subtracted by the detection of the second detection switch and the second variable ball entry count switch 223b. The second passage counter, which is added by the detection of the second detection switch and subtracted by the detection of the third detection switch and the second start winning switch 224b, and the fourth detection switch, which is added by the detection of the third detection switch, A third passage counter that is subtracted by the detection of the first variable entry switch 223a and a fourth passage counter that is added by the detection of the fourth detection switch and subtracted by the detection of the discharge detection switch are provided. It may be configured so that it is possible to grasp where in the guide passage 112, the second guide passage 113, the third guide passage 114, and the fourth guide passage 115 where the ball is jammed. Further, the first residual light emitting means that is turned off when the values of the first passage counter, the second passage counter, the third passage counter, and the fourth passage counter are "0" and is turned on when the values are other than "0". , A second residual light emitting means, a third residual light emitting means, and a fourth residual light emitting means may be provided.

By adopting the above configuration, it is possible to obtain information on whether or not the game ball has passed a predetermined position behind the decorative panel 401 in an easy-to-understand manner. The passage detecting means is provided in a region where only the game ball that enters the predetermined ball entry means passes, and when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means (enters the predetermined ball entry means). When the ball entry detecting means for detecting the ball is detected), the visual mode of the passing notification means may be the reference visual mode. Further, the configuration of the passage notification means is not particularly limited. For example, a movable accessory is adopted as the passage notification means, and the movable accessory is displaced (the rotating body rotates according to the detection) or is visually recognized. It may be configured to notify the passage of a game ball or the like by changing the mode (changing to red, blue, or white by changing the posture).

When a displacement means for additional decoration is provided in front of the decorative means, the passage of the game ball used in the right-handed winning unit 37 is grasped, and the displacement means is the right-handed winning unit based on the information. The 37 may be configured to be displaced to a position that does not interfere with the visibility of the moving game ball. That is, when the displacement means is provided corresponding to the decorative means, there is a concern that the visual recognition of the game ball may be hindered depending on the arrangement of the displacement means. In this respect, based on the information of the game ball passage, the displacement means can be displaced so as not to cover the front of the game ball, and while the displacement means is provided in the decorative means, the visibility of the game ball is reduced by the displacement means. Can be prevented. In the above embodiment, since the passage to which the game ball is guided is switched in the game state (switched depending on the number of jackpot rounds, intervals, etc.), the function of grasping the game state corresponds to the passage grasping means. For example, it is also possible to use the passage detecting means for detecting the game ball moving in the area covered in front by the decorative means as the passage grasping means.

(1-q; Approach detection) In the above embodiment, an approach detection switch is provided as an approach detection means for detecting an object approaching from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (glass unit 137 of the front frame 14) to the decorative panel 401. , The mode of the decorative panel 401 may be changed and configured based on the detection of the approach detection switch. For example, when the light emitting means (surface emitting lighting 188 or the like) provided corresponding to the decorative panel 401 emits light for a specified time, the player brings his / her face closer or holds his / her hand over the decorative panel 401 or the decorative panel. In a situation where it is considered that the area on the back side of the decoration panel 401 is to be visually recognized in more detail, the decoration panel 401 and the area on the back side of the decoration panel 401 can be brightened for easy viewing. Here, the change of the mode of the decorative panel 401 (surface light emitting means 188, etc.) means that the normal lighting mode is changed to a specific lighting mode (color change / blinking from colorless / white to yellow, red, etc.), and the light is turned off. And so on. Further, the change in the mode of the predetermined effect means (accessory or display device) provided corresponding to the decorative panel 401 may be changed in the mode of the decorative panel 401.

Further, when the aspect of the surface-emitting lighting 188 or the like is changed based on the detection of the approach detection switch, the aspect of the surface-emitting lighting 188 or the like changes after a lapse of a predetermined time after the proximity detection switch is no longer detected. It may be changed to the original aspect. Furthermore, by detecting the approach detection switch before the specified time elapses after the proximity detection switch is no longer detected, the specified time is reset and it is monitored that the approach detection switch is not detected. You may do it. In addition, when the effect of giving a predetermined teaching or suggestion is performed by changing the aspect of the decorative panel 401, the aspect of the decorative panel 401 (surface emitting illumination 188 or the like) is changed based on the detection of the approach detection switch. Even in the state of being damaged, the mode change may be terminated and the effect may be performed. Further, in the effect, an operation effect capable of advancing the effect based on the detection of the approach detection switch may be configured to be executable.

It should be noted that input related to a predetermined effect may be performed based on the detection of the approach detection switch provided corresponding to the decorative panel 401. That is, the decorative panel 401 is decorated with a specific aspect. For example, if the specific aspect is a motif of the pachinko machine 10, the player can touch the motif of the pachinko machine 10 to attach to the pachinko machine 10. By using the detection of the approach detection switch in the staging, it is possible to increase the chances that the player sees and touches a specific mode while effectively using the approach detection switch. Further, for example, the decorative panel 401 is arranged at the lower center of the game area, and the characters "left" and "right" are displayed on the front side thereof, and a detection switch for detecting the approach of the object to the characters is provided. It may be that. In this case, the effect of the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like can be advanced according to the detection of the detection switch. The decorative panel 401 can be arranged as close as possible to the player without being touched by the player in the rear of the glass unit 137 and in front of the game area, and is easy to use in a configuration for showing predetermined information to the player. .. In addition, the approach detection means for detecting the approach to the decorative panel 401 is not limited to the approach detection switch capable of detecting an object at a position away from the decorative panel 401, but to the decorative panel 401 or a portion in the vicinity thereof. It may be one that can detect the contact of the object, or it may be a combination of the approach detection switch and the contact detection switch.

Further, depending on the relative position with respect to the decorative panel 401, the decorative panel 401 or a member provided in a peripheral portion thereof (for example, the back side) may be configured to perform different reactions. For example, the closer the separate member is to the decorative panel 401, the brighter the light emitting means provided behind the decorative panel 401 may be, and a plurality of types of symbols are described as a specific mode of the decorative panel 401. , A sensor and a light emitting means are provided corresponding to each symbol, and when the sensor detects the proximity to the predetermined symbol in the effect of touching the predetermined symbol, the light emitting means corresponding to each emits light. You may exercise. It should be noted that the visual aspect of the decorative panel 401 can be changed by overlapping the separate member in the front-rear direction with respect to the decorative panel 401.

Further, for example, an approach detecting means capable of detecting the approach of the player's hand to a plurality of positions is provided corresponding to the area in front of the decorative symbol display device 42, and the front position of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the front position of the decorative symbol display device 42. A decorative panel 401 that can be displaced (like a shutter) is provided at a retracted position that retracts from the front position, and a predetermined character is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the player uses the decorative panel 401 as the front position. It is possible to execute a game such as having the player guess the position of the predetermined character (touching the area where the predetermined character is thought to be displayed and teaching the success or failure based on the detection of the approach detection means). It may be configured in. Further, for example, as one pattern of the game, the decorative symbol display device 42 starts from a state in which the predetermined character is not displayed at all, and it is possible to visually recognize whether or not the predetermined character is hidden in the area touched by the player. A configuration that changes the mode may be adopted. In addition, for example, when the relative positional relationship between the first transmissive portion 406 and the second transmissive portion 408 of the decorative panel 401 is suitable for a player who wants to visually recognize the rear of the decorative panel 401 (the entire first transmissive portion 406 and the first). 2 There may be cases where the two transparent portions 408 overlap in the front-rear direction) and cases where it is not suitable (the first transparent portion 406 and the second decorative portion 407 overlap in the front-rear direction) (decorative means). The relative position of a pair of left and right shutters that can be slid in the left and right directions can be changed).

The decorative panel 401 (decorative means) may be foldable (for example, bellows-shaped), or as a configuration (for example, fan-shaped) that can change the state between a state in which a plurality of panels are overlapped and a state in which they are arranged side by side. It may be in the form of a roll (the state can be changed between a rolled state and a pulled state).

(1-r; Correspondence with operation) In the above embodiment, it is possible to derive a reflection mode (reflection display) that reflects the input and selection of the effect button 125, the cross button 126 (input means), and the like behind the decorative panel 401. An information display means as an information means may be provided. For example, by operating the effect button 125 at a predetermined timing of the variable display, a lamp provided in the area covered in front of the decorative panel 401 and instructing that a big hit state occurs may emit light. It may be configured. For example, at the start of the variation display, a lottery is performed on whether or not to execute the back button teaching effect on the sub control device 262, and if the result is won, a timer is set to measure the time until the back button teaching effect is executed. , Set a timer to measure the time until the back button teaching effect is finished when the timer becomes "0", and whether or not the effect button 125 is operated during the period of the back button teaching effect. The information display means (for example, a lamp) behind the decorative panel 401 may be configured to emit light in a predetermined manner when the operation is confirmed by checking each normal process.

In addition, various settings related to the decorative panel 401 can be made based on the player's operation (for example, open "Menu screen"-> "Settings"-> "Decorative panel" to make various settings, and enter the operation of "Enter". By performing the above, the setting may be reflected). For example, a movable figure may be provided behind the decorative panel 401 so that the player can set the operating conditions of the figure. Further, for example, a liquid crystal display device is provided behind the decorative panel 401, and a character selected by the player is displayed on the liquid crystal display device (when a predetermined effect is generated, the effect button 125 or the like is operated, and the character makes various suggestions. ) May be configured. In addition, the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404 of the decorative panel 401 may be used as a transmissive display device, and the specific mode may be changed (to make a moving image or the like, or to make the whole transparent to eliminate the specific mode. Will also be possible). In this case, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the player. Further, when it is possible to displace a predetermined portion of the decorative panel 401 or change the visual mode, the player may be able to set (a part of) these.

When the menu screen as an input screen is opened in the decorative symbol display device 42 as an input display means, the screen of the information display device arranged behind the decorative panel 401 is set as a common standby screen, and the decorative symbol display device is used. When the menu screen of 42 is closed, a reflection display reflecting the player's setting may be derived on the screen of the information display device. In this case, the reflection display of the information display device can be made invisible relatively easily by opening the menu screen when the person is away from the seat, and the reflection display can be displayed relatively easily when the person is seated.

It should be noted that, based on a predetermined operation of the player, it may be configured so that the member provided behind the decorative panel 401 cannot be visually recognized via the decorative panel 401. For example, a decorative panel equipped with a transmissive display device is provided in front of the space where the effect using the pseudo sphere is performed, and the decorative panel is in a state where the rear area cannot be visually recognized, and the effect using the pseudo sphere is performed. It may be possible to select to enjoy only by voice (or to enjoy by the display effect of the decorative pattern display device 42). In this case, the information means provided behind the decorative panel 401 can be intentionally invisible (it is possible to avoid unintentional visual recognition), and the effect can be produced corresponding to the information means. When it is performed, it becomes possible to further enjoy the effect. Further, when the player may stop the game, such as when the return switch 122 or the ball removal button 123 is operated, the setting of the decorative panel 401 may be returned to the standard one.

Further, for example, a plurality of decorative panels 401 having openings in a range including the central portion are arranged in the front-rear direction (for example, the outer diameter of the decorative panel 401 is wider toward the rear, and the openings are all the same diameter. Alternatively, each decorative panel 401 is configured to be relatively displaceable with respect to each other (smaller toward the rear), and a specific mode of the plurality of decorative panels 401 (further, a plurality of decorative panels 401) is determined by the relative positions of the plurality of decorative panels 401. The members around and behind the (decorative pattern display device 42, etc.) are integrated so that they can be seen well or not at all, and the player can operate the plurality of decorative panels 401. It may be configured to perform an effect such that the operation is stopped.

(1-s; Aspect of the decorative panel and interlocking with the game ball) In the above embodiment, the aspect of the decorative panel 401 and the game ball moving the right-handed winning unit 37 may be configured to be interlocked with each other. .. For example, an interlocking accessory that is displaced in conjunction with a game ball that moves at a predetermined position of the guide passages 112, 113, 114, 115 of the right-handed winning unit 37 may be provided. For example, the interlocking accessory is configured to be displaceable by coming into contact with a game ball moving in the guide passage, and by being displaced by contact with the game ball, the downstream side of the guide passage 112, 113, 114, 115 of the game ball. A contact portion that allows displacement to the surface and a contact portion that is visible from the front side of the decorative panel 401 (for example, the front side of the decorative panel 401 or between the front side sheet 403 and the rear side sheet 404). It may be configured to include an interlocking decorative portion that is mechanically interlocked with the above.

Further, for example, a seesaw structure (interlocking accessory) that basically inclines downward to one side (the center of gravity is located), and a game ball that moves in the second guide passage 113 is the other side (contact portion) of the seesaw structure. A plate-like body that extends vertically and curves back and forth is provided on one side of the seesaw structure so as to be in contact with the upper surface of the plate-like structure, and a picture of a whale of the decorative panel 401 is provided on the front surface of the plate-like body. When one side of the seesaw structure is down, the default round eyes as the interlocking mode part and the interlocking decoration part are visually recognized from the front, and the game ball falls on the seesaw structure. Then, by setting the other side of the seesaw structure to be in a lowered state, the eyes of the heart as the interlocking mode portion and the interlocking decorative portion may be visually recognized from the front instead of the default eyes. The configuration and position of interlocking are not particularly limited, and the configuration may be such that the aspect of the decorative panel 401 and the game ball moving behind the decorative panel 401 are interlocked (for example, the front leg of a whale). A rotating structure like a windmill in a pachinko machine is placed in the right-handed winning unit 37, and the decoration (for example, a flower picture) on the front of the rotating structure is visible from the front. At the same time, when the game ball moving the right-handed winning unit 37 comes into contact with the rotating structure, the rotating structure rotates (for example, the decoration rotates or the interlocking mode portion linked to the rotation of the rotating structure is displaced. It may be configured as such.

In this case, the decorativeness and directing of the decorative panel 401 can be improved by providing the interlocking mode portion. Further, by using a passage that limits the moving direction of the game ball, such as the second guide passage 113 of the right-handed winning unit 37, the behavior of the game ball on the back side of the decorative panel 401 is limited, and the mode of the interlocking mode portion is changed. It can be in the desired mode (as expected).

The "interlocking mode portion" does not have to be configured so that the interlocking mode portion itself operates. For example, the eyes of the whale picture of the decorative panel 401 (around the eyes are the first decorative portion). However, it is configured by providing a round transparent portion (first transparent portion) in the center of the white eye portion, and the round transparent portion corresponds to the interlocking mode portion, and is round even when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the first position. The aspect of the back side of the transparent portion is visible, and the game ball passage (for example, the second guide passage 113) extends behind the round transparent portion, and the game ball (displacement means) is a round transparent portion. When it is located on the back side, the game ball is visually recognized as equivalent to the black eye of the whale through the round transparent part (the eyes are opened), and the game ball is not located on the back side of the round transparent part. In this case, a configuration is adopted in which a picture (for example, a line of "abbreviation"; a second decorative part) attached to a wall portion defining the rear side of the second guide passage 113 is visually recognized. May be good. It is also possible to capture the whale picture including the whale's eyes as a decoration addition part that adds decoration to the aspect of the game ball.

Further, for example, a game ball is configured to be able to pass between the first decorative portion 405 and the second decorative portion 407, and the decorative panel 401 is formed from the mouth of a character (for example, a chicken) as a specific aspect of the decorative panel 401. The game ball is configured to be able to enter inside, and the appearance of the game ball moving inside the decorative panel 401 passing through the character's body and reaching the special entry part 145 can be intermittently visually recognized in the first decoration part 405. (Corresponding to the front of the passage leading to the special ball entry portion 145, the design of both ends of the egg is described in the first decorative portion 405, and when the game ball passes through the portion, both ends of the egg appear to be connected. Things may be arranged intermittently).

Further, the mode change of the interlocking mode portion is not limited to mechanical interlocking, and may be interlocked using an electrical configuration. For example, a detection switch provided on the front side (or between the front side seat 403 and the rear side seat 404) of the decorative panel 401 and detecting a game ball moving in a predetermined position of the guide passages 112, 113, 114, 115. An electric decorative part that is electrically driven based on the detection of (a movable accessory driven by a solenoid or a motor, for example, a movable accessory that imitates a flower blooms when the ball enters the ball entry section behind the decorative panel 401. Alternatively, a transmissive liquid crystal device is provided as a first component instead of the front side sheet 403, and for example, when the ball enters the ball entry section (for example, the special entry section 145) behind the decorative panel 401. , Fireworks are displayed on the peripheral portion by a transmissive liquid crystal device), and the interlocking mode portion may be configured. In this case, it is easy to understand that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the right-handed winning unit 37 whose front is covered with the decorative panel 401 (such as the game ball entering the special entry section 145), and the game is lively. Can be told to others.

Further, the interlocking continuation portion is provided so that the visual recognition mode can be changed in conjunction with the change in the visual recognition mode of the interlocking mode portion, and the interlocking continuation portion is provided closer to the central portion of the game area than the interlocking mode portion. May be. For example, the first interlocking mode unit (for example, mechanically or electrically interlocking with the entered game ball) corresponding to the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b of the right-handed winning unit 37. A movable accessory (such as a movable object that is displaced) is provided, and a second interlocking mode portion (for example, a movable object that is mechanically or electrically interlocked with the entered game ball) is provided in correspondence with the second start winning device 33b. A third interlocking mode portion (for example, a movable accessory that is mechanically or electrically interlocked with the entered game ball and is displaced) is provided corresponding to the special entry portion 145. A first light emitting means extending or scattered between the first interlocking mode portion and the decorative symbol display device 42 is provided behind the transparent game board 30, and the second interlocking mode portion and the decorative symbol display device are provided. A second light emitting means extending or scattered between the 42 and the second light emitting means is provided, and a third light emitting means extending or scattered between the third interlocking mode portion and the decorative symbol display device 42 is provided, and the first variable When there is a ball entering the winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b, the mode of the first interlocking mode portion changes, and in the case of continuous chan, the first light emitting means emits light and the number of payouts. The display is configured to count up, and when there is a ball entering the second start winning device 33b, the mode of the second interlocking mode portion changes, and in the case of normal game (in the case of chance up). (Only possible), the second light emitting means emits light and the hold icon is additionally displayed, and when there is a ball entering the special ball entering part, the third interlocking mode part changes its mode and the third light emitting means changes. It may be configured to emit light to perform a V winning effect. In this case, the action and effect of making it easy to understand the event on the back side of the decorative panel 401 and transmitting it to the player is further achieved.

Further, in the second guide passage 113 of the right-handed winning unit 37, a delay means (delayed protrusion, etc. of the above embodiment) for delaying the moving speed of the game ball corresponding to the interlocking mode portion (behind the eyes of the whale). ) May be provided. In this case, since it is possible to prevent the speed of the game ball passing through the second guide passage 113 from becoming too high when interlocking with the interlocking mode portion and to adjust the position of the game ball, the interlocking mode can be adjusted. It is possible to more preferably change the aspect of the portion.

(1-t; additional aspect portion of the second transmissive portion) In the second transmissive portion 408, an additional aspect portion that adds information to the visible mode behind the decorative panel 401 when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the second position is provided. It may be provided. For example, the letter "V" may be added as an additional mode portion corresponding to the front position of the special ball entry portion 145 in the second transmission portion 408, and the peripheral portion thereof may be colored in transparent yellow. .. Further, for example, characters such as "start" may be added corresponding to the front position of the second start winning device 33b. In addition, for example, the second component portion including the second decorative portion 407 is composed of a panel-shaped rear surface side panel instead of the rear surface side sheet 404, and the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b. Corresponding to the entrance of the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b, the letters "open" are added so that the rear panel can be seen as emitting light when light is incident from the side. Light may be incident on the rear side panel in front of the open state from the side.

By configuring as these, it assists the player's understanding of the visual mode when the decorative means (decorative panel 401) is visually recognized from the second position (teach the position of the winning device to be visually recognized), and is decorative. It is possible to improve the performance. For example, when the game ball is used as a displacement means, a region advantageous as a direction in which the game ball moves is indicated by an additional mode portion (changing the translucent color, guiding with an arrow or a character, etc.), thereby displaying the decorative panel 401. It is possible to relatively easily (quickly) recognize what happens and can occur in the rear region of the decorative panel 401, which is difficult to see. Further, for example, a ball entry means (special entry section 145, first variable winning device 32a, second variable winning device 32b, etc.) to which a privilege is given by entering a game ball in the rear region of the decorative panel 401 is provided. If it is provided, by providing an additional aspect portion in the peripheral portion of the ball entry means, it is possible to help the understanding that it is desirable to allow the game ball to enter the ball entry means, or by decoration around the ball entry means. It is possible to raise the feelings of the player when the game ball enters the ball entry means.

It should be noted that an additional aspect portion may be provided to add information at a peripheral portion of the additional aspect portion or a position visually recognized via the additional aspect portion when the decorative panel 401 is visually recognized from the second position. For example, an opaque blue arrow may be attached from the second variable shutter 142 to the special entry portion 145 on the rear surface side of the rear plate portion 182 of the rear part 181 of the right-handed winning unit 37. In this case, it is possible to further enhance the visual aspect of the peripheral portion of the additional aspect portion without hindering the visual recognition of the game ball moving the right-handed winning unit 37. Examples of the additional aspect portion include light emitting means, printing of characters and figures, resin molded products, and the like. In addition, when the additional aspect portion is composed of a light guide plate and the target member is used, light is incident on the corresponding portion of the light guide plate from the side, and the attached characters and the like emit light. It may be configured to be visible.

(1-u; Right-handed winning unit) In the above embodiment, the right-handed winning unit 37 whose front is covered with the decorative panel 401 is made of a transparent material, but the rear part 181 is made of an opaque material. You may do it. In addition, the winning device made of a transparent material is decorated with a non-transparent decoration (a part of the prize device is left transparent so that the back side can be seen from the player's side). It may be configured. For example, a print sticker constituting the second decorative portion 407 may be attached to the front surface of the front plate portion 185. Further, even if it is not transparent, a material having transparency such that a plurality of openings are formed (for example, a slit is formed along the movement path of the game ball, which is configured in a grid pattern) is used. A winning device or the like (for example, a front plate portion 185 of the front part 184 of the right-handed winning unit 37, a rear plate portion 182 of the rear part 181) may be configured. Further, although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, among the right-handed winning units 37 whose front (player side) is covered by the decorative panel 401, a portion corresponding to various winning devices (for example, a ball entry portion (shutter)). The rear part 181 and the like may be colored, have low transparency, or be opaque. In this case, it is possible to easily visually recognize the state of the game ball entering the various winning devices.

[Additional Notes]
The technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiments are described below.

A. As a kind of gaming machine, for example, there is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters the starting ball entry means provided on the game board, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, the area on the front side of the gaming machine is limited, and there is a demand for more efficient decoration on the front side of the gaming machine, particularly on a portion that is easily visible to the player.

More specifically, in recent pachinko machines, the display device installed in the center of the game area has become larger, and a prize unit that combines a plurality of prize devices capable of entering a game ball has been provided. Along with this, while the gaming area is expanded, the range of the front surface of the pachinko machine on the outer side of the gaming area is narrowed. For this reason, it is difficult to secure a cohesive area (relatively large area) where decoration can be performed on the front side of the pachinko machine. It is also conceivable to decorate the game board or make the game board transparent and install decorative members behind it, but a game ball that moves in the game area, a winning device installed in the game area, etc. Visibility is easily obstructed behind the pachinko machine (a large range cannot be secured), and the position is relatively far from the player located in front of the pachinko machine, so that the visibility is reduced (game area). It is more difficult to see if the light is reflected on the decoration provided in the back of the slingshot).

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently decorating.

Means A-1. In a gaming machine provided with a specific aspect of decorative means
The decorative means includes a first component and a second component.
The first component portion includes a first decorative part to which the first decoration is applied, and a first transmissive part that makes the other side visible through the first component part.
The second component comprises a second decoration to which the second decoration is applied.
When the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position with respect to the decorative means in front of the gaming machine, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion visually recognized via the first transmissive portion are adjacent to each other. The specific aspect is visually recognized.
When the decorative means is visually recognized from a second position different from the first position with respect to the decorative means in front of the gaming machine, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are separated from each other, and the first decorative portion is separated from each other. A gaming machine characterized in that an information means for transmitting predetermined information to a player is visibly configured between one decoration unit and the second decoration unit.

According to the means A-1, the player can visually recognize the decorative means from the first position to visually recognize the specific mode in which the mode of the first decorative portion and the mode of the second decorative portion are combined. can. On the other hand, by visually recognizing the decorative means from the second position, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are separated from each other, and the information means is visually recognized between the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion. Can be done. That is, for example, in a state where the player does not confirm the information means, by visually recognizing the decorative means from the first position, the player can proceed with the game while keeping a specific aspect of the decorative means in the field of view. When confirming the means, the information means can be visually recognized from the second position via the decorative means, and the information of the information means can be surely obtained. As a result, when the player visually recognizes from the second position, the decorative means can visually recognize the area (information means) covered by the decorative means on the player side (front) through the decorative means. Therefore, it is possible to install it in a relatively wide range in a region that is relatively easy to attract attention. Therefore, it is possible to secure the decorated decorative area as wide as possible while ensuring the visibility of the information means without reducing the game area (without reducing the installation location of the right-handed winning unit 37). ..

As a result, on the front side of the gaming machine, the place where the information means is installed and the place where the decoration is desirable can be shared between the information means and the decoration means, and the playability using the information means and the like can be shared. It is possible to efficiently decorate while fully demonstrating. Further, as compared with the case where the decoration is performed behind the information means, the decoration can be performed closer to the player, which is easier to see and gives a stronger impression. In addition, in order to make the other side visible through the decorative means, the design is as good as the case where the whole or a part of the specific embodiment is thinned (semi-transparent or transparent). Can be avoided.

The information means may be any information as long as information such as a predetermined state, a predetermined state occurring, or a predetermined state is likely to occur can be transmitted to the player, for example, a predetermined state. Examples thereof include a display means for displaying information, a state changing means for changing the state between the first state and the second state, and a moving means having different results depending on the moving destination. "When the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are adjacent to each other" means that a slight gap is formed (a predetermined first decorative portion in terms of configuration). It is difficult to prevent the gap between the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion from being visually recognized even if any part of the decorative means is visually recognized from the position).

Further, the shapes of the first decorative portion and the first transmissive portion are not particularly limited, and for example, the first decorative portion and the first transmissive portion are alternately arranged in a vertical grid pattern (horizontal grid pattern). It may be configured to be arranged, or the first decorative portion is provided with a substantially circular first transmissive portion, and the second constituent portion is provided with a second decorative portion having a larger area than the first transmissive portion. (For example, in the first position, the second decorative portion is visually recognized as a part of the first decorative portion, and in the second position, the third decorative portion is formed around the second decorative portion. The decorative portion becomes visible, and the second decorative portion is visually recognized as a part of the third decorative portion).

When the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position, the information means is (temporarily) arranged between the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion, and the information means hides a part of the second decorative portion. A configuration in which the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are visually recognized apart from each other (if the information means is not arranged between the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion, the first decoration is used. The purpose is to include (a configuration in which no gap is formed between the portion and the second decorative portion).

In addition, "the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion visually recognized via the first transmissive portion are adjacent to each other, and the specific aspect is visually recognized" means the first decorative portion and the first. In the direction adjacent to the two decorative portions, a predetermined line of the first decorative portion (outline of the pattern, etc.) and a line of the second decorative portion corresponding to the predetermined line are continuous.

Means A-2. The gaming machine according to means A-1, characterized in that it includes a base portion that holds the first component portion and the second component portion in a separated state.

According to the means A-2, it is possible to provide a three-dimensional and more complicated visual mode (decoration) in the decorative means, and it is possible to improve the design. Further, the first component and the second component can be held in a separated state, and the player can take his / her own posture without relative displacement of the first component and the second component. Can be changed to visually recognize a specific aspect in the decorative means, or to visually recognize the information means behind the decorative means. In particular, since both the first component and the second component are held (attached) to the base, relative positional deviation between the first component and the second component is prevented. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the space between the first component and the second component is narrowed or separated, making it difficult to visually recognize the specific mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent a relative positional deviation between the first decorative portion (first transparent portion) and the second decorative portion, and it is possible to more preferably visually recognize the specific mode of the decorative means. Further, since the base portion, the first constituent portion, and the second constituent portion are unitized, the base portion, the first constituent portion, and the second constituent portion can be attached and detached at one time, and the decorative means can be used. It is possible to improve the workability of putting on and taking off. In addition, the first component and the second component can be reinforced, and foreign matter can be prevented or suppressed from entering between the first component and the second component.

The shape and configuration of the base portion are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the base portion may be formed as a separate body from the first constituent portion and the second constituent portion and then connected to the base portion, or may be integrally formed with the first constituent portion and the second constituent portion. It may be configured to be. Further, the base portion does not have to be a transparent or translucent plate shape, and may be formed in a perforated shape such as a frame shape (annular) or a grid shape, or may have an uneven shape. It may be opaque or it may be opaque. Further, it may be set that "a mark of the mounting position of the first component portion with respect to the base portion and a mark of the mounting position of the second component portion with respect to the base portion are provided". As a mark, for example, a predetermined position of the contour of the base portion and the first component portion, which is suggested by planar visual information such as a print, coincides with each other, or the base portion is provided with unevenness in the first configuration. When the part is installed, the unevenness may be matched.

Means A-3. The gaming machine according to means A-2, wherein the decorative means is connected to the attached portion.

According to the means A-3, the decorative means is attached to the attached portion (between a plurality of models) as compared with the configuration in which the first component and the second component are attached to the attached portion. It is possible to standardize, simplify, and stabilize the mounting state.

Means A-4. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-3, wherein the first decorative portion and the first transmissive portion are integrally provided.

According to the means A-4, a specific mode in which the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are combined is preferable because the first decorative portion and the first transparent portion are displaced from each other. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the image cannot be visually recognized. In addition, "integral" is intended to be a configuration in which relative displacement is not possible.

Means A-5. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-4, wherein at least one of the first component and the second component is in the form of a film.

According to the means A-5, the decorative means can be made as thin as possible, the degree of freedom of the installation place can be improved, and the installation space of other game members can be suppressed from being reduced. It should be noted that the design may be printed on a transparent resin mount to provide a sticker-like shape, or the outer peripheral portion of the film-like display (which can be curved or bent) may be sandwiched and fixed. good. Further, for example, the first component may be a seal-shaped display, the second component may be a film-shaped display, and the seal-shaped third component may be provided behind the second component.

Means A-6. The second component includes a second transmission unit that makes the other side visible through the second component.
A means A The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to A-5.

According to the means A-6, by providing the second transmission portion, the player can suitably visually recognize the information means through the decorative means. That is, even if the decorative means is installed, the area behind the decorative means (information means) can be visually recognized, so that the place where the decorative means is installed can be set more freely. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the installation location of the decorative means, the specific mode, the design of the information means, and the like are limited. Further, as compared with the case where the decoration is performed behind the information means, the decoration can be performed closer to the player, and a stronger impression can be given.

In addition, it may be said that "the second decorative portion and the second transmissive portion are integrally formed". In this case, it is possible to prevent the position shift between the second decorative portion and the second transmissive portion, and by extension, the specific mode of the decorative means and the visual mode via the first transmissive portion and the second transmissive portion. It can be more preferably visually recognized.

Means A-7. The decorative means is provided at a position shifted laterally from the central portion in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine.
The first transparent portion adjacent to the predetermined first decorative portion is provided so as to be visually recognized adjacent to the predetermined first decorative portion when visually recognized from the first position. On the other hand, the gaming machine according to means A-6, which is provided at the same position in the lateral width direction of the gaming machine.

A player who plays a gaming machine basically advances the game in such a way that his / her face faces the central part in the width direction of the gaming machine. According to the means A-7, when the decorative means arranged laterally from the central portion in the width direction of the gaming machine is visually recognized diagonally, the information means is preferably used via the first transmissive portion and the second transmissive portion. It is designed to be visible. Therefore, by shifting only the line of sight to the decorative means while proceeding with the game, the information means can be reliably visually recognized. Therefore, the player can grasp the whole game situation without moving his face significantly, and can improve convenience and the like.

Means A-8. The decorative means is provided at a position shifted laterally from the central portion in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine.
The first transparent portion adjacent to the predetermined first decorative portion is provided so as to be visually recognized adjacent to the predetermined first decorative portion when visually recognized from the first position. On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the means A-7, wherein the gaming machine is arranged so as to be offset to the central portion side in the width direction of the gaming machine.

A player who plays a gaming machine basically advances the game in such a way that his / her face faces the center of the gaming machine in the width direction. According to the means A-8, when the decorative means arranged laterally from the central portion in the width direction of the gaming machine is visually recognized diagonally, the second decorative portion is preferably visually recognized via the first transmission portion. It has become like. Therefore, by shifting only the line of sight to the decorative means while advancing the game, it is possible to more preferably visually recognize the specific mode of the decorative means (decoration from the state in which the player is normally advancing the game). The viewpoint when visually recognizing the means can be the first position). In addition, when the information means is desired to be visually recognized, the information means is provided by performing an action normally performed when visually recognizing the article in more detail, such as looking into the decorative means and bringing the face closer to the front of the decorative means. It can be seen with certainty.

Means A-9. A game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided,
A game ball that moves in the game area can be entered, and is provided with a ball entry means to which a predetermined privilege is given based on the entry of the game ball.
The decorative means is provided corresponding to a range including the game area on the upstream side of the predetermined ball entry means.
When the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position, the gaming ball as the information means for moving the gaming area is visually recognizable between the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-8.

According to the means A-9, in the gaming area provided at a position easily visible to the player, the movement of the gaming ball is not hindered, and the visibility of the gaming ball from the front of the gaming machine is ensured. , The decoration by the decorative means can be preferably performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the decorativeness without impairing the playability. Further, for example, the decoration can be performed closer to the player than the decoration on the front surface (or the rear surface side of the transparent game board) of the game board that defines the rear part of the game area, and a stronger impression can be given. ..

Conventionally, a cel image is attached to the front surface of the game board that defines the rear part of the game area, but a ball entry unit provided with a ball entry means and a guide passage to the ball entry means is attached to the game board. In addition to being unable to decorate the game board at the site where the delimitation was performed, it was not possible to sufficiently decorate the ball entry unit in order to visually recognize the behavior of the game ball. Further, the decoration on the front surface of the game board may be worn due to contact with the game ball, and the design may be deteriorated. In this regard, by providing a decorative means in front of the ball entry unit, such concerns can be dispelled, and further, the position closer to the player in the front-rear direction and in front of the player's line of sight. The decorativeness can be improved at a close position.

It should be noted that the game ball moving in the game area on the upstream side of the predetermined ball entry means is determined by its behavior (movement route, arrival timing when the predetermined ball entry means is open / closed, etc.). It is an information means for transmitting information to the player whether or not it is easy to enter the ball or whether or not it is easy to enter the ball (and by extension, whether or not a privilege is given).

It should be noted that "the ball-entry means may be provided at a position avoiding the decorative means". In this case, the player who wants to confirm whether or not the game ball has entered the target ball entry means can continue to visually recognize the target entry means without obstructing the view by the decorative means. It is possible to reliably confirm the game ball that enters the target ball entry means.

It should be noted that the information means visually recognized via the decorative means is not limited to the configuration limited to the game ball, and in addition to the game ball, the decorative means and the teaching means (display means, movable accessory, immovable). It may be configured so that the accessory, the printed matter, etc.) can be visually recognized. Further, the decorative means is not limited to a configuration in which the entire decorative means is provided in the game area, but includes a configuration in which at least a part of the decorative means is provided in the game area. In addition, "the decorative means is provided in the game area" means that the game ball cannot pass through the area where the decorative means is installed (the space is filled with the decorative means). When it is considered that the area is not a game area, the purpose is to include the provision in a space communicating with the game area.

Means A-10. The gaming machine according to means A-9, which comprises a protective means for preventing the gaming ball from coming into contact with at least one of the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion.

According to the means A-10, it is possible to prevent the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion from coming into contact with the game ball and causing the visual appearance to be diminished due to wear. Therefore, the visual aspects of both the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are protected, and the preferred visual aspect of the specific aspect can be maintained for as long as possible. It is desirable that the protective means is a material that is not easily scratched and has high transparency, and that it is detachable (configured separately from the game board and the transparent body unit). ..

Means A-11. The second component is arranged behind the first component.
The gaming machine according to means A-9 or A-10, wherein the rear surface of the decorative means is a smooth surface (for example, a flat surface).

According to the means A-11, by making the rear surface of the decorative means (second component) a smooth surface, for example, it is possible to avoid narrowing the front-rear width of the game area as compared with the case of making the uneven surface, or to use the game ball. Protective means are provided to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the second component and preventing damage or the movement direction of the game ball from being significantly changed in the case of a structure that allows contact with the game ball. If this is the case, it is possible to avoid narrowing the front-rear width of the game area by contacting or approaching the protective means as much as possible.

Means A-12. A detection means capable of detecting a game ball moving in a predetermined portion covered in front by the decorative means, and a detection means.
A mode changing means for changing the mode of the decorative means into a normal mode and a changing mode is provided.
The mode changing means is described in any one of means A-9 to A-11, characterized in that the mode of the decorative means can be changed to the changing mode based on the detection of the detecting means. Gaming machine.

According to the means A-12, it is possible to notify the player that the game ball has moved to a predetermined portion behind the decorative means, and for example, it is easy to confirm the game ball moving behind the decorative means. When a predetermined state occurs when the game ball moves to the predetermined portion, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the occurrence of the predetermined state. Further, by using the normal mode, it is possible to easily visually recognize the specific mode composed of the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion. That is, in a state where information related to the progress of the game can be obtained behind the decorative means, it is possible to assist the player's understanding by appropriately changing the decorative means so that the game ball on the decorative means side is not launched. In such a state, the decorative means can be used as a normal mode so as not to interfere with a specific mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the progress of the game smoother while improving the decorativeness.

As the mode changing means, a light emitting means installed behind the decorative means, a decorative irradiating means capable of irradiating the front side of the decorative means, and a movable combination provided so as to be overlapped with a part of the decorative means in the front-rear direction. Things etc. can be mentioned. Further, "the mode changing means may be changed to the normal mode after a lapse of a predetermined time after the detection of the detecting means is stopped".

Means A-13. The decorative means covers at least the front side of the gaming machine at the entrance of the predetermined ball entry means.
The gaming machine according to means A-12, characterized in that it includes a ball entry teaching means as the aspect changing means for teaching that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means.

According to the means A-13, although the predetermined ball entry means can be visually recognized via the decorative means, it is considered that the visibility is lower than that in the case where the decorative means is not provided. Therefore, it is difficult to confirm the information means (game ball) when the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position. In this regard, by providing the ball entry teaching means, it is possible to more than compensate for the decrease in visibility in terms of confirming the condition of ball entry into the predetermined ball entry means, and the player can do so. You can concentrate on the game without increasing your concern about the decorative means.

As the ball entry teaching means, a means for generating a sound effect, a means for displaying that a privilege corresponding to the ball entry has been given, a ball entry means, or a light emitting means (ball entry) provided adjacent to the ball entry means. It lights up with, and it is easy to confirm which entry means the entry was made). Further, for example, the decorative means may be provided with a displacement means that is displaced by the drive of the drive means, and the displacement means may be configured to be displaced based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means. In addition, when a passage through which the game ball can pass is formed behind the decorative means, a means for teaching that the game ball has entered the rear of the decorative means (the advantageous ball has entered the passage) ( A detection switch, a display device, etc.) may be provided.

Means A-14. It is provided with a substantially plate-shaped game board and a transparent body unit provided in front of the game board at a predetermined distance from the front surface of the game board.
The game area is formed between the game board and the transparent body unit.
The decorative means is configured as a separate body from the transparent body unit.
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-9 to A-13, wherein an installation recess is provided on the front surface side of the gaming board at a position corresponding to the decorative means.

According to the means A-14, it is possible to prevent the front-rear width of the game area from being shortened by installing the decorative means in the game area. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the movement of the game ball is hindered by providing the decorative means.

Means A-15. It is provided with a substantially plate-shaped game board and a transparent body unit provided in front of the game board at a predetermined distance from the front surface of the game board.
The game area is formed between the transparent unit and the game board.
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-9 to A-14, wherein the decorative means is provided in the transparent body unit.

According to the means A-15, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the front-back width of the game area is reduced by the decorative means.

Means A-16. The gaming machine according to means A-15, wherein the transparent body unit includes a main body portion and the decorative means detachably provided with respect to the main body portion.

According to the means A-16, maintainability, reusability and the like can be improved.

Means A-17. The main body and the decorative means each include a pair of front and rear transparent bodies and a holding means for holding the pair of transparent bodies.
In the decorative means, the first decorative portion is provided on the rear surface of the front transparent body which is the transparent body on the front side, and the second decoration is provided on the front surface of the rear transparent body which is the transparent body on the rear side. The gaming machine according to means A-16.

According to the means A-17, the action effect of not narrowing the front-back width of the gaming area is more reliably achieved, the contact between the gaming ball moving in the gaming area and the second component, and the front surface of the gaming machine. It is possible to avoid contact between an object (player or the like) that touches the side and the first component. Further, the holding means prevents the front transparent body and the rear transparent body from being displaced from each other, so that the specific mode can be more preferably visually recognized.

Means A-18. Any of the means A-9 to A-17, wherein the game area is provided with a guide passage for guiding the moving direction of the game ball corresponding to the position where the front is covered by the decorative means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means A-18, the behavior of the game ball on the back side of the decorative means is restricted, the occurrence of ball clogging, etc. is suppressed, and the appearance of the game ball through the decorative means is improved (of the game ball). A first transmissive portion and a second transmissive portion may be preferably arranged corresponding to the passage).

Means A-19. The gaming machine according to means A-18, wherein the decorative means is composed of means constituting the guide passage.

According to the means A-19, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the front-back width of the game area is reduced by the decorative means.

Means A-20. The gaming machine according to means A-18 or A-19, wherein the decorative means includes an interlocking mode portion whose visual mode is changed by a gaming ball passing through the guide passage.

According to the means A-20, the decorativeness of the decorative means can be improved by providing the interlocking mode portion. In particular, by providing the guide passage, the behavior of the game ball on the back side of the decorative means can be restricted, and the mode of the interlocking mode portion can be a desired mode.

The "interlocking mode portion" is, for example, a portion that enables the gaming ball passing behind the decorative means to be visually recognized even when the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position, and the gaming ball is the interlocking mode portion. When it is located on the back side of the game ball, a part of the game ball is visually recognized via the interlocking mode portion, and when the game ball is not located on the back side of the interlocking mode portion, a member located on the back side of the decorative means (guidance). A configuration may be adopted in which a member defining the rear side of the passage, decorations made on the member, etc. can be visually recognized, or an interlocking accessory (interlocking) that is displaced in conjunction with a game ball moving in the guide passage. The accessory is configured to be displaceable in contact with the game ball moving in the guide passage, and is decorated with a contact portion that allows the game ball to be displaced to the downstream side of the guide passage by being in contact with the game ball and being displaced. It may be configured by the front side of the means (or provided on the front side (or between the first component and the second component) and provided with an interlocking decorative part that is mechanically interlocked with the contact part). An electric decorative unit provided on the front side of the means (or between the first component and the second component) and electrically driven based on the detection of the detection means for detecting the game ball moving in the guide passage. (A movable accessory driven by a solenoid or a motor, for example, a movable accessory that imitates a flower may bloom when the ball enters the ball entry portion behind the decorative means, or a transmissive liquid crystal device, for example, a decorative means. It may be configured by (a fireworks is displayed in the peripheral part when the ball enters the rear part of the ball). In this case, it is easy to understand that a predetermined condition is satisfied in the area covered in front by the decorative means (such as that the game ball has entered the predetermined entry means), and it is possible to excite and inform the player. can.

Further, "the interlocking continuation unit is provided so that the visual recognition mode can be changed in conjunction with the change in the visual recognition mode of the interlocking mode portion, and the interlocking continuation portion is closer to the central portion of the game area than the interlocking mode portion. It may be "provided". In this case, the action and effect of making it easy to understand the events on the back side of the decorative means and transmitting them to the player are further achieved.

Means A-21. The game according to any one of means A-18 to A-20, wherein the guide passage is provided with a delay means for delaying the moving speed of the game ball corresponding to the interlocking mode portion. Machine.

According to the means A-21, it is possible to prevent the speed of the game ball passing through the guide passage from becoming too high when interlocking with the interlocking mode portion, and it is possible to adjust the position of the game ball. It is possible to more preferably change the mode of the interlocking mode portion.

In a configuration in which a game ball is configured to pass between the first component and the second component (the game area is provided), for example, the eyes of the character in the first component. Is the first transmissive portion, and is drawn with the character's eyes closed in the second decorative portion visually recognized through the first transmissive portion, and the guide passage corresponding to the character's eyes is played. When the sphere passes, the character's eyes may be opened. Further, for example, the interlocking mode portion includes a wind vehicle body arranged in front of and behind the decorative means and a connecting shaft connecting the pair of wind vehicle bodies, and the game ball comes into contact with the wind vehicle body on the rear side to interlock. The structure may be such that the portion (wind body on the front side) rotates.

Means A-22. The information means is composed of displacement means (game balls) that can displace the game area.
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-9 to A-21, wherein the width of the first decorative portion is narrower than the width of the displacement means in the displacement direction of the displacement means.

According to the means A-22, the whole of the displacement means can be configured not to be hidden by the first decorative portion while the displacement means is displaced. Therefore, if the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position, the effect of being able to follow the displacement of the displacement means with the eyes is more reliably achieved.

The second component portion includes a second transmissive portion having higher transparency than the second decorative portion, and the width of the second decorative portion is the width of the displacement means in the displacement direction of the displacement means. May be narrower than. In this case, when the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position, the displacement operation of the displacement means whose front is covered by the decorative means can be continuously visually observed while avoiding a state in which the entire displacement means is blindfolded. Will be.

Means A-23. The decorative means is any one of means A-1 to A-22, characterized in that the decorative means includes a transparent or translucent spacer arranged between the first component and the second component. The gaming machine described in.

According to the means A-23, it is possible to prevent or suppress foreign matter from entering between the first component and the second component. In addition, it is possible to confirm whether or not the distance between the first component and the second component is appropriate.

Means A-24. The decorative means is provided with a displacement means capable of displacing the area covered in the front.
The displacement means is configured to be displaceable between an exposed position that is visible or easily visible from the front of the gaming machine and a covering position that is invisible or difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine. Being done
The portion on the opposite side of the first decorative portion from the first transmissive portion is also the first transmissive portion.
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-23, wherein the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in a direction including a direction in which the decorative portion and the transmission portion are arranged.

According to the means A-24, the position opposite to the second position across the first position is also configured to be the second position. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player has to pinpoint the position in order to take the second position, that is, to visually recognize the rear of the decorative means. Further, even if a part of the displacement means becomes invisible by the decorative means (because of the relative arrangement of the second position) when the displacement means is displaced, a part of the displacement means can be visually recognized immediately after that. It is possible to allow the player to sufficiently visually follow the displacement of the displacement means. The "direction including the direction in which the decorative portion and the transmissive portion are lined up" is intended to include not only the direction parallel to the direction in which the decorative portion and the transmissive portion are lined up, but also the direction in which the decorative portion and the transmissive portion intersect diagonally.

Means A-25. The decorative means is provided with a displacement means capable of displacing the area covered in the front.
The displacement means is configured to be displaceable between an exposed position that is visible or easily visible from the front of the gaming machine and a covering position that is invisible or difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine. Being done
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-23, wherein the transmission portion extends along a displacement direction of the displacement means.

According to the means A-25, at least a part of the displacement means displaced from the covering position to the exposed position can be continuously visually recognized when the displacement means is displaced, so that the player can sufficiently follow the displacement of the displacement means. Can be.

B. As a kind of gaming machine, for example, there is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters the starting ball entry means provided on the game board, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, the area on the front side of the gaming machine is limited, and there is a demand for more efficient decoration on the front side of the gaming machine, particularly on a portion that is easily visible to the player.

Further, it is conceivable to install decorative means for decoration, but if the decorative means is installed, there is a concern that the decorative means and its peripheral portion may be darkened. For this reason, it is difficult to install the decorative means in a position of the gaming machine that is relatively easy for the player to see. Further, when the lighting for brightening the decorative means is provided, the design is deteriorated due to the direct visual recognition of the lighting, or the light of the lighting is directly incident on the eyes of the player. There is concern that it will be a burden on people's eyes.

More specifically, in recent pachinko machines, the display device installed in the center of the game area has become larger, and a prize unit that combines a plurality of prize devices capable of entering a game ball has been provided. Along with this, while the gaming area is expanded, the range of the front surface of the pachinko machine on the outer side of the gaming area is narrowed. For this reason, it is difficult to secure a cohesive area (relatively large area) where decoration can be performed on the front side of the pachinko machine. Furthermore, it is conceivable to decorate the game board or to make the game board transparent and install decorative members behind it, but a game ball that moves in the game area, a winning device installed in the game area, etc. Visibility is easily obstructed behind the pachinko machine (a large range cannot be secured), and the position is relatively far from the player located in front of the pachinko machine, so that the visibility is reduced (game area). It is more difficult to see if the light is reflected on the decoration provided in the back of the slingshot).

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently decorating.

Means B-1. In a gaming machine provided with a specific aspect of decorative means
The decorative means includes a first component and a second component.
The first component portion includes a first decorative part to which the first decoration is applied, and a first transmissive part that makes the other side visible through the first component part.
The second component includes a second decorative portion to which the second decoration is applied, and a second transmissive portion having a higher translucency than the second decorative portion.
When the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position with respect to the decorative means in front of the gaming machine, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion visually recognized via the first transmissive portion are adjacent to each other. The specific aspect is visually recognized.
When the decorative means is visually recognized from a second position different from the first position with respect to the decorative means in front of the gaming machine, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are visually recognized separately from each other.
A gaming machine characterized in that a light emitting means is provided in a region opposite to the first component side across the second component.

According to the means B-1, the decorative means and the peripheral portion thereof can be brightened by providing the decorative means on the player side of the light emitting means. In particular, since the second decorative portion is visible through the first transparent portion and the first decorative portion is located on the front side of the second transparent portion, the decorative means can be visually recognized from the first position to obtain a specific mode. In the visually recognizable state, the presence of the first transmissive portion and the second transmissive portion, which are also light passages, is well hidden by the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion, and the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are present. Since the portions are adjacent to each other, even if the light of the light emitting means is irradiated toward the player side, it is suppressed that the light is directly incident on the player. Therefore, it is possible to suitably visually recognize the specific mode in which the mode of the first decorative portion and the mode of the second decorative portion are combined.

On the other hand, when the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are visually recognized separately, so that the decorative means is arranged in an area deeper than the second component portion. The light emitted from the light emitting means is efficiently irradiated to the periphery of the decorative means via the first transmitting portion and the second transmitting portion (attenuation of the light route passing through the decorative means is suppressed). The route will be secured). Therefore, the decorated area (the area where a specific mode of the decorative means is visually recognized) is as much as possible while avoiding the situation where the peripheral portion is darkened by providing the decorative means without making the light emitting means too bright. Can be secured widely.

It should be noted that, in the region behind the second component, the light emitting means may be installed avoiding the positions that can be visually recognized via the first transmissive portion and the second transmissive portion, or the game may be played normally ( By configuring the player to maintain the first position (unless he looks into the decorative means, etc.), the effect of suppressing the direct light from the light emitting means from entering the player is more effective. It will be played reliably.

In addition, "when the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are adjacent to each other" means that a slight gap is formed (predetermined in terms of configuration). It is difficult to prevent the gap between the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion from being visually recognized even if any part of the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position). Further, the shapes of the first decorative portion and the first transmissive portion are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, the light emitting means may be capable of changing the light emitting mode (brightness, light emitting color, lighting / extinguishing switching pattern, direction, etc.). The light emitting means may be configured so that its own light reaches the decorative means, and the light of the light emitting means is not only directly irradiated to the decorative means but also reflected by the reflecting means and then incident on the decorative means. It may be configured to be used.

Means B-2. The gaming machine according to means B-1, wherein the second decorative portion also has translucency.

According to the means B-2, by making the light emitting means emit light, the second decorative portion can also be visually recognized brightly. That is, it is possible to prevent shadows from being formed in the second decorative portion (at a portion separated from the second transmissive portion), for example, when the second decorative portion does not have translucency. ..

The light emitting means is provided in a wide range as much as possible in order to suppress the difference in the brightness of each part of the decorative means (for example, light from the LED light source or the like is incident on the light guide plate from the side). Surface emission) is desirable.

Means B-3. The gaming machine according to means B-2, wherein the first decorative portion also has translucency.

According to the means B-3, by making the light emitting means emit light, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion can also be visually recognized brightly. That is, for example, as in the case where the first decorative portion does not have translucency, the first decorative portion (the second decorative portion visually recognizable through the) is bright, while the first decorative portion looks dark. It can be deterred. Further, for example, when one of the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion does not have translucency, the appearance of the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion is significantly different. The situation can be prevented.

Means B-4. The decorative means is configured to be the first position in front of the gaming machine and at a position corresponding to the central portion in the lateral width direction of the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in any of B-3.

According to the means B-4, the player who plays the gaming machine in a normal posture is made to visually recognize a specific mode in the decorative means, and the light of the light emitting means is prevented from directly incident on the player. The effect of brightening the decorative means and its surroundings is more reliably achieved.

Means B-5. In the area where the front is covered by the decorative means, a state changing means capable of changing the state into a first state and a second state is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-4, characterized in that the means for changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means according to the state of the state changing means is provided.

According to the means B-5, the state of the state changing means can be grasped by the light emitting means by the light emitting mode without directly confirming the state changing means. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience and the like. It is also possible that the state changing means can be visually recognized by visually recognizing the decorative means from the second position.

Means B-6. The feature is that the timing of the state change of the state changing means coincides with the timing of changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in response to the state change of the state changing means, and the timing does not match. The gaming machine according to the means B-5.

According to the means B-6, it is possible to improve the effectability and the like. In addition, when the light emitting mode change of the light emitting means precedes, the player can be given a little quick surprise, and the player can respond more quickly to the state change of the state changing means. On the other hand, when the state change of the state changing means precedes, it is possible to give a surprise by an operation different from the usual one, and to expect a plus alpha privilege due to the preceding change of the state changing means.

Means B-7. The gaming machine according to means B-5 or B-6, wherein the position of the state changing means can be specified by the light emitting mode of the light emitting means.

According to the means B-7, it is possible to meet the needs of the player who wants to confirm where the state change of the state changing means is occurring.

Means B-8. The second transmission portion is configured so that the other side via the second component portion can be visually recognized.
When the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position, the area behind the second component is visibly configured between the first decoration and the second decoration. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-7.

According to the means B-8, the visual mode of the decorative means can be further diversified. In addition, the translucency of the second transmitting portion is further enhanced, and the light from the light emitting means can be more efficiently irradiated to the peripheral portion of the decorative means. Further, the decorative means can be installed in front of the configuration that the player wants to see, and the place where the decorative means is installed can be effectively utilized. again,
Means B-9. An information means for transmitting predetermined information to the player in the area covered in front by the decorative means is provided.
Means B-8, characterized in that the information means is visibly configured between the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion when the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position. The gaming machine described in.

According to the means B-9, as described above, the light of the light emitting means behind the decorative means is efficiently delivered to the front of the decorative means via the first transmitting portion and the second transmitting portion. The information means can be reliably seen through the decorative means without making the light too bright.

Means B-10. An irradiation means capable of irradiating light is provided on the front side of the information means.
The gaming machine according to means B-9, wherein the light emitting means is arranged behind the information means.

According to the means B-10, even if the information means is backlit due to the arrangement of the light emitting means, the visibility of the information means can be improved by the lighting means.

Means B-11. The light emitting means is any one of means B-8 to B-10, characterized in that the light emitting means is provided at a position deviated from the extension line of the virtual straight line passing through the first transmitting portion and the second transmitting portion. The gaming machine described in.

According to the means B-11, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the light emitting means is visually recognized when the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position, and the light emitting means can also be used by the player who is visually recognized from the second position. It is possible to prevent deterioration of the design due to the visual recognition of the light emitting means while avoiding the situation where the direct light of the light is applied.

Means B-12. The second transmissive portion is characterized in that it is translucent so that light can be transmitted and the opposite side of the second component portion is invisible or difficult to be visually recognized via the second transmissive portion. The gaming machine according to any one of B-1 to B-7.

According to the means B-9, the design is deteriorated due to the fact that the rear region of the second component is visually recognized through the second transmission portion while maintaining the effect of brightening the decorative means and its peripheral portion. Can be avoided.

Means B-13. A means characterized in that, in the second transmissive portion, an additional aspect portion is provided to add another visual aspect to the visual aspect behind the decorative means when the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of B-1 to B-2.

According to the means B-13, it is possible to improve the design when the second transmissive portion is visually recognized. Further, when the rear part of the second component portion is visible through the second transmission portion, the additional aspect portion assists the player in understanding the visual aspect when the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position. Information and the like for improving decorativeness and directing can be added. For example, when a game ball moving behind the decorative means is made visible via the decorative means, an area advantageous as a direction in which the game ball moves is indicated by an additional aspect portion (an arrow or an arrow that changes the translucent color). By guiding with letters, etc.), it is possible to make it relatively easy (quickly) to recognize what occurs and can occur in the rear region of the decorative means, which is difficult to see. Further, for example, when a ball-entry means for which a privilege is given by the game ball entering the ball in the rear region of the decorative means is provided, an additional aspect portion is provided in the peripheral portion of the ball-entry means to enter the ball. Helps the player understand that it is desirable to have the game ball in the means, and the decoration around the ball entry means further enhances the player's feelings when the game ball enters the ball entry means. be able to.

It should be noted that "the first transmissive portion is provided with an additional aspect portion that adds another visual aspect to the visual aspect behind the decorative means when the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position". good. In this case, a predetermined visual mode (decoration and information) can be added to the second decorative portion, and the design can be improved and the convenience of the game progress can be improved. Further, in order to match the aspect of the first decorative portion and the aspect of the second decorative portion, an additional aspect portion may be provided in front of the first decorative portion.

Means B-14. In the first component portion, the first decorative portion extending in the vertical direction and the first transmitting portion extending in the vertical direction are alternately arranged in the left-right direction.
The second component is a means B-1 to B, wherein the second decorative portion extending in the vertical direction and the second transmitting portion extending in the vertical direction are alternately arranged in the left-right direction. The gaming machine according to any one of -13.

According to the means B-14, the first component and the second component are configured in a grid pattern extending vertically, so that the player can be compared with, for example, in a grid pattern extending left and right. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the ease of taking the first position with respect to the decorative means differs depending on the height of the person (the appearance differs depending on the height difference).

Means B-15. The means B-1 to B-14 characterized in that the width of the second decorative portion visible through the first transmissive portion is wider than the width of the first transmissive portion. The gaming machine described in either.

According to the means B-15, when the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are different from the case where the first transparent portion and the second decorative portion have the same width (area). It is possible to suppress a situation in which the second transparent portion is visually recognized between the two decorative portions. Further, it is possible to further prevent the light from the light emitting means from being directly applied to the front of the gaming machine (player) via the first transmitting portion and the second transmitting portion.

It should be noted that the second decorative portion may be adjacent to the first decorative portion so as to be visible in a connected manner when visually recognized from the first position, and the first transmission is visible when visually recognized from the first position. Regarding the part located outside the peripheral portion of the portion, the same embodiment as the first decorative portion overlapping the portion in the front-rear direction (the embodiment connected to the portion located inward from the peripheral portion of the first transmissive portion) may be used. Alternatively, the mode may be such that it is not connected to a portion located inward of the peripheral portion of the first transmission portion (for example, a single color).

Means B-16. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-15, wherein the light emitting means includes a light source and a surface light emitting means that emits surface light by incident the light of the light source inside. ..

According to the means B-16, light can be emitted with uniform brightness over a relatively wide range behind the decorative means, and the design of the peripheral portion of the decorative means can be improved. Further, the design of the light emitting means itself is enhanced, and even if the light emitting means is visually recognized when the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position, it is possible to prevent the design from being deteriorated.

Means B-17. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-16, wherein the decorative irradiating means capable of irradiating light is provided on the front surface side of the decorative means.

According to the means B-17, the front surface of the decorative means can be brightened (in particular, the front surface of the colored first decorative portion is more prominent), and the decorativeness can be improved. Further, by changing the color of the decorative lighting means or blinking it, the effect of improving the decorativeness is further enhanced.

Means B-18. It has a game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided.
The decorative means is provided so as to be able to cover the front of the game ball moving in a predetermined portion of the game area.
When the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position, the gaming ball moving in the gaming area between the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion is configured to be visible. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-17.

According to the means B-18, even if the decorative means is arranged in the game area, the game ball can move in the game area covered in front by the decorative means, and the game ball moves in the game area through the decorative means. Because it is visible, it is possible to expand the decorative area without reducing the game area. In addition, the game area around the decorative means can be brightened.

The light emitting means (for example, a light guide plate) may be provided in front of the game area, may be provided in the game area, may be provided on the side of the game area, or may be provided behind the game area. It may be provided in. However, by providing the light emitting means in front of or to the side of the area behind the decorative means, it is possible to irradiate the light toward the game ball and brighten the front side (player side) of the game ball. The visibility of the game ball can be improved.

Means B-19. It is provided with a substantially plate-shaped game board and a transparent body unit provided in front of the game board at a predetermined distance from the front surface of the game board.
The game area is formed between the game board and the transparent body unit.
The game board is made of a transparent material and is made of a transparent material.
The gaming machine according to means B-18, wherein the light emitting means is provided behind the gaming board.

According to the means B-19, it is possible to prevent the front and rear width of the game area from being narrowed by the light emitting means.

Means B-20. A detection means capable of detecting a game ball moving in a predetermined portion covered in front by the decorative means, and a detection means.
The light emitting mode changing means for changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means into a normal light emitting mode and a changing light emitting mode is provided.
The light emitting mode changing means changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting means to the changed light emitting mode based on the detection of the detecting means, and the normal light emitting mode is after a lapse of a predetermined time after the detection of the detecting means is stopped. The gaming machine according to means B-18 or B-19.

According to the means B-20, it is possible to notify the player that the game ball has moved to a predetermined portion behind the decorative means, and for example, it is easy to confirm the game ball moving behind the decorative means. When a predetermined state occurs when the game ball moves to the predetermined portion, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the occurrence of the predetermined state. Further, by setting the normal light emitting mode, it is possible to make it easy to visually recognize the specific mode composed of the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion. That is, in a state where information related to the progress of the game can be obtained behind the decorative means, the player can be assisted in understanding the decorative means by appropriately changing the light emitting mode, and the game ball on the decorative means side is not launched. In such a state, the decorative means can be used as a normal mode so as not to interfere with a specific mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the progress of the game smoother while improving the decorativeness.

It should be noted that "the game area includes an approach detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered or can enter a portion of the game area covered in front of the decorative means, and the light emitting means has the normal light emitting mode and the above. It may be said that the approach light emitting means is provided, which is shifted when the approach detecting means is detected and can be changed to the changed light emitting mode which is the normal light emitting mode after a lapse of a predetermined time. " That is, when the game ball as an information means is visibly configured via the decorative means, the game ball is visible but difficult to see through the decorative means. Therefore, the game ball is the decorative means. By creating an opportunity for the player to notice that he / she has entered the back side, it is possible to make it easier for the player to confirm the game ball moving on the back side of the decorative means. Further, in a state where the game ball is not launched on the back side of the decorative means, that is, in a state where it is not necessary to confirm the whereabouts of the game ball through the decorative means, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is set to the normal light emitting mode for decoration. It is possible to make it easy to visually recognize a specific aspect composed of the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion of the means.

Means B-21. A game ball that moves in the game area can be entered, and a ball entry means that is given a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball is provided.
The front of the ball entry means is covered by the decorative means.
The light emitting means has a first light emitting mode set when a game ball can enter the ball entering means or is in a state of being easy to enter, and the game ball cannot enter the approach detecting means. Or, any of the means B-18 to B-20, which is provided with a firing position notification light emitting means that can be changed to the second light emitting mode set when the ball is in a difficult state. The gaming machine described in.

According to the means B-21, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means and the visual mode of the decorative means are changed depending on the state in which the game ball is launched into the area where the decorative means is provided and the other states (for example,). It is possible to make the recognition and sharpness that the state of the game is switched between the bright state and the dark state of the decorative means.

Means B-22. When the firing position notification light emitting means has the first light emitting mode, the first light emitting mode can be visually recognized even when the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position.
The launch position notification light emitting means according to the second light emitting mode is configured to be invisible or difficult to see when the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position. The gaming machine according to -21.

According to the means B-22, it is possible to improve the design of a specific aspect when the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position.

Means B-23. In the game area, a guide passage for guiding the moving direction of the game ball is provided corresponding to the decorative means.
5. The means according to any one of means B-18 to B-22, wherein the light emitting means is configured so as to be configured so that the light emitting mode is different from the light emitting mode of other portions along the guide passage. Game machine.

According to the means B-23, it is possible to easily confirm the guide passage and, by extension, the game ball passing through the guide passage. In particular, when the approach detection means is detected, the guide passage is set to a specific light emitting mode, and after a predetermined time from the detection of the approach detecting means, the specific light emitting mode is returned to the normal mode. It is possible to make it easy to visually recognize a specific aspect of the decorative means.

Means B-24. An approach detecting means for detecting an object approaching the decorative means from the front of the gaming machine is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-23, wherein the light emitting mode of the light emitting means can be changed based on the detection of the approach detecting means.

According to the means B-24, for example, when the area on the back side of the decorative means is brightened based on the detection of the approach detecting means, the player brings his face closer or holds his hand over the back side of the decorative means. It is possible to make the area easier to see in a situation where it is possible that the area is to be visually recognized in more detail. Further, when a predetermined teaching or suggestion is given based on the detection of the approach detecting means, that is, when the detection of the approach detecting means is used in the staging, the player can use the approach detecting means effectively while the player has a specific aspect. You can increase the chances of seeing and touching. Here, the change of the light emitting mode of the light emitting means includes changing from a normal lighting mode to a specific lighting mode (color change / blinking from colorless / white to yellow, red, etc.), turning off the light, and the like.

It should be noted that, based on the detection of the approach detecting means provided corresponding to the decorative means, a predetermined effect input may be performed (for example, a predetermined effect is executed by the display means). That is, the decorative means is decorated in a specific mode. For example, if the specific mode is a motif of a gaming machine, the player performs an action of touching the motif to increase attachment to the gaming machine. Can be expected. In addition, the approach detecting means may be one capable of detecting an object at a position distant from the decorative means, may be capable of detecting contact with the decorative means or a portion in the vicinity thereof, or may be a combination thereof. Further, "when the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is changed based on the detection of the approach detecting means, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is elapsed after a lapse of a predetermined time after the detection of the approach detecting means is stopped. Is changed to the original mode. "

Means B-25. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-24, wherein the light emitting means is configured to be relatively displaceable with respect to the decorative means.

According to the means B-25, it is possible to diversify the visual appearance of the decorative means, and by extension, to diversify the staging by utilizing the change in the mode of the decorative means. For example, a driving means for displacementing the light emitting means (rotation, sliding / tilting displacement in the vertical / horizontal / front / back direction) may be provided. The relative displacement of the light emitting means with respect to the decorative means is included in the change in the light emitting mode of the light emitting means.

Means B-26. One of the means B-1 to B-25, wherein at least one of the first component and the second component is provided with a decorative side light emitting means capable of changing the light emitting mode. The described gaming machine.

According to the means B-26, the first component and the second component can also be decorated and produced by changing the light emitting mode, and can improve the design and the effect. ..

C. As a kind of gaming machine, for example, there is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters the starting ball entry means provided on the game board, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, the area on the front side of the gaming machine is limited, and there is a demand for more efficient decoration on the front side of the gaming machine, particularly on a portion that is easily visible to the player.

More specifically, in recent pachinko machines, the display device installed in the center of the gaming area has become larger, and a winning unit is provided in which a plurality of winning devices capable of entering a game ball are put together. Along with this, while the gaming area is expanded, the range of the front surface of the pachinko machine on the outer side of the gaming area is narrowed. For this reason, it is difficult to secure the decorative area on the front side of the pachinko machine at a position that is relatively easy for the player to see.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently decorating.

Means C-1. In a gaming machine provided with a gaming area in which a gaming ball launched by a launching means is guided and a decorative means.
The decorative means includes a first component and a second component.
The first component portion includes a first decorative part to which the first decoration is applied, and a first transmissive part that makes the other side visible through the first component part.
The second component comprises a second decoration to which the second decoration is applied.
When the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position with respect to the decorative means in front of the gaming machine, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion visually recognized via the first transmissive portion are adjacent to each other. ,
When the decorative means is visually recognized from a second position different from the first position with respect to the decorative means in front of the gaming machine, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are configured to be separated from each other. ,
The decorative means is a gaming machine including a passage component that constitutes a passage of a gaming ball.

According to the means C-1, it is possible to provide a three-dimensional and more complicated visual mode (decoration) in which the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are combined in the decorative means, and the design can be improved. Can be planned. In addition, by configuring the decorative means so that the game ball passes through, the visual opportunity of the decorative means is increased, and an interesting visual mode that combines the decoration of the decorative means and the behavior of the game ball is derived. You can enjoy it. Furthermore, it is possible to decorate the space where the game ball passes, which attracts a lot of attention, without reducing the game area. As a result, decoration can be preferably performed while effectively utilizing the space.

Means C-2. The gaming machine according to means C-1, wherein the decorative means is configured so that a gaming ball can pass between the first component and the second component.

According to the means C-2, since the game ball passes between the first component and the second component, the behavior of the game ball is compared with the configuration in which the game ball only passes in front of or behind the decorative means. Can be made more interesting.

Means C-3. The gaming machine according to means C-1 or C-2, wherein the passage component portion is configured so that the guiding direction of the gaming ball can be changed.

According to the means C-3, it is possible to avoid one pattern of the behavior of the game ball in the passage component portion, and it is possible to improve the game playability and the like.

Means C-4. The gaming machine according to means C-3, wherein the decorative means is configured to be displaceable, and the guiding direction of the gaming ball in the passage component is changed according to the displacement of the decorative means.

According to the means C-4, since the visual mode of the decorative means changes and the passage of the game ball also changes, an interesting visual mode that combines the decoration of the decorative means and the behavior of the game ball is derived. The action and effect such as The displacement of the decorative means can be appropriately set for each model, such as tilting, sliding, and rotating. Further, in the case of electric displacement, the decorative means performs a constant displacement operation so that the guiding direction of the game ball changes regularly. In the case of non-motor displacement, it may be configured to move from the reference position to another position in conjunction with the game ball and then return to the reference position by a return means (spring, etc.), or like a roulette wheel. Eventually, a configuration that can return to the reference position (a configuration that can stand still at a position different from the reference position) may be used.

Means C-5. A passage detecting means capable of detecting a game ball passing through the passage component is provided.
The gaming machine according to means C-4, wherein the decorative means is configured to be capable of displacement based on the detection of the passage detecting means.

According to the means C-5, the retention of the game ball (ball clogging) in the passage component of the decorative means can be automatically eliminated. Therefore, while avoiding bothering the hands of the game hall related persons, troubles when the game field related persons solve the ball jam (such as the game ball moving in a direction undesirable for the player). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of allegations).

In addition, based on the detection of the passage detecting means, the light emitting means provided at or near the decorative means is configured to irradiate the game ball passing through the passage component, or a sound effect is generated. It may be done.

Means C-6. When the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion visually recognized via the first transmission portion are adjacent to each other and a specific aspect is visually recognized.
A driving means for displacing the decorative means is provided.
The driving means is characterized in that the decorative means can be stopped so that the position corresponding to the front of the gaming machine and the central portion in the lateral width direction of the gaming machine is the first position. The gaming machine according to the means C-4 or C-5.

According to the means C-6, even in a configuration in which the decorative means is displaced, the specific mode can be positively visually recognized, and the design can be improved. It should be noted that the stop of the decorative means includes a pattern of temporary stop such as stopping for a certain period of time after being displaced for a certain period of time, and a pattern of stopping until a predetermined trigger occurs.

Means C-7. When the state shifts to the standby state where the gaming ball cannot reach the path constituent portion, the position corresponding to the front of the gaming machine and the central portion in the lateral width direction of the gaming machine is located. The gaming machine according to means C-6, wherein the decorative means is stopped so as to be in the first position.

According to the means C-7, in a state where the game is not progressing and the game ball is not entangled in the passage component, the decorative means can be in a state specialized for decoration in which a specific aspect is visually recognized. Therefore, the design can be improved, and the game can be promoted to the players who will play the game from now on.

Means C-8. In a configuration in which the passage component is visually recognized between the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion when the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position.
When the gaming ball passes through the passage component of the decorative means in a state where the position corresponding to the central portion in the lateral width direction of the gaming machine is the second position in front of the gaming machine, the player The gaming machine according to means C-6 or C-7, wherein a state advantageous to the player can occur.

According to the means C-8, the viewpoint of the player in a posture in which the game is normally performed is set to the second position, so that the passage component is easily visible, and the game ball that has passed through the path component. Can be made easier to see. Therefore, by making it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the desired route, the player's uplifting feeling can be more reliably enhanced.

Means C-9. A driving means that displaces the decorative means and
It is provided with a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the course component to enter.
It is a configuration in which a privilege is given to a player based on a game ball entering the special ball entry means.
When the gaming machine shifts to the error state, the decorative means is stopped so as to be in a position where the gaming ball is not guided by the special ball entering means, C-4 to C-8. The gaming machine described in any of.

According to the means C-9, when the gaming machine detects vibration, magnetism, or the like and shifts to an error state (for example, the decorative means is provided at a position where the gaming ball is guided by the special ball entry means by the path component. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball enters the special ball entry means (because it is stopped).

Means C-10. The second component includes a second transmission unit that makes the other side visible through the second component.
A third component having a third decorative portion is provided behind the decorative means.
A means characterized in that when the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position, the third decorative unit can be visually recognized via the first transmissive portion and the second transmissive portion. The gaming machine according to any one of C-1 to C-9.

According to the means C-10, since the area behind the decorative means can be visually recognized, the amount of information when the decorative means is visually recognized can be increased, and the decorativeness can be further improved. Can be done. Further, since the predetermined information means can be visually recognized even if the decorative means is arranged in front of the predetermined information means, the installation location of the decorative means can be set more freely.

D. As a kind of gaming machine, for example, there is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters the starting ball entry means provided on the game board, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, the area on the front side of the gaming machine is limited, and there is a demand for more efficient decoration on the front side of the gaming machine, particularly on a portion that is easily visible to the player.

More specifically, in recent pachinko machines, the display device installed in the center of the gaming area has become larger, and a winning unit is provided in which a plurality of winning devices capable of entering a game ball are put together. Along with this, while the gaming area is expanded, the range of the front surface of the pachinko machine on the outer side of the gaming area is narrowed. For this reason, it is difficult to secure a cohesive area (relatively large area) where decoration can be performed on the front side of the pachinko machine. It is also conceivable to decorate the game board or make the game board transparent and install decorative members behind it, but a game ball that moves in the game area, a winning device installed in the game area, etc. Visibility is easily obstructed behind the pachinko machine (a large range cannot be secured), and the position is relatively far from the player located in front of the pachinko machine, so that the visibility is reduced (game area). It is more difficult to see if the light is reflected on the decoration provided in the back of the slingshot).

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently decorating.

Means D-1. In a gaming machine equipped with decorative means
The decorative means is provided with a plurality of information means to cover the front.
The decorative means includes a decorative portion to which a predetermined decoration is applied, and a transparent portion that makes the information means visible through the decorative means.
When the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position with respect to the decorative means in front of the gaming machine, the plurality of information means covered in front by the decorative means are considered invisible or difficult to see.
When the decorative means is visually recognized from a second position different from the first position with respect to the decorative means in front of the gaming machine, the plurality of information means covered in front by the decorative means are visible or easy to see. A gaming machine characterized by being said to be.

According to the means D-1, the player can appropriately select whether or not to confirm the information of the information means according to the game situation and the like, and also switches between a state in which the information means is visually recognized and a state in which the information means is not visually recognized. As for the above, it can be performed quickly without requiring a predetermined operation or the like for the gaming machine. That is, it does not prohibit the player from visually recognizing the information means, and if the player tries to visually recognize the information means, the information means can be visually recognized, but when the necessity of the visual recognition is not recognized, that is, for example, the information means is visually recognized. In addition to teaching the result of the game, if you want to enjoy the result of the game obtained by the information means more when the effect is performed by another effect means, you dare to look at the information means. It is also possible to make a choice such as not (not in sight, avoiding getting into the edge of sight). Further, when the information means is not visually recognized, a specific aspect can be visually recognized in the decorative means, and the front of the information means can be effectively utilized as a decorative area.

Further, although there are a plurality of information means whose fronts are covered with the decorative means, the plurality of information means can be visually recognized at once by visually recognizing the decorative means from the second position. Therefore, from the second position, the predetermined information means among the plurality of information means can be visually recognized, but the other information means cannot be visually recognized, and the third position is required to visually recognize the other information means. It is possible to avoid a very troublesome situation in which the information means to be visually recognized cannot be easily visually recognized (it takes time to visually recognize the information means), such as a configuration in which it is necessary to visually recognize the decorative means. As a result, the decorative area can be expanded by utilizing the area extending in front of the plurality of information means while ensuring the visibility of the plurality of information means whose front is covered by the decorative means.

Means D-2. As the plurality of information means, a first information means and a second information means are provided.
The gaming machine according to means D-1, wherein the mode of the second information means is configured to be changeable in conjunction with the behavior of the first information means.

According to the means D-2, since the behavior related to the first information means and the second information means are linked, the player can see both the first information means and the second information means. The situation you want to happen occurs. In this regard, by visually recognizing the decorative means from the second position, both the first information means and the second information means can be visually recognized. Therefore, the second information while grasping the behavior of the first information means. The means can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience in the situation where the first information means and the second information means are visually recognized.

As for "interlocking", for example, the first information means and the second information means are light emitting means, and when the first information means emits light, the granting of the first privilege is taught, and further, the second. The information means may be configured to give a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege by emitting light, or the first information means may be a start-up that allows the game ball of the pachinko machine to enter. It is a ball means, and the second information can be opened by a lottery result performed based on the entry of a game ball into the starting entry means (for example, it is opened for about 2 seconds at a predetermined winning). It may be configured as a means of entering a ball.

Means D-3. The gaming machine according to means D-1 or D-2, wherein the position opposite to the second position across the first position is also configured to be the second position.

According to the means D-3, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player takes a second position, that is, the player has to pinpoint the position in order to visually recognize the rear of the decorative means.

Means D-4. The portion on the side opposite to the transmissive portion across the decorative portion is also referred to as the transmissive portion, and the portion on the side opposite to the decorative portion across the transmissive portion is also referred to as the decorative portion.
The gaming machine according to means D-3, wherein a plurality of the transmissive portions are provided so as to sandwich the decorative portion with each other corresponding to each of the plurality of information means.

According to the means D-4, the position opposite to the second position across the first position can also be configured to be the second position. Further, by providing a transparent portion corresponding to each of the plurality of information means, each information means can be reliably visually recognized. In addition, in a configuration in which the modes of the plurality of decorative parts are combined to form a specific mode as a whole, even if the plurality of information means are installed relatively far from each other, the decorative parts do not separate from each other too much. A specific aspect can be made visible.

Means D-5. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-4, wherein the transmissive portion includes a portion extending so as to connect at least between the plurality of information means.

According to the means D-5, it is possible to surely grasp that the plurality of information means are separate bodies. In addition, it is possible to connect a plurality of information means to each other so that the location of the information means can be easily understood, and it is possible to meet the needs such as wanting to confirm the information means more quickly.

Means D-6. The decorative means includes a first component and a second component.
The first component is a first decorative part as the decorative part to which the first decoration is applied, and a first transparent part as the transparent part that makes the other side visible through the first component. And with
The second component is a second decorative part as the decorative part to which the second decoration is applied, and a second transparent part as the transmissive part that makes the other side visible through the second component. And with
When the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion visually recognized via the first transmission portion are adjacent to each other, and a specific aspect is visually recognized. The plurality of information means are considered invisible or difficult to see,
When the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are separated from each other, and the plurality of decorative portions are located between the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-5, wherein the information means of the above is visible or easy to see.

According to the means D-6, the visual mode of the decorative means when the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position is a combination of the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion, that is, from the second position. When the decorative means is visually recognized, the aspect lacking in the first transparent portion can be supplemented by the second decorative portion, and there is a decorative means whose appearance changes depending on the position to be visually recognized while improving the design. You can enjoy the composition. It should be noted that "when the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position, the plurality of information means are visible or easy to see through the first transmission portion and the second transmission portion". May be good.

Means D-7. The first component portion includes a plurality of the first decorative portions while interposing the first transmission portion.
A means characterized in that, when the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position, the first decorative portion is interposed between the first information means and the second information means among the plurality of information means. The gaming machine described in D-6.

According to the means D-7, even when the distance between the first information means and the second information means is relatively long, the distance between the plurality of first decorative portions is not excessively widened. And the specific aspect of the decorative means can be made more suitable. Further, corresponding to the means D-4, for example, as compared with a configuration in which the second component portion (second decorative portion) is not provided, a portion corresponding to the first transmission portion between the first decorative portions (first decoration portion). The player relies on the player's imagination for the visual aspect of the part (the part having no visual aspect related to the part), or the player takes a large posture to take the second position so that the visual aspect of the first decorative part can be seen almost continuously. It is possible to avoid situations such as being forced to change.

Means D-8. The first component portion is characterized in that it extends in the vertical direction and includes a plurality of the first decorative portions provided with the first transmissive portion interposed therebetween in the left-right direction. 6 or the gaming machine according to D-7.

According to the means D-8, in the first component portion, the first decorative portion is provided like a vertical striped pattern. Therefore, for example, by providing the first decorative portion like a horizontal striped pattern, the physique of the player Depending on the (sitting height), it is possible to avoid a situation in which it becomes difficult to take the first position or the second position. Therefore, regardless of the physique, it is possible to enjoy the configuration in which the specific mode of the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position while ensuring the acquisition of information from the second position.

Means D-9. A game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided,
A game ball that moves in the game area can be entered, and is provided with a ball entry means to which a predetermined privilege is given based on the entry of the game ball.
The decorative means is arranged in the gaming area or in front of the gaming area.
Behind the decorative means, the ball entry means as the plurality of information means is provided.
Described in any one of the means D-6 to D-8, characterized in that the ball entering means and the gaming ball entering the ball entering means are visibly configured via the decorative means. Gaming machine.

According to the means D-9, it is possible to confirm the behavior of whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means to which a predetermined privilege is given by the game ball entering the ball. In particular, a plurality of ball entry means whose front is covered by the decorative means are provided, and by visually recognizing the decorative means from the second position, the plurality of ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the plurality of ball entry means. The state of the ball can be checked at once, for example, while checking the state of the game ball entering one side, the inconvenience of not being able to check the state of the game ball entering the other side is solved. be able to.

Means D-10. Any of the means D-6 to D-9, wherein at least one of the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion is configured to be relatively displaceable with respect to the plurality of information means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means D-10, it is possible to give a variation to the visual aspect, and it is possible to further increase the interest in the aspect including the decorative means.

The relative displacements of the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion include slide displacement and rotation including directions such as up / down, left / right, and front / back (for example, tilting of a plurality of plate-like bodies such as louver windows). Displacement and the like may be mentioned, and the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion may be entirely or partially displaced, or the information means may be displaced.

In addition, it may be "the information means is configured to be displaceable". Here, for example, not only a configuration in which a lamp or a display device (segment display device, etc.) as an information means is displaced, but also a configuration in which a specific display position as an information means in the display unit of the display means can be changed. It is intended to include.

Means D-11. The first decorative unit and the second decorative unit include a first symbol display unit on which the first symbol is displayed and a second symbol display unit on which the second symbol is displayed, and by being displaced, the first decorative unit and the second decorative unit are displaced. The design display unit that is visually recognized when the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position is switched.
When the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position, the first symbol display unit is visually recognized in the first decorative portion, and the first symbol display portion is visually recognized in the second decorative portion. 1 Specific aspect is visually recognized
When the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position, the second symbol display unit is visually recognized in the first decorative portion, and the second symbol display portion is visually recognized in the second decorative portion. 2. The gaming machine according to means D-10, wherein a specific aspect is visually recognized.

According to the means D-11, the variation can be increased to the pattern of a specific embodiment. The first decorative portion includes a transparent plate-shaped body, a first symbol display portion provided on the front surface of the plate-shaped body, and a second symbol display portion provided on the back surface of the plate-shaped body. A rotation shaft is provided so as to extend on an extension of a virtual straight line extending through the central portion of the shape and extending along the longitudinal direction of the plate, a pinion is provided on the rotation shaft, and a plurality of first decorations are provided. A rack (or belt) is attached to the pinion of the unit and displaced by a motor so that the symbol display units of a plurality of first decorative units can be switched between the first symbol display unit and the second symbol display unit at once. You may.

Means D-12. The decorative means is provided at a position shifted laterally from the central portion in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine.
The first transparent portion adjacent to the predetermined first decorative portion is provided so as to be visually recognized adjacent to the predetermined first decorative portion when visually recognized from the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-6 to D-11, characterized in that the gaming machines are arranged so as to be offset toward the central portion in the width direction of the gaming machine.

A player who plays a gaming machine basically advances the game in such a way that his / her face faces the central part in the width direction of the gaming machine. According to the means D-11, when the decorative means arranged laterally from the central portion in the width direction of the gaming machine is visually recognized diagonally, the second decorative portion is preferably visually recognized via the first transmission portion. It has become like. Therefore, by shifting only the line of sight to the decorative means while advancing the game, it is possible to more preferably visually recognize the specific mode of the decorative means (decoration from the state in which the player is normally advancing the game). The viewpoint when visually recognizing the means can be the first position). In addition, when the information means is desired to be visually recognized, the information means is provided by performing an action normally performed when visually recognizing the article in more detail, such as looking into the decorative means and bringing the face closer to the front of the decorative means. It can be seen with certainty.

Means D-13. The means D-6 to be characterized in that the decorative means is configured to be the second position in front of the gaming machine and at a position corresponding to the central portion in the lateral width direction of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of D-12.

According to the means D-13, a player who plays the gaming machine in a normal posture can visually recognize a plurality of information means through the decorative means, and the state of the back side of the decorative means can be more quickly displayed. It becomes possible to grasp. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience in the progress of the game. Further, it is possible to impart a configuration in which the player himself / herself can visually recognize the information means, but the adjacent player cannot visually recognize the information means, and a playability that cannot be imagined without playing the game by himself / herself. As a modification of the configuration, it is possible to apply to a configuration in which the front of one information means is covered by the decorative means instead of the configuration in which the front of the plurality of information means is covered by the decorative means.

Means D-14. Equipped with an input means that allows players to enter information
The gaming machine according to means D-13, wherein an information display means as the information means is provided behind the decorative means so that the player can derive a reflection display reflecting the selection.

According to the means D-14, the enjoyment of the player can be increased.

Means D-15. In a configuration where various settings can be made by the input means
It is provided with an input display means capable of deriving an input screen to be opened when various inputs are performed by the input means.
When the input screen is opened, the screen of the information display means is regarded as a common standby screen, and when the input screen is closed, the reflection display is derived on the screen of the information display means. The gaming machine according to the featured means D-14.

According to the means D-15, the reflection display of the information display means can be made invisible relatively easily when the person is away from the seat, and the reflection display can be displayed relatively easily when the person is seated.

Means D-16. The game according to any one of means D-1 to D-15, which comprises means for producing an effect capable of teaching information obtained by visually recognizing the information means or deriving an effect display suggesting. Machine.

According to the means D-16, the effectability can be improved. Further, even if the information means is not confirmed, the information obtained from the information means can be obtained from the staging means, so that it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game cannot be enjoyed by concentrating on the confirmation of the information means. .. Further, for example, when it is desired to enjoy the production of the production means without obtaining information from the information means, by maintaining the first position with respect to the decoration means, such a request can be realized relatively easily. .. Of course, it is also possible to obtain information from the information means and enjoy the production of the production means.

It should be noted that the timing at which the predetermined information is obtained from the information means may coincide with the timing at which the content of the predetermined information is taught (suggested) in the staging display of the staging means corresponding to the predetermined information. , The staging means may be faster (earlier), the staging means may be slower (later), or any one or more of these patterns may be appropriately selected.

It should be noted that "the staging means may be provided at a position not covered by the decorative means".

Means D-17. In the case where the information obtained by visually recognizing the information means is taught or suggested by the staging means, the staging display is sandwiched after the timing at which the information means obtains predetermined information. The gaming machine according to means D-16, characterized in that there is.

According to the means D-17, the effectability can be improved.

Means D-18. The plurality of information means covered in front by the decorative means are configured to be modifiable into a first aspect and a second aspect.
Corresponding to each of the information means, the mode teaching means for teaching that the information means is the second aspect is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-17, wherein the aspect teaching means is configured to be visible even when the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position.

According to the means D-18, it is possible to make it easier to understand that each information means has a second aspect or that there is an information means according to the second aspect, and it is possible to pay attention to the confirmation of the information means. It is possible to avoid situations such as overuse.

E. As a kind of gaming machine, for example, there is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters the starting ball entry means provided on the game board, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, the area on the front side of the gaming machine is limited, and there is a demand for more efficient decoration on the front side of the gaming machine, particularly on a portion that is easily visible to the player.

More specifically, in recent pachinko machines, the display device installed in the center of the gaming area has become larger, and a winning unit is provided in which a plurality of winning devices capable of entering a game ball are put together. Along with this, while the gaming area is expanded, the range of the front surface of the pachinko machine on the outer side of the gaming area is narrowed. For this reason, it is desired to make more effective use of the space just for decoration.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently decorating.

Means E-1. In a gaming machine provided with a specific aspect of decorative means
The decorative means includes a first component and a second component.
The first component portion includes a first decorative part to which the first decoration is applied, and a first transmissive part that makes the other side visible through the first component part.
The second component comprises a second decoration to which the second decoration is applied.
When the decorative means is visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine, the specific embodiment in which the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion visually recognized via the first transmissive portion are combined can be visually recognized. Configured,
A visual state that is arranged behind the first component and in front of the second component and is visible or easy to see from the front of the gaming machine via the first transmission unit, and the above-mentioned. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a visible state changing means capable of changing the state into an invisible state which is invisible or difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine.

According to the means E-1, it is possible to perform an effect using a mode change in which the visual state changing means is shown or not shown according to the state change of the visual state changing means, and the effectability is improved. Can be done. Further, a second component is arranged behind the first component and the visible state changing means, and when the visible state changing means is in the non-visible state, the second component is passed through the first transmissive part of the first component. Therefore, the second decorative part can be visually recognized as it is. Therefore, when the visible state changing means is in the non-visible state, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the mode of the first transmission portion is only empty and the design is deteriorated. In particular, since the aspect of the first decorative portion and the aspect of the second decorative portion are combined to form a specific aspect, it is possible to further improve the decorativeness and the like.

It should be noted that the portion of the second decorative portion located behind the visible state changing means when the visible state changing means is in the visible state is not limited to the configuration in which only the decoration is applied, and the model information. It may be configured so that a description or the like associated with the motif of the model or the model is described. Further, the specific mode of the decorative means is not only the case where the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are combined to positively perform the decoration, but also the second decorative portion is provided so as not to impair the mode of the first decorative portion. The purpose is to include cases such as the same mode.

Means E-2. The means E-1 is characterized in that even if the visible state changing means is set to the visible state, a part of the second decorative portion can be visually recognized via the first transmission portion. The described gaming machine.

According to the means E-2, the player can visually recognize the mode that combines the modes of the first decorative portion, the second decorative portion, and the visual state changing means, and the decorativeness can be improved. can.

Means E-3. When the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position with respect to the decorative means in front of the gaming machine, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion visually recognized via the first transmissive portion are adjacent to each other. The specific aspect is visually recognized.
When the decorative means is visually recognized from a second position different from the first position with respect to the decorative means in front of the gaming machine, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are separated from each other, and the first decorative portion is separated from each other. An information means for transmitting predetermined information to the player is visibly configured between the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion.
The visible state changing means in the visible state is visible or easy to see when the decorative means is visually recognized from either the first position or the second position.
Means E, characterized in that the information means is visible or easy to see when the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position even when the visual state changing means is in the visual state. The gaming machine according to -1 or E-2.

According to the means E-3, the player can appropriately select whether or not to visually recognize the information means according to the game situation and the like, and also switch between a state in which the information means is visually recognized and a state in which the information means is not visually recognized. , It can be performed quickly without requiring a predetermined operation on the gaming machine. That is, it does not prohibit the player from visually recognizing the information means, and if the player tries to visually recognize the information means, the information means can be visually recognized, but when the necessity of the visual recognition is not recognized, that is, for example, the information means is visually recognized. When the result of the game is taught and the result of the game obtained by the behavior (aspect) of the information means is to be enjoyed more when the effect is performed by another effect means. It is possible to make a choice such as not looking at the information means (avoid getting into the field of sight or getting into the edge of the field of sight). Further, when the information means is not visually recognized (in a state where it is not necessary to pay attention to the displacement of the information means in the area covered by the decorative means), the decorative means can visually recognize a specific aspect, and the front of the information means can be visually recognized. Can be effectively used as a decorative area.

Further, even if the visual state changing means is in the visual state, the information means can be visually recognized when the decorative means is visually recognized from the second position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent oversight of the information when predetermined information is taught by the information means, and as an aspect of the decorative means, a mode in which the visual state changing means and the information means are combined is derived. , It is possible to improve the design.

In particular, when the visual state changing means is in the visual state, the visual state changing means can be visually recognized regardless of whether the decorative means is visually recognized from either the first position or the second position, so that the visual state changing means can be used. The player can appropriately select the mode of the decorative means when the visual state is set, and the mode of the information changing means and the mode of the combination of the specific mode can be visually recognized, or the mode of the information changing means and the mode of the information changing means. It is possible to visually recognize the mode in combination with the information means.

Means E-4. The gaming machine according to means E-3, wherein the second component includes a second transmission unit that makes the other side visible through the second component.

According to the means E-4, it is possible to derive more diverse and detailed decorations in the decorative means. For example, it is possible to make the decoration behind the second component visible, or to change the light emitting mode by the light emitting means behind the second component.

Means E-5. The visual recognition state changing means is between an exposed position that is visible or easy to see from the front of the gaming machine and a retracted position that is invisible or difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine. Consists of displaceable displacement means
When the displacement means is set to the exposed position, the visible state is set, and when the displacement means is set to the retracted position, the non-visible state is set.
Means E-meaning that a decorative addition portion is provided at a position adjacent to the displacement means at the exposed position and has an aspect related to the aspect of the displacement means at the exposed position. The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to E-4.

According to the means E-5, when the displacement means is displaced to the exposed position, the displacement means is not only visually recognized, but is related to the aspect of the displacement means by the decorative addition portion at the destination of the displacement means to the exposed position. It is possible to visually recognize the aspect to which the aspect is added. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effectability while suppressing the complexity and size of the configuration of the displacement means itself. Regarding the configuration of the decoration addition portion, the above-mentioned means E-1 "includes a position where the visible state changing means in the visible state is visually recognized by switching between the visible state and the non-visual state. It is also applicable to a configuration in which the configuration such as "the visual mode is switched between the combination mode of the first decorative portion and the visual state changing means and the combination mode of the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion" is omitted. ..

Means E-6. The visual recognition state changing means is between an exposed position that is visible or easy to see from the front of the gaming machine and a retracted position that is invisible or difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine. Consists of displaceable displacement means
When the displacement means is set to the exposed position, the visible state is set, and when the displacement means is set to the retracted position, the non-visible state is set.
A staging addition means configured to be displaceable between the front position of the decoration means (the first decoration portion) and the position deviating from the front of the decoration means is provided.
The means E-1 to E are characterized in that the effect adding means is configured to be displaceable to the front position of the decorative means when the displacement means is displaced from the exposed position to the retracted position. The gaming machine described in any of -5.

According to the means E-6, when the displacement means is displaced to the retracted position, not only the pattern in which the displacement means is simply invisible, but also the effect additional means is visually recognized by the player in conjunction with the movement of the displacement means to the retracted position. A pattern of displacement can be provided as possible. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effectability while suppressing the complexity and size of the configuration of the displacement means itself.

Means E-7. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-6, wherein the visual recognition state changing means is configured to be changeable into a light emitting mode and a non-light emitting mode.

According to the means E-7, the brightness of the visual state changing means arranged between the first component and the second component can be ensured, and the visible state changing means can be sufficiently conspicuous. .. In addition, it is possible to adjust the brightness, color development, and the like of the peripheral portion of the decorative means including the visual change state changing means, and it is possible to improve the decorativeness and the directing property. Further, the visible state changing means in the non-visual state can be made inconspicuous as a non-light emitting mode.

Means E-8. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-7, wherein the visible state changing means includes an effect means for suggesting or teaching a timing at which the visual state can be changed.

According to the means E-8, since the timing at which the visual state changing means should be visually recognized is suggested by the staging means, it is possible to prevent the visual state changing means from overlooking the state change, and the visual state changing means of the means. You can enjoy the change of state more. It is possible to avoid a situation in which too much attention is paid to confirming the state change.

Means E-9. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-8, wherein the visual state changing means includes an effect means for explaining the state change.

According to the means E-9, the player can relatively easily grasp the meaning of the state change of the visual state changing means, and the game can be advanced without any confusion. Further, since the information can be obtained from the staging means even if the state change of the visual state changing means is overlooked, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game cannot be enjoyed by concentrating on the confirmation of the visual state changing means. Further, for example, it is possible to respond to a request to enjoy the production of the production means without obtaining information from the visual state changing means. It should be noted that the explanation includes an explanation when the state change of the visual state changing means occurs and an explanation before the state change occurs, and it is configured so that either explanation is given. good.

Means E-10. It has a game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided.
The decorative means is provided so as to cover the front of a game ball moving in a predetermined portion of the game area.
A passage grasping means capable of grasping the passage of a game ball moving in an area covered in front by the decorative means is provided.
Described in any one of means E-1 to E-9, wherein the visible state changing means is configured to be able to change the state based on the information of the passage of the gaming ball grasped by the passage grasping means. Gaming machine.

According to the means E-10, when the displacement means is provided corresponding to the decorative means, there is a concern that the visual recognition of the game ball may be hindered depending on the arrangement of the displacement means. In this respect, based on the information of the game ball passage, the displacement means can be displaced so as not to cover the front of the game ball, and while the displacement means is provided in the decorative means, the visibility of the game ball is reduced by the displacement means. Can be prevented. As the passage grasping means, the passage detecting means for detecting the game ball moving in the area covered in front by the decorative means, and the game state when the passage through which the game ball is guided is switched in the game state. Means to do, etc. can be mentioned.

F. As a kind of gaming machine, for example, there is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters the starting ball entry means provided on the game board, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, the area on the front side of the gaming machine is limited, and there is a demand for more efficient decoration on the front side of the gaming machine, particularly on a portion that is easily visible to the player.

More specifically, in recent pachinko machines, the display device installed in the center of the gaming area has become larger, and a winning unit is provided in which a plurality of winning devices capable of entering a game ball are put together. Along with this, while the gaming area is expanded, the range of the front surface of the pachinko machine on the outer side of the gaming area is narrowed. For this reason, it is difficult to secure a cohesive area (relatively large area) where decoration can be performed on the front side of the pachinko machine. It is also conceivable to decorate the game board or make the game board transparent and install decorative members behind it, but a game ball that moves in the game area, a winning device installed in the game area, etc. Visibility is easily obstructed behind the pachinko machine (a large range cannot be secured), and the position is relatively far from the player located in front of the pachinko machine, so that the visibility is reduced (game area). It is more difficult to see if the light is reflected on the decoration provided in the back of the slingshot).

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently decorating.

Means F-1. In a gaming machine provided with a specific aspect of decorative means
The player can see a first visual state in which the area behind the decorative means is invisible or difficult to see, and a second visual state in which the area behind the decorative means is visible or easy to see. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be selectable.

According to the means F-1, the player can appropriately select whether or not to confirm the area behind the decorative means according to the game situation and the like. That is, it does not prohibit the player from seeing the area behind the decorative means, and it is visible if the player tries to see it, but if the need for visual recognition is not recognized, that is, for example, the decorative means. The result of the game is taught by visually recognizing the area behind the decoration means, and the effect of the game obtained in the area behind the decorative means is more enjoyable when the effect is performed by another effect means. In such cases, it is possible to make a choice not to look at the area behind the decorative means (to avoid entering the view or entering the edge of the view). Further, when the area behind the decorative means is not visually recognized, a specific aspect can be visually recognized in the decorative means, and the front of the area behind the decorative means can be effectively utilized as a decorative area.

Means F-2. The decorative means includes a decorative portion to be decorated and a transparent portion that makes the other side visible through the decorative means.
In the first visual recognition state, the aspect of the decorative portion can be visually recognized as the specific aspect, or can be easily visually recognized.
The gaming machine according to means F-1, wherein the specific aspect is invisible or difficult to be visually recognized in the second visual recognition state.

According to the means F-2, the area behind the decorative means can be made visible without the decorative means being displaced relative to the area behind the decorative means.

Means F-3. The gaming machine according to means F-2, wherein the decorative portion may be located at a first position or the decorative portion may be located at a second position different from the first position.

According to the means F-3, it is possible to increase the variation of the visual aspect of the decorative means, and to improve the directing property and the decorative property.

Means F-4. The decorative means includes a first component and a second component.
The first component portion includes a first decorative part to which the first decoration is applied, and a first transmissive part that makes the other side visible through the first component part.
The second component includes a second decorative part to which the second decoration is applied, and a second transmissive part that makes the other side visible through the second component.
When the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position in front of the gaming machine, the first visual recognition state is reached, and the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion visually recognized via the first transmission portion are Adjacent to this particular aspect, the particular aspect is visually recognized.
When the decorative means is visually recognized from a second position different from the first position in front of the gaming machine, the second visual recognition state is set, and the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are separated from each other. The area behind the decorative means is visible or easily visible through the first transmissive portion and the second transmissive portion.
Means F-meaning that when the viewpoint of the player is in the first position, the first visual state is set, and when the viewpoint of the player is in the second position, the second visual state is set. 2 or the gaming machine according to F-3.

According to the means F-4, it is possible to derive a specific aspect in the decorative means while making the area behind the decorative means visible, and it is possible to improve the design. Further, the switching between the state in which the area behind the decorative means is visually recognized and the state in which the area behind the decorative means is not visually recognized can be quickly performed without requiring a predetermined operation or the like for the gaming machine.

Means F-5. A state in which the viewpoint of the player located in front of the gaming machine and in front of the central portion in the width direction of the gaming machine is the first position, and a state in which the viewpoint of the player is the second position. The gaming machine according to means F-4, which is configured to be capable of changing its state.

According to the means F-5, even for a player who has difficulty in changing his / her posture, he / she can enjoy the playability of switching between a state of visually recognizing a specific mode of the decorative means and a state of visually recognizing a region behind the decorative means. Can be done. In addition, it is possible to improve the effectability. If the player is located in front of the gaming machine and in front of the central portion in the width direction of the gaming machine, the first visual recognition state is set, but the player moves his / her face to the side. It is possible to set the second visual state (to visually recognize the rear area of the decorative means).

Means F-6. In the area behind the decorative means, an information unit that can be visually recognized via the transparent unit is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of means F-2 to F-5, wherein the information unit is configured to be visible only through the transmission unit.

According to the means F-6, the information in the information unit can be easily seen only by the player who is playing the gaming machine, and the gaming can be concentrated without worrying about the eyes of other companies. In addition, for example, it is possible to display information that is inconvenient to be known to others in such an area (for example, a lock number setting / input function that prevents others from performing a predetermined operation when leaving the seat). If there is, the lock number setting can be displayed behind the decorative means, etc.) to improve crime prevention.

Means F-7. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player
The gaming machine according to any one of means F-1 to F-6, which is configured to be switchable between the first visual recognition state and the second visual recognition state by operating the operation means.

According to the means F-7, even for a player who has difficulty or troublesome to change his / her posture, the visual mode of the decorative means can be switched relatively easily, and the convenience can be improved.

Means F-8. A game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided,
It is provided with a variable ball entry means that changes the state between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter.
The gaming machine according to any one of means F-1 to F-7, wherein the decorative means is provided so as to cover the front of the variable ball entry means.

According to the means F-8, decoration by the decorative means can be performed even in front of the variable ball entry means, and the decoration can be further expanded. Further, since it is not necessary to visually recognize the variable ball entry means when the game ball does not enter the variable ball entry means, it is possible to enhance the decoration during such a period.

Means F-9. The gaming machine according to means F-8, wherein the entrance of the variable ball entry means is not covered in the front by the specific aspect of the decorative means.

According to the means F-9, at the moment when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the game ball can be easily visually recognized unconditionally, and whether the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means. It is possible to make it easier to recognize whether or not it is.

Means F-10. The gaming machine according to any one of means F-1 to F-9, wherein the specific aspect of the decorative means is configured so that at least a part thereof can be changed.

According to the means F-10, it is possible to change the specific mode of the decorative means to change the visual mode of the decorative means (the area whose front is covered by the decorative means). Therefore, it is possible to improve the decorativeness and the directing effect. Further, it is also possible to switch between the case where the specific mode of the decorative means is visually recognized and the case where the area behind the decorative means is visually recognized.

It is also possible to appropriately combine the technical items described in the above means A, means B, means C, means D, means E, and means F (combining a part of each means). It is also possible).

The basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied are shown below.

a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball gaming machine. As a more detailed example, "an operating means operated by a player (game ball launching handle), a launching means for flipping and launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the firing An example is a ball-and-ball game machine provided with a game area in which a pachinko ball is guided and each ball-entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operating opening, etc.) arranged in the gaming area.

b. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball gaming machine provided with a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed example, "an operating means operated by a player (game ball launching handle), a launching means for flipping and launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the firing are performed. A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) extending along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, etc.) arranged in the game area. A ball-and-ball game machine provided with a variable winning device (a variable winning device, an operating port, etc.) and configured so that the behavior of a game ball flowing down the game area can be visually recognized.

c. The game machine in each of the above means, or each of the ball game machines, is a pachinko machine or a game machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

d. The gaming machine in each of the above means shall be a spinning-type gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed example, "an identification information string (design sequence; specifically, a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) composed of a plurality of identification information (designs) is displayed in a variable manner (specifically, a reel). It is equipped with a variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information string after (rotation of, etc.), and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (specifically, the start lever). The fluctuation of the identification information (design) is started, the fluctuation of the identification information (design) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and the identification aligned on the effective line at the time of the stop. An example is a spinning reel type gaming machine configured so that a gaming value is given on condition that the information is specific identification information.

e. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine in the form of a fusion of a slot machine and a pachinko machine (particularly, a spinning-type gaming machine using a slot machine specification ball that uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium). As a more detailed example, "an identification information string (design sequence; specifically, a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) composed of a plurality of identification information (designs) is displayed in a variable manner (specifically, a reel). It is equipped with a variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information string after rotation), and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (specifically, the start lever). The fluctuation of the identification information (design) is started, the fluctuation of the identification information (design) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and the identification aligned on the effective line at the time of the stop. The game value is given on the condition that the information is specific identification information, and a ball tray (upper plate, etc.) is provided to take in the game ball from the ball tray, and the ball tray is used. An example is a game machine provided with a payout means for paying out a game ball, and configured so that a game start condition is satisfied when the game ball is taken in by the take-in means.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 18 ... Handle, 32a ... 1st variable winning device, 32b ... 2nd variable winning device, 33a ... 1st starting winning device, 33b ... 2nd starting winning device, 34 ... Through gate, 42 ... Decorative design Display device, 43a ... 1st special display device, 43b ... 2nd special display device, 261 ... main control device, 262 ... sub control device.

Claims (6)

In a gaming machine provided with a specific aspect of decorative means
The player can see a first visual state in which the area behind the decorative means is invisible or difficult to see, and a second visual state in which the area behind the decorative means is visible or easy to see. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be selectable. The decorative means includes a decorative portion to be decorated and a transparent portion that makes the other side visible through the decorative means.
In the first visual recognition state, the aspect of the decorative portion can be visually recognized as the specific aspect, or can be easily visually recognized.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein in the second visible state, the specific aspect is invisible or difficult to see. The decorative means includes a first component and a second component.
The first component portion includes a first decorative part to which the first decoration is applied, and a first transmissive part that makes the other side visible through the first component part.
The second component includes a second decorative part to which the second decoration is applied, and a second transmissive part that makes the other side visible through the second component.
When the decorative means is visually recognized from the first position in front of the gaming machine, the first visual recognition state is reached, and the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion visually recognized via the first transmission portion are Adjacent to this particular aspect, the particular aspect is visually recognized.
When the decorative means is visually recognized from a second position different from the first position in front of the gaming machine, the second visual recognition state is set, and the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are separated from each other. The area behind the decorative means is visible or easily visible through the first transmissive portion and the second transmissive portion.
2. The gaming machine described in. A state in which the viewpoint of the player located in front of the gaming machine and in front of the central portion in the width direction of the gaming machine is the first position, and a state in which the viewpoint of the player is the second position. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be capable of changing its state. In the area behind the decorative means, an information unit that can be visually recognized via the transparent unit is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4, wherein the information unit is configured to be visible only through the transmission unit. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the specific aspect of the decorative means is configured so that at least a part thereof can be changed.

Images